Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Assessment of The Lower Limb, Second Edition
Assessment of The Lower Limb, Second Edition
CHURCHILL LIVINGSTONE
An imprint of Elsevier Limited
Pearson Professional Limited 1995
2002, Elsevier Limited. All rights reserved.
The rights of Linda M. Merriman and Warren Turner to be identified as
editors of this work has been asserted by them in accordance with the
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without either the
prior permission of the publishers or a licence permitting restricted
copying in the United Kingdom issued by the Copyright Licensing
Agency, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London WIT 4LP. Permissions may
be sought directly from Elsevier's Health Sciences Rights Department in
Philadelphia, USA: phone: (+1) 215 238 7869, fax: (+1) 215 238 2239, e-
mail: healthpermissions@elsevier.com. You may also complete your
request on-line via the Elsevier homepage (http://www.elsevier.com).by
selecting 'Customer Support' and then 'Obtaining Permissions'.
First edition 1995
Second edition 2002
Reprinted 2005
ISBN 0 443 07112 8
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the Library of Congress
Note
Medical knowledge is constantly changing. As new information becomes
available, changes in treatment, procedures, equipment and the use of
drugs become necessary. The authors and the publishers have taken care
to ensure that the information given in this text is accurate and up to date.
However, readers are strongly advised to confirm that the information,
especially with regard to drug usage, complies with the latest legislation
and standards of practice.
health sciences
www.elsevierhealth.com
Working together to grow
libraries in developing countries
www.elsevier.com I www.bookaid.org I www.sabre.org
ELSEVIER f ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Sabre Foundation
Printed in China
The
publishers
policy istouse
papermanufactured
from sustainable forests
I
Contributors
Robert LAshford
BABEd MA MMedSci PhD DPodM MChS
Professor of Podiatry, Health and Social Care
Research Centre, Faculty of Health and
Community Care, University of Central
England, UK
Paul Beeson BSc(Hons) MSc DPodM
Senior Lecturer, Northampton School of Podiatry,
University College Northampton, UK
Ivan Bristow MSc(Oxon) BSc(Hons) DPodM MChS
Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Applied Sciences,
University College Northampton, UK
C JGriffith BSc(Hons) DPodM SRCh
Private Practitioner, The Manse Health Centre,
UK
Mary Hanley BSc(Hons) Psychology MSc PhD
Senior Lecturer (Health Psychology & Research
Methods), University College Northampton, UK
Linda Merriman PhD MPhil DPodM MChS CertEd
Dean, School of Health and Social Sciences,
Coventry University, UK
JMcLeod Roberts BSc(Hons) MSc DPodM
Senior Lecturer, Northampton School of
Podiatry, University College Northampton, UK
Patricia Nesbitt DPodM MChS PGD(BioEng)
Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Applied Sciences,
University College Northampton, UK
C Payne DipPod (NZ) MPH
Lecturer, Department of Podiatry, School of
Human Biosciences, La Trobe University,
Melbourne, Australia
A Percivall
Senior Lecturer, School of Podiatry, University
College Northampton, UK
I Reilly DPodM BSc SRCh FCPod(S) Cert MHS DMS
Senior LecturerI Podiatric Surgeon, School of
Podiatry, University College Northampton, UK
Ian F Turbutt BSc(Hons) FChS FPodA FCPods
Specialist in Podiatric Surgery, The Manor
Hospital, Bedford; Ext. Lecturer in Podiatric
Radiology, University of Brighton and
University of Southampton, UK
R Turner MB ChB MRCP
Consultant Dermatologist,
Churchill Hospital, Oxford, UK
Warren Turner BSc(Hons) DPodM
Associate Dean, School of Podiatry, University
College Northampton, UK
Ben Yates MSc (Sports Injuries) BSc(Hons) FCPod
Head, Podiatry Department, La Trobe
University, Melbourne, Australia
Preface
Many textbooks make reference to the assess-
ment of the lower limb but very few are dedi-
cated entirely to this purpose. Those that are tend
to focus on only one of the components of the
process, e.g. skin disorders or on a specific client
group such as paediatrics. The purpose of this
book is to produce a textbook which encom-
passes all aspects of lower limb assessment.
Problems affecting the lower limb can lead to dis-
comfort, pain, reduction or loss of mobility and
loss of time from work. Effective and efficient
management of these problems can only be
based on a thorough assessment.
Throughout the book the term 'practitioner' is
used in its broadest sense to denote any person
who has an interest in the management of lower
limb problems. Although the podiatrist has a
natural claim to specialising in caring for the
foot, the range of practitioners with an interest in
the lower limb includes bioengineers, diabetolo-
gists, general medical practitioners, nurses, occu-
pational therapists, orthopaedic surgeons,
orthotists, physiotherapists and rheumatologists.
This is the second edition of this textbook and,
like the first edition, it is divided into four parts:
Approaching the Patient, Systems Examination,
Laboratory and Hospital Investigations and
Specific Client Groups.
Approaching the Patient provides an introduc-
tion to the assessment process and covers in
detail the assessment interview, the presenting
problem and the reliability and validity of clini-
cal measurement. For the second edition these
chapters have been reviewed and updated.
Systems Examination covers the separate com-
ponents of lower limb assessment: medical and
social history, vascular, neurological, orthopaedics,
skin and appendages and footwear assessments.
Details relating to anatomy and physiology have
been discussed where relevant. Again, the chapters
in this section have been updated as part of the
second edition. The chapter on the assessment of
skin and its appendages has been rewritten, as has
the chapter on the locomotor system, which has
been renamed orthopaedic assessment to reflect
more accurately the content of the chapter.
Laboratory and Hospital Investigations
focuses on those tests which may be performed
to confirm, support or clarify the clinical exami-
nation: blood analysis, urine analysis, microbial
identification, histopathology, radiographic
imaging and methods of quantifying gait and
foot-ground interface systems. These chapters
have been updated for the second edition.
Reliance on tests without the appropriate clinical
examination is unwise, creates higher costs, may
worry the patient unnecessarily and overworks
support departments. It is intended that this part
of the book demonstrates when and how these
tests can be used to aid the assessment process.
The last part of the book, Specific Client
Groups, looks at the main areas of foot disease:
the at-risk foot, the child's foot, sport injuries and
the painful foot. For the second edition two new
chapters have been added to this section: assess-
ment of the elderly and pre- and postoperative
assessment. The addition of these chapters reflects
the developments within podiatry. The elderly
x PREFACE
form by far the largest client group receiving foot
treatment; it is, therefore, important that the
specific needs of this client group are addressed
in this textbook. Over the last 10 years there has
been a growth in the number of surgical proce-
dures performed, under local analgesia, by podi-
atrists. Assessing a patient for surgery under
local analgesia requires the practitioner to be
aware of the specific issues related to this type of
treatment as they do differ from those result-
ing from surgery under general anaesthesia.
Although Systems Examination covers the range
of assessments and can be applied to all age
groups, the assessment of children and sports
people is worthy of independent discussion. Pain
in the foot can arise due to a multitude of factors,
affects all age groups and has a highly morbid
affect on our lives; for this reason, it has been
given a separate chapter. The early diagnosis of
the at-risk foot is recognised as a means of reduc-
ing morbidity, mortality and minimising the cost
of in-hospital care for these patients.
Case histories and comments support some of
the chapters, particularly those in Systems
Examination and Specific Client Groups. These
have been used to illustrate certain points and
reflect real life experiences. Where appropriate,
black and white photographs, figures and tables
have also been used to support and further illus-
trate points raised in the text. A section of colour
plates has been specifically used to support
Chapters 6, 9 and 17. Each chapter has been ref-
erenced and some indicate Further Reading.
Clearly there is more than one approach to
undertaking an assessment. Assessment of the
Lower Limb has been written to support good
practice in a wide range of outlets for all profes-
sionals with an interest in the foot. Whatever
approach the practitioner adopts, it is hoped that
this text will be a valuable asset.
Linda Merriman, Warren Turner, 2002
Acknowledgements
We are indebted to those who have given their
help and encouragement throughout the devel-
opment and production of this second edition: in
particular, our family and friends.
A big thank you to all the contributors for their
time and effort in updating and/or rewriting
their chapters. We would also like to thank Ann
Marie Carr for her help with the new chapter on
assessment of the elderly.
This book is dedicated to Jackie McLeod
Roberts in recognition of her contribution to
podiatry and in particular her work in the
Ukraine, developing and improving footcare ser-
vices for people with diabetes. Jackie's pioneer-
ing work has made a significant difference to
these people.
Plate 1 An ischaemic foot. The superficial tissues are
atrophied. The fifth ray has been excised.
Plate 2
Typical ischaemic
ulceration
overlying a hallux
abductovalgus in
a patient with
chronic peripheral
vascular disease.
Plate 3 'Dry' gangrene, involving two toes. The necrotic
area is surrounded by a narrow band of inflammation. The
toes have become mummified, due to loss of the local blood
supply.
Plate 5 Atrophie blanche (white patches), which occurs in
association with chronic venous hypertension and venous
ulcers.
Plate 4 Telangiectasias: distortion of the superficial
venules secondary to varicosity.
Plate 6 Gravitational (varicose, stasis) eczema and
haemosiderosis.
Plate 8 Venous ulceration in association with gross
oedema and haemosiderosis (from Wilkinson J, Shaw S,
Fenton 0 1993 Colour guide to dermatology. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh, Figure 179).
Plate 7 Healed venous ulcer that had been present for
2 years.
Plate 9 Histology section of normal hairy skin stained with
haematoxylin and eosin. Light microscopy x 60.
Plate 10 Koebner phenomenon in psoriasis due to injury.
Plate 11 Subungual exostosis affecting the second toe.
Plate 12
Extravasation within callus due to prolonged high pressure .
..
Plate 14 Plantar keratoderma.
Plate 13
Dorsal corn.
Plate 15 Bullous pemphigoid.
Plate 17 Lichen planus.
Plate 18 Necrobiosis Iipoidica.
Plate 16 Plantar pustular psoriasis.
Plate 19 Acute contact dermatitis to adhesives in footwear.
Plate 20 Extensive plantar warts in an immunosuppressed
patient.
Plate 22 Pitted keratolysis of the heel.
Plate 24 Interdigital melanoma.
CHAPTER TITLE 5
Plate 21 Pseudomonas infection affecting the interdigital
area.
Plate 23 Tinea pedis affecting the dorsum of the foot.
6 PART TITLE
Plate 25 Pyogenic granuloma under the nail.
Plate 27 The sample of urine on the left is normal; the
sample on the right is cloudy and tinged with blood,
indicating infection.
NEG.
NEG.
CHAPTER TITLE 7
Plate 30 Hyperhidrosis, particularly interdigitally, leads to
over-moist skin (macerated) which tears easily when
mechanically stressed, sometimes exposing the dermis as
seen here. Complications of hyperhidrosis include
dermatophyte, yeast and bacterial infections.
Plate 32 Deep neuropathic ulcer which penetrates to the
plantar tendons; there is no cellulitis or abscess formation.
The patient was a noninsulin-dependent diabetic.
Plate 31 A typical neuropathic foot.
Plate 29
Dry fissures
develop when
the skin is too
brittle to
conform to
external and
internal
mechanical
stresses
(tension and
shear
particularly).
They are a
frequent
complication of
anhidrosis and
atrophy.
Plate 33 Bilateral arthropathy of the midtarsal joint,
with ulceration of normally non-weightbearing soft
tissues, in an insulin-dependent diabetic with
peripheral neuropathy.
Plate 35 Typical neuroischaemic ulceration over the lateral
aspect of the midfoot in a noninsulin-dependent diabetic,
showing deep erosion of soft tissues, sloughy base, heavy
peripheral callosity and maceration of superficial tissues.
Plate 34 A neuropathic ulcer on the plantar surface of the foot.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 3
Why undertake a primary patient assessment? 3
The assessment process 4
Risk assessment 4
Making a diagnosis 5
Aetiology 7
Time management 7
Re-assessment 7
Recording assessment information 8
Confidentiality 9
Summary 10
Assessment
L. Merriman
INTRODUCTION
Patients present with a range of signs and symp-
toms for which they are seeking relief and if
possible a cure. However, before this can be
achieved, it is essential to undertake a primary
patient assessment. Ineffective and inappropri-
ate treatment may result if the practitioner has
not taken into account information obtained
from the assessment. This chapter explores why
it is necessary to undertake an assessment and
considers specific aspects of the assessment
process.
Why undertake a primary patient
assessment?
Information from the assessment helps the prac-
titioner to:
arrive at a differential diagnosis or definitive
diagnosis
identify the likely cause of the problem
(aetiology), e.g. trauma, pathogenic
microorganism
identify any factors which may influence the
choice of treatment, e.g. poor blood supply,
current drug regimen
assess the extent of pathological changes so
that a prognosis can be made
establish a baseline in order to identify
whether the condition is deteriorating or
improving
assess whether a second opinion is necessary.
3
4 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
All the above information is essential if the
practitioner is to provide effective treatment and
care for the patient.
THE ASSESSMENT PROCESS
Table 1.1 Components of an assessment
Assessment comprises three elements; the
interview, observation and tests (Table 1.1).
Information from the interview and observation
is used to formulate ideas as to the likely diagno-
sis and cause. Further information may be sought
via the ihterview and the use of clinical and lab-
oratory tests. The practitioner uses the data
gained from the assessment to formulate a
hypothesis(es) from which a diagnosis will be
reached. This diagnosis will be used to inform
the management plan (Fig. 1.1). Where possible,
the cause (aetiology) of the problem should be
identified, as part of the management plan
would be to eradicate or reduce the effects of the
cause.
What has been outlined above is the ideal. In
reality, patients often present with ill-defined
problems and it is not possible to reach a defin-
itive diagnosis. In these instances the practitioner
explores a range of likely possibilities and devel-
ops the management plan in relation to these
Component
Assessment interview
Observation and clinical
examination
Laboratory and hospital tests
Presenting problem
Personal details
Medical history
Family history
Social history
Current health status
Vascular
Neurological
Locomotor
Skin and nails
Footwear
Urinalysis
Microbiology
Blood tests
History
Gait analysis
X-ray
Other imaging techniques
ECG
Nerve conduction
Figure 1.1 The stages of assessment summarised.
possibilities. This approach focuses on symptom
reduction and palliation.
A good assessment requires that the practi-
tioner demonstrates good interviewing (commu-
nication) and observational skills. It is essential
that the practitioner has effective listening skills
and knows when and which questions to ask the
patient (see Ch. 2). Research has shown that
most diagnoses are based on observation and
information volunteered by the patient (Sandler
1979).
Clinical, laboratory and hospital based tests
provide additional data. Clinical tests involve
physical examination of the patient (e.g. assess-
ing ranges of motion at joints, taking a pulse) as
well as near-patient tests such as assessing blood
glucose levels with a glucometer. Most clinical
tests are relatively quick and inexpensive to carry
out and in most instances give fairly reliable and
valid results. Technological advances mean that
there are an increasing number of available clini-
cal tests. Tests in laboratories and hospitals are
more expensive and can be time-consuming.
Such tests should only be used when it is neces-
sary to confirm a suspected diagnosis, in cases of
differential diagnosis or when the outcome of the
test will have a positive influence on treatment.
Risk assessment
Risk assessment can serve two purposes:
ASSESSMENT 5
Problem Features
Table 1.2 Presenting problems which should be given high
priority
whole area before such measures can be used
with confidence.
Making a diagnosis
Arriving at a diagnosis is a complex activity.
Studies of clinical reasoning show that practi-
tioners use one or more of the following
approaches (Higgs & Jones 2000):
hypothetico-deductive reasoning
pattern recognition
interpretative model.
Hypothetico-deductive reasoning is based on
generating hypotheses using clinical data and
knowledge. These hypotheses are tested through
further inquiry during the assessment. The evi-
dence gained is evaluated in relation to existing
knowledge and a conclusion reached on the basis
of probability (Gale 1982).
Pattern recognition is a process of recognising
the similarity between a set of signs and symp-
toms. The important aspect of the use of cate-
gorisation in clinical reasoning is the link
practitioners make between the pattern they are
currently observing and previous cases showing
the same or similar patterns.
The interpretative model is very different
from the other two models. This approach is
based on the practitioner gaining a deep under-
standing of the patient's perspective and the
influence of contextual factors. Protagonists of
this approach believe that the meaning patients
give to their problems, including their under-
standing of and their feelings about their
problem, can significantly influence their levels
of pain tolerance, disability and the eventual
outcome (Ferurestein & Beattie 1995).
Studies have shown that with all these
approaches there is an association between clinical
reasoning and knowledge (Higgs & Jones 2000).
There is a symbiotic relationship between the
knowledge base of practitioners and their clinical
reasoning ability. It is not possible to develop
problem-solving skills in the absence of cognitive
knowledge related to the specific problem.
There are three partners in the assessment
process; the practitioner, the patient and the
Distinct colour change
Discharge may be malodorous
Itching
Bleeding
Abnormal skin changes
Acute swelling
Ulceration
Pain Constant, weightbearing and
non-weightbearing
Affects patient's normal daily
activities
Raised temperature (pyrexia)
Sign of acute inflammation
Signs of spreading cellulitis
Lymphangitis, lymphadenitis
Loss of skin
Mayor may not be painful
May expose underlying tissues
Unrelieved pain
Very noticeable swelling
May have associated signs of
inflammation
Infection
identify patients who need immediate
attention
serve as a predictor for those 'at risk'.
On account of the demands on time it is often
necessary for the practitioner to differentiate
between those patients who need immediate
attention and those who do not. Table 1.2 sum-
marises the presenting problems which should
be given high priority. In clinics where there are
lengthy waiting lists patients may be screened
initially to assess whether they have one or more
problems which appear in Table 1.2 and are then
given immediate treatment.
The term 'at risk' usually denotes those
patients at risk of developing ulceration and
infection. Identifying those at risk is a complex
task. Currently, research into risk factors related
to lower limb problems is sparse and thus it is
difficult to produce risk assessment methods that
are robust and valid. Considerable research has
been undertaken into the risk assessment of pres-
sure ulcers (Lothian 1987). In relation to the
lower limb some work has been undertaken into
developing methods of risk assessment to iden-
tify diabetics at risk of developing diabetic ulcers
(Zahra 1998). Further work is needed in this
Table 1.3 Factors which should be taken into
consideration when making a differential diagnosis
droses), whereas other conditions have specific
presenting features (e.g. the sudden, acute, noc-
turnal pain associated with gout).
The patient is the key partner in the assess-
ment process. Some patients want to playa
greater role in decision making and their health
care management. Additionally, patients are
increasingly being seen as consumers of health
care. As such, they have expectations of the type
and quality of the health services they receive.
Patients' perceptions, beliefs and expectations
related to their lower limb problems can be
influenced by the following factors:
home environment
work environment
culture
socioeconomic status
language skills
general state of health.
The above factors can affect patients' needs,
communication skills and, ultimately, the choices
they make.
The wider health environment and context
cannot be ignored in the assessment process.
6 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
wider environment. The ability of a practitioner
to undertake an effective assessment and make a
diagnosis is influenced by a range of factors:
personal values, beliefs and perceptions
knowledge base related to the problem(s)
reasoning skills (cognition and metacognition)
previous clinical experience
familiarity with similar cases.
There can be enormous differences between
practitioners, both in their assessment findings
and their diagnoses. For example, Comroe &
Botelho (1947) described a study in which 22
doctors were asked to examine 20 patients and
note whether cyanosis was present. Under con-
trolled conditions these patient were assessed for
cyanosis by oximeter. When the results of the
clinical assessment were compared with the
oximeter results, it was found that only 53% of
the doctors diagnosed cyanosis in subjects with
extremely low oxygen content: 26% said cyanosis
was present in subjects with normal oxygen
content. Curran & Jagger (1997) found poor
agreement between podiatrists when diagnosing
common conditions of the leg and foot.
Agreement improved when a patient expert
system was used. Expert patient systems are
increasingly being used, in particular in medicine
(Adams et al 1986). These computer-based
systems provide practitioners with a wealth of
information and are used to guide and direct
clinical decision making.
Unfortunately, making a diagnosis is not a
precise science: errors can and do occur.
Practitioners should always keep an open mind
when making a diagnosis, reflect on the process
they have used, keep up to date with current lit-
erature and technology and request a second
opinion when unsure.
Sometimes the practitioner may have gener-
ated more than one possible diagnosis; in these
instances the practitioner has to undertake a dif-
ferential diagnosis, i.e. decide which is the most
likely from a number of possibilities. When arriv-
ing at a differential diagnosis the practitioner
should take into account the factors listed in
Table 1.3. For example, a number of conditions
affect specific age groups (e.g, the osteochon-
Social history
Medical history
Symptoms
Signs
Specific tests
Age
Gender
Race
Social habits
Occupation
Leisure pursuits
Family history
Medication
Onset
Type of pain
Aggravated by/relieved by
Seasonal variation
Site
Appearance
Symmetry
Imaging techniques
Urinalysis
Microbiology
Blood analysis
Biopsy
Foot pressure analysis
Electrical conductive studies
Health care is a political issue and government
policy changes can radically affect available ser-
vices. Finance is another major influencing factor
that may limit the range of clinical and labora-
tory tests that may be used. Conversely, techno-
logical advances have led to improved clinical
and laboratory test equipment. Employing
organisations can affect the assessment process in
a variety of ways, e.g. use of specific frameworks
of operation. Profession-specific frameworks and
the status of knowledge within the profession
can also be influencing factors.
Aetiology
Information from the assessment can enable the
practitioner to identify the cause of the problem.
A variety of aetiological factors can result in dis-
orders of the lower limb. These can be divided
into hereditary, congenital (present at birth) or
acquired.
Hereditary conditions may manifest immedi-
ately after birth, e.g. epidermolysis bullosa, or
may not appear until some years after, e.g.
Huntington's chorea.
Congenital conditions include chromosomal
abnormalities, e.g. Down's syndrome, develop-
mental defects, e.g. spina bifida, or birth injuries
such as cerebral palsy.
Acquired conditions are those which arise
after birth. Infection by a pathogenic organism
resulting in sepsis is a common example of an
acquired condition affecting the lower limb.
Many conditions occur as a result of more than
one factor, i.e. they are multifactorial. Athero-
sclerosis is thought to be due to the interplay of a
number of factors, including dietary intake,
familial high cholesterol level, high blood pres-
sure, sedentary lifestyle and stress. In many cases
predisposing factors present in conjunction with
an exciting factor before the condition manifests.
An example is a septic toe, where there has to be
a portal of entry in order for the bacteria to gain
entry into the skin and multiply.
If the cause can be identified (e.g. lack of shock
absorption, contamination by a pathogen) then
treatment can be aimed at eradicating or reducing
its effects. Knowing what has caused a problem
ASSESSMENT 7
can assist in identifying the most appropriate
treatment and help to produce an accurate prog-
nosis. For example, if the cause of pain in the foot
is chronic ischaemia due to atherosclerosis, the
prognosis may be poor unless radical (bypass)
surgery is performed. Conversely if the foot pain
is due to acute ischaemia that has occurred as a
result of hosiery constricting the peripheral circu-
lation, the prognosis is good and advice may be all
that is required. Unfortunately, it is not always
possible to isolate the cause; in these cases the
term idiopathic (unknown cause) is used.
TIME MANAGEMENT
The assessment process is fundamental to a satis-
factory outcome for both patient and practitioner.
However, practitioners often find themselves
working within strict time constraints and may
feel they have" insufficient time in which to
undertake a full primary patient assessment. It is
important that the practitioner does not compro-
mise the assessment process in order to save
time. Such action, although it may deliver a
short-term time saving, may result in unfortu-
nate long-term effects. The practitioner who has
not obtained important information or failed to
recognise salient clinical findings may reach an
incorrect diagnosis and/ or implement treatment,
that puts the patient at considerable risk. In the
long term this will lead to avoidable patient suf-
fering and extra time being spent in dealing with
the complications arising from treatment.
In order to use time effectively it is important to
plan and prioritise activities. The time allotted to a
primary assessment may be as little as 5 minutes
or may stretch to 30 minutes plus. On average
practitioners should be able to undertake a routine
assessment in 10 minutes; further time may be
required if the problem is complex, if a definitive
diagnosis cannot be reached or if laboratory or
hospital tests are required. Table 1.4 identifies the
essential components of any assessment.
RE-ASSESSMENT
Assessment should not be something that is only
undertaken on the patient's first visit. Every time
8 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
----------_._---------------------
Figure 1.2 The assessment loop.
Table 1.4 The essential components of an assessment.
These should be carried out with all patients. Further tests
and examination should be used if indicated from the
information obtained from the essential assessment
the patient attends the clinic a mini-assessment
should be undertaken in order that the following
can be noted:
changes to the patient's general health status
changes to the status of the lower limb
patient's perception of previous treatment
effects of previous treatment
information about treatment from other
practitioners.
The process of assessment, diagnosis and treat-
ment should be an uninterrupted loop: at every
subsequent consultation, the patient should be
re-assessed and evaluated (Fig. 1.2).
Observation
Interview
Observation
Tests
Gait as the patient walks into the room
in order to detect abnormal function
Facial features for signs of current
health status
Presenting problem
Personal details
Medical history
Family history
Social history
Current health status
Skin and nails to detect trophic changes
and abnormal lesions
Position of lower limb to note deformity,
mal alignment
Footwear
Pulses, capillary filling time
RECORDING ASSESSMENT
INFORMATION
Information gained from the assessment should
be accurately and clearly noted in the patient's
record. This record is the storehouse of knowl-
edge concerning the patient and his/her
medical history. It should contain a summary of
the main points from the assessment and
sufficient data to justify the diagnosis. Ideally,
whether in a hospital or primary care setting,
health care practitioners should use the same
patient record. This ensures that all practitioners
involved with the care of the patient are aware
of each other's assessments and interventions.
Although this is good practice, the keeping of
separate records by each health care profes-
sional, e.g. general practitioner, district (home)
nurses, podiatrists, is still prevalent. This prac-
tice does not facilitate teamworking.
Two methods may be used to record the
assessment information. The first involves using
a blank piece of paper on which the practitioner
writes, in a logical sequence, assessment and
diagnostic details. The other involves the use of
a pro-forma; this may vary from a form with a
few headings to a very detailed format with
boxes in which to write specific details. Such pro-
formas can be self-designed or purchased from
specialised suppliers.
Whatever the method used, it is important that
all details are written in such a way that practi-
tioners not involved with the assessment can
familiarise themselves with the salient details
and any previous treatment. Records may be
handwritten or typed; typed records are prefer-
able as they are more legible but they do have
resource implications. If handwritten, the hand-
writing must be legible and in ink (blue or black).
The use of computers is already having an
impact: it is likely that computers will eventually
be the prime means of recording patient data.
The record should be made at the time of the
assessment: any blank spaces should be scored
through. The original record should not be
altered or disguised. If it proves necessary to
amend the record, the nature of the amendment
should be clear and the amendment should be
signed and dated by the practitioner making the
alteration.
It is recommended that abbreviations should
be avoided (Bradshaw & Braid 1999). The use of
profession-specific abbreviations can be particu-
larly problematic in multi-authored patient
records, which are completed by more than one
health care profession. However, the use of
abbreviations in patient records is common.
Curran (1994) noted that 97% of respondents
used clinical abbreviations in their podiatric
treatment records.
All entries should be dated and signed. In par-
ticular, details regarding the patient's medication
should always be dated, as the medication may
have been changed by the time the patient
attends for the next appointment. The patient's
name or the patient identifier should appear on
every page. Records should always be written in
such a way as not to be offensive or contain sub-
jective opinions.
Most professional bodies provide guidance on
recording information in patient records. For
example, the Society of Chiropodists and
Podiatrists (2000) produce Guidelines on the
Minimum Standards in Clinical Practice, which
contain specific information on record keeping.
Bradshaw & Braid (1999) identified the following
four reasons for poor record keeping:
illegible handwriting
incomplete information
inaccurate information
ambiguous abbreviations.
It is suggested that practitioners as part of their
continuing professional development receive
periodic reminders and refresher sessions related
to record keeping (Bradshaw & Braid 1999). It has
been found that regular audit of medical records
improves record keeping (Donnelly 1995).
The information recorded from the assessment
may be used for:
ensuring contraindicated treatments are not
used
clinical and epidemiological research
audit
planning
legal purposes.
ASSESSMENT 9
Retrospective and prospective analysis of
patient records is commonly used for clinical
and epidemiological research, audit and plan-
ning. If well documented, they can provide a
wealth of information. However, one of the
problems with patient records is that there is no
standardised manner in which information is
collected. For example, the use of clinical terms
can be ambiguous.
The International Statistical Classification of
Diseases, Injuries and Causes of Death was estab-
lished by the World Health Organization as a
universal system for collecting data. The system
was originally designed for mortality statistics
but has evolved to cover a broad range of dis-
eases. It is updated every 10 years to keep abreast
of the constantly changing information base. This
system can be used to record diseases for the
purpose of clinical and epidemiological research
and audit.
In an increasingly litigious society it is impor-
tant that high standards of record keeping
are maintained. The St Paul International
Insurance Company Limited (1991) states that
35-40% of all malpractice claims in the United
States cannot be defended because of 'documen-
tation problems'. The Society of Chiropodists
and Podiatrists (1998) found that inadequate
patient records were the main reason why
legal claims against state-registered chiropodists
succeeded.
CONFIDENTIALITY
The information volunteered by the patient and
recorded in the patient's notes should be treated
as confidential and not divulged to any other
party without the consent of the patient.
However, the information can be made avail-
able to all those involved with the care of that
patient.
Patient records, whether in manual or elec-
tronic format, are subject to the Data Protection
Act 1998, which became effective from March
2000. This means that patients have the right of
access, for a pre-set fee, to information stored
about them. The act gives rights to individuals in
10 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
respect of personal data held about them by
others. Where information about a patient is
stored electronically it is a legal requirement that
practitioners (or their employing organisation)
comply with the notification requirements of the
Data Protection Act (1998). If information is
solely stored manually then there is no require-
ment to notify.
REFERENCES
Adams I D, Chan M, Clifford P 1986 Computer aided
diagnosis of abdominal pain: a multi centre study. British
Medical Journal 293: 80-84
Bradshaw T, Braid S 1999 The practice of recording clinical
treatment and audit of practice - an overview for
podiatrists. British Journal of Podiatry 2(1): 8-12
Comroe J H, Botelho S 1947 The unreliability of cyanosis in
the recognition of arterial anoxemia. American Journal of
the Medical Sciences 214: 1-6
Curran M 1994 Use of abbreviations in chiropody/podiatry.
Journal of British Podiatric Medicine 49(5): 71-72
Curran M, Jagger C 1997 Interobserver variability in the
diagnosis of foot and leg disorders using a computer
expert system. The Foot 7: 7-10
Data Protection Act 1998 EC Data Protection Directive
(95/46/EC)
Donnelly A 1995 Improve your nurses' record collection.
Nursing Management 2(3): 18-19
Ferurestein M, Beattie P 1995 Biobehavioural factors affecting
pain and disability in low back pain: mechanisms and
assessment. Physical Therapy 75: 267-280
SUMMARY
This chapter has stated the purpose of assess-
ment and outlined the assessment process. If
undertaken well, it leads to the drawing up of
appropriate and effective treatment plans. It is
therefore an activity that should be seen as
pivotal to good patient-practitioner interaction.
Gale J 1982 Some cognitive components of the diagnostic
thinking process. British Journal of Educational
Psychology 52: 64-72
Higgs J, Jones M 2000 Clinical reasoning in the health
professions, 2nd edn. Butterworth-Heinemann, London
Lothian P 1987 The practical assessment of pressure sore
risk. CARE Science and Practice 5(4): 3-7
Sandler G 1979 Costs of unnecessary tests. British Medical
Journal 1: 1686-1688
Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists 1998 Defensive
practice (editorial). Podiatry Now 1(1): 1
Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists 2000 Guidelines on
minimum standards of clinical practice, December
St Paul International Insurance Company Limited 1991
Defensible documentation. St Paul House, 61-63 London
Rd, Redhill, Surrey RHI INA (information leaflet for
health care professionals)
Zahra J 1998 Can podiatrists predict diabetic foot ulcers
using a risk assessment card? British Journal of Podiatry
1(3): 79-88
CHAPTERCONTENTS
Introduction 11
Is an interviewdifferent from a normal
conversation? 11
Aims of the assessment interview 12
Communicating effectively 12
Questioningskills 13
Listeningskills 15
Non-verbal communication skills 16
Stereotyping 21
Documenting the assessment interview 21
Structuring the asseSSment interview 22
Preparation 22
The interview 23
,Closure 24
Confidentiality 25
What makes a good assessment interview? 25
Summary 26
The assessment
interview
M. Hanley
INTRODUCTION
Research has shown that the interview, as
opposed to any other method of assessment such
as clinical tests and examinations, is the most
efficient method in reaching an initial diagnosis
(Sandler 1979). This chapter examines the
purpose of the interview, the skills required to
communicate effectively, how the interview
should be structured and the pitfalls to avoid. It
concludes by examining the features of a good
assessment interview.
Is an interview different from a
normal conversation?
An interview is based upon a conversation
between two or more people. As individuals we
converse with a broad range of people.
Conversation serves a multitude of purposes.
The conversation in an interview differs from an
ordinary conversation in a number of ways:
It is an opportunity for an exchange of
information.
It has a specific purpose; e.g. to solve a
problem.
It has an outcome, e.g. a course of treatment.
It has less flexibility than an ordinary
conversation.
The interviewer has a perceived position of
authority/power over the interviewee.
It is important that this power is not abused.
Every effort should be made to put the
interviewee (the patient) at ease.
11
12 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
A written record of the interview is usually
kept.
Practitioners may be involved with other types
of conversation with patients, which require
additional skills such as counselling, teaching
and advising. These are discussed in the accom-
panying text to this book: Clinical skills in treating
the foot.
Aims of the assessment interview
The assessment interview is a conversation with
a purpose, which takes place between the practi-
tioner and the patient. Patients present with
problems, which may have physical, psychologi-
cal and social dimensions. Patients often have
their own ideas and concerns about the problems
they present with, and about the medical care
that they mayor may not receive. Likewise, prac-
titioners approach the interview with percep-
tions of their role. These will have been
influenced by training, past experiences, atti-
tudes and beliefs. The availability of resources
and facilities will contribute to the practitioner's
response to the patient. It is essential that the
practitioner and the patient develop common
ground during the interview and that both are
aware of each other's perspectives. If this cannot
be achieved the interview may be an unsatisfac-
tory experience for both of them.
The prime purpose of the interview is for the
cause of the patient's concerns to be identified
and appropriate action taken. This is best
achieved by the patient and the practitioner
working in partnership to reduce or resolve these
concerns.
It is essential that the practitioner provides
ample opportunity for the patient to convey his
concerns and worries. In other words, the inter-
view should be patient-centred. Research has
shown that this is not always the case. A few
years after qualification most practitioners are
confident that they are good at taking histories
and explaining things to patients. Is this
confidence justified? A detailed analysis of the
recordings of over 2500 doctor/patient inter-
views showed that 77% of them were doctor-
centred, compared with 21% classed as patient-
centred (Byrne & Long 1976).
Information gathered collectively from the
interview and examination should facilitate the
identification of the patient's health problem
and, where appropriate, a diagnosis can be
made. However, as well as aiding the diagnostic
process, the interview serves other important
purposes:
The information gained may be of help when
drawing up a treatment plan. For example, the
interview can provide a picture of the patient's
social circumstances, which may affect the
manner of, or the actual advice given.
It provides an opportunity to gain the
patient's trust and confidence in you as a
practitioner.
It facilitates the development of a therapeutic
relationship between the health care
practitioner and the patient.
However, not all health care students are
aware of how to communicate effectively and, as
a result, communication skills training is becom-
ing a common part of the curriculum in health
care courses (Hargie et a11998, Sleight 1995).
COMMUNICATING EFFECTIVELY
Since the interview plays a particularly
significant role in the assessment of the patient, it
is important to ensure that the meeting is suc-
cessful. In other words, good communication
skills are essential if you are to achieve an effec-
tive assessment interview. What is meant by
communication? In its simplest form it can be
seen as the transmission of information from one
person and the receiving of information by
another. Unfortunately, the communication
process is not that simple; if it were there would
not be communication breakdowns or misunder-
standing between people as to what has been
said.
Communication can be influenced by charac-
teristics of the sender (e.g. ability to express ideas
clearly, verbal skills, attitude toward the patient),
the receiver (e.g. the extent to which the receiver
is paying attention, ability to hear and under-
stand the conversation, prior beliefs and expecta-
tions) or characteristics of the social environment
in which the interview is being conducted (e.g.
disruption due to background noise). With so
many opportunities for these forms of interfer-
ence, it is not surprising that many attempts to
communicate effectively fail. Consequently,
health care professionals should develop their
communication skills in order to make the best
use of the interview.
A common question asked is: 'Are good com-
municators born or is it a skill you can learn?'.
The answer has to be, it's a bit of both. We can all
think of people we consider to be good commu-
nicators; these people appear to have an inherent
skill. For others, communication may not come
so easily. It is particularly important for health
practitioners to be aware of and develop effec-
tive communication skills because so much clin-
ical information is gathered through the
assessment interview. Research has shown that
with assistance and motivation, good communi-
cation skills can be developed (Ryden et aI1991).
A myriad of books are available on the subject
of communication skills. However, just reading a
book does not automatically mean you become a
good communicator. Observing others, noting
good and bad points, receiving feedback from
others, role-play exercises, video- and audiotap-
ing of interactions, practising in front of a mirror
or with friends are all helpful ways in which
skills can be developed. Being an effective com-
municator is a skill - and like any clinical skill it
should be regularly practised and reviewed.
Constructive criticism is an essential part of
learning but not always an easy method to
accept!
While you may not be able to change the com-
munication characteristics of the patient or the
social environment, you can ensure that your
contribution to the interview is as effective as
possible. You can do this by sending clear and
appropriate messages to the patient and by
ensuring that you understand fully what the
patient is trying to communicate to you. In order
to achieve this, you need to pay careful attention
to three key components of the communication
process:
THEASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 13
questioning skills
listening skills
non-verbal communication skills.
Each of these skills will be considered in turn.
Questioning skills
The prime purpose of the assessment interview is
to gain as much information as possible from the
patient in order that a diagnosis and treatment
plan can be arrived at. To achieve this objective
the practitioner uses a range of questioning skills.
There are three categories of question:
open
closed
leading.
Open questions. Open questions invite the
patient to give far more than one-word answers.
The patient is in a much better position to con-
struct the response he wishes to give. Examples
of open questions are:
What happened when you went into
hospital?
What do you look for when buying a pair of
shoes?
What do you think is causing the problem?
This sort of question can elicit information
from the patient that you had not expected. Open
questions are often preferable to closed questions
such as 'When you were in hospital did they test
your blood sugar or give you an X-ray?'. The
patient may legitimately answer 'no' to these
direct questions and fail to tell you that they
undertook a test you have not mentioned.
Closed questions. Closed questions limit the
responses a patient may give. They usually
require a one word response. Closed questions
may:
require a yes/no response, e.g. Do you suffer
from rheumatoid arthritis?
require the patient to select, e.g. Is the pain
worse in the morning or the afternoon?
require the patient to provide factual
information, e.g. How long have you been a
diabetic?
14 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
Closed questions serve useful purposes during
the assessment interview. They provide a quick
means of gaining and verifying information.
Patients often find them easier to answer than the
more open type of question. They can be used to
focus the assessment interview in a particular
direction. On the other hand, if used too much
they limit what the patient can say. As a result the
patient may not volunteer important informa-
tion.
Leading questions. Leading questions should
be avoided where possible. In general, they give
responses that the professional expects to receive.
Examples of leading questions are:
You don't smoke, do you?
That doesn't hurt, does it?
You said you get the pain a lot; that must
mean you get it every day?
While you may get the answer you want or
expect to hear, it does not necessarily mean it is
true!
In addition to a specific style of question, the
practitioner may also use a range of interview
techniques to elaborate further on the issues
raised. These techniques are often referred to as
probes. Probing questions are a very useful
adjunct to both open and closed questions. In
general they aim at finding out more from the
patient. In particular, they are useful in gaining
in-depth rather than superficial information.
Examples include:
Could you describe the type of pain it is?
What makes you think it might be linked to
your circulation?
You might also use silence as a probe to
encourage the patient to expand on a given
answer, or say 'yes', 'uh-hm' or simply nod,
techniques that are particularly useful when
you feel the patients may have more to say
and are thinking about expanding their
answer.
General pointers when questioning patients
The following points should be borne in mind
when interviewing patients:
Show empathy. Authier (1986) defined
empathy as: '[being] attuned to the way another
person is feeling and conveying that
understanding in a language he/she
understands' .
Use language that is simple, direct and
understandable. Avoid medical and technical
terms. The 'fog index' can be used to assess
the complexity of a piece of communication
(Table 2.1). It is primarily used in written
communication but has also been used,
although less frequently, to analyse the
complexity of the spoken word. It involves a
mathematical equation that produces a score.
For example, tabloid newspapers have a fog
index score between 3 and 6, whereas
government policy documents can achieve a
score of 20+. Applying the fog index to
spoken communication or a foot health
education leaflet will give an indication of the
complexity of that particular communication.
If it receives a high fog index score, the
average patient may find it very difficult to
understand.
Avoid presenting the patient with a long list
of conditions. This is especially important
during medical history taking. It is unlikely
that a patient has experienced more than
one or two of the problems on a list. Patients
may fall into the habit of replying 'no' to
all the items on the list and fail to respond
in the affirmative to ones they do suffer
from. Strategies that can be used to avoid this
situation include a pre-assessment ques-
tionnaire (see Ch. 5) or breaking up the
list of closed questions with some open
questions.
Table 2.1 The fog index
Take a passage of about 100 words, ending in a full stop.
Work out the average sentence length. This is achieved by
dividing the number of sentences into 100. Then work out
the number of words of three or more syllables. Ignore two-
syllable words that have become three syllables with plural
or endings like -ed or -ing, technical words and proper
nouns. Add the average sentence length to the number of
difficult words and multiply by 0.4. The result will give you
the reading score (fog index)
Don't ask the patient more than one question
at a time. For example, if asking a closed-type
question do not say, 'Could you tell me when
you first noticed the condition, when the pain
is worse and what makes it better?'. By the
end of the question the patient will have
forgotten the first part.
Attempt to get the patient to give you
an honest answer using his or her own
words. Avoid putting words into the patient's
mouth.
Clarify inconsistencies in what the patient tells
you.
Get the patient to explain what he means by
using certain terms, e.g. 'nagging pain'. Your
interpretation of this term may differ from the
patient's.
Pauses are an integral part of any com-
munication. They allow time for participants
to take in and analyse what has been
communicated and provide time for a
response to be formulated. Allow the patient
time to think how he wishes to answer your
question. Avoid appearing as if you are
undertaking an interrogation.
In the early stages of the interview it is often
better to use the term 'concern' rather than
'problem'. Asking patients what concerns
them may elicit a very different response from
asking them what the problem is. Some
patients may feel they do not have a problem
as such but are worried about some symptom
or sign they have noticed. Asking them what
concerns them may get them to reveal this
rather than a denial that they have any
problems.
Asking personal and intimate questions can
be very difficult. Do not start the interview
with this type of question; wait until further
into the interview when hopefully the patient
is more at ease with you. Try to avoid
showing any embarrassment when asking an
intimate question as this may well make the
patient feel uncomfortable.
It is important that the patient understands
why you are asking certain questions.
Remember that the assessment interview is a
two-way process: besides gathering infor-
THEASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 15
mation from the patient it can be used for
giving information to him.
Some patients, on account of a range of
circumstances such as deafness, speech deficit
or language difference, may not be able to
communicate with the practitioner. In these
instances it is important that the practitioner
involves someone known to the patient to
communicate on his behalf, e.g. relative,
friend or carer.
The patient may have difficulty listening and
interpreting what you are saying through fear,
anxiety, physical discomfort or mental
confusion. Be aware of non-verbal and verbal
messages that can give clues to the patient's
emotional state.
Listening skills
Listening is an active not a passive skill. Many
people ask questions but do not listen to the
response. A common example is the general
introductory question: 'How are you?'. Most
responses tend to be in the affirmative: 'Fine',
'OK'. Occasionally, someone responds by saying
they have not been too well, only to get the
response from the supposed listener: 'Great;
pleased to hear everything is fine'. Similarly, do
not limit your attention to that which you want
to hear or expect to hear. Listen to all that is being
said and watch the patient's non-verbal behav-
iour. The average rate of speech is 100-200 words
a minute; however, we can assimilate the spoken
word at around 400 words per minute. As a
result the listener has 'extra time' to understand
and interpret what is being said. If you have
asked a question you should listen to all of the
answer. Often when trying to understand the
clinical nature of a patient's problem, there is a
great temptation to listen to the first part of an
answer and then to immediately use this infor-
mation to try and make a diagnosis. This may
mean that you are not paying careful attention to
important clinical information, which the patient
may give, at the end of their reply. Finally, it is
important that you don't let your mind wander
on to unrelated thoughts such as what you are
going to do after the interview. Before you know
16 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
it you have missed a good chunk of what the
patient has been telling you and have most prob-
ably missed important and relevant information.
In order to be a good listener you need to set
aside your own personal problems and worries
and give your full attention to the other person.
It is inevitable that, at times, one's attention does
wander. This may be due to lack of concentra-
tion, tiredness or because the patient has been
allowed to wander off the point. In the case of the
former do not be afraid to say to the patient,
'Sorry, could I ask you to go over that again?'. In
the latter case, politely interrupt the patient and
use your questioning skills to bring the conversa-
tion back to the subject in hand.
During the interview the techniques of para-
phrasing, reflection and summarising can be
used to aid listening and ensure you understand
what the patient is trying to convey.
Paraphrasing. This technique is used to clarify
what a person has just said to you in order to get
him to confirm its accuracy or to encourage him
to enlarge. It involves re-stating, using your own
and the patient's words, what the patient has
said.
Reflection. This technique is similar to
prompting in that it is used to encourage the
patient to continue talking about a particular
issue that may involve feelings or concerns. It
may be used when the patient appears to be
reluctant to continue or is 'drying up'. It involves
the practitioner repeating in the patient's own
words what the patient has just said.
Summarising. This technique is used to iden-
tify what you consider to be the main points of
what the patient is trying to tell you. It can also
be a useful means of controlling the interview
when a patient continues to talk at length about
an issue. To summarise, the practitioner draws
together the salient points from the whole con-
versation. At the end of the summary the patient
may agree with, add to or make corrections to
what the practitioner has said. Summarising
serves a useful purpose in checking the validity,
clarity and understanding of old information; it
does not aim to develop new information.
The basic skills of a good listener are high-
lighted in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Skills ofa good listener
Look at the patient when he/she startstotalk
Use body language suchas nodding, leaning forward to
demonstrate tothe speaker that you are interested in
what is being said
Do not keep looking at thetime
Adopt a relaxed posture
Use paraphrasing, reflecting andsummarising toshow the
patient that you are listening to and understanding what
he/sheis/are saying
Non-verbal communication skills
This involves all forms of communication apart
from the purely spoken (verbal) message. It is
through this medium that we create first impres-
sions of people and, similarly, people make initial
judgements about us. Once made, first impres-
sions are often difficult to change, yet research
has shown they are not always reliable.
Therefore, it is particularly important that we
consider non-verbal communication here since it
affects not only how we are perceived when we
communicate but also how we make judgements
about the patient.
Non-verbal behaviour includes behaviours
such as posture, touch, personal space, physical
appearance, facial expressions, gestures and
paralanguage (i.e. the vocalisations associated
with verbal messages, such as tone, pitch,
volume, speed of speech). It is said that we pri-
marily communicate non-verbally. Remember
the old adage 'a picture says a thousand words'.
Your body language and paralanguage will send
an array of messages to your patient prior to you
saying anything. Non-verbal communication
serves many useful purposes. It can be used to:
replace, support or complement speech
regulate the flow of verbal communication
provide feedback to the person who is
transmitting the message, e.g. looking
interested
communicate attitudes and emotions (Argyle
1972, Hargie et aI1994).
The average person only speaks for a total of
10-11 minutes daily, with the average spoken sen-
tence lasting only around 2.5 seconds
(Birdwhistell 1970). Therefore, non-verbal com-
munication is the main mode of conveying our
emotional state in most types of human interac-
tions. In fact, in a typical conversation only one-
third of the social meaning will be conveyed
verbally - a full two-thirds is communicated
through non-verbal channels! (Birdwhistell1970).
Due to the broad literature in this area the fol-
lowing section will focus on selected aspects of
non-verbal behaviour and how they may
influence the success of the assessment inter-
view. For the interested reader, there is a wide
range of books available which look at the topic
of non-verbal communication, many specialis-
ing in the clinical interaction: see Davis (1994),
Dickson et al (1997), Hargie (1997), or the winter
1995 edition of the Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
for further information on this topic.
Eye contact. Eye-to-eye contact is frequently
the first stage of interpersonal communication. It
is the way we attract the other person's attention.
Direct eye-to-eye contact creates trust between
two people; hence, the innate distrust felt of
someone who avoids eye contact. However, we
do not keep constant eye-to-eye contact through-
out a conversation. The receiver looks at the
speaker for approximately 25-50% of the time,
whereas the speaker looks at the other person for
approximately half as long. So in other words,
people tend to look more at the other person
when they are listening compared with when
they are speaking.
Too much eye contact is interpreted as staring
and is seen as a hostile gesture. Too little is inter-
preted as a lack of interest, attention or trustwor-
thiness. Interviewers cannot afford to look
inattentive because the patient may interpret this
as meaning that he has said enough and as a
result may stop talking. Conversely, withdraw-
ing eye contact may be used as a legitimate way
of getting the patient to stop talking.
Health care practitioners should be aware of
the frequency and duration of eye contact they
have with their patients. The use of eye contact is
important for assessing a range of patient needs
and providing feedback and support, and its use
during the interview should be based on the pro-
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 17
fessional judgement of the practitioner
(Davidhizar 1992). Certainly eye-to-eye contact is
recommended at the beginning of the interview,
to gain rapport and trust, and at the end of the
interview by way of closing the interview.
However, you should always be aware of poten-
tial cultural and gender differences in appropriate
level of eye contact. For example, Hall (1984) has
reported that on average women tend to make
more eye-to-eye contact compared with men, so
adjust your non-verbal behaviour accordingly.
Facial expression. Facial expression is argu-
ably the most important form of human com-
munication next to speech itself (Hargie et al
1994). It is via our facial expression we commu-
nicate most about our emotional state, and the
meaning of a wide range of facial expressions
(e.g. happy or sad) are recognised universally
(Ekman & Fresen 1975). Smiling, together with
judicious eye-to-eye contact, signifies a recep-
tive and friendly persona and inspires a feeling
of confidence and friendliness. Facial expres-
sions often carry even more weight in a social
interaction than the spoken word. For example,
if a practitioner is giving a very positive verbal
message to the patient but, at the same time, the
practitioner's facial expression communicates
anxiety and doubt, then it is likely that the
patient will pay more attention to the facial
message. This is because verbal behaviour is
much easier to control than non-verbal and, as a
result, non-verbal communication is likely to be
more honest! Therefore, it is important that
practitioners are always aware of the message
they are communicating using their facial
expressions.
Posture and gestures. The manner in which
we hold ourselves and the way in which we
move says a lot about us as individuals. This area
of non-verbal behaviour is often referred to as
kinesics and includes all those movements of the
body which complement the spoken word (e.g.
gestures, limb movements, head nods, etc.), One
particularly important aspect is posture. Four
types of posture have been identified:
approaching posture, which conveys interest,
curiosity and attention, e.g. sitting upright
18 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
and slightly forward in a chair facing towards
the person you are communicating with
withdrawal posture, which conveys negation,
refusal and disgust, e.g. distance between the
receiver and the communicator, shuffling,
gestures indicating agitation
expansion, which conveys a sense of pride,
conceit, mastery, self-esteem, e.g. expanded
chest, hands behind head with shoulders in
air, erect head and trunk
contraction, which conveys depression,
dejection, e.g. sitting in a chair with head
drooped, arms and legs crossed or head held
in hands, avoiding eye contact.
Clearly, the posture adopted by the health care
practitioner is important in developing a rapport
and a working therapeutic relationship with the
patient.
When we speak we also tend to use our arms
and hands to reinforce and complement the
verbal message. In fact, when people are con-
strained from using their arms and hands, they
experience greater difficulty in communicating
(Riseborough 1981). Self-directed gestures such
as ring twisting, self-stroking and nail biting may
indicate anxiety. Be aware of self-participation in
these types of activities as you may convey a
non-verbal message of anxiety to your patient
while verbally you are trying to convey a
confident approach. The health care profession
should be sensitive to the non-verbal gestures
used by the patient as these may reveal more
about the patient's thoughts and feelings than
they are able to communicate verbally (Harrigan
& Taing 1997).
Touch. The extent to which touching is per-
missible or encouraged is related to culture
(McDaniel & Andersen 1998). In general, the
British people are not known as a nation of
Table 2.3 Four zones of personal space (Hall 1969)
'touchers'. During the assessment it may be nec-
essary to touch the patient in order to examine a
part of his body. This type of touching, known
as functional touching, is generally acceptable
to most patients as part of the role of the practi-
tioner and as such does not carry any connota-
tion of a social relationship. However, people
from certain cultures may find it difficult to
accept, even in medical settings. Prior to func-
tional touching of a patient, it is important that
you inform the patient what you intend to do
and the reasons for doing it.
During the interview you may wish to use
touch as a means of reassuring the patient, to
indicate warmth, show empathy or as a sign of
care and concern (McCann & McKenna 1993). A
hand lightly placed upon a shoulder or holding a
patient's hand are means of showing concern and
giving reassurance. It is difficult to produce
guidelines for when this type of touching should
or should not be used. Practitioners must feel
confident and happy in its use, and must also take
into account a multitude of communication cues
from the patient before deciding whether it is or is
not appropriate (Davidhizar & Newman 1997).
Proxemics. All of us have a sense of our own
personal territory. When someone invades that
territory, depending upon the situation, we can
be fearful, disturbed or pleased and happy. As
with touch, our sense of personal space is
affected by culture. In some cultures individuals
have a large personal space, whereas in others
they have a very small personal space.
Encroaching on someone else's personal space
can be perceived as intimidation and, in the case
of the assessment interview, may put patients on
their guard. As a result the patient may become
reluctant to disclose relevant information. Hall
(1969) defined the four zones of personal space
(Table 2.3).
Zone
Intimate
Personal
Social/consultative
Public
Distance
0-0.5 metres
0.5-1 .2 metres
1.2-3 metres
3 metres +
Activities
Intimate relationships/close friends
What is usually termed 'personal space'
Distance of day-to-day interactions
Distance from significant public figures
The zone in which people interact is highly
influenced by social status and people who have
an equal status tend to interact at closer distances
(Zahn 1991). The assessment interview usually
takes place in the social/consultative and the
personal zone. During the interview it may be
necessary to enter the intimate zone. Prior to
doing this, notify the patient in order to justify
any actions requiring closer contact.
Social interactions are not only influenced by
distance, but also by bodily orientation. The angle
A
C
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 19
at which you conduct the assessment interview
may have a significant effect on the success of the
interaction. There are four main ways in which
you can position yourself in order to interact
with the patient (Fig. 2.1): (i) conversation;
(ii) cooperation; (iii) competition; and (iv) coac-
tion. Research indicates that the conversation
position is most appropriate for an assessment
interview. In fact, research has shown that
when CPs sat at a 90
Q
angle to their patients
during a clinical interview, the amount of
B
o
Figure 2.1 Body orientation may influence the success of the interview. The figures show four positions commonly
encountered when two people interact. Which of the following orientations do you think would be most appropriate for the
assessment interview? A. Conversation B. Cooperation C. Competition D. Coaction.
20 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
clinician-patient information exchanged increa-
sed by up to six times compared with when they
interacted face-to-face (Pietroni 1976).
Clearly, the health care professional needs to
be aware of the physical position they adopt
when assessing a patient as this will have a
significant impact on the kind of relationship
they are hoping to achieve (Worchel1986).
Physical appearance. We use our clothing and
accessories to make statements about ourselves
to others. Clothing can be seen as an expression
of conformity or self-expression, comfort,
economy or status. Uniforms are used as inten-
tional means of communicating a message to
others; often the message is to do with status.
Uniforms are also used in the health care profes-
sions for cover and protection. Whether one
wears a uniform (white coat, coloured top and
trousers) for the assessment interview is open
for debate, but one should pay attention to
issues of cleanliness and appearance of dress,
hair, hands, footwear and accessories such as
jewellery - they all send messages to the patient.
In addition to physical factors, which can be
altered, you should also be aware of how 'non-
changeable' physical characteristics may playa
role in your interaction with the patient. For
example, physically attractive and/or taller
people are typically judged more favourably in
general social interactions (Hensley & Cooper
1987, Melamed & Bozionelos 1992). Research has
shown that within a health care environment,
children make judgements about health
care professionals on the basis of height. In
general, taller health professionals were judged
to be stronger and more dominant than their
smaller colleagues, but they were not considered
to be more intelligent nor more empathetic
(Montepare 1995).
Finally, health care practitioners should also be
aware of the impact of their appearance on any
health promotion message that they hope to
communicate. For example, the patient will often
pay attention to the footwear worn by the practi-
tioner. Avoid giving conflicting verbal and non-
verbal messages, e.g. by wearing high-heeled
slip-on shoes while advising patients that they
should not wear this type of shoe.
Paralanguage. This involves the manner in
which we speak. It includes everything from the
speed at which we speak to the dialect we use.
Paralanguage is the bold, underlining, italics and
punctuation marks in our everyday speech! An
individual who speaks fast is often considered by
the receiver to be intelligent and quick, whereas
a slow drawl may be associated with a lower
level of intelligence. When talking to patients we
should be careful not to speak too quickly as they
will not understand what we say. Conversely, if
speech is too slow, the patient may not have
confidence in the practitioner.
When we speak we use pitch, intonation and
volume to affect the message we transmit.
Individuals who speak at a constant volume and
do not use intonation and/or alter their pitch
often come across as monotonous, dull and
boring. Such speech is often difficult to listen to.
Intonation and pitch should be used to highlight
the important parts of your question and can be
used to change the point you are trying to make.
For example, in the following sentence you can
see how changing the point of emphasis changes
the message you are trying to get across.
You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. treatment is the responsibility of the patient.
You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. it is essential that the treatment is carried out.
You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. it is important that the cream is usedand not
some othersubstance.
You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. the cream should beusedon thefoot and not
some other part of the body.
You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. treatment needs to beon a regular basis.
The fluency with which we speak also tends to
convey messages about mental and intellectual
abilities. Repeated hesitations, repetitions, inter-
jections of 'you know' or 'urn' and false starts
do not inspire confidence in the receiver
(Christenfeld 1995). We all experience occasions
when we are not as fluent as at other times. These
occasions tend to occur when we are tired or
under great stress. If possible, these times should
be keep to a minimum during clinical assessment.
Dialect conveys which part of the country we
originate from. It may also cause us to use vocab-
ularya person from another part of the country is
not familiar with. Avoid using colloquial terms.
Dialect, on the other hand, is not so easy to alter.
The only time it should be considered is when
patients cannot understand what the practitioner
is saying. Finally, volume should not be changed
too regularly. Shouting at the patient should be
avoided. In the clinical setting, as in life in
general, it certainly does not guarantee that the
other person will listen more to what you say!
From this section it should be clear that health
care professionals need to be sensitive to the kind
of atmosphere they are creating through their
non-verbal communication, and the role this may
have in the subsequent interaction with the
patient. The extent to which you establish a satis-
factory rapport will depend heavily on your non-
verbal skills and how you develop them in your
clinical work (Grahe & Bernieri 1999).
Stereotyping
Health care practitioners should be aware of their
own underlying psychological characteristics,
which may have a profound effect on the interac-
tion - i.e. stereotypes. A stereotype is a belief that
all members of a particular social group share
certain traits or characteristics (Baron & Byrne
2000). For example, you might hold particular
ideas about the characteristics of a patient who is
an alcoholic, elderly, from an upper social class
group, from a minority ethnic group or female. In
fact, you probably already hold a range of stereo-
types about a wide group of patients whom you
have never actually treated! While stereotypes
are not always negative, they do share a common
characteristic in that they reduce the ability of the
health care worker to see the patient as an indi-
vidual. Consequently, any information gathered
from the patient during the assessment interview
is likely to be interpreted in the light of such
stereotypes (Price 1987). Ganong et al (1987) con-
ducted a review of 38 research studies, which
examined stereotyping by nurses and nursing
students. Results indicated that nurses held
stereotypes about patients on the basis of age,
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 21
gender, diagnosis, social class, personality and
family structure. However, the impact on actual
patient care was harder to classify. What does
seem to be the case is that patients were less
likely to be seen as having unique concerns,
health problems and social circumstances.
Consequently, in addition to practising inter-
viewing skills, it is important for health care
practitioners to reflect on any belief systems they
may hold regarding particular patient groups,
and consider how such views may impair the
overall success of the assessment interview.
Documenting the assessment
interview
It is essential either during or at the end of the
assessment to make a permanent record of the
findings of the interview. This record is essential
as an aide-memoire for future reference when
monitoring and evaluating the treatment plan
and as a means of communicating your findings
to another practitioner who may collaborate in
treating the patient.
Despite recent discussions within the field of
podiatry regarding changing to electronic data
management systems, the majority of patient
records are still stored on paper. However, the
use of computerised records is on the increase,
particularly in private practice. It may well be in
the future that paper records are discarded com-
pletely, and replaced by computerised tech-
niques. Whatever the future may hold, the
need for clear, accurate recording of information
will still be the same. The recording of assess-
ment findings, together with the recording of
treatment provided, forms a legal document.
Patient records would certainly be used if action
was taken by a patient against a practitioner, or
if certain agencies required detailed evidence
of management and progress in the case of
disability awards.
Patient records may take a variety of forms: at
the simplest level a plain piece of paper may be
used. If using plain paper it is essential to adopt
an order to the presentation ofyour assessment
findings: e.g. name, address, doctor, age, sex,
weight, height, main complaint, medical history,
22 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
etc. This is considered further in Chapter 5. A
variety of patient record cards exist in the NHS
and private practice. Many practitioners and
health authorities produce their own tailor-made
record card. The Association of Chief Chiropody
Officers produced a standard record in 1986 for
charting foot conditions, diagnoses and treat-
ment progress.
Handwritten recording of information requires
the following:
The writing is legible and in permanent ink,
not pencil. If another practitioner cannot read
your writing the information is of no use.
The information is set in a clear and logical
order. It is essential to use an accepted
method.
Accurate recording of location and size of
lesions or deformities. The use of prepared
outlines of the feet are very good for
indicating anatomical sites and save
additional writing.
Abbreviations are avoided where possible.
What is obvious to you may not be so
obvious to another practitioner.
Entries are dated. Recording the medication a
patient is taking is useless unless it is dated.
Once dated the information can be updated
as and when there is a change.
Each entry should be signed and dated by the
practitioner.
STRUCTURING THE ASSESSMENT
INTERVIEW
Preparation
In order to achieve a good assessment interview
it is essential you prepare yourself for the inter-
view. The following should be taken into consid-
eration.
Purpose. It is essential that the practitioner is
clear as to the purpose of interview. In some
instances the assessment interview may be used
as a screening mechanism to identify patients for
further assessment. It may be used to gain infor-
mation from patients in order that their needs
can be prioritised and those judged to be urgent
can be seen first. On the other hand, the assess-
ment interview may be aimed at undertaking a
full assessment of the patient, with treatment
provided at the end of the interview.
Letter of application. Was the patient referred
or self-referred? If the patient was referred by
another health care practitioner there should be
an accompanying letter of referral. Read this
carefully so you are fully informed of the reasons
for referral. This information should be used as a
starting point for the assessment. If patients have
referred themselves directly (self-referred) they
should complete any appropriate documentation
prior to the interview. Information on application
forms can be used to prioritise patients and
ensure the most suitable practitioner sees them. If
no application form or letter of referral is avail-
able the practitioner has very little information
prior to the interview, possibly only the patient's
name.
You may wish to give the patient a short health
questionnaire to complete prior to the assess-
ment (pp. 77-78). This questionnaire may be sent
to the patient prior to the interview or the patient
may be asked to fill it in on arrival. These ques-
tionnaires provide the practitioner with impor-
tant information before the start of the interview.
The patient should be allowed time to complete
the questionnaire in order that he can think about
his responses. The advantage of such a question-
naire is that the practitioner does not have to ask
the patient a series of routine questions during
the interview. However, some patients may be
reluctant to fill in a form without having met the
practitioner or reluctant to disclose information
in writing.
Prior to the interview try to read all the infor-
mation you have about the patient. You can then
come across to the patient as well informed and
as someone who has taken an interest in him.
Patient expectations. Does the patient know
what to expect from the assessment interview?
Some new patients, prior to attending their
assessment appointment, are sent an information
sheet or booklet explaining the purpose of the
assessment interview and what will happen
during it. Such an initiative is helpful. The cause
of a poor interview may be that the patient's
expectations of what will happen are very differ-
ent from what actually happens. For example, a
patient who expected immediate treatment and
had not envisaged any need for history taking
may well say, 'Why are you asking me all these
questions?'. Table 2.4 highlights what should be
contained in a patient information booklet.
Waiting room. Patients can spend a lot of time
in the waiting room, especially if they arrive too
early or are kept waiting due to unavoidable cir-
cumstances. Try sitting in the waiting room in
your clinic. Look around you: how welcoming is
it? The waiting room sets the scene for the rest of
the interview. Where possible, ensure that it is in
good decorative order, clean, with magazines to
read and informative, eye-catching posters or
pictures on the wall. Make the most of a captive
audience to put over important health education
information. TV monitors showing health pro-
motion videos may be used.
The name of the practitioner displayed outside
the clinic may be useful. Some clinics, like a
number of high street banks, have a display of
photographs with the names and titles of those
within the department or centre.
Interview room. The assessment interview may
be carried out in an office or in a clinic. Both have
advantages and disadvantages. Using an office
prevents the patient being put off by surround-
ing clinical equipment. It facilitates eye-to-eye
contact by sitting in chairs, and provides a non-
clinical environment. This is especially useful if
Table 2.4 Information booklet for patients to read prior to
the interview
The booklet should contain the following information:
The purpose of the assessment interview
How long the interview should take
What will happen during the interview
Specific information the patient may be asked to provide,
e.g. list of current medication
Specific items the patient may be asked to bring, e.g.
footwear
Examples of questions he/she is likely to be asked
The possible outcomes of the assessment interview, e.g.
whether the patient will receive treatment at the end of it.
The booklet may also contain a health questionnaire for the
patient to complete and bring to the assessment interview.
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 23
treatment is not normally provided at the end of
the assessment. On the other hand, using a clinic
ensures that clinical equipment is readily to hand
and the patient can be moved into different posi-
tions if there are controls on the couch.
During the interview you should ensure that
you are not disturbed. If there is a phone in the
room, redirect calls. Ensure the receptionist does
not interrupt. While the patient is in the room
you should be giving him your undivided atten-
tion. Constant disturbances not only makes the
assessment interview a protracted occasion but
also can prompt the patient into feeling that his
problem is not worthy of your attention.
The interview
When the patient enters the room, welcome him
to the clinic, preferably by name. This person-
alises the occasion for the patient and at the same
time ensures that you have the correct patient. If
you have difficulty with the patient's name, ask
politely how to pronounce it rather than doing so
incorrectly. Introduce yourself. As part of the
Patient's Charter you should be wearing a name
badge but a personal introduction is usually
preferable, especially if the patient's eyesight is
poor. It is useful to shake the patient by the hand
since touch is an important aspect of non-verbal
behaviour (as discussed earlier), although this
may be influenced by personal preference.
At this stage you may find it helpful to make
one or two general conversation points about
the weather, the time of year or some news item.
This enables patients to see you as a fellow
human. Remember that during the interview
they are going to give a lot of themselves to you.
It is important that patients feel you are
someone they wish to disclose information to.
Use the introduction as an opportunity to
explain the purpose of the interview and what
will happen.
The positioning of patient and practitioner can
influence the success of the assessment interview.
Ideally, you and the patient should be at the same
level in order to facilitate eye-to-eye contact.
Barriers such as desks are often used in medical
interviews. They can be considered as means of
24 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
making the interview formal. Standing over a
patient who is sitting down or lying on a couch
may be intimidating.
Data gathering. It is essential that the practi-
tioner is clear as to what areas should be covered
in the interview. A logical and ordered approach
should be adopted. However, it is not always
possible or desirable to stick to an ordered
approach. Patients tend to talk around issues or
elect to give information about a question that
you asked earlier at the end of the interview. You
must make allowances for this.
Effective and efficient use of time is para-
mount. Experienced practitioners combine the
interview with the examination. This is
achieved by, for example, feeling pulses and
skin temperature while simultaneously asking
questions about medical history. This technique
is a matter of preference; some prefer to com-
plete the interview before commencing the
examination.
After each assessment interview reflect upon
it. Ask yourself how you could improve your
performance and how you could make better use
of the time. This will help you to make the best
use of the data-gathering stage of the interview.
Peer appraisal is another mechanism that you
may find helpful in aiding you to develop good
data-gathering skills.
Closure
Bringing the assessment interview to a close is a
difficult task. When do you know you have
enough information? This is a difficult question
to answer. Some presenting problems, together
with information from the patient, can be easily
diagnosed. Other problems are not so easy to
resolve and may require further questioning and
investigations.
General medical practitioners have been
shown to give their patients, on average, 6
minutes of their time. Psychotherapists, on the
other hand, spend 1 hour or more on each
assessment. Unfortunately the demands on
practitioners' time means they are often not in a
position to give the patient as much time as they
would like.
As a general rule of thumb the interview should
be brought to a close when the practitioner feels
the patient has been given an opportunity to talk
about the problem. Body language can be used to
convey the closing of the interview. Standing up
from a sitting position, shuffling of papers, with-
drawing eye-to-eye contact are all ways by which
the end of the interview can be conveyed to the
patient, together with a verbal message.
The patient should not leave the interview
without fully understanding what is to happen
next and without an opportunity to ask ques-
tions. A range of outcomes may result from the
assessment interview (Table 2.5). Patients should
know which outcome applies to them. They
should always be given the opportunity to raise
any queries or concerns they may have prior to
leaving the assessment. This is one of the most
important parts of the assessment and should not
be hurried. The patient must leave the assess-
ment fully understanding the findings of the
assessment interview and what action, if any, is
to be taken, and it is the responsibility of the
health care professional to ensure that they have
communicated such information clearly (Calkins
et al 1997).
It is helpful to provide written instructions as a
follow-up to the interview. For example, if the
patient is to be offered a course of treatment what
will the treatment involve, when will it be given,
who will give it, what problems may the patient
experience?
Table 2.5 Outcomes from the assessment interview
Treatment is not required; the patient requires advice and
reassurance
The patient can look after the problem once appropriate
self-help advice has been given
A course of treatment is required; the patient should be
informed as to whether treatment will commence straight
after the assessment interview or at a later date
The patient needs to be referred to another practitioner for
treatment
Further examination and investigations are required
before a definitive diagnosis can be made
A second opinion is required
The urgency for treatment should be prioritised
Confidentiality
The information the patient divulges during the
interview is confidential. It should not be dis-
closed to other people unless the patient has
given consent. The Data Protection Act 1998
requires that all personal data held on computers
should be 'secure from loss or unauthorised dis-
closure'. The General Medical Council (1991) and
the National Health Service (1990) have laid
down guidelines on confidentiality.
WHAT MAKES A GOOD
ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW?
The prime purpose of the assessment interview is
to draw out information, experiences and opin-
ions from the patient. It is the duty of the inter-
viewer to guide and keep the interview to the
subject in hand. At the same time, it is equally
important to encourage the patient to talk and to
clear up any misunderstandings as you go along.
Keeping the balance between these two compet-
ing aims is not an easy task. One way of checking
on this is to ask yourself who is doing most of the
talking. Is it you or the patient? If you are to
achieve the aims of the assessment interview it
should be the patient.
It is not essential that you like the patient you
are interviewing. What is important is that you
adopt a professional approach, demonstrate
empathy and deal with the patient in a compe-
tent and courteous manner. It is essential that
you do not make value judgements based on
your own biases and prejudices. Respect the
patient; avoid stereotyping. Do not jump to con-
clusions before reaching the end of the interview.
As highlighted earlier, the assessment inter-
view should be patient-centred; its prime
purpose is to gain information from the patient.
However, one sometimes comes across patients
who appear unable to stop talking. What can the
practitioner do in these instances?
The first question to ask is why the patient is
talking so much. Is it because he is lonely and
welcomes the opportunity to talk, is he very self-
centred, is he avoiding telling you what the real
concern is by talking about minor issues? The
THEASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 25
reason will influence the action you take. If you
feel the patient wants to tell you something but is
finding it difficult, try reflecting or summarise
what you think has been said. Ask if there is any-
thing else the patient would like to discuss.
Encourage patients by telling them that you want
to be able to help as much as you can; the more
they tell you about their concerns the more you
can help them.
On the other hand, if you feel you need to
control a talkative patient you may find the fol-
lowing techniques helpful:
use eye contact and your body language to
inform the patient that you are bringing a
particular section of the interview to a close
politely interrupt the patient, summarise
what he has said and say what is to happen
next
ask questions that bring the patient back to
the topic under discussion.
The converse of talkative patients are those
who are reluctant to disclose information about
themselves. This may be because they do not see
the purpose of the questions you are asking, they
are shy, they cannot articulate their concerns,
they are fearful of what the outcomes may be or
they are too embarrassed to disclose certain
information. Your response will depend on the
cause of the reticence.
Explaining why you need to know certain
information will be helpful if the patient is hesi-
tant. For example, a patient may wonder why
you need to know what medication he is taking
when all he wants is to have a corn treated. If you
feel the patient cannot articulate what he wants
to say, you may find that closed questions can
help. This type of questioning limits responses
but can be helpful for a patient who has difficulty
putting concerns and problems into words. You
need to use a range of closed questions and avoid
leading questions if you are to ensure you reach
an accurate diagnosis.
The shy or embarrassed person may find self-
disclosure very difficult. It has been shown that
people tend to disclose more about themselves as
they get older. In general, females disclose more
than males. When privacy is ensured and the
26 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
interviewer shows empathy, friendliness and
acceptance, patients have been shown to disclose
more information. Reciprocal disclosure can also
be helpful.
Feedback. In order to develop your interview
technique it is important that you obtain feed-
back on your performance. Mention has already
been made of self- and peer assessment of the
interview. This is a valuable process, which
should be ongoing. Patient feedback is another
valuable mechanism. Questionnaires (postal or
self-administered) and structured or unstruc-
tured interviews are ways in which patient reac-
tions to the interview can be obtained.
Suggestions as to how to improve interviews
should be welcomed.
REFERENCES
Argyle M 1972 The psychology of interpersonal behaviour.
Penguin, Harmondsworth
Authier J 1986 Showing warmth and empathy. In: Hargie
(ed) A handbook of communication skills. Routledge,
London
Baron R A, Byrne D 2000 Social psychology, 9th edn. Allyn &
Bacon, Boston
Birdwhistell R L 1970 Kinesics and context. University of
Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia
Byrne P, Long E 1976 Doctors talking to patients: A study of
verbal behaviour of general practitioners consulting in
their surgeries. HMSO, London
Calkins D, Davis R, Reiley P et al1997 Patient-physician
communication at hospital discharge and patients'
understanding of the postdischarge treatment plan.
Archives of Internal Medicine 157: 1026
Christenfeld N 1995 Does it hurt to say Urn. Journal of
Nonverbal Behavior 19: 171
Data Protection Act 1998 EC Data Protection Directive
(95/46 EC)
Davidhizar R 1992 Interpersonal communication: a review
of eye contact. Infection Control and Hospital
Epidemiology 13: 222
Davidhizar R, Newman J 1997 When touch is not the best
approach. Journal of Clinical Nursing 6: 203
Davis C 1994 Patient practitioner interaction: An experiential
manual for developing the art of healthcare, 2nd edn.
Slack Inc, New Jersey
Dickson D, Hargie 0, Morrow N 1997 Communication skills
training for health professionals, 2nd edn. Chapman &
Hall, London
Ekman P, Fresen W V 1975 Unmasking the face. Prentice-
Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
Ganong L H, Bzdek V, Manderino M A 1987 Stereotyping by
nurses and nursing students: a critical review of research.
Research in Nursing and Health 10: 49
SUMMARY
The interview is the process of initiating an
assessment of the lower limb. The relationship
created between the practitioner and the patient
during the interview will hopefully lead to an
effective diagnosis. A good interview can
provide the majority of the information required
without having to resort to numerous tests and
unnecessary examination. There is no one
formula that can be applied to all assessment
interviews. Each patient should be treated as an
individual with specific needs. Practitioners
should develop their interviewing skills in order
that the interview achieves a successful outcome
for the patient and the practitioner.
General Medical Council 1991 Professional conduct and
discipline: Fitness to practice. GMC, London
Grahe J, Bernieri F 1999 The importance of nonverbal cues in
judging rapport. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 23: 253
Hall E T 1969 The hidden dimension. Doubleday, New York
Hall J A 1984 Nonverbal sex differences: communication
accuracy and expressive style. Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore
Hargie 1997 The handbook of communication skills, 2nd
edn.Routledge,London
Hargie 0, Saunders C, Dickson D 1994 Social skills in
interpersonal communication, 3rd edn. Routledge,
London
Hargie 0, Dickson D, Boohan M, Hughes K 1998 A survey
of communication skills training in UK schools of
medicine: present practices and prospective proposals.
Medical Education 32: 25
Harrigan J, Taing K 1997 Fooled by a smile: detecting
anxiety in others. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 21: 203
Hensley W, Cooper R 1987 Height and occupational success:
a review and critique. Psychological Reports 60: 843
McCann K, McKenna H P 1993 An examination of touch
between nurses and elderly patients in a continuing care
setting in Northern Ireland. Journal of Advanced Nursing
18:38
McDaniel E, Andersen P 1998 International patterns of
interpersonal tactile communication. Journal of
Nonverbal Behavior 22: 59
Melamed J, Bozionelos N 1992 Managerial promotion and
height. Psychological Reports 71: 587
Montepare J 1995 The impact of variations in height in
young children's impressions of men and women. Journal
of Nonverbal Behavior 19: 31
National Health Service Circular No 1990 (Gen) 22, 7 June
1990 A code of practice on the confidentiality of personal
health information. London
----------------------------
Pietroni P 1976 Non-verbal communication in the GP
surgery. In Tanner B (ed) Language and communication
in general practice. Hodder & Stoughton, London
Price B 1987 First impressions: paradigms for patient
assessment. Journal of Advanced Nursing 12: 699
Riseborough M 1981 Physiographic gestures as decoding
facilitators: three experiments exploring a neglected
facet of communication. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
5: 172
Ryden M B, McCarthy P R, Lewis M L, Sherman C 1991 A
behavioural comparison of the helping styles of nursing
students, psychotherapists, crisis interveners, and
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 27
untrained individuals. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing
5: 185
Sandler G 1979 Costs of unnecessary tests. British Medical
Journal 1: 1686-1688
Sleight P 1995 Teaching communication skills: part of
medical education. Journal of Human Hypertension 9: 67
Worchel S 1986 The influence of contextual variables on
interpersonal spacing. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
10:230
Zahn G L 1991 Face-to-face communication in an office
setting: the effects of position, proximity and exposure.
Communication Research 18: 737
CHAPTERCONTENTS
Introduction 29
The problem 30
Encouragingthe patient to tell you about concerns
and problems 30
Patients with special needs 31
Why did the patient seek your help? 31
Assessmentof the problem 31
History of the problem 31
Dimensionsof pain 33
Techniques for assessing pain 34
Summary 36
The presenting problem
1. Merriman
INTRODUCTION
Most patients consult a practitioner because
they have concerns about or problems with their
lower limbs. Problems are usually quite specific
and focused. Patients may have problems with
painful feet, an ingrowing toe nail or difficulty
accommodating a bunion in footwear. Concerns
are where the patient is worried or anxious
about something. Patients may have concerns
related to a problem, e.g. they are worried about
an ulcer that is taking a long time to heal.
Conversely, a patient may have concerns but no
specific problems, e.g. a patient may be con-
cerned that an asymptomatic mole on their leg
may be a malignant melanoma.
The role of the practitioner is to discover what
are the patient's concernis) and problemts) in
order that an effective management plan can be
drawn up and implemented. This may involve
anything from giving reassurance, e.g. that the
mole is not a melanoma, to implementing a
treatment plan aimed at resolving or reducing
the effects of a specific problem, e.g. pain in the
foot.
During the assessment interview the patient
should be given ample opportunity to express
their concerns and talk about any problems they
may have. The remainder of this chapter con-
centrates on acquiring information about the
patient's presenting problemts). However, the
practitioner should always remember it is also
important to identify any concerns the patient
may have.
29
30 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
THE PROBLEM
What one person perceives as a problem another
may accept as being normal. A major concern for
one person may be a minor issue to another.
Defining what is normal and acceptable, and
what is abnormal or unacceptable and therefore a
problem, is fraught with difficulties.
When patients attend for their appointments
they bring with them their own ideas of what is a
problem and what is normal. A variety of factors
can influence a patient's perception (Table 3.1).
example, if media coverage emphasised a
link between verrucae and cancer of the cervix
this might result in a number of females
had previously ignored their verrucae seekmg
treatment. Having a friend who has developed a
malignant melanoma may make a person
more vigilant for signs associated with this con-
dition and prompt her to seek advice when pre-
viously she may have been oblivious to the
situation. People from socioeconomic groups 1
and 2 are more likely to seek medical assistance
than those from socioeconomic groups 4 and 5
(Townsend & Davidson 1982).
It is important that the practitioner allows the
patient to describe the problem in her own
words. The practitioner's perception of the
problem is not always the same as that of the
patient. For example a mother may be
that her 3-year-old child has flat feet. The practi-
tioner considers this to be normal for a child of
that age. However, during the consultation, the
Table 3.1 Factors that influence a patient's perceptions of
what is normal and what is a problem
Age
Gender
Culture
Socioeconomic base
Knowledge base
Previous experiences
Views of family and friends
Media
Socioeconomic background
Life expectations
practitioner notices a small verruca on the apex
of the right second toe and suggests that it is
treated. The mother accepts the treatment but
leaves the clinic still concerned about her child's
flat feet. The practitioner has failed to identify the
mother's main concern. An effective solution
would have consisted of advice and reassurance
regarding the flat feet as well as treatment of the
verucca.
Encouraging the patient to tell you
about concerns and problems
How can you encourage patients to tell you why
they have sought your help? A whole range of
factors can make it difficult for the patient to
articulate the problem in words. Some patients
may be frightened or embarrassed, others may
be concerned that they are wasting your time and
others that you will think they are silly to be con-
cerned about a minor problem. It is essential that
patients are made to feel that they are. not
wasting your time and that you are genumely
interested in their concerns and problems.
Most patients present with discomfort or pain.
For example, a patient may present with discom-
fort from a bunion rubbing on footwear. The
patient may also be concerned about the appea.r-
ance of the bunion and scared that she will
develop a deformity similar to her grandmother's.
A skilled practitioner will identify all the anxieties
the patient is experiencing: the problems with the
current discomfort, the difficulty in finding
appropriate shoes to wear, the worry about the
unsightly appearance of the bunion and the fear
that it may get worse.
It is important that you consider how best to
start the conversation. Asking the patient 'What
are you complaining on', 'What's the problem?'
or 'What is it that's wrong with you?' are proba-
bly not the best ways to start. The last question
may result in the patient responding 'That's what
I've come here for you to find out'. 'How can I
help you?' or 'Would you like to tell me about
what concerns you?' may be preferable. Open
questions should be used. The patient should
feel rushed; avoid interrupting and puttmg
words into the patient's mouth. Record in the
patient's own words what she is concerned about
and what she sees as a problem. Avoid medical
jargon wherever possible.
Having obtained an idea of the patient's con-
cerns, it may help to find out if she has any
thoughts as to the cause. Ask the reason for such
conclusions. The answers to these questions may
reveal whether patient and practitioner share the
same view.
When patients do reveal what is worrying
them, avoid being judgemental and making
comments such as 'Oh, that's nothing!' or 'I
don't know why you are so worried!'. Remem-
ber it is a problem to the patient even if it is rel-
atively innocuous to you. Patients may not
reveal their real reason for coming to see you
until they are just about to leave. This can be a
source of annoyance to the busy practitioner. Do
try and give the patient time even if it is at the
end of the consultation.
Patients with special needs
Some patients may experience other difficulties
in telling you about their concerns and problems
than simply having poor powers of description.
The patient may be deaf and dumb, have suf-
fered a stroke, have a speech impediment or have
learning or language difficulties. It is important
you give these patients extra time. Avoid
jumping to too many assumptions. If the patient
can write, ask her to write down the nature of the
complaint. Friends or relatives may be able to
provide valuable details and information or act
as interpreters.
Why did the patient seek your help?
A variety of factors can influence why a patient
has chosen to visit your practice. Table 3.2 gives
the usual reasons for a patient choosing a partic-
ular practitioner. It is important to find out what
made the patient choose you. For example, a
patient who has been referred by a friend or rela-
tive may find it very easy to disclose her concerns
to you. The friend/relative may have been very
complimentary about your abilities. On the other
hand, a patient who is seeking a second opinion
THE PRESENTING PROBLEM 31
Table 3.2 Reasons for a patient choosing a practitioner
Applied for treatment at their local health service
Found your name in the yellow pages
Saw an advertisement
Noticed your plate outside the practice
Were advised by a friend or relative to seek your help
Were referred by another health practitioner, e.g. GP
Are seeking a second opinion because they were
unhappy with the response of the first practitioner
may want you to give a different diagnosis from
the one given by the previous practitioner. As a
result she may not disclose all the salient features
of the problem. It is important to remember that
outstanding legal claims for lower limb injuries
may affect the patient's perspective.
ASSESSMENT OF THE PROBLEM
Assessment of the problem involves acquiring
information about the history of the problem.
The history must be taken logically and system-
atically. An assessment of the current level of pain
and discomfort should also be undertaken.
History of the problem
History taking involves finding answers to a
range of questions (Table 3.3). Many diseases can
be identified by the pattern of symptoms they
display. Research has shown that history taking
Table 3.3 The history of the problem: questions to ask the
patient
Where is the problem?
How did it start?
How long have you had the problem?
Where is the problem?
When does it trouble you?
What makes it worse?
What makes it better?
What treatments have you tried?
Are you treating it at the moment?
32 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
can be more effective in diagnosing a problem
than clinical tests alone (Sandler 1979).
Where is the problem? Locating the problem is
very important. Getting the patient to show you
by pointing is the best way. If the patient has
difficulty reaching the area, you may find it
helpful to present an outline of the lower limb
and ask her to mark the area affected. For
example, pain may start in one area but then
radiate to other areas. Some problems may have
a precise location; others may be far more diffuse
or have multiple sites. These variations may
yield helpful clues to diagnosis. Isolating a
localised area in the case of pain can be very
helpful in differentiating enthesopathy from the
more general discomfort associated with conges-
tion of the heel pad. During the physical exami-
nation you may touch the area and attempt to
elicit the symptoms in order to make sure you
have isolated the area. Do not forget to tell the
patient that this is what you are going to do.
Palpation should use no more pressure than nec-
essary to elicit symptoms and isolate the particu-
lar anatomy affected. It is essential that you
record, either on a diagram or in words, the loca-
tion of the problem and give an indication in the
records as to whether it is well localised or
diffuse. For example, a patient with plantar digital
neuritis (Morton's neuroma) may complain of
acute pain at one particular site, but may also
describe a paraesthesia which radiates towards
the apex of the toes. Diagrams may be preferable
to written descriptions. Another practitioner
treating the patient on a different occasion can
see exactly where the problem lies. It is essential
that dimensions of skin lesions are recorded. This
approach allows progress to be monitored for
improvement or deterioration.
How did it start? It is important to identify how
the problem started. The problem may have had a
sudden or an insidious onset. For example,
rheumatoid arthritis may have an acute sudden
onset accompanied by raised temperature and
severe joint pains, or more commonly a slow
insidious onset with general aches and pains,
which gradually get worse and more regular.
Besides trying to locate the start of the condition,
it is also important to record the symptoms the
patient initially experienced. For example, was
there anything visible at the start, such as a rash,
swelling or erythema? Were there any symptoms,
e.g. the throbbing associated with acute
inflammation? Initial symptoms may be different
from the patient's current symptoms, especially
if the condition had an acute onset but is now
chronic.
How long have you had the problem? It may be
necessary to jog the patient's memory, especially
if the problem started some time ago. Using
family occasions such as weddings or births,
national events or the season of the year may
help the patient to pinpoint which time of the
year it started.
When does it trouble you? Some conditions
may give rise to constant symptoms. Others may
occur especially at night or during the day. For
example, one of the distinguishing features of
gout is nocturnal pain. Chronic ischaemia is asso-
ciated with pain in the calf muscle (intermittent
claudication) after a period of walking and the
maximum distance the patient can walk prior to
experiencing pain gives an indication of the
severity of the problem.
What makes it worse and what makes it better?
Some conditions may improve on rest, others can
deteriorate. Patients may discover all sorts of
ways to alleviate their symptoms, e.g. wearing
particular shoes, adopting a different walking
pattern. Such information can provide valuable
clues. In instances where patients alter their gait
because of a problem affecting one part of their
foot or leg they may develop secondary problems
elsewhere. It is essential that the practitioner
identifies the original problem, as treatment for
the secondary problem will not be successful
until the initial problem is identified.
What treatments have you tried? Are you treat
ing it at the moment? It is important to find out if
the patient has or is presently using any medica-
tions. Sometimes treatments can mask or alter
the clinical features of a problem and make diag-
nosis difficult. For example, using 1% hydrocor-
tisone cream on a fungal infection of the skin
may mask the inflammatory response and blur
the distinctive border between infected and non-
infected areas.
It is important that you record the information
the patient gives you in response to all these
questions. All critical events should be dated.
Dimensions of pain
Pain is a subjective, multidimensional phenom-
enon that can be affected by social and psycho-
logical factors. In the same way as individuals
differ over what they perceive as a problem, indi-
viduals also differ when it comes to the assess-
ment of their pain. Pain caused by apparently
similar conditions affects individuals in very dif-
ferent ways. Practitioners should avoid making
assumptions about the severity of pain an indi-
vidual is experiencing. Patients vary in their abil-
ities to cope with pain. Some are more than
willing to complain about mild discomfort,
whereas others make no complaint despite being
in considerable pain.
Tolerance and coping are subjective concepts
that are difficult to quantify. A patient's state of
mind and personal circumstances may make
their pain worse or demand that they ignore it.
For example, it is well known that runners may
continue to run in a race despite having sustained
an injury.
The assessment of pain requires information
about its character, distribution, severity, dura-
tion, frequency and periodicity. This information,
coupled with the history of the problem and
details of the patient's concerns, helps the practi-
tioner to arrive at the correct diagnosis and draw
up an effective treatment plan.
Character
THE PRESENTING PROBLEM 33
pain but as it becomes chronic and the disease
process spreads it can affect a wider area.
Radiating pain can result from the extent of the
disease or from pain being referred from one site
to another; for example, a trapped spinal nerve
can lead to pains in the leg. Usually, referred pain
does not get worse when direct pressure is
applied to the site affected. However, if the pain
has a localised cause it usually worsens when
direct pressure is applied.
Severity
Certain conditions give rise to severe pain, e.g.
myocardial infarction. However, a patient's ability
to tolerate and cope with pain differs so much
that a description of the severity of the pain must
be assessed alongside the other features.
Duration
Pain may be fleeting or may be persistent.
Ascertaining the duration of the pain can provide
valuable information. For example, pain due to
intermittent claudication may last a few minutes
to half an hour. The pain associated with a deep
vein thrombosis is persistent. These differences
can be helpful in differential diagnosis.
Frequency and periodicity
Some conditions lead to pain occurring in a
regular pattern; others result in a less pre-
dictable pain pattern. It may be that the pain
recurs infrequently or regularly.
Pain can be superficial or deep. Pain arising in
the skin often gives rise to a pricking sensation if
brief or burning if protracted. Deep pain is more
nebulous and is often associated with a dull ache.
Patients may use a variety of adjectives to
describe their pain (Table 3.4).
Distribution
Pain may be localised, diffuse or radiating.
Initially, a problem may give rise to localised
Table 3.4
Vice-like
Tooth ache
Throbbing
Sharp
Stabbing
Shooting
Bursting
Descriptors used to describe pain
Deep
On touching
On weightbearing
Intermittent
34 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
9 8 7 6 5 4
1
1 2 3 11
A.c. 1
1(
.. '...
:>".
,
.,
L
r
)
A B
Figure 7.12 Diagram illustrating the somatotopic organisation of (A) the motor and (B) the sensory cortex. The left half of
the body is represented by the right hemisphere of the brain and the right half of the body by the left hemisphere (reproduced
from Ross &Wilson 1990, with permission).
central areas of the thalamus, before projecting to
the limbic system and the hypothalamus. These
pathways do not cross and can be activated by
more than one stimulus. The other multisynaptic
pathway is the palaeospinothalamic tract, which
follows the same course as the neospinothalamic
tract until it reaches the brain stem, where it
diverges, to make further synaptic connections
with the RAS and central thalamus before travel-
ling on to the limbic system. The information is
interpreted in a less precise manner but with
emotional overtones, such as the sensation of a
deep, burning abdominal pain.
The division into tracts of differing modalities
is not hard and fast, however, since the nervous
system demonstrates the phenomenon of redun-
dancy, which means that if one tract is damaged
another is usually able to take over the function,
albeit in a slightly altered form. For example,
impulses conveying information about touch
travel in both the dorsal column and the ventro-
spinothalamic tract though the nature of the
information differs, as the dorsal column deals
with detailed localisation of the touch sensation
and the spinothalamic tract with gross tactile
sensations.
Some of the pathways, the neospinothalamic
pain pathways in particular, carry information
about a single type of stimulus. These are
described as specific pathways, since they are
interpreted as well-localised, precise sensations
by the somatosensory cortex - e.g. the sharp sen-
sation of a pinprick.
The majority of these ascending tracts cross
over to the opposite side at some stage, either in
the spinal cord or in the brain stem, synapsing
with contralateral areas of the thalamus before
continuing to the conscious cortex. This
arrangement explains why a stroke/ cerebrovas-
cular accident (eVA) affecting a particular part
of the sensory cortex produces numbness or
paraesthesia in a specific part of the body on the
opposite or contralateral side. Neurological
damage to the spinal cord may produce numb-
ness on either the contralateral side, if the site of
damage is before the tracts cross, or the ipsilat-
eral (same) side, if the site of damage occurs
after the tracts have crossed.
Motor pathways
Just as all conscious stimuli are interpreted in
the cortex, so all conscious actions originate
there. The whole area is known as the sensori-
motor cortex; one part is called the primary
motor cortex and initiates conscious action
(Fig. 7.12). It too shows somatotopic organisa-
tion, so that damage to this region produces
precise effects on particular actions on the con-
tralateral side of the body. Close to this area is
the premotor cortex, which is involved in the
planning of actions. Since the actions produced
by these neurones are the conscious movements
of the body, the muscles involved will be skele-
tal and the neurones will be part of the somatic
motor system.
Neurones in the brain which are responsible for
initiating the commands are called upper motor
neurones (UMNs). They do not send impulses
directly to the muscles but exert their influence
via neurones in the ventral (anterior) horn of the
spinal cord called lower motor neurones (LMNs).
The latter send impulses to the skeletal muscles
via their axons, which form the peripheral effer-
ent pathways within spinal nerves.
The descending pathways from brain to spinal
cord can be divided into two main tracts: the
corticospinal tract and the multineuronal (brain
stem) tract (see Fig. 7.11).
The corticospinal tract. This is a rapid pathway
and is mainly responsible for the skilled move-
ments of small, distal limb muscles such as those
used in scalpel work. Most of the fibres cross over
in the brain stem and descend in the white matter
of the spinal cord as the lateral corticospinal tract.
The uncrossed fibres descend as the ventral (ante-
rior) corticospinal tract. At the appropriate level in
the spinal cord they enter the ventral horn of the
grey matter to synapse with a lower motor
neurone. Because the corticospinal tract forms a
rough pyramid shape as it passes through the
brain stem, it is also called the pyramidal tract.
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 129
The multi neuronal tract. This tract runs to
lower motor neurones by a slower, more diffuse
route, since it makes many more synaptic con-
nections on the way, particularly in the
descending reticular system and the nuclei of
the brain stem. Although influenced by UMNs
the tracts are only recognisable as separate
pathways as they emerge from the brain stem to
travel through the spinal cord as the vestibu-
lospinal, tectospinal and reticulospinal tracts.
The tracts enter the ventral horn of the grey
matter to influence the appropriate lower motor
neurone.
These tracts do not form part of the pyramids
in the medulla and so are also called the extra-
(outside) pyramidal pathways. They mainly
influence the large, proximal limb muscles and
the axial muscles of posture, and have a predom-
inately inhibitory effect on the ventral horn cells.
They are responsible for the antigravity reflexes,
which keep our knees extended and head erect in
order to maintain upright posture.
The division of the descending tracts is not
clear cut, as they also demonstrate redundancy,
there being much overlap and interaction between
the two. Other areas of the brain also have strong
modifying influences, such as the cerebellum and
clusters of neurones in the fore- and midbrain
known collectively as the basal ganglia.
The last stage in the production of a conscious
action is the excitation of an LMN in the ventral
(anterior) horn of the spinal cord and the
passage of an impulse along its axon in the
spinal nerve to the skeletal muscle. The LMN
will be subject to influences from many neu-
rones, not only from descending tracts but also
from spinal neurones. As many as 10000-15000
synapses, both excitatory and inhibitory, can
occur on one lower motor neurone. If the sum of
these influences is excitatory, the LMN will be
stimulated to discharge an impulse along its
axon and the skeletal muscle will contract. This
peripheral pathway from LMN to skeletal
muscle is called the final common pathway and
the entire pathway, including the neuromuscular
junction and the 10-600 skeletal muscle fibres
innervated by that nerve is called a motor unit
(Fig. 7.13).
130 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
skeletal muscle
a motor unit
lower motor neurone
Figure 7.13 The final common pathway of a motor unit.
Cerebellum
The actions of the cerebellum are unconscious
and are very important in postural reflexes. The
cerebellum has no direct descending pathways to
the spinal cord; instead it has a rich afferent input
and sends modifying influences to the sensori-
motor cortex, the reticular formation and the
brain-stem nuclei. Thus, symptoms of cerebellar
defects may be due to lesions in the ascending
spinocerebellar tracts, in the cerebellum itself or in
efferent pathways going to other parts of the
brain.
The cerebellum receives all information about
position sense. The vestibular apparatus of the
ear projects via the vestibular nuclei of the brain
stem to the flocculonodular lobe. The spinocere-
bellar tracts carry proprioceptive information
from muscles, tendons, joints and cutaneous
pressure receptors which project to the vermis
and anterior lobes. The cerebral cortex gives
information about the actions decided upon and
projects to the posterior lobes via pontine nuclei.
The cerebellum integrates the information
received from all these areas and compares it
with the information on intended actions
received from the cerebral cortex. It then sends
modifying influences back to the motor cortex
and brain stem, so that descending instructions
to the LMNs can be altered where necessary.
Basal ganglia
At present the precise functions of the basal
ganglia in movement are unknown, but they are
thought to enable abstract thought (ideas) to be
converted into voluntary action (Ganong 1991a).
Like the cerebellum they function at an uncon-
scious level and have no direct pathway to LMNs
but influence the sensorimotor cortex and the
descending reticular formation. Because the
main action of the basal ganglia is on the
descending extrapyramidal tracts, they have
become known as the extrapyramidal system
and conditions affecting them are referred to as
extrapyramidal syndromes, e.g. parkinsonism.
REFLEXES
Reflex actions are automatic responses to partic-
ular stimuli and form the basis of much of our
behaviour, from the simple knee jerk to driving a
car. They are also very important in posture,
balance and gait. Reflexes can be inborn (inher-
ited, innate, instinctive) or acquired (learned).
Examples of the former are eye blink, pupil dila-
tion/ constriction, change in heart rate, knee jerk
(stretch) reflex, pain withdrawal and sweat secre-
tion. Examples of the latter are swimming,
walking, driving, debriding callus. They can
involve any subdivisions of the nervous system
and any type of effector organ. We may be aware
of them or they may never reach consciousness.
It is here that the close association between the
nervous and endocrine systems is best illus-
trated, since both can contribute to the same
reflex arc. For example, when the retina of the eye
detects a threatening situation, this information
will be carried by the optic nerve to the brain and
one of the responses will be the release of the
hormone adrenaline (epinephrine) from the
adrenal medulla, to prepare the body for action.
In all cases, the pathway allows the body to
respond rapidly to a given stimulus. Generally,
inborn reflexes produce stereotypic responses
which are usually protective reflexes or those
needed for posture and balance. Acquired reflexes
are more complex, involving the conscious cortex
and many different effectors, so that the response
is more easily modified. Try standing upright
and leaning backwards as far as you can. What
happens to your arms and knees? Can you
prevent their movement? Compare this with the
ease with which you can change from a walking
to a running gait.
Reflex arcs
The pathway between detector and effector is
called a reflex arc and always involves the CNS,
though not necessarily the brain (Table 7.6).
There are three reflexes that are of particular
importance to the functioning of the lower limb:
pain withdrawal reflex
crossed extensor reflex
stretch reflex.
Pain withdrawal reflex. Injured cells produce
local chemical mediators, including prosta-
glandins, that sensitise the nociceptors to other
mediators. Graded impulses, proportional to
the damage done, are generated and trigger
action potentials in the afferent pathways. The
action potential travels to the CNS (in this case
the spinal cord) via the afferent neurone and
synapses within the grey matter of the dorsal
horn, in either Rexed's laminae II and III (the
substantia gelatinosa) or in laminae V. It is here
that the pain gating mechanism is thought to
take place. This mechanism was first described
internuncial
neurones
synapse
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 131
Table 7.6 Essential elements of a reflex arc
1. A detector to detect the change (stimulus) in either the
internal or external environment
2. Afferent neurones that send the information into the CNS
along the afferent pathways
3. An integrating centre to match the appropriate response
to the stimulus. This will be in the brain or spinal cord.
Different parts of the CNS communicate with one another
via ascending and descending pathways
4. Efferent neurones that carry instructions from the CNS
via efferent pathways to the effectors (skeletal, smooth or
cardiac muscle or gland)
5. An effector to carry out the necessary response
by Melzack & Wall in the 1960s to explain pain
inhibition by such techniques as rubbing the
painful area, although the precise nature of the
gating mechanism is still not completely
known. From here the impulse is transmitted to
an LMN in the ventral horn of the spinal cord.
Excitation of this neurone results in an action
potential reaching the motor end-plate. The
neurotransmitter acetylcholine is released and
its combination with receptors in the muscle
membrane results in a graded potential that will
be transmitted to the interior of the muscle as an
action potential and cause contraction of skele-
tal muscle fibres (Fig. 7.14). The number of
fibres contracting depends on the number of
muscle fibres innervated by that neurone, i.e.
the size of the motor unit. Thus the limb suffer-
afferent neurone
----
skin
(receptor)
skeletal
muscle
(effector)
efferent neurone
Figure 7.14 The reflex arc (reproduced from McClintic 1980, with permission).
132 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
ing damage is removed from the deleterious
cause. The presence of more than one synapse in
the reflex arc means that the arc is described as
polysynaptic. In addition to this reflex arc, the
first-order neurones will synapse in the dorsal
horn with neurones which transmit impulses up
to neurones in the brain, via the ascending
anterolateral tracts. However, the cortex is not
needed for the withdrawal reflex to occur.
Crossed extensor reflex. This is often superim-
posed on the pain withdrawal reflex and is a pos-
tural reflex, enabling an injured lower limb to be
withdrawn while the remaining limb bears
weight. In order for this to occur, many LMNs
must be excited and their antagonists inhibited
(Fig. 7.15). This ensures that the flexors of the
injured limb contract while the extensors relax,
whereas in the contralateral limb the flexors are
excitation
of flexor
__contralateral limb
inhibited and the extensors contract to provide a
rigid support. This reflex occurs not only when a
lower limb is injured but at each step in walking,
when one limb is in the swing phase and the
other is weightbearing.
Stretch reflex. This is a very important reflex
for all motor activity, especially when new
actions are being learnt. It can be demonstrated
by the patellar and Achilles tendon reflexes and
exists to supply the cerebellum with information
about the state of contraction in muscle.
The receptors are stretch receptors in spe-
cialised muscle fibres called intrafusal fibres.
These receptors lie within swellings of the intra-
fusal fibres called muscle spindles. Whenever the
ordinary muscle fibres (extrafusal fibres) are
stretched, as when the patellar tendon is hit by
the hammer, the receptors will generate graded
painful
stimulus
from foot
excitation
of extensor
Figure 7.15 The crossed extensor reflex (reproduced from McClintic 1980, w ~ permission).
potentials. These will in turn trigger action
potentials which will travel rapidly into the
spinal cord, to synapse directly with the alpha
LMNs. Efferent impulses will travel out to the
extrafusal fibres, causing contraction of the
muscle. The stretch receptors are of two types,
one conveying information about the degree of
stretch (static) and the other about the rate of
change of stretch (dynamic). This information is
sent along the spinocerebellar pathway to the
cerebellum as part of the rich input that the cere-
bellum needs to be able to compile a precise
'picture' of what is happening in the muscles
(Fig. 7.16). The reflex contraction of the muscle
switches off the muscle spindle and deprives the
cerebellum of information. This does not matter
if the action being carried out by the muscle is a
well-learned one, but if it is still being learned the
cerebellum needs this information and can
switch the spindle back on. This is achieved by a
system of alpha-gamma coactivation, whereby
small gamma LMNs are activated. These go to
the poles of the muscle spindle and, by contract-
ing the poles, the spindle continues to fire.
COORDINATION AND POSTURE
It is now possible to summarise the various parts
of the nervous system which are involved in
posture, balance, gait and coordination of motor
activity (Table 7.7).
Table 7.7 Role of CNS in posture, balance and coordination
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 133
to cerebellum
....
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 7.16 The stretch reflex. Contraction of the extensor
muscle causes stretch in the muscle spindle and increases
the firing rate of action potentials. This information is
conveyed to the spinal cord and results in inhibition of the
extensor muscle's motor neurone and excitation of the flexor
muscle's motor neurone (adapted from Vander et al 1998).
Action
Motor coordination
Posture and balance
Gait
Site
Premotor cortex
Sensorimotor cortex
Basal ganglia
Cerebellum
Brain stem
(extrapyramidal)
(pyramidal)
Cerebellum
All of above
Function
Plans actions
Initiates action
Converts thought into action
Modifies action. Compares actual and intended action, smooths action
Modifies action
Corrects position
Skilled work
Rich input, miniprogrammes
134 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
THE NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT
idiopathic, e.g. Parkinson's disease, motor
neurone disease, non-familial Alzheimer's
disease.
Table 7.8 Classification of neuropathies
Once the organisation and function of the nervous
system is understood, it is often possible to diag-
nose the site of a lesion by careful history taking,
observation and simple tests. The causes of neu-
rological disorders are many and can be
classified as follows:
heredity, e.g. Huntington's chorea, peroneal
muscular atrophy, Friedreich's ataxia,
malignant hyperpyrexia
developmental defect, e.g. spina bifida,
syringomyelia
trauma, e.g. severing of the spinal cord or a
peripheral nerve, concussion
ischaemia, e.g. stroke, cerebral haemorrhage
compression, e.g. tumour of the cerebellum,
Morton's neuroma, common peroneal nerve
palsy
infection, e.g. HIV, [akob-Creutzfeldt disease,
herpes zoster (shingles), Guillain-Barre
syndrome, lepromatous neuropathy
autoimmune, e.g. myasthenia gravis,
polymyositis, possibly multiple sclerosis
nutritional! metabolic, e.g. Korsakoff's
psychosis, sub-acute combined degeneration
of the spinal cord, diabetic neuropathy
iatrogenic, e.g. tight plaster cast causing
nerve palsy, drug-induced myopathies
(lithium, high-dose steroids, etc.)
Type of neuropathy
Mononeuropathy
Mononeuritis multiplex
Radiculopathy
Polyneuropathy
Description
Abnormality of a single nerve
Asymmetrical abnormality of
several individual nerves
Abnormality of a nerve root
Widespread, symmetrical
abnormality of many nerves,
usually characterised as
sensory/motor/autonomic 'glove
and stocking' distribution
The effects of any lesion in the nervous
system will depend on the area involved. For
example, occlusion of the posterior cerebral
artery, which feeds the occipital lobe of the brain
(striate cortex), may result in visual distur-
bances, occlusion of a cerebellar artery may
result in ataxia, and occlusion of the vasa nervo-
sum of a peripheral nerve may result in a 'glove
and stocking' paraesthesia.
Nerve function deficit is called neuropathy
and is classified according to the numbers and
types of nerves involved and the site of the lesion
(Table 7.8).
The assessment process involves a general
overview of neurological function followed by
assessment of:
levels of consciousness
sensory function
motor function (to include muscles)
posture and coordination
autonomic function.
Many neurological conditions present with
multiple signs and symptoms because more than
one part of the nervous system is affected. It is
important to bear this in mind when assessing
each of the above parts in order that information
from all the assessments can be put together to
produce a definitive diagnosis. For example,
multiple (disseminating) sclerosis is a progres-
sive disease affecting the CNS where repeated
patchy demyelination of nerve sheaths occurs,
leading initially to temporary and later to perma-
nent loss of function. The nerve axons most often
affected are the optic nerves - the optic nerve is
considered an outgrowth from the CNS rather
than a peripheral nerve - the cerebellar nerves
and those of the lower spinal cord, leading to
blurring of vision (diplopia), unsteady gait,
weakness in the lower limbs, lower limb sensory
loss and/ or disturbances of micturition. Multiple
sclerosis along with Parkinson's disease is the
second most common disease to affect the CNS,
after strokes (Wilkinson 1993a).
GENERAL OVERVIEW OF
NEUROLOGICAL FUNCTION
History
It is important to undertake a thorough medical
and social history (Ch. 5). In particular the fol-
lowing should be borne in mind.
Presenting problem
Onset and duration may provide vital clues as to
the cause of a problem. For example,
Cuillain-Barre syndrome has a sudden, postviral
onset. The type of pain and its distribution can
help to establish whether the problem affects a
nerve pathway or is referred pain from entrap-
ment of a spinal nerve. The patients should be
asked if their limbs feel weak or sluggish
(paresis): a slow, progressive onset of muscular
weakness suggests muscular dystrophy, whereas
an acute onset suggests a demyelinating disease.
The history of the problem and the type of
onset may facilitate a diagnosis. For example,
pain, numbness, a sensation of heaviness or a
'pins and needles' sensation in the arm could be
due to compression of nerve roots in the spine, as
seen in cervical spondylosis, or to an attack of
angina pectoris. The sensation is likely to be
spasmodic and associated with exercise or some
other stress in the latter case, and of a more con-
tinuous nature in the former.
A history of frequent falls with no loss of con-
sciousness suggests a lesion in one of the areas of
the brain dealing with balance and posture, such
as the cerebellum or basal ganglia. Such episodes
can be seen in patients with Parkinson's disease or
in multiple sclerosis. Where loss of consciousness
has occurred, the period of unconsciousness and
the age of the patient should be taken into account
when making a diagnosis. The presence of a
severe headache is an important sign, since
although it often has a completely benign cause, it
may also indicate one of several underlying more
serious causes, e.g. brain tumour or subarachnoid
haemorrhage or the less sinister migraine or
tension headache. Again, the onset, nature and
duration of the headache should be established.
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 135
Social habits
Smoking and alcohol consumption should be
noted. Smoking is a risk factor for certain condi-
tions such as atherosclerosis and therefore CVAs.
Chronic alcoholism can affect both motor coordi-
nation and memory (Korsakoff's psychosis). The
actual cause is an alcohol-induced thiamine
deficiency which damages the limbic system
(Wilkinson 1993b). Such patients appear alert
and fully conscious, but recent memory of time
and place is severely impaired. The patient
denies any loss of memory and frequently
attempts to disguise the deficit by confabulation.
Similarly, indications of a lifestyle that increases
the risk of contracting the HIV virus, such as
intravenous drug abuse, may explain a neurolog-
ical deficit, since the infection can produce a pro-
gressive encephalopathy.
Gender
Some conditions occur much more frequently in
one sex than the other. For example, myasthenia
gravis affects females more than males whereas
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy, which is an
X chromosomal-linked disease, is seen much
more in males.
Age
There is a general slowing in the passage of
impulses throughout the nervous system with
age, as shown by nerve conduction tests.
Defective sensory perception is present in
around 20% of people over the age of 65 years
(Ch. 18). The likelihood of neurological abnor-
malities increases with advancing years. In addi-
tion, many conditions affecting the nervous
system have typical onsets at particular ages. For
example, shingles (herpes zoster), parkinsonism
and CVAs are all associated with the over-60 age
group, whereas Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
usually manifests itself in people in their twen-
ties and some forms of spina bifida have observ-
able effects from birth. However, where two or
more systemic conditions coexist the picture
may be altered - for example, patients with dia-
136 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
betes mellitus or sickle cell anaemia are predis-
posed to earlier onset of CVAs. Coexisting
chronic disease can also be helpful in diagnosing
the cause - for example, atherosclerosis and
hypertension are major risk factors for strokes
(McLeod & Lance 1989a).
Observation
answer questions and follow instructions can all
give indications of the level of consciousness.
History
Any history of loss of consciousness should
always be questioned further, to try to establish
whether the cause was:
Table 7.9 Classification of tremors and their likely causes
a simple faint
transient ischaemic attack (TIA) or full-blown
stroke
an epileptic episode
a metabolic disorder such as a hypoglycaemic
coma.
Simple faints (syncope) are always due to a
temporary interruption of blood supply to the
brain, which is rapidly restored by the prostrate
position of the patient. This may be caused by:
benign causes, such as emotional shock,
causing vasovagal syncope
autonomic neuropathy if the fainting episode is
associated with a change to an upright posture
The patient should be observed while walking,
sitting and speaking as well as while performing
particular tasks. A change in the level of con-
sciousness, inability to follow simple instructions
and deficits in voluntary movement or sensation,
including the presence of pain, all provide
important clues. Important points to note are:
The affected areas of the body, their
distribution and whether one or more
modalities are involved.
Whether the effect is uni- or bilateral.
If affecting movement, whether it causes
weakness or complete paralysis.
Whether it involves particular muscles or
particular actions.
Whether it produces any change in muscle
tone and bulk.
If the deficit is affecting sensation, whether
the sensation is altered (paraesthesia) or lost
(anaesthesia).
The presence of a deformity, e.g. a cavoid-
type foot and clawed toes are often seen with
spina bifida occulta.
Presence of tremors. Tremors can have a
physiological cause or be associated with a
neurological deficit. The exact nature of the
tremor should be noted, when it appears/
disappears, area of body involved, etc.
The causes of tremor are summarised in
Table 7.9.
ASSESSMENT OF THE LEVEL OF
CONSCIOUSNESS
The cerebral cortex and the reticular formation of
the brain stem are the two areas of the brain most
concerned with maintaining consciousness. The
general level of the patient's awareness, ability to
Type of tremor
Physiological
Age (senile)
Resting
Intention
Essential
Drug-induced
Condition
Maintenance of posture is
accompanied by a tremor (10Hz).
This may be exacerbated by anxiety,
fatigue, thyrotoxicosis
With age the normal physiological
tremor slows to 6-7 Hz. As a result
the tremor becomes more noticeable
especially when undertaking a slow
motion such as picking up a cup to
drink from
Tremor that is present during rest
(4-5 Hz), seen in parkinsonism
Tremor that increases as the
individual tries to undertake a
coordinated movement, seen with
cerebellar dysfunction
Postural tremor similar to a
physiological tremor but of much
greater amplitude, usually hereditary
Tremor similar to an essential tremor
may occur in 40% of patients treated
with barbiturates
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 137
Hospital tests
Table 7.10 Assessment of the level of consciousness
(McLeod & Lance 1989)
whether the patient can follow instructions
the patient's response to stimuli.
Levels of consciousness can be graded as
shown in Table 7.10.
The following is a brief summary of some of the
hospital tests that may be undertaken if a patient
shows an altered level of consciousness.
Occuloplethysmography. This is a non-inva-
sive test to detect carotid lesions that cause a
reduction in blood flow to the ipsilateral orbit
compared to the opposite eye.
Duplex Doppler ultrasound. This technique
uses sound waves of 4-8 MHz, which are beyond
the range of human hearing. The transmitted
beams are reflected from their interface with
tissues in amounts proportional to the density of
the tissues. The difference between transmitted
and reflected beams is proportional to the
density of the tissues and is used to create an
acoustic image. In this particular technique, two-
dimensional B-mode scanning is used, which
gives greater resolution than the M-mode scan-
ning of conventional Doppler. Duplex Doppler
may reveal stenosis or occlusion of the carotid
arteries, a possible cause of a CVA or a TIA, and
is often used prior to an angiogram.
Patient is fully aware of
environment and self and responds
to stimuli
Patient shows lack of attentiveness,
cannot concentrate and has
impaired memory
Patient is anxious, excited, agitated
and may be hallucinating
Patient is drowsy but responds to
verbal stimuli
Patient is unconscious but
responds to pain
Patient cannot be roused
Observable effects
Delirium
Coma
Confusion
Alert wakefulness
Stupor
Lethargy
Level
TIAs may be accompanied by disorders of
speech (dysphasia), vision, movement (dyskine-
sia) or swallowing (dysphagia), depending on
the area of brain involved. However, a full recov-
ery is usual. CVAs can result in neurological
deficits similar to those seen in TIAs, but are
often permanent, though partial or total recovery
is possible depending on the extent and site of
damage to the brain.
Epileptic attacks can involve the whole brain
(global) and result in a brief loss of consciousness
(petit mal) which may not show any other symp-
toms or may last much longer, being accompa-
nied by tonic-clonic jerks (grand mal). Such an
attack is often preceded by an 'aura' and the
patient may cry out. Attacks can also be focal, as
in a Jacksonian attack, which affects only the
primary motor cortex and in which different
parts of the body show jerks as the attack spreads
over the motor cortex.
Observation
Clinical tests
In the clinic the following can be used to establish
the level of consciousness:
the patient's response to a question and answer
schedule
serious causes such as haemorrhage or
anaphylactic shock.
Strokes are the result of prolonged/permanent
interruption of the blood supply to the brain and
are the most common condition to affect the
CNS. TIAs are a temporary interruption in the
vascular supply to the brain and like strokes
usually occur in the older person (60+). Both
strokes and TIAs are primarily caused (80% of
cases) by thrombosis resulting from atheroma-
tous plaques in cerebral vessels, haemorrhage
being the cause of the remainder (McLeod &
Lance 1989a). TIAs usually last from 1 to 30
minutes and always less than 24 hours.
Epileptic attacks can occur at any age and are
due to unusual electrical activity in the cortex,
which could be caused by a lesion or a tumour.
138 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Angiography. Interarterial angiography with
injection of a radio-opaque dye into the sus-
pected artery will show atherosclerotic plaques
in cerebral vessels, which are a common cause of
embolitic strokes.
Brain scans. Computed tomography (CT) or
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can be used to
confirm TIAs, full-blown CVAs, neoplastic mass
or epileptic foci. Both techniques produce digi-
tised images that can be numerically graded
according to the pixel value of the matrix. This can
then be converted to a grey-white scale. CT uses
X-rays to scan the brain. MRI uses radiofrequency
pulses that excite the protons of tissue.
Electroencephalogram (EEG). EEGs, or 'brain
waves', are traces which show the electrical
activity of the cortex, as measured by scalp
electrodes. EEGs are normally used to confirm
a clinical diagnosis and locate the focus of
epilepsy.
Lumbar punctures. A hollow needle is inserted
into the spinal canal through the intervertebral
space between L3 and L4 or L4-5 to withdraw
cerebrospinal fluid. This is analysed for microor-
ganisms, glucose levels, protein levels, blood cell
types and concentration and hydrostatic pres-
sure. It is based on the fact that many central
nervous disorders affect the blood-brain barrier
and allow passage of substances normally held
in check. The blood-brain barrier is affected by
inflammation, infection, haemorrhage and
degenerative diseases such as muscular sclerosis
and epilepsy. It is performed where bacterial or
viral infection in the brain such as encephalitis,
meningitis or the Cuillain-Barre syndrome,
abscess, tumour or haemorrhage is suspected.
Raised pressure measurements can indicate pres-
ence of infection or a tumour. A bloody aspirate
indicates cerebral haemorrhage.
Myelography. This test is usually combined
with MRI or CT investigations. A radio-opaque
dye is introduced into the subarachnoid space
via a lumbar puncture and with the patient on a
tilt table, the fluid is manoeuvred to the sus-
pected area. It is used to diagnose tumours of the
spinal cord, diseases of the intervertebral disc
space, bony abnormalities and spondolytic
lesions of the vertebral column.
Laboratory tests
These involve DNA testing to detect mutant
genes and other biochemical tests to detect
faulty enzymes, and are used for diagnosis of
hereditary metabolic diseases which affect the
CNS such as Huntington's chorea, familial
Alzheimer's disease, Tay-Sach's disease,
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease and inherited
myopathies such as McArdle's syndrome.
ASSESSMENT OF LOWER LIMB
SENSORY FUNCTION
It is important that the sensory system is intact in
order that a person can respond to his external
and internal environment. Failure to respond,
especially to noxious stimuli, can lead to serious
pathological changes and may even be life-
threatening. Some patients may be unaware that
sensory loss has occurred; it is therefore essential
that the practitioner assesses the functioning of
the sensory system.
Assessment involves checking whether sensory
units are functioning normally and, if not, the
extent of damage and the possible cause. Sensory
deficits may arise as a result of damage to:
parietal cortex
ascending pathways
receptors.
Conditions which may cause sensory deficits
are outlined in Table 7.11.
The most important area of the brain for
somatic sensory perception is the parietal cortex
Table 7.11 Causes of sensory deficits
Diabetes mellitus
Subacute combined degeneration of the spinal cord
(vitamin 8
12
deficiency)
Congential absence of particular sensory neurones
Spina bifida
Syringomyelia
Tabes dorsalis
Nerve injuries
Guillain-Barre syndrome
MUltiple sclerosis
Cord compression/lesion, e.g. tumour (Brown-Sequard
syndrome)
Chronic alcoholism
(see Fig. 7.12). Any damage to this area, whatever
the cause, will produce a contralateral sensory
deficit in the appropriate part of the body.
Damage to the occipital lobe (striate cortex) will
produce visual disturbances. The most common
cause of such neurological deficits is an occlusion
or haemorrhage of one of the cerebral arteries.
Damage to the ascending tracts in the spinal
cord will produce either ipsi- or contralateral
effects, depending on the site of the lesion in rela-
tion to the point of crossover of the tracts. This is
well illustrated in the Brown-Sequard syndrome,
where damage to one side of the spinal cord
results in:
ipsilateral loss of touch, position sense, two-
point discrimination and vibration sense
below the level of the lesion, due to dorsal
column injury
contralateral loss of pain and temperature
sensation below the level of the lesion, due to
damage to the anterolateral tracts.
The exact effect of peripheral nerve damage
depends on the site and the nature of the
damage, since this dictates the repair process
(Table 7.12).
History
The nature and distribution of any sensory
deficit can be an important aid in diagnosing the
underlying cause. This may take the form of
Table 7.12 Classification of nerve damage
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 139
complete anaesthesia (total lack of sensation) or
paraesthesia (an altered sensation). Examples of
paraesthesia are pins and needles, burning,
pricking, shooting pain and dull ache. Patients
should be asked if they experience any abnor-
mal sensations.
Phantom limb. An unusual phenomenon that
arises from amputation of a limb is that of
'phantom limb', where the patient has the very
real sensation of the amputated limb still being
present and behaving just like a normal limb.
The most unpleasant effect is the sensation of
pain which is said to occur in 70% of amputees
(Melzack 1992). The traditional explanation, that
this is due to the growth of neuromas in the
nerve stumps which continue to generate
impulses, cannot be the entire explanation since
cutting the afferent pathways from such nerves
does not abolish the pain. Melzack has sug-
gested that the phantom sensations are due to
learned circuits in the brain that are capable of
generating impulses in the absence of sensory
inputs.
Referred pain. Injury to the viscera often pro-
duces pain in a somatic structure some distance
away. This is called referred pain. For example, a
myocardial infarction can produce pain in the left
arm as both the heart and the skin of the left arm
have developed from the same dermatomal
segment. However, the exact mechanism is still
not clearly understood although both convergence
and facilitation are thought to playa role (Ganong
1991b). Damage to a spinal nerve may result in
referred pain which is experienced around the
heel; this occurs if there is damage to S1.
Type
Neuropraxia
Axonotmesis
Neurotmesis
Damage
Mild trauma or compression
causing local demyelination and
leading to temporary loss of
function. Full recovery within days
or weeks
Crush injuries causing
degeneration of axon and myelin
sheath (wallerian degeneration)
Neurolemma sheaths intact and
reinnervated
Whole nerve axon severed.
Surgical repair needed to ensure
reinnervation of distal trunk
Clinical tests
Simple apparatus is all that is needed to under-
take an assessment of sensory function. Among
the apparatus that can be used are cotton wool,
the fine brush of a neurological hammer, a pair of
blunted dividers or a pair of blunt-ended orange
sticks, a 128Hz tuning fork, a 109 monofilament,
a neurothesiometer, Neurotips (Owen Mumford)
and two small metal test tubes, metal being a
better conductor of heat than glass. Although all
the methods are acceptable, only tests using
140 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 7.13 Sensory testing
Sense
Light touch
Two-point discrimination
Vibration (pressure)
Temperature
Sharp pain/pinprick
Proprioception
Method
Cottonwool/brush/monofilament
Dividers, two orange sticks
Tuning forklneurothesiometer
Warm and cold test tubes/
dissimilar metals
Neurotips
Dorsilplantarflexion of hallux
I
}
Fibre type and pathway in spinal cord
A-beta fibres
Ipsilateral dorsal column
A-delta and C fibres
Contralateral (anterolateral columns)
A-alpha fibres
Ipsilateral dorsal columns
monofilaments and neurothesiometers/biothe-
siometers have been evaluated. The tests
examine the integrity of the afferent pathways
that involve the ipsilateral dorsal columns
and the contralateral anterolateral columns
(Table 7.13). Each test should be demonstrated to
the patient first, usually on the back of the
patient's hand, so that the test is understood and
the expected sensation experienced. It is then
possible to ask the patient to compare the same
sensations on hand and foot which will indicate
the degree, if any, of sensory loss. If the patient
suffers from neuropathy of the upper limbs, the
demonstration test can take place on the fore-
head. For the actual test, where appropriate, the
patients should have their eyes closed in order
that the results cannot be influenced by observing
the test. Use of forced-answer questions where
possible help to eliminate observer influence, e.g.
'Which is sharper, number 1 or number 2?'.
Sham testing, where appropriate, should also
be used to rule out any attempts to guess the
correct answer by the patient. The test should be
repeated three times on the same site and if 2/3
answers are correct, the patient is not considered
to have a sensory deficit in that modality. If
screening is being carried out to detect gener-
alised neuropathy it is important that the tests
involve all the dermatomes at that level (see Fig.
7.8), starting distally and working proximally. As
most peripheral neuropathies begin at the most
distal site and progress proximally, it is only nec-
essary to test more proximal areas if the test has
proved negative distally. The results of each test
should state the extent of any neuropathy, e.g.
'loss of vibration perception from toes to ankles'
to aid monitoring of the deficit. If a mononeu-
ropathy is suspected, e.g. anterior tibial damage
contributing to foot drop, the dermatomes inner-
vated by that nerve should be investigated. A
deficit may not always be due to pathological
causes: factors such as overlying callus render
the skin less sensitive and the normal slowing of
conduction rates associated with ageing results
in a reduction in sensation.
Testing large-diameter fibres
Light touch. Cotton wool, a fine brush or a
109 monofilament can all be used for this test.
The nerves being tested are large-diameter A-
beta fibres which ascend in the dorsal columns,
transmitting light touch perception. The recep-
tors (Meissner's corpuscles) lie in the superficial
dermis. After explaining the test, the patient's
eyes should be shut. The patient is asked to state
when the foot is being stroked and to indicate the
site. The clinician should make no further
comment until the test is finished. The skin of the
foot is then stroked lightly with a wisp of cotton
wool/brush or monofilament. The sense of touch
will be reduced in the elderly and in calloused
skin (due to thickened skin). The patient may
incorrectly distinguish between the lesser toes in
this test, but this is normal and is due to the par-
ticular innervation of the lesser digits.
Two-point discrimination. Blunt-ended orange
sticks or the two points of a pair of dividers can
be used for this test, providing the points of the
dividers have been blunted to avoid accidental
skin penetration. The nerves being tested are
again the large-diameter A-beta fibres, but here
the density of the touch receptor field is being
assessed. The plantar surface of the foot is
usually tested. The patient is asked, with eyes
shut, to state how many points can be felt when
the tips of a compass lightly press the skin surface
simultaneously. The distance between the tips of
the compass that allows the patient to detect two
points rather than one should be noted. Usually
the distance on the foot of a healthy young adult
is 2 cm. It will increase with age and if the skin is
calloused. The receptors responsible for identify-
ing two-point discrimination are also essential
for stereognosis - the ability to recognise objects
by touch - and are therefore very important for
readers of Braille.
Pressure. The 109 monofilament is used for this
test. The first monofilament for detecting
neuropathy was the Semmes-Weinstein mono-
filament produced by the Hansen's Disease
Center, USA. In theory this monofilament buckles
when a force of 109 is applied. Since then a wide
variety of monofilaments have been produced, all
said to be buckled by the same force of 109.
However, McGill et al (1998) and Booth & Young
(2000) studied 109 monofilaments from a range of
manufacturers and found inconsistencies in their
deforming pressures. The clinical relevance of this
variation has yet to be determined. Booth &Young
(2000) also showed that all monofilaments decline
with use and recommended a 24-hour rest should
be allowed between repeated use of a single
monofilament to allow recovery. A range of
monofilaments of different diameters and buck-
ling forces is also available, but these are more
useful for research purposes than for routine
screening. In view of its small size, low cost and
ability in detecting large-fibre neuropathy, the
monofilament is considered one of the most useful
tools a clinician can possess and is recommended
by the International Diabetes Federation, the
World Health Organization European St. Vincent
Declaration and the International Working Group
on the diabetic foot (International Consensus on
the Diabetic Foot 1999).
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 141
The nerve fibres being tested are once more
those belonging to the A-beta group of fibres.
The receptors are encapsulated and lie in the
dermis but are slow adaptors and so detect con-
stant pressure rather than vibration. Both touch
and pressure receptors can respond to applied
pressure, the difference being in the force used
to apply the pressure. Light touch will stimulate
a small area of nerve endings and increasing
pressure will recruit more and more receptors.
When the stimulus becomes pressure rather
than touch and whether a different receptor is
involved with increased pressure is not clear, so
the stimulus is sometimes referred to as the
touch-pressure sensation.
The monofilament is applied at right angles
to the skin surface with just enough pressure to
deform the filament into a 'C' shape. Care
should be taken not to slide the filament or
brush the skin. It should be held in that position
for 2 seconds, the patient having been asked to
state when and where pressure from the 109
monofilament is felt at various points, with
eyes shut. Inability to detect the 109
monofilament is taken to indicate neuropathy
of large fibres.
Vibration. Either a simple 128Hz tuning fork
or a graduated Rydel-Seiffer version can be used.
The nerve fibres being tested are again large-
diameter A-beta fibres, sensitive to pressure, but
this time the deeply placed pacinian corpuscles
are particularly sensitive to rapidly changing
pressures or vibrations. They are coated with
layers of connective tissue, which has the ability
to absorb low-frequency pressure changes, so
that only high-frequency vibrations such as those
produced by the tuning fork will reach the
central receptor.
The vibrating tuning fork is placed on the
skin above a bony prominence such as the apex
of the hallux, malleolus or the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint (MTPJ). It is important to ask
the patients to describe what they feel, without
any prompting, as most patients will be able to
feel pressure, but not necessarily any vibratory
sensation. Most patients describe the vibratory
sensation as a 'buzzing'. The argument that the
tuning fork should not be placed over bone, as
142 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
this augments the sensation, is immaterial, since
all damaging pressures to which the foot is
likely to be subjected - e.g. tight footwear,
ground forces on bony deformities or foreign
objects in footwear - compress soft tissue
against bone. The Rydel-Seiffer tuning fork is
an attempt to produce a semi-quantitative result
to enable comparisons to be made with other
patients and on different occasions. It has
detachable clamps which can be moved to dif-
ferent positions on the prongs, to alter the
vibrating frequency from 64 to 128 Hz. As the
prongs vibrate, the apex of a cone drawn on
the clamps, upright or inverted, will appear to
move vertically up or down a scale from 1 to 8.
The position of this cone is noted when the
patients say the vibration sensation stops. At
128 Hz the apex should reach at least halfway
along the scale, i.e. to the number 4 from 1 or 8,
depending on which cone is being observed. If
vibration sensation is lost before this point is
reached, the patient is said to have a vibratory
perception deficit.
Neurothesiometers provide an alternative
method of assessing vibration. The neurothe-
siometer is basically a vibrator that delivers
vibrations of increasing strength, measured in
volts per micrometre. The mains-operated
version, the biothesiometer, has been super-
seded by the battery-operated neurothesiometer,
to meet Health and Safety requirements.
Cassella et al (2000) recommended that rather
than using a pistol grip when using the appara-
tus, the head of the tool should rest in the palm
of the operator's hand while being applied to the
patient. Only in this way, with no extraneous
pressure being applied, could truly reproducible
vibratory perception thresholds (VPTs) be deter-
mined. The neurothesiometer is positioned over
a bony prominence and the strength of the vibra-
tions is increased until the patient can detect a
'buzzing' sensation. This reading is called the
VPT and values of over 25 volts are taken to
indicate the presence of peripheral neuropathy.
The measurement should be repeated three
times and the average value taken. An alterna-
tive method is to begin with the maximum inten-
sity of stimulus and reduce it until the patient
can no longer detect any sensation. This method
is not measuring the same index, however, and
the two methods should not be mixed on the
same patient. Up to 12 readings can be stored in
the memory of the apparatus. Intra-observer
error is small. The disadvantages of the appara-
tus are its cost and weight. Using data from 392
patients with diabetes mellitus, Coppini et al
(2000) found that using a VPT score based on
comparing the patient's value of VPT with an
age-related normal population showed overall
better sensitivity and specificity than raw VPT in
identifying patients with subclinical neuropa-
thy; they felt that this measurement would be
more useful in regular monitoring of diabetic
patients. A VPT score >10.1 indicates increased
risk of developing neuropathy.
Testing small-diameter fibres
Temperature. Two test tubes filled with warm
and cool water are preferable to immersing saline
sachets in cool and warm water, which quickly
lose their temperature differences. Metal rods
cooled or warmed in water can also be used. A
small cylinder made of two metals with dissimi-
lar conductivities is even easier to transport and
use, but is not so readily available in the UK. For
research purposes, quantitative instruments to
measure temperature perception thresholds
using thermode devices (Kalter-Leibovici et al
2001) or thermo-aesthesiometers (van Schie et al
1998) have been used. The latter paper concludes
that a combined method, using two simple clini-
cal tests and the more sophisticated apparatus,
produced the highest sensitivity (76%).
This tests the integrity of the warmth and cold
temperature receptors that feed into the anterior
part of the anterolateral columns. The nerve fibres
involved are narrow diameter A-delta and C
fibres. Cutaneous receptors detect absolute values
rather than the temperature gradient across the
skin. Warmth receptors operate in the range of
30---43C and cold receptors operate in the range
of 35-20C (Vander et al 1998). Temperatures
above 43C or below 20C will trigger pain recep-
tors. The skin temperature is usually a few
degrees cooler than that of core temperature, i.e.
between 30 and 35C, though a greater difference
may exist in extremes of environmental tempera-
tures. The temperature of the warm water should
be above 35C and that of the cold water below
30e. Again, with eyes closed, the patient is asked
to state which they find the cooler/warmer from
the first or second tube presented.
Pain. Disposable Neurotips (Owen Mumford)
are best used for this test. The Neurotips have a
sharp and a blunt end, but the sharp end cannot
pierce the skin. Spring-loaded devices which are
designed to deliver a stimulus at a force of 40gare
thought to be the safest and most reliable way of
testing for pinprick sensitivity (Wareham et al
1997). The use of the sharp end of a patella
hammer is not advisable as it may be sharp
enough to penetrate the skin and is non-dispos-
able. A hypodermic syringe should not be used as
the danger of skin penetration is high.
This tests the integrity of the sharp pain
pathway, which begins with free nerve endings
in the dermis. A-delta fibres travel into the
spinal cord and synapse in the dorsal horn. The
postsynaptic fibres then cross to the contralat-
eral anterolateral columns which travel up to
the brain.
Using disposable Neurotips and with eyes
closed the patient is asked to state which is
sharper, the first or second sensation. The two
ends should be presented in random sequence to
avoid correct guessing by the anxious-to-please
patient. Neuropathy does not always mean
absence of pain, as is witnessed by diabetic
patients with neuropathy who can experience a
period of intense pain (Boulton 2000).
There are certain perceived wisdoms concern-
ing sensory testing on diabetic patients which the
busy practitioner may use to justify using only
one of the above methods:
vibration sensation is the first modality to
deteriorate
the presence of neuropathy as indicated by
failure to detect the 109 monofilament implies
neuropathy of all nerve fibres in that limb.
There is no conclusive evidence to support
either of these statements. Indeed Winkler et al
(2000) have reported the existence of a subgroup
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 143
of type 1 diabetic neuropathy patients who suffer
from autonomic symptoms severe enough to
warrant treatment, such as severe bladder or
gastroparesis, orthostatic hypotension and dia-
betic diarrhoea associated with a selective small-
fibre sensory and autonomic loss with relatively
preserved large-fibre sensory modalities such as
vibration and touch-pressure sensation. Whether
either or both of the above statements can be
applied to patients without diabetes is even less
certain. A study by Nakayama et al (1998) on rats
showed that small-diameter, unmyelinated nerve
fibres decrease in number with ageing whereas
larger-diameter fibres maintain both conduction
ability and numbers. In the absence of solid evi-
dence to the contrary, it would seem advisable to
carry out sensory testing on both small and large
fibres. However, any testing is better than none.
In research studies, a range of sensory tests have
been used to calculate a neuropathy disability
score (NDS). For further discussion of peripheral
neuropathy assessment in patients with diabetes
mellitus see Boulton et al 1998, Young &
Matthews 1998 and Chapter 17.
Tinel's sign. This helps in the diagnosis of nerve
compression. Palpating the nerve, or tapping it
with a patellar hammer, at the site of compression
will often elicit an abnormal sensation distally, but
it can also follow the proximal distribution of
the nerve. Usually the sensation is paraesthesia
(tingling, burning) or is like an electric shock.
Tinel's sign can be used to assess for compression
of the medial nerve at the wrist or the posterior
tibial nerve at the ankle (carpal and tarsal tunnel
syndromes). However, no clinical tests for carpal
and tarsal tunnel syndromes are entirely reliable
(Golding et al 1986), so that the suspicion of such
a condition needs to be confirmed by nerve con-
duction tests (see Hospital tests).
Referred pain. Entrapment of a spinal nerve
may lead to paraesthesia, pain and weakness of
muscles in the lower limb. Normally when pres-
sure is applied to a site of pain, the pain becomes
worse. However, with referred pain the level of
pain stays about the same. A suspected entrap-
ment of the sciatic nerve usually leads to pain
when the affected leg is raised while the patient
lies in a supine position.
144 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Hospital tests
Nerve conduction test. Sensory nerve conduc-
tion velocities are measured by placing stimulat-
ing electrodes on the skin over the nerve to be
tested. Recording electrodes, either skin or needle
electrodes, are placed either proximally for ortho-
dromic stimulation or distally for antidromic stim-
ulation. The latter gives more consistent results.
The lower limit of normal sensory conduction
velocities in the lower limb is around 35m/ s.
Values are less than those for the upper limb. A
slowing of conduction velocity may be due to a
variety of causes (Matthews & Arnold 1991):
ageing
damage to the cell body as in herpes zoster
(shingles)
nerve axon damage as in compression due to
a spinal tumour, a slipped disc or
tarsal! carpal tunnel syndrome
demyelinisation as seen in Guillain-Barre
syndrome.
Amplitude of the action potentials and latency
are also measured. For a brief discussion of pos-
sible findings, see section on motor nerve con-
duction tests.
Nerve biopsy. This can be carried out on
sensory, motor and autonomic nerves. A small
sample of tissue is removed, using a needle, cone
or, if surgery is being performed, a scalpel. The
tissue is examined histologically and its interpre-
tation requires great expertise. Characteristics
such as a thickened basement membrane, scar-
ring of the myelin sheath, etc., can be identified.
Biopsies are carried out where another labora-
tory test is inconclusive or where no other diag-
nostic test exists for the suspected condition.
ASSESSMENT OF LOWER LIMB
MOTOR FUNCTION
If the motor system is functioning normally
muscles should display a resting tone, show
good muscle power on active contraction and be
able to move against resistance (Ch. 8).
The lower limb reflexes, patella and Achilles,
should also show a normal response. Reflex path-
ways involve both an afferent and an efferent
component and therefore a deficit in either com-
ponent would be expected to have an observable
effect on the response, as would abnormal
influences by higher centres on the LMN. Reflex
responses can be graded as follows (Fuller
1993a):
3+ == clonus
2+ == increased
1+ == normal
+/ - == obtainable with reinforcement
o == absent.
Values of 2 and above suggest UMN lesions,
values of below 1 suggest LMN lesions, periph-
eral sensory nerve or muscle damage.
The patellar reflex. This tests the integrity of
the spinal reflex pathway (L3, L4) and demon-
strates descending influences on the ventral horn
cell. It is important that the limb being tested is as
relaxed as possible. The patient should sit side-
ways on the examination couch with the feet
clearing the ground. The practitioner can gently
push the leg to be tested, which should swing
freely in response. A gentle tap on the patellar
tendon with the hammer should elicit a knee
jerk. If the leg is not relaxed, the patient should
clasp both hands around the other knee and pull
(Jedrassik manoeuvre). This releases spinal
influence and allows the leg to relax. The test
should be undertaken on both legs.
The Achilles reflex. This tests the spinal reflex
pathway (51, 52). The response is best elicited if
the foot of the patient is slightly dorsiflexed by
applying gentle pressure to the plantar surface of
the forefoot with one hand and tapping the
Achilles tendon while the pressure is maintained.
The patient can either sit on a couch, with legs
extended and the limb being tested crossed over
the other, or kneel on a chair, with the foot to be
tested hanging slightly over the edge of the chair.
In a healthy young adult the forefoot will gently
plantarflex. In an elderly person no visible move-
ment may be seen, but a very slight
plantarflexion will be felt against the practi-
tioner's hand.
Lower limb motor dysfunction can occur as a
result of damage to upper motor neurones, lower
motor neurones, peripheral nerves or muscles.
Upper motor neurone lesions
Upper motor neurone (UMN) lesions are due to
damage occurring anywhere between the cortex
and L1 in the spinal cord. Since the spinal cord
ends at level L1, lesions below this level will not
produce UMN signs. Conditions which can lead
to UMN signs are listed in Table 7.14.
Although a specific area of the frontal lobes
(precentral gyrus) is designated the primary
motor cortex (see Fig. 7.12), many neurones
from other areas of the cortex are also involved
in planning and initiating conscious movement
and so can also be called upper motor neurones.
This includes neurones of both descending
tracts. Damage to the descending tracts will
produce the same effects as damage to the neu-
rones themselves.
Observation
Damage to the corticospinal neurones and tracts
will result in contralateral loss of skilled move-
ments. Lack of movement will in turn eventu-
ally lead to a form of muscle atrophy known as
disuse atrophy. Damage to the multineuronal
pathway causes release of inhibition on the
LMNs in the spinal cord, especially those which
innervate the antigravity muscles, producing
the effect most commonly associated with UMN
lesions, that of spasticity or stiffness in the
limbs.
Gait. Observation of the patient's gait is an
important part of the assessment for UMN
lesions. In the lower limb the effect is extension at
Table 7.14 Conditions associated with UMN signs
Cerebral palsy due to anoxia at birth
Cerebral vascular accidents
Brain injury
Friedreich's ataxia
Spinal injury
Brain or spinal tumours
Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (motor neurone disease)
Vitamin B
12
deficiency
Multiple (disseminated) sclerosis
Later stages of syringomyelia
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 145
the hip and knee, with plantarflexion and inver-
sion of the foot. If the effect is unilateral, the
person is described as hemiplegic. The inability
to flex the knee and hip leads to a circumductory
gait, with the lateral border of the forefoot and
toes often scraping the ground. If both sides are
affected the person is paraplegic and the gait is
described as a scissor gait, with the knees
adducted and feet abducted. Walking aids such
as Zimmer frames are essential.
Clinical tests
Clasp-knife spasticity. The affected limb will
be initially stiff to passive stretch, but if gentle
stretch is continued, the limb may suddenly
relax, rather like the opening of a clasp-knife.
This is due to a length-dependent inhibition of
the stretch reflex (see Fig. 7.16).
Tendon reflexes. Due to the reduced inhibition
by the multineuronal tracts, the alpha LMNs
responsible for the contraction of extrafusal
fibres are hyperexcited. This results in exagger-
ated patella and ankle tendon reflexes and clonus
- increased rhythmic contractions elicited at the
ankle or patella by causing brisk stretch of the
muscles. More than three contractions as a result
of testing the patella or Achilles reflex is indica-
tive of UMN damage (Fuller 1993b).
Plantar reflex. Damage to the corticospinal
neurones or their axons has another effect that is
clinically detectable, the so-called plantar reflex
or Babinski sign. It has been suggested that the
abnormal reflex, a dorsiflexing big toe, is due to
release of a spinal inhibitory reflex (Van Gijn
1975). The plantar surface of the foot is stroked
firmly and briskly from the posterolateral border
of the heel to the hallux as shown in Figure 7.17.
The normal response is a slight plantarflexion of
the hallux and lesser toes, although no response
is also often seen, especially in the elderly where
the sensory pathway may be affected. In patients
with corticospinal tract dysfunction, the hallux
will extend (dorsiflexion of the hallux) and the
lesser toes may fan out. This is the extensor
response, sometimes referred to as a positive
Babinski response. However, the normal
response does not become established until the
146 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
will be on the same side, below the level of the
lesion (Case history 7.1).
/
l
Figure 7.17 The Babinski response A. Eliciting the
response B. Flexor response (normal response) - toes
plantarflex e. Extensor response (positive Babinski
sign) - toes dorsiflex.
A 70-year-old female Caucasian presented to the
clinic complaining of excessive wear on the lateral
border of the left shoe and a corn on the dorsum of
the fifth toe. The patient walked with a stick and had
a slow, circumducted gait; the left arm was held in a
flexed position.
Neurological assessment revealed normal tendon
reflexes and muscle power in the right leg but
exaggerated tendon reflexes and an extensor plantar
response (positive Babinski sign), clonic spasm of the
muscles and signs of muscle atrophy in the left leg.
Diagnosis: History taking revealed the patient had
suffered a major eVA, which had affected the right
cortex. The clinical features were consistent with the
history. Fortunately for the patient she was right-
handed so her speech was not affected and she was
still able to feed herself and write.
Case history 7.1
Lower motor neurone lesions
As the lower motor neurone cell body, its efferent
fibres, the neuromuscular junction and the
10-600 skeletal muscle fibres it innervates all act
as a coordinated whole, damage to any part of
this motor unit will produce similar effects of
weakness (paresis) or complete loss of function
(paralysis) and reduced or absent reflexes.
Diseases principally affecting the muscles are
called myopathies, but this can be confusing as
often the cause is lesions in the LMN which have
given rise to atrophy of the muscle. Therefore,
assessment of all parts of the motor unit will be
considered in this section. For classification of
myopathies, see Table 7.15.
Since LMNs or their spinal nerves exit at all
segments of the spinal cord, LMN symptoms can
be seen as a result of damage to any segment from
Hospital tests
The use of tests to diagnose UMN lesions will
vary according to the suspected cause. For
example, brain scans are indicated if a CVA is
suspected, whereas a spinal radiograph would
be used if a tumour of the spine was suspected.
\
,
e B
person has learnt to walk and so an extensor
response is quite normal in babies. It is impor-
tant not to rely only on this test for diagnosis of
UMN lesions as it is easy to elicit a pain with-
drawal response which may appear similar to an
extensor response. The rest of the clinical picture
should also suggest UMN lesions.
Muscle tone. Due to the release of spinal inhi-
bition in UMN conditions, the LMNs will be in
a hyperexcited state and so will be firing more
frequently. This will result in greater muscle
'tone' and the affected muscle will feel very firm
or tense.
Any condition which causes damage to the
UMNs or their descending tracts can produce
UMN signs. If the cortex is affected, the effects
will occur on the contralateral side of the body,
and if the lesion is in the spinal cord, the effects
A
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 147
Table 7.15 Classification of myopathies
Classification
Inherited
Biochemical defect
Acquired inflammatory
Non-inflammatory
Descriptor
Muscular dystrophies (at present untreatable)
Duchenne's - X-linked recessive condition. Commonest and most serious of the inherited
dystrophies. Affects males, females are carriers. Onset before age 10 years. Weakness in
proximal and girdle muscles of lower limb first, later upper limbs also. Hypertrophy and later
fatty infiltration (pseudohypertrophy) of calf muscles. Cardiac muscle also affected. See ele
vated levels of serum phosphokinase. Death from respiratory failure usual between 20 and
30 years
Becker's - X-linked recessive condition. A more benign variety of the above
Dystrophia myotonica - autosomal dominant condition. Gene located on chromosome 19.
Insidious onset, usually between 20 and 50 years, but can be present earlier. Progressive
weakness and wasting of distal as well as proximal limb muscles, facial and sternomastoids.
Cardiomyopathy, cataracts and frontal baldness also common. Myotonia is failure of muscle
to relax immediately after contraction. Patient cannot open hand quickly after making a fist.
Faulty gene leads to defective chloride ion transport, resulting in membrane hyperexcitability
Facio-scapulo-humeral-autosomal dominant condition - benign, often asymptomatic.
Wasting and weakness of facial, scapular and humeral muscles mean patient has
difficulty in whistling, heavy lifting, etc., as well as scapula in abnormal position
Limb girdle - variable inheritance (may be treatable, depending on cause). Several causes:
specific biochemical defect, benign form of motor neurone disease, polymyositis, hormonal
and metabolic disease
McArdle's syndrome. Abnormality of glycogen metabolism due to deficiency of muscle
phosphorylase. Patient suffers from fatigue, cramps and muscle spasm.
Malignant hyperpyrexia. No muscle wastage or weakness. Symptoms occur during or
immediately after administration of a general anaesthetic, especially if halothane or the
muscle relaxant suxamethonium chloride is given. Defect in calcium metabolism gives rise
to prolonged muscle contraction, in turn raising body temperature. Fatal in 50% of cases
Polymyositis-autoimmune disease. Infiltration of monocytes and muscle necrosis. Weakness
of proximal limb, trunk and neck muscles. Patient has difficulty raising hands above head,
getting up out of low chairs and bath. May be associated pain on muscular exertion
Dermatomyositis. As above, with additional involvement of skin of face and hands, with
erythematous rash
Secondary to high-dose steroids and thyrotoxicosis. These are the most usual causes, but
can also be associated with alcoholism, Cushing's disease, Addison's disease, acromegaly,
osteomalacia and malignancy. See weakness of proximal limb muscles and shoulder girdle.
Trunk may also be involved
C1 to 55. However, due to the anatomy of the
spinal cord any damage to the cord from L2 will
only result in an LMN lesion. It is possible to see
a combination of UMN and LMN symptoms if the
lesion is between C1 and LI, e.g. syringomyelia.
The conditions that can lead to lower motor
neurone lesions are listed in Table 7.16.
Observation
If the pathway is interrupted or damaged in any
way, either at the level of the cell body or along
Table 7.16 Conditions associated with lower motor
neurone lesions
Poliomyelitis
Injury to lower motor neurone and/or peripheral nerve
Motor neurone disease
Syringomyelia
Vitamin B
12
deficiency
Cord compression/lesion (Brown-Sequard syndrome)
Spina bifida
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
148 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Case history 7.2
A 54-year-old male Caucasian first presented to the
clinic complaining of corns and callus under the
metatarsal heads of both feet. He was unable to bend
down to cut his toe nails.
A vascular assessment revealed weak pulses in
both feet, with the right foot being cold. A neurological
assessment revealed dimished reflexes in the right
leg and absence of vibration sense in the right foot.
Two-point discrimination was 2 ern in the left foot and
10 cm in the right foot. Orthopaedic examination
showed a leg length discrepancy of 2.5 ern, the right
leg being the shorter and having developed a
functional equinus at the ankle. Muscle wastage was
apparent in the lower limb of the right side. The
patient walked with a limp.
Diagnosis: The signs and symptoms are all
consistent with poliomyelitis. The patient had
contracted the virus when a child. The lower motor
neurones of the right side of the spinal cord at the
level of the lumbar plexi had been affected.
its axon, then the impulse cannot reach the
muscle. The result will be weakness (paresis) or
flaccid paralysis, depending on the site and
extent of the damage. The sites of damage may
involve:
lower motor neurone, e.g. poliomyelitis virus
(Case history 7.2)
peripheral axon, e.g. diabetes mellitus
neuromuscular junction, e.g. destruction of
cholinergic receptors of the skeletal muscle as
in myasthenia gravis.
Myopathies will also produce weakness or
paralysis, even if the lower motor neurone is intact.
In contrast to UMN lesions, which affect par-
ticular movements, LMN lesions and myopathies
affect particular muscles (Case history 7.3). For
example, if the tibialis anterior nerve is affected
the anterior tibial muscle is unable to control
deceleration of dorsiflexion at the ankle in gait,
producing a characteristic slapping gait (Root
et al1977).
Nerve impulses are essential to the health of
the muscle, so that lack of impulses leads to
much more rapid atrophy of muscle, skin and
other soft tissue than seen in UMN lesions. This
is known as denervation atrophy. In addition, the
denervated muscle becomes highly sensitive to
Case history 7.3
A 52-year-old Caucasian female presented to the
clinic with plantar callus and fissuring, which had
arisen following plantar fasciotomy to correct 'clubbed
feet'. The patient stated that she had been born with
normal feet, but by the time she was 6 years old she
could not run or jump properly and by the time she
was an adolescent her feet had become high-arched
and inverted.
She had noticed a gradual weakness in her arms
and legs and on one accasion, when 41 years old, she
had almost dropped a baby while working as a nursing
auxiliary. This incident had caused her to be sent for a
neurological examination which revealed slowed motor
nerve conduction velocities. She had a recent history
of several falls, with her ankle 'going over'. She also
complained of aching joints in the feet, knees and hips.
Her 27-year-old son was similarly affected.
Neurological examination showed all sensory
perception except vibration to be normal, but reflexes
were absent. Muscle power was reduced in all limbs
and muscle wasting of hands, feet and calf muscles
was noted. Orthopaedic examination showed reduced
dorsiflexion and eversion, with a pes-cavus-typa foot
and high-stepping gait.
Diagnosis: The patient suffered from
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, also known as
peroneal muscle atrophy. It is an inherited peripheral
neuropathy and exists in more than one form, the two
most common forms being autosomal dominant.
very small amounts of neurotransmitter (acetyl-
choline), possibly due to upregulation of recep-
tors. This results in a quivering of the muscle
(fasciculation), seen on an electromyogram as
fibrillation. This effect will not be seen if the
lesion is in the muscle itself.
Clinical tests
Muscle power: Muscle power can be graded
according to the Medical Research Council scale
(Fuller 1993c) as follows:
5 =normal power
4+ = submaximal movement against resistance
4 = moderate movement against resistance
4- = slight movement against resistance
3 =moves against gravity but not resistance
2 = moves with gravity eliminated
1 =flicker
a =no movement.
A reduced strength of contraction suggests
paresis or paralysis.
Fatiguability. If the site of the lesion is the neu-
romuscular junction, the muscle will show a
sliding decrease in response or fatiguability as
seen in myasthenia gravis. The acetylcholine
receptors are destroyed in an autoimmune
attack and although the first quanta of neuro-
transmitter can diffuse to remaining receptors,
subsequent release of neurotransmitter is less
and less likely to make contact and so the
response fades. The muscle cells are able to
replace the receptors but the autoimmune attack
will strike again, in the same or different
muscles.
Muscle tone. In the skeletal muscles of a
healthy person there will always be some motor
units firing, which means that the muscle will
feel firm. This is referred to as the 'tone' of the
muscle. In LMN or muscle damage, the muscle
will feel flabby, because of loss of this tone.
Tendon reflexes. Reflexes will be weak or
absent, because of interruption of the final
common pathway. A single reduced or absent
reflex suggests mononeuropathy or radiculopa-
thy. A reduction or absence of all lower limb
reflexes suggests polyradiculopathy, cauda
equina lesions, peripheral polyneuropathy or a
myopathy. In the latter there will be no sensory
deficit.
Hospital tests
Again, the tests selected vary according to the
suspected cause. For example, if diabetic
polyneuropathy is suspected, the diagnosis
could be confirmed by a combination of sensory
testing, nerve conduction tests and blood glucose
measurements.
Nerve conduction. To measure motor conduc-
tion velocities the stimulating electrode is placed
along the path of the nerve and the recording
electrode is placed over the belly of the muscle.
Amplitude and duration of the action potential
are also recorded. The lower limit of normal con-
duction velocities in the lower limb is 40 m/ s.
Nerve conduction tests, whether sensory,
motor or mixed nerve, do not give definitive
diagnoses but help to confirm diagnosis: e.g. by
comparing the affected side with the healthy side
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 149
as in diagnosing tarsal tunnel syndrome (Galardi
et al 1994) or by distinguishing between axonal
degeneration and segmental demyelination, the
two chief pathological processes occurring in
peripheral nerve diseases. The distinguishing
characteristics are shown below.
Axonal degeneration, e.g. the polyneu-
ropathies of diabetes mellitus, alcoholism, toxic-
ity due to heavy metals, nerve entrapment and
Friedreich's ataxia (Zouri et al 1998):
see clinical changes first (weakness,
numbness, atrophy)
slowing of nerve conduction velocities and
loss of large fibres
reduction in action potential amplitude
more prominent distally than proximally
(longest fibres affected first)
fibrillation seen on electromyograph.
Segmental demyelination, e.g. vasculitis of
rheumatoid arthritis (acquired, chronic),
Guillain-Barre syndrome (acquired, acute/
chronic), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease/peron-
eal muscular atrophy/hereditary motor and
sensory neuropathy (inherited, chronic):
electrophysiological changes seen first
dramatic fall in nerve conduction velocities,
maybe even total conduction block
worsens proximally.
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease is interesting
because two subtypes have been identified:
HMSN type I, which shows primarily segmental
demyelination, and HMSN type II, which shows
mainly axonal degeneration (McLeod & Lance
1989b).
Electromyography. This uses a needle elec-
trode inserted into the muscle to show the elec-
trical activity of the muscle in response to an
electrical stimulus. Abnormal results are detected
in dysfunction of motor nerves, neuromuscular
junction lesions and in myopathies (Matthews &
Arnold 1991). Electromyography is the only
means of electrophysiological testing for
myopathies:
if due to motor nerve denervation (e.g.
poliomyelitis), will see reduced recruitment,
150 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 7.17 Differences between upper motor neurone and lower motor neurone lesions
Upper motor neurone
Exaggerated tendon reflexes
Extensor plantar response (positive Babinski sign)
Loss of abdominal reflex
Normal electrical excitability of muscle
Some muscle wasting over a period of time due to lack of use
Increase in muscle tone (clonus)
Whole limb affected
fibrillation, then a reduction in nerve action
potential amplitude
if due to changes at the neuromuscular
junction (e.g. myasthenia gravis), will see a
reduction in recruitment
if due to muscle disease (e.g. Duchenne's
muscular dystrophy), will see spike
potentials on the electromyograph.
Tests may be performed that are specific to
particular conditions, such as detection of the
presence of antibodies to cholinergic receptors in
myasthenia gravis.
Nerve and muscle biopsies. These are obtained
in an identical manner to those described for
sensory nerve biopsies. Histological examination
of nerve and muscle tissue will show structural
abnormalities, and biochemical tests will detect
enzyme dysfunction: e.g. in distinguishing
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy from the treat-
able connective tissue disease of polymyositis,
which also shows muscle weakness and atrophy
of limb girdles.
The differences between UMN and LMN
lesions are summarised in Table 7.17.
ASSESSMENT OF
COORDINATION/PROPRIOCEPTION
FUNCTION
The receptors in the muscles, joints and tendons
all feed position sense information to the cerebel-
lum and cortex. In turn, the cerebellum and the
cortex bring about vital postural reflexes and
Lower motor neurone
Loss of tendon reflexes
Flexor plantar response (negative Babinski sign)
Normal abdominal reflex
Fasciculation (fibrillation seen on EMG)
Marked muscle wasting occurs relatively quickly
Flaccid muscles (lack of tone)
Certain muscle groups affected depending on site of
damage; deformity due to contracture of antagonists
reflexes necessary for accurate movement. The
basal ganglia also play an important part in the
coordination of movement. Damage to these
parts of the nervous system may have an effect
on gait and coordination. Conditions that may
affect coordination and proprioception function
are listed in Table 7.18.
Observation
Careful observation of motor activity can give
an indication of a deficit in posture, balance or
coordination; for example, a stamping gait may
be due to loss of proprioception as occurs in
Table 7.18 Conditions that may result in poor coordination
Part Conditions
Cerebellum Tumour
Multiple sclerosis
Arnold-Chiari malformation
Friedreich's ataxia
Other hereditary spinocerebellar
ataxias
Hypothyroidism
Repeated head trauma as in boxing
Basal ganglia Parkinsonism
Huntington's chorea
Wilson's disease
Sydenham's chorea
Ascending pathways Subacute combined degeneration
of the spinal cord
Guillain-Barre syndrome
Tabes dorsalis
Alcoholism
tabes dorsalis, where the ascending tracts in the
dorsal columns degenerate. The patient will not
know where his body is in space and so lifts his
legs much higher than necessary to clear the
ground. The patient will also be unaware of
when his foot is about to make ground contact
and so stamps the foot down. This has the
advantage of stimulating pressure receptors
proximally, as vibrations from the foot travel up
the leg and so provide much needed informa-
tion to the brain.
The cerebellum has modifying influences on
the UMNs in the cortex and on brain-stem nuclei.
It receives rich proprioceptive information and
adjusts the activity of the UMNs to ensure that
the actual action and intended action are
matched. The cerebellum is essential for smooth,
accurate movement and posture and balance.
Dysfunction of the cerebellum or of its afferent
and efferent tracts produces characteristic effects
that are easily observable.
Dysarthria. Here cerebellar dysfunction affects
the speech muscles and produces a scanning
speech, with inappropriate syllabic stress and
volume.
Dysdiadochokinesia. This is where actions are
no longer smooth, continuous movements, but
are broken down into their component parts,
producing clumsy, jerky actions.
Tremor. The tremor associated with cerebellar
defect is due to the dysfunction of the stretch
reflex and is an intention tremor, i.e. one which
increases in amplitude as the person tries to carry
out any tasks with the affected limb. The tremor
disappears at rest.
Gait. If maintenance of balance is upset, the
patient will feel unsteady and adopt a wide base
of gait. As voluntary movement is also affected,
the gait will be clumsy or staggering, as if drunk.
Such gait is described as ataxic. The patient may
complain of deviating to one side, which sug-
gests the dysfunction is limited to that hemi-
sphere.
Basal ganglia. Although the basal ganglia also
have a modifying role on voluntary movement,
the effects of their dysfunction is quite different
from that of the cerebellum. Damage to the basal
ganglia produces either a poverty of movement
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 151
(hypo /bradykinesia) as seen in Parkinson's
disease, or jerky writhing movements (choreo-
athetosis) as seen in the inherited disease of
Huntington's chorea (Case history 7.4) or the
benign and brief effects of Sydenham's chorea,
associated with rheumatic fever.
Clinical tests
Proprioception in joints. To test proprioception
distally, the practitioner holds the sides of the
hallux between forefinger and thumb. While the
patient's eyes are shut, the toe is moved up and
down and the patient should be able to state the
final position of the toe. The sides of the hallux
are held rather than the dorsal and plantar sur-
faces, to avoid additional pressure information
being generated. This information travels from
receptors in joints in the largest-diameter, fastest
nerve fibres of the A-alpha class into the spinal
cord, up to the cerebellum in the ipsilateral
spinocerebellar tracts and to the conscious
cortex in the dorsal columns. A positive result
shows that the pathway to the cortex is intact.
An inability to give the correct responses would
be seen in conditions such as tabes dorsalis.
Romberg's sign. This test can be used to
confirm proprioceptive disturbance in the dorsal
columns or peripheral nerves (Fuller 1993d).
Case history 7.4
A 30-year-old Caucasian male attended the clinic
complaining of sore corns. Questioning revealed that
he was mentally handicapped. Examination showed
warm, hyperhidrotic feet with a poor skin condition
and fibrous lesions on the plantar aspect of the feet.
The left foot had marked pes cavus deformity. The
gait revealed limping and shuffling with excessive arm
movement in order to maintain balance.
Over a period of a few years further mental and
physical deterioration became apparent. The patient's
brother was similarly affected and so apparently had
been their father.
Diagnosis: A diagnosis of Huntington's chorea was
made. This disease is inherited as an autosomal
condition with complete penetration and late onset,
and is characterised by progressive chorea and
dementia.
152 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Patients are observed standing with feet together
and eyes open and then closed. If patients are
unable to maintain balance with eyes open, this
suggests either a cerebellar or a vestibular defect
and if the patients rock backwards and forwards
with eyes open a cerebellar defect could be the
cause. In such cases this is not a positive
Romberg's sign and Romberg's test cannot be
performed. Closing the eyes will deprive the
patients of visual information, so that the brain
has to rely on proprioceptive input: if this is not
being transmitted, the patients will sway and
find it difficult to keep balance. The practitioner
must be ready to catch the patient. A positive
Romberg's sign could be due to cord compres-
sion, tabes dorsalis, vitamin B
12
deficiency or
degenerative spinal cord disease.
Nystagmus. This is rapid eye movements due
to vestibular dysfunction and can be elicited by
asking the patient to make a sudden rapid head
movement. Its presence indicates a cerebellar
lesion.
Heel-shin test. The patient is asked to slide the
heel of one leg straight down the shin of the
other. Patients with cerebellar dysfunction are
often unable to do this because of lack of coordi-
nation and the heel will follow a wavy path
down the other leg.
Heel-toe test. The patient is asked to walk in a
straight line heel to toe. Patients with cerebellar
dysfunction will stagger about the midline, but it
must be remembered that there are many other
causes of an unsteady gait, especially in the
elderly.
Finger-nose test. The patient is asked to stand
comfortably and then, with eyes shut and one
arm outstretched, to bring his fingertip to the
nose. Repeat for the other arm. Cerebellar dys-
function will cause the patient to overshoot
(hypermetria) or undershoot (hypometria) and
miss the nose.
Muscle tone. This will be reduced in the
affected limbs.
Tendon reflexes. These may be unusually sus-
tained, because of the oscillations of an abnormal
stretch reflex, but should not be exaggerated.
Occasionally, a weak response can be seen in
cerebellar syndromes.
Parkinson's disease
This is the commonest extrapyramidal disease
and is due to depletion of dopaminergic neurones
in the substantia nigra, which project to the
caudate nucleus. The most troublesome effect is
hypo/bradykinesia, which results in the patient
having great difficulty initiating or stopping
movement (Case history 7.5). Rest tremor and
rigidity are also features. If the hand is affected
the tremor may cause the patient to move i n d e ~
finger and thumb in a 'pill-rolling' movement.
The patient may show a mask-like face, and
speak in a soft voice. Micrographia (small hand-
writing) is also a characteristic.
The antigravity muscles are affected, producing
a stooped posture with knees flexed, so that the
patient's centre of gravity is no longer over the
base of gait. This causes the festination seen in
gait, where the patient has to move more and
more quickly to avoid falling forward. Gait also
tends to be shuffling, with poor heel-ground
contact - 'marche ii petits pas'.
The tendon reflexes are unaffected. There is a
general resistance to passive stretch, described
as 'lead-pipe rigidity'. It may show a superim-
posed intermittent release of the resistance
producing a series of jerks, the so-called 'cog-
wheel' effect.
Case history 7.5
A 65-year-old female Caucasian presented to the
clinic requesting nail care. On examination her nails
were found to be long, thickened and mycotic and a
variety of dorsal, apical and interdigital lesions were
present.
The patient could appreciate temperature, light
touch and pressure and reflexes were normal, but
she was very confused and nervous, so that
communication was difficult. A full orthopaedic
assessment could not be carried out because of the
patient's inability to relax her legs and feet. Ankle
dorsiflexion was limited and the feet adopted a varus
position. Most of the toes showed retraction
deformities. Movements were hypokinetic and gait
was stooped and shufftinq. There was a minor rest
tremor in the right arm.
Diagnosis: The symptoms are consistent with
Parki.n.son's ~ i s e s e This is a progressive idiopathic
condition which gradually affects all limbs. Mental
confusion/dementia is not always present.
In a patient with Parkinson's disease, there is
no habituation with the glabellar tap reflex. The
glabellar tap reflex involves the practitioner
gently, slowly and repeatedly tapping the fore-
head of the patient between the eyes. In a healthy
person, the first tap or two will elicit the eye-
blink reflex, but this will rapidly habituate.
The frequency of the tremor may be measured
via hospital tests but usually the above clinical
tests and a positive response to drug therapy
will be sufficient to confirm the diagnosis of
Parkinson's disease.
ASSESSMENT OF AUTONOMIC
FUNCTION
As explained earlier, the autonomic nerves inner-
vate the viscera and internal structures such as
blood vessels, since they enable the nervous
system to maintain homeostasis (see Fig. 7.9).
Medical history may reveal abnormalities of
bowel and bladder function.
Observation
There will be various signs which would suggest
autonomic neuropathy such as abnormal sudo-
motor responses in the skin and abnormal car-
diovascular responses in the functioning of the
heart and peripheral blood vessels (Faris 1991).
Sudomotor neuropathy usually leads to an
absence of sweating and a dry skin, although it
may produce hyperhidrosis. Vasomotor neu-
ropathy usually produces a warm red skin and
an absence of vasoconstriction in response to
cold although it may occasionally produce a pro-
longed vasoconstriction. It may also lead to pos-
tural hypotension. Neuropathy of nerves to the
cardiac pacemaker tissue may lead to failure of
the heart to respond appropriately to the
demands of the body, e.g. an absence of tachy-
cardia in response to exercise.
Clinical tests
Heart rate. The pulse is taken while the patient
is in a supine position and repeated when an
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 153
upright posture is adopted. The normal response
is an increase in heart rate of greater than 11beats
per minute. A loss of response suggests parasym-
pathetic abnormality.
Blood pressure. Repeat the above test measur-
ing blood pressure in the two positions. The sys-
tolic blood pressure should fall on standing by
approximately 30 mmHg and the diastolic pres-
sure by about 15 mmHg. An increased drop sug-
gests sympathetic abnormality. Failure of the
cardiovascular system to compensate for pos-
tural effects can lead to postural syncope.
Valsalva manoeuvre. This is not advisable if
there is evidence of proliferative retinopathy. The
patient is asked to take a deep breath and exhale
against a closed glottis for 10-15 seconds and
then breathe normally. The pulse rate is taken
during the Valsalva manoeuvre and on release.
Heart rate should increase during the manoeuvre
and fall on release. No increase during the
manoeuvre suggests sympathetic abnormality
and no decrease on release suggests parasympa-
thetic abnormality. These tests reveal abnormal
responses of the baroreceptor reflex, which impli-
cates defects in innervation of the cardiac pace-
maker tissue rather than peripheral autonomic
neuropathy, for which there are no clinical tests.
Certain signs may suggest peripheral autonomic
(sympathetic) neuropathy:
a dry skin due to failure of sudomotor
nerves
a warm foot due to lack of arterial
vasoconstriction
engorged dorsal veins, due to lack of venous
vasoconstriction.
Signs of parasympathetic neuropathy are
disorders of bowel and bladder function and
impotence.
The condition commonly associated with
autonomic neuropathy is diabetes mellitus,
where the foot will often appear red and feel dry
and warm. There may be coexistent neuropathy
of other small fibres such as pain and tempera-
ture fibres (A-delta and C), as well as large-fibre
(A-alpha and A-beta) involvement, giving
rise to the picture of a typical neuropathic foot
(Ch, 17). Less common conditions exhibiting
SUMMARY
Table 7.19 Conditions that affect more than one part of the
nervous system
This chapter has considered the assessment of the
various components on the nervous system.
However, as stated earlier, it is important to
remember that a number of conditions affect more
than one part. Those conditions that result in
damage to more than one part of the nervous
system are summarised in Table 7.19. It is essential
that all parts of the nervous system are assessed in
order that the practitioner may acquire a full
picture of neurological function (Case history 7.6).
A summary of the tests discussed and their inter-
pretation is shown in Table 7.20.
154 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
autonomic neuropathy are Cuillain-Barre syn-
drome, amyloidosis and congenital autonomic
failure. It should be remembered that other con-
ditions, such as infection and anaemia, and
certain drugs, such as beta-blockers, can also
affect the cardiovascular system and may give a
false-positive result.
Case history 7.6
A 47-year-old male Caucasian was referred to the
clinic with a small ulcer which had existed for
6 months beneath his right heel. When 29 years old,
he had visited Nigeria where he had contracted
schistosomiasis with resultant paraparesis from his
lower abdomen downwards. Since then he had
suffered repeated ulceration of both feet. The present
ulcer was covered with dense callus which when
debrided revealed a lesion 15 mm in diameter and
8 mm deep. Its border was surrounded by macerated
callus.
A vascular assessment showed no remarkable
features, all tests indicating a good blood supply to
the foot. The neurological assessment revealed
absent reflexes, lack of appreciation of all senses and
constant 'pins and needles' sensation around his hips
and legs. The skin of the feet was dry. The patient
used a walking stick to support his right leg and
walked with an abductory gait to achieve ground
clearance as the right foot could not dorsiflex. The
right leg showed wasting of the triceps surae.
Diagnosis: A diagnosis was made of neuropathic
ulcer associated with peripheral sensory, motor and
autonomic neuropathy due to damage in the spinal
cord caused by the parasitic blood fluke Schistosoma
haematobium.
REFERENCES
Condition
Diabetes mellitus
Motor neurone disease
Spina bifida
Syringomyelia
Vitamin B
12
deficiency
Multiple sclerosis
Cord compression/lesion
Guillain-Barre syndrome
Charcot-Marie-Tooth
disease
Nerve injuries
Parts affected
Sensory, motor (LMN) and
autonomic
LMN and UMN
LMN and sensory
Sensory, LMN and UMN
Sensory, LMN and UMN
Sensory and UMN
Sensory, LMN and UMN
LMN, sensory and autonomic
Mainly LMN but possible
sensory
Depends upon site, may
result in LMN, UMN, sensory
or autonomic
Booth J, Young M 2000 Testing the reliability of 10 g
monofilaments. Diabetic Medicine 17: S74
Boulton A J M (ed) 2000 The pathway to ulceration. In:
Boulton A J M, Connor H, Cavanagh P R (eds) The foot in
diabetes, 3rd edn. J Wiley, Chichester, p 22
Boulton A J M, Gries FA, Jervell J A 1998 Guidelines for the
diagnosis and outpatient management of diabetic
peripheral neuropathy. Diabetic Medicine 15: 508-514
Budd K 1984 Pain. Update Postgraduate Centre Series.
Update, Guildford
Cassella J P, Ashford R L, Kavanagh-Sharp V 2000 Effect of
applied pressure in the determination of vibration
sensitivity using the neurothesiometer. The Foot 10: 27-30
Coppini D V, Weng C, Young P J, Sonksen P H 2000 The
'VPT score' - a useful predictor of neuropathy in diabetic
patients. Diabetic Medicine 17: 488-490
Epstein 0, Perkin G, de Bono D, Cookson J 1992 Clinical
examination. Gower Medical, London
Faris I 1991 The management of the diabetic foot. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh
Fuller G 1993a Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 135
Fuller G 1993b Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 135
Fuller G 1993c Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 107
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 155
Table 7.20 Summary of neurological signs and symptoms
Feature
Apraxic gait
Aphasia, speech defects
Visual defects
Progressive focal deficit epilepsy
Increased tone and reflexes
Weak arm extensors
Weak leg flexors
Hypo/bradykinesia
Festinating gait
Lead-pipe/cog-wheel rigidity
Rest tremor
Choreo-athetotic movements
Nystagmus
Dysarthria
Cranial nerve palsies
Nystagmus
Dysarthria
Scanning speech
Diminished, pendular reflexes
Intention tremor
Ataxic gait
Dysdiadochokinesia
Diminished tendon reflexes
Paresis/paralysis
Pain
Paraesthesia/anaesthesia
Progressive fatiguability and weakness
Proximal limb muscle weakness and
wasting, but no sensory loss and
no fasciculation
Site of lesion
UMN (hemisphere)
UMN (head)
UMN (head/spinal cord)
Neck, cervical region
Basal ganglia
Basal ganglia
Brain stem
Cerebellum
Spinal cord
LMN
(Spinal cordi nerve roots/axons)
Neuromuscular junction
Muscle
Possible disease
Stroke
Hydrocephalus
Head injury
Tumour, ischaemic stroke,
previous intracranial disease
Stroke
Cerebral palsy
Neck injury
Multiple sclerosis
Parkinson's disease
Huntington's chorea
Sydenham's chorea (rare)
Multiple sclerosis
Syringomyelia
Friedreich's ataxia
Stroke
Tumour
Vitamin B
12
deficiency
Syringomyelia
Spina bifida
Poliomyelitis
Diabetes mellitus
Chronic alcoholism
Guillain-Barre syndrome
Rheumatoid arthritis
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
Vitamin deficiencies (Bl' B
6
, B
12
)
Tumour
Disc protrusion
Trauma
Myasthenia gravis
Myopathies
Fuller G 1993d Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, pp 41-42
Galardi G, Amadio 5, Maderna L et al 1994
Electrophysiologic studies in tarsal tunnel syndrome -
diagnostic reliability of motor distal latency, mixed nerve
and sensory nerve conduction studies. American Journal
of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 73: 193-198
Ganong W 1991a Reviews of medical physiology, 15th edn.
Lange, London, p 200
Ganong W 1991b Reviews of medical physiology, 15th edn.
Lange, London, pp 132-133
Golding D N, Rose D M, Selvarajah K 1986 Clinical tests for
carpal tunnel syndrome: an evaluation. British Journal of
Rheumatology 25: 388-390
International Consensus on the Diabetic Foot 1999
International Working Group on the Diabetic Foot, p 32
Kalter-Leibovici 0, Yosipovitch G, Gabbay U, Yarnitsky D,
Karp M 2001 Factor analysis of thermal and vibration
thresholds in young patients with Type 1 diabetes
mellitus. Diabetic Medicine 18: 213-217
McClintic J R 1980 Basic anatomy and physiology of the
human body. John Wiley, New York
156 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
McGill M, Molyneaux L, Yue D K 1998 Use of the
Semmes-Weinstein 5.07/10 gram monofilament: the long
and the short of it. Diabetic Medicine 15: 615-617
McLeod J, Lance J 1989a Introductory neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 210-211
McLeod J, Lance J 1989b Introductory neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, p 282
Matthews P, Arnold D 1991 (eds) Diagnostic tests in
neurology. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Melzack R 1992 Phantom limbs. Scientific American, April: 90
Nakayama H, Noda K, Hotta H, Ohsawa H, Hosoya Y 1998
Effects of ageing on numbers, size and conduction
velocities of myelinated and unmyelinated fibers of the
pelvic nerve in rats. Journal of the Autonomic Nervous
System 69: 148-155
Root M L, Orien W P, Weed J H 1977 Normal and abnormal
function of the foot. Clinical biomechanics - volume 2.
Clinical Biomechanics Corporation, Los Angeles, p 254
Vander A J, Sherman J H, Luciano D S 1998 Human
physiology, 7th edn. McGraw Hill, New York, pp
238-239
Van Gijn J 1975 The Babinski response: stimulus and
effector. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and
Psychology 38: 180-186
FURTHER READING
Berkow R (ed) 2000 The Merck manual. Merck Sharp &
Dohme Research Laboratories, New Jersey
Fuller G 1993 Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Joel A, Delisa J B (eds) 1993 Electrodiagnostic evaluation of
the peripheral nervous system. In: Rehabilitation
Van Schie C H M, Abbott C A, Shaw J E, Boulton A J M
1998 A simple method for measuring temperature
perception threshold in diabetic neuropathy. Diabetic
Medicine 15: S66
Wareham A, Rayman A, Rayman G 1997 Pin-prick sensory
thresholds in detecting risk of neuropathic ulceration.
Diabetic Medicine 14: S32
Wilkinson I M S 1993a Essential neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, p 135
Wilkinson I M S 1993b Essential neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 49-50
Wilson K J W 1990 Ross & Wilson Anatomy and
physiology in health and illness. Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh
Winkler A S, Ejskaer N, Edmonds M, Watkins P J 2000
Dissociated sensory loss in diabetic autonomic
neuropathy. Diabetic Medicine 17: 457-462
Young M, Matthews C 1998 Neuropathy screening: can we
achieve our ideals? The Diabetic Foot 1: 22-25
Zouri M, Feki M, Hamida C B et al1998 Electrophysiology
and nerve biopsy: comparative study in Friedreich's
ataxia and Friedreich's ataxia phenotype with
vitamin E deficiency. Neuromuscular Disorders 8:
416-425
medicine: principles and practice, 2nd edn. Lippincott,
Philadelphia
Kandel E, [essel T, Schwartz J 1991 The principles of neural
science. Elsevier, New York
Wilkinson I M S 1998 Essential neurology, 2nd edn. Blackwell
Science, Oxford
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 157
Termsof reference 157
Positionof a part of the body 158
Joint motion 158
Positionof a joint 161
Deformity of a part of the body 161
Why is an orthopaedicassessment
indicated? 161
The assessment process 162
General assessment guidelines 163
Gait analysis 167
Abnormal gait patterns 173
Non-weightbearing examination 175
Hip examination 175
Knee examination 181
Tibia/fibularexamination 186
Ankle examination 187
Midtarsal joint 194
Metatarsal examination 194
Metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs) 196
Interphalangeal joints (IPJs) 197
Alignment of the leg and foot 197
Static examination(weightbearing) 202
Limb-lengthinequality 206
Summary 209
Orthopaedic assessment
P. Beeson
INTRODUCTION
Orthopaedic lower limb assessment is an essen-
tial component of the primary patient evaluation.
It involves both static and dynamic assessment of
musculoskeletal function. Movement of the
lower limb involves interaction between the
musculoskeletal and the nervous system. This
chapter concentrates on the assessment of the
musculoskeletal system. Details of the neurolog-
ical basis of movement and assessment of the
nervous system are covered in Chapter 7.
The assessment process is based upon an
approach which involves general observation of
the patient, specific joint observation, palpation,
examination of movements and conduction of
special tests (McRae 1997). Qualitative, semi-
quantitative and quantitative measurement tech-
niques are used. The practitioner should be
aware of the likely errors that can ensue from
such measurements and take these into consider-
ation when interpreting and analysing data from
the assessment (see Ch. 4). This chapter concen-
trates on assessment of the lower limb: details
regarding the upper limb and spine have been
excluded but can be found in other texts.
TERMS OF REFERENCE
The body is divided into three cardinal planes:
sagittal, frontal (coronal) and transverse (Fig. 8.1).
These planes form the reference points from which
to describe:
157
158 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Sagittal plane
t---- Frontal plane
Transverse
plane
Figure 8.1 Cardinal planes of the body: sagittal. frontal
and transverse. Sagittal divides the body into right and left
halves. frontal divides the body into front and back and
transverse divides the body into upper and lower sections.
The diagram shows midplanes but the terms refer to any
plane parallel to the appropriate midplane.
position of a part of the body
joint motion
position of a joint
deformity of a part of the body.
Position of a part of the body
The cardinal body planes are used as reference
points to describe positions within the body.
Anterior (to the front of) and posterior (to the rear
of) describe positions in the frontal plane, e.g. the
patella lies anterior to the knee joint. Distal (away
from the centre) and proximal (towards the
centre) describe positions in the transverse plane,
e.g. the interphalangeal joints (IPJs) lie distal to
the metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs). Medial
(towards the midline of the body) and lateral
(away from the midline of the body) describe
positions in the sagittal plane, e.g. the navicular
lies on the medial side of the foot and the cuboid
on the lateral side. In the foot, dorsal is used to
refer to the top of the foot and plantarto the sole
of the foot.
Joint motion
Sagittal plane. Motion in the sagittal plane pro-
duces extension and flexion. The term flexion
denotes the bending of a joint, whereas extension
denotes the opposite, i.e. straightening of a joint.
The terms used to describe sagittal plane motion in
the foot are slightly different from those used to
describe such motion at the hip and knee (exten-
sion and flexion). At the ankle (Fig. 8.2), subtalar
joint (STJ), midtarsal joint (MTJ), metatarsopha-
langeal joint (MTPJ), interphalangeal joint (IPJ)
and first and fifth rays, sagittal plane motion is
termed dorsiflexion and planiarilexion. Dorsiflexion
denotes a raising of the whole or part of the foot
towards the leg, whereas plantarflexion denotes the
movement of the dorsal aspect of the foot away
from the leg.
Frontal (coronal) plane. Motion in the frontal
plane produces abduction and adduction of the
thigh and leg and inversion and eversion of the
foot. This is because the foot lies at right angles to
the leg, so the terminology used to describe
movements of the foot differ from that for the leg
and thigh. Abduction is when the distal segment
moves away from the midline of the body and
adduction when it moves towards the midline.
For example, in order to do the 'splits' gymnasts
must abduct their legs. Inversion of the foot is
when the plantar aspect of the foot is tilted so as
to move towards the midline of the body.
Eversion is when the plantar aspect of the foot is
tilted so as to face away from the midline of the
body (Fig. 8.3).
Transverse plane. Motion in the transverse
plane produces internal and external rotation of
the thigh and leg and adduction and abduction of
the foot. Internal rotation occurs when the anterior
surface of the distal segment rotates medially in
relation to the proximal segment and external
rotation when the opposite occurs - the anterior
surface of the distal segment moves laterally in
relation to the proximal segment (Fig. 8.4). In the
ORTHOPAEDICASSESSMENT 159
A B C
Figure 8.2 Sagittal plane motion at the ankle A. Dorsiflexion: movement of the foot toward the anterior aspect of the tibia
B. Neutral position C. Plantarflexion: movement of the foot away from the tibia.
A
B
Figure 8.3 Frontal plane motion in relation to the midline of the body (black line) A. Inversion: the foot is lifted up and
away from the line B. Eversion: the foot is moved down and towards the line.
160 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
A B
c
E
D
Figure 8.4 Relationship between transverse plane motion
in the leg and transverse plane motion in the foot A. The
feet are mildly abducted; this is the normal standing position
B. The legs are externally (laterally) rotated, which results in
abduction of the feet (C) D. The legs are internally rotated
(medially), which results in the adduction of the feet (E).
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 161
Figure 8.5 Frontal plane deformity of the legs A. Genu
valgum (knock knees): the knees are close together and the
medial malleoli are far apart B. Genu varum (bow legs):
the knees are far apart and the medial malleoli are close
together.
Deformity of a part of the body
The term 'deformity' is used to describe a fixed
position adopted by a part of the body. Terms
used to denote deformity usually have the
suffix -us:
Sagittal plane - equinus when the foot or part of
the foot is plantarflexed, e.g. ankle equinus,
and extensus when the foot or part of the foot
is dorsiflexed, e.g. hallux extensus. Calcaneus,
although rarely seen, is used to describe the
calcaneus when it is in fixed dorsiflexion, e.g.
talipes calcaneovalgus.
Frontal plane - varus and valgus (Fig. 8.5).
Transverse plane - adductus or abductus.
Genu varum
(bow leg)
B
Genu valgum
(knock knees)
A
Position of a joint
Todescribe the position of a joint the suffix -ed is
used:
sagittal plane - extended and flexed (thigh and
leg); dorsiflexed and plantarflexed (foot)
transverse plane - internally and externally
rotated (thigh and leg); adducted and abducted
(foot)
frontal plane - abducted and adducted (thigh
and leg); inverted and everted (foot)
triplanar - pronated and supinated (foot).
It is important that a distinction is made
between joint motion and position; a joint moves
in the opposite direction to the position it is in. For
example, at heel-strike the foot is slightly
supinated (position) but as soon as the heel con-
tacts the ground pronation (motion) occurs at the
subtalar joint in order to absorb shock from ground
contact.
foot the use of the terms adduction and abduction
is dependent upon the site of the reference point:
the midline of the body or the midline of the foot.
Functionally, the midline of the body is usually
used as the reference point: abduction of the foot
is where the distal part of the foot moves away
from the midline of the body and adduction when
the distal part of the foot moves towards the
midline of the body (Fig. 8.4). Anatomically the
midline of the foot is commonly used as the ref-
erence point: e.g. adductor hallucis is inserted
into the lateral side of the proximal phalanx of
the hallux and is so termed because it brings
about adduction of the hallux - movement of the
hallux towards the midline of the foot.
Triplanar motion. The position of the joint axis
together with the shape of the articulating surfaces
can result in joint motion in more than one plane.
If a joint axis is positioned at an angle of less than
90
0
to all the cardinal body planes triplanar motion
occurs - pronation and supination. Pronation is the
collective term for dorsiflexion, eversion and
abduction and supination for plantarflexion, inver-
sion and adduction. In the foot the subtalar and
midtarsal joints produce triplanar motion.
162 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 8.1 Factors that can affect normal function
Hereditary/congenital problems, e.g. Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, talipes equinovarus, CDH
Acute/chronic injury causing pain, e.g. slipped femoral epiphysis, ankle sprain
Abnormal alignment secondary to trauma, e.g. femoral/ tibial! epiphyseal fracture
Abnormal alignment (developmental), e.g. internal femoral torsion, genu valgum
Infections, e.g. tuberculosis
Neurological disorders, e.g. CVA
Muscle disorders, e.g. Duchenne's muscular dystrophy
Neoplasia, e.g. osteosarcoma
Systemic disease, e.g. autoimmune (rheumatoid arthritis), bone disease (Paget's disease)
Degenerative processes, e.g. osteoarthritis
Joint hypermobility, e.g. Marfan's syndrome
Osteochondroses, e.g. Perthes' disease
Psychological factors, e.g. attention seeking
Footwear, e.g. high-heeled shoes
WHY IS AN ORTHOPAEDIC
ASSESSMENT INDICATED?
Normal lower limb function should be pain-free
and energy-efficient. The main purpose of the
assessment is to identify whether the system is
functioning within the boundaries of 'normality'.
Normal function can be affected by many factors
(Table 8.1). It should be remembered that
orthopaedic lower limb problems are not always
isolated in origin. They may result from referred
pain from a proximal source or can be part of a sys-
temic disorder. It is therefore important that the
lower limbs are not examined in isolation and that
observation and examination of other parts of the
body are undertaken where indicated.
In summary the purpose of an orthopaedic
lower limb assessment is to:
establish the main complaintts), e.g. pain,
stiffness, tenderness, numbness, weakness
or crepitus
identify the site of the primary problem - e.g.
foot, leg, knee, hip - and try to relate to
underlying structures
identify any secondary problems and relate
them to the primary problem, e.g. lesion
patterns, pronation due to leg-length
discrepancy
identify the cause of the problem, e.g.
abnormal alignment
establish how the problem evolved
identify any movement/ activity that
produces/exacerbates symptoms
identify movement/ activity that relieves
symptoms
establish any differential diagnoses
utilise the data from the assessment to produce
an effective management plan
utilise the data from the assessment to monitor
the progress of the condition.
The assessment process
When undertaking an assessment of the lower
limb it is essential that the system is observed
weightbearing (dynamic and static) and non-
weightbearing. Differences between the two can
help to determine whether compensation has
occurred. For example, non-weightbearing assess-
ment may identify the presence of a forefoot varus;
observation of the patient's gait may show this
problem has been fully compensated through
abnormal pronation at the subtalar joint. Con-
versely, information from the non-weightbearing
assessment may explain the cause of a gait abnor-
mality, e.g. a patient may have a bouncy gait due
to an early heel lift; non-weightbearing assessment
of the ankle joint may reveal that the cause is an
ankle equinus due to a short gastrocnemius
muscle.
To gain a full and detailed picture of the function
of the locomotor system, the following factors
must be assessed:
gait
alignment and position of the lower limb
joint motion
muscle action.
Practitioners vary as to the sequence in which
they assess the above. There is no one correct
sequence; practitioners should adopt the sequence
and approach they feel most comfortable with.
However, it is essential that a systematic approach
is adopted to ensure vital pieces of data are not
omitted. For the purposes of this chapter the fol-
lowing sequence has been adopted:
1. Gait analysis. This will focus on the position
and alignment of the body and foot-ground
contact.
2. Non-weightbearing. This will focus on the
assessment of joints and muscles.
3. Static weightbearing. This will focus on the
position and alignment of the body and the
relationship of the foot to the ground during
stance.
To achieve a successful assessment it is impor-
tant that the patient is at ease and cooperates with
and has confidence in the practitioner. The practi-
tioner should always be sensitive to the patient's
needs and explain what she is about to do, and
why, prior to undertaking the assessment.
Qualitative and quantitative measurement should
be undertaken where necessary, but the data must
be meaningful and reproducible if they are to be of
any use in assessing improvement or deteriora-
tion. Various measuring devices may be used; their
use will be discussed in the appropriate sections.
General assessment guidelines
Always observe and functionally assess the joints
bilaterally. It is valuable to obtain an overview of
both limbs, particularly if the onset of the
problem is insidious, the pain is diffuse and non-
specific or if during testing a number of joints
appear to be implicated. Where only one limb
is affected, it is often helpful to start with the
unaffected limb first, then repeat the test on the
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 163
affected limb. Compare ranges of motion, end
feel (the sensation the examiner feels when he
pushes the joint being examined to the end of its
range of motion) and muscular strength. It is
helpful to arrange your testing so that the most
painful test is last. This ensures that the condition
will not be aggravated by your testing procedure
or make the patient apprehensive.
Not all of the tests will be necessary for each
component of the lower limb assessment. The
selection of tests used will depend on the findings
as the examination proceeds, and should be
influenced by the history and observations in
order to rule out needless testing: having said that,
it is necessary to be thorough enough to rule out all
other possibilities by applying a holistic approach.
Exclusion of all possible injured structures in addi-
tion to vascular, visceral and systemic conditions
will be required.
Referred pain associated with local nerve
entrapments or radicular patterns of pain in which
spinal nerves or nerve roots are irritated need to
be considered. In addition, it is important to rule
out the joint above and below, especially if the
history suggests other joint involvement.
Furthermore, it is useful to remember that a
problem that affects one part of the system can
lead to problems elsewhere in the system. This is
because the lower limb functions as one mechani-
cal unit; as a result a problem in one part has to be
compensated for in another part of the system.
Compensation is a change in structure, position
or function of one part in an attempt to adjust to an
abnormal structure, position or function in another
part. For example, a scoliosis of the spine may lead
to an apparent leg-length discrepancy, which will
affect foot function. Conversely, a problem affect-
ing the foot, e.g. an uncompensated rearfoot varus,
may lead to discomfort/pain at the knee.
The process of assessment follows a standard
format:
general observation of the patient
specific joint observation
palpation
examination of joint movement
muscle assessment
undertaking special tests
arranging further investigations.
164 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Figure 8.6 Devices used to measure joints
A. Protractor B. Tractograph C. Finger goniometer.
D. Gravity goniometer.
B
c
A
Range of motion (ROM) is the amount of
motion at a joint and is usually measured in
degrees. The ROM at a joint can be compared
with the expected ROM for that joint; e.g. if only
20 of motion is found at the first MTPJ when the
expected norm is 70 (28% of the normal ROM)
it can be concluded that the ability of this joint to
carry out normal function is impaired (hallux
limitus). Often a guesstimate of the amount of
joint motion is made from observation.
Protractors, tractographs and goniometers can
be used to quantify joint motion (Fig. 8.6). A joint
may show a normal ROM but the direction of the
motion (DaM) may be abnormal. It is, therefore,
important to note the direction as well as the
range. For example, the total ROM of transverse
plane rotation at the hip is 90; 45 internal rota-
tion and 45 external rotation. If the ROM is 90
but there is 70 of external rotation and 20 of
The process of joint assessment should be based
upon the following approach:
range of motion (ROM)
direction of motion (DaM)
quality of motion (QOM)
symmetry of motion (SaM)
dislocation and subluxation.
Examination of joint movement
Features of an inflamed joint are redness, heat,
pain, swelling and loss of function. Inflammation
of a joint may be due to a range of factors: trauma,
infection, loose body (osteochondritis diseccans),
Examination of the joint, information from the
medical and social history and results from X-ray
and lab tests will enable a diagnosis to be made. If
a patient complains of a painful joint the character-
istic features of the pain should be recorded.
Prior to examining a joint it is important that the
joint is warmed up (moved through its range of
motion); this relaxes the ligaments and muscles
and also reduces the viscosity of the synovial fluid.
Palpation
Palpation of the limb segment or joint for clinical
features such as raised/lowered skin temperature,
swelling/ effusion, tenderness, pain or abnormal
lumps/nodules provides additional information
to help establish a diagnosis.
Specific joint observation
Observation of each lower limb joint prior to
examination is useful to establish the presence of
any clinical features synonymous with pathology,
e.g. oedema, contusion, erythema, local muscle
wasting, alteration in shape or the presence of
scars. In addition, comparison of symmetry of con-
tralateral parts, abnormal posture/evidence of
limb shortening and abnormal joint movement
during gait are additional clinical clues to underly-
ing pathology.
General observation of the patient
The assessment process starts in the waiting room.
Observation of the patients' demeanour, facial
expression, seated posture and how they get up
from the chair will provide valuable clinical infor-
mation. In addition, the way in which the patient
walks into the clinic, together with use of walking
aids, provides additional information as to mobil-
ity and how this might be influencing lower
limb/ foot function.
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 165
neutralise the effects of other muscles prior to
testing the muscle in question. One way in which a
muscle can be neutralised is by flexing the joint
which the muscle crosses so that tension is
removed.
Muscles should be tested for:
strength
tone
spasm
bulk.
Strength. The Medical Research Council (MRC)
system is commonly used for grading muscle
strength (Crawford Adams & Hamblen 1990):
o= no contraction
1 = a flicker from muscle fasciculi
2 = slight movement with gravitational effects
removed
3 = muscle can move part against gravity
4 = muscle can move part against gravity +
resistance
5 = normal power.
Muscle strength can be assessed by the patient
bringing about the motion (active) or by the prac-
internal rotation then the ROM would be normal
but the DaM would be abnormal. Normal joint
motion should occur without crepitus, pain or
resistance (quality of motion or QOM). The
ROM and DaM of motion of a joint, e.g. hip,
should be the same for both limbs (symmetry of
motion or SaM). The presence of asymmetry of
motion should always be noted. Joint motion
can be affected by the ligaments around the
joint. It is important as part of joint assessment
to identify any dysfunction of the ligaments, e.g.
ligament tear or contracture of a ligament.
Finally, joints should be assessed as to whether
they are subluxated or dislocated. Dislocation
occurs where there is no contact between articu-
lating surfaces of the joint and subluxation
where there is only partial contact.
The range of active and passive movement of
each respective lower limb joint should be exam-
ined, documented, compared and contrasted with
the contralateral side. It is useful to assess whether
passive movement of the joint provokes any pain
or guarding (sometimes seen in hallux Iimitus). In
addition, it is valuable to document the response to
resisted testing (strong/weak/painless/painful)
and stability of the joint. This will determine the
integrity of the articulating surfaces and ligaments.
Provoking crepitus on joint movement is an indi-
cation of joint damage. Table 8.2 summarises the
main joint changes that can be detected during
joint assessment.
Often it is helpful to be able to differentiate
between articular and capsular damage. In a
lesser MTPJ this can be achieved by comparing
the results of a compression test (compression of
the metatarsal head against the proximal phalanx
- to test for articular damage) with a distraction
test (dorsiflexion/plantarflexion of a distracted
proximal phalanx against the joint capsule dor-
sally/plantarly).
Muscle assessment
Muscles bring about motion at joints. To identify
the cause of joint dysfunction and/or pain it is
important to differentiate between muscle, liga-
ment and joint abnormality. As a number of
muscles may affect anyone joint, it is important to
Table 8.2 Joint changes
Type of sensation
Joint stiffness
Tightness or tension
Popping
Snapping
Clicking
Grating
Crepitus (tendon)
Crepitus (joint)
Tearing
Tingling
Warmth
Numbness or
hypersensitivity
Indication
Inflammatory/degenerative
changes
Swelling or protective muscle
spasm
Muscle tear or strain
Tendon slipping over bony
prominence
Meniscal tear or patella rubbing
femoral condyles
Osteoarthritis or osteochondritis
Inflammation of tendon
Articular damage or loose body
Muscle or ligament tear
Neural or circulatory pathology
Local inflammation or infection
Local nerve or nerve root
compression
166 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
titioner moving the part (passive). Active motion
can be tested against resistance, i.e. the practitioner
attempts to prevent active motion.
Tone. All muscles should show tone. Tone
denotes that a muscle is in a state of partial con-
traction without full movement being necessary.
Asking the patient to undertake isometric contrac-
tion of a muscle is a useful means of identifying
tonal quality. For example, the tone of the quadri-
ceps can be assessed by asking the patient to con-
tract the muscle while the knee is in an extended
position. During contraction muscles should feel
firm as well as appearing taut. Flaccid muscles lack
tone; this is common with lower motor neurone
disorders. Absence of tone in young males could
be due to Duchenne's muscular dystrophy.
Spasm. Muscles may present in spasm and as a
result affect joint motion. There are two types of
muscle spasm: tonic and clonic. Tonic spasm
usually occurs as an attempt by the muscles to stop
movement at a painful joint; clonic spasm is asso-
ciated with neurological (upper motor neurone)
deficit and is involuntary. Information from the
neurological assessment, medical history and pre-
senting problem should enable identification of the
type of spasm.
Bulk. Muscle bulk should be observed and com-
parisons made between the lower limbs. Atrophy
of muscle can result in a loss of muscle bulk and
may be due to a number of factors, e.g. lack of use,
lower motor neurone lesion (Case comment 8.1).
Hypertrophic muscles that show normal tone and
symmetrical distribution are considered normal
and are usually due to the effects of exercise.
Unilateral atrophy/hypertrophy can be assessed
by observation and measuring the girth of both
limbs with a tape measure (Fig. 8.7).
Undertaking special tests
It may be necessary to carry out specific examina-
tion tests so as to confirm a diagnosis or to differ-
entially diagnose between similar conditions.
Some clinical examination techniques have been
developed so as to test a particular aspect of joint
function, e.g. Lachman's test - to assess sagittal
plane stability of the knee in an anterior direction
and thereby the integrity of the anterior cruciate
Case comment 8.1
Be mindful of diabetics who inject themselves with
insulin. The quadriceps and abdominal muscles are
often used and will show patchy loss of fat and
muscle.
ligament. The section on non-weightbearing exam-
ination will discuss the specific tests used to assess
each of the lower limb joints and their associated
structures.
Arranging further investigations
Usually the information obtained from a detailed
history and assessment is sufficient to arrive at a
Figure 8.7 Assessment of muscle bulk (quadriceps) using
a tape measure.
diagnosis. Occasionally, however, it may be neces-
sary to arrange specialist investigations to confirm
the diagnosis or to consider other options. A
number of possibilities are available, including:
specialist imaging techniques and haematological,
biochemical and nerve function tests. In addition,
histological examination of specimens, elec-
tromyography (EMG), video/treadmill gait analy-
sis or computerised analysis/ forceplate analysis
may be indicated. The choice of investigation will
depend upon the patient's individual history.
Furthermore, cost restraints, time, availability of
each technique and local expertise will also deter-
mine which specialist investigations are arranged.
GAIT ANALYSIS
Gait involves complex neuromuscular coordina-
tion of the lumbar spine, pelvis, hips and those
structures distal to them. Any dysfunction in the
lower limb will become observable during gait. A
variety of neurological, systemic and structural
dysfunctions can influence gait (Inman et a11981)
(Table 8.3). The effects of the dysfunctions listed
in Table 8.3 may lead to gross or relatively minor
changes to gait. Gross disorders are readily
observed, whereas those that lead to relatively
minor changes, e.g. rearfoot varus, may not be so
obvious.
Gait can be adequately assessed with few aids,
providing that sufficient room is available;
ideally there should be a walkway 1.1 m wide
and 6 m long. A treadmill may be used; this facili-
tates the observation of a sufficient number of
strides without the patient having to make fre-
quent turns and is especially appropriate if there
is not enough room for a 6 m walkway. It is
important that the patient is appropriately attired
(ideally shorts and 'l-shirt) so that key parts can
be observed; these are summarised in Table 8.4.
This section concentrates on the observation of
gait. Methods of analysing gait are discussed in
Chapter 12; these can provide a very useful
adjunct to information obtained from observa-
tion and are particularly useful in the monitoring
of gait changes. The patient's gait must be
observed from the posterior, anterior and lateral
views in order that movement in all three body
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 167
Table 8.3 Dysfunctions that can influence gait
Neurological
May involve dysfunction of one or a combination of the
following parts of the CNS and/or PNS:
motor, e.g. CVA
sensory, e.g. tabes dorsalis, blindness
cerebellum, e.g. Friedreich's ataxia
basal ganglia, e.g. Parkinson's disease
Systemic
joint disease, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis,
juvenile idiopathic arthritis
crystal arthropathies, e.g. gout
muscle disease, e.g. Duchenne's muscular dystrophy,
dermatomyositis
bone disease, e.g. rickets, Paget's disease
Structural
limb-length inequality, e.g. DOH, polio,
femoral/tibial fracture
alignment disorders: coxa valgalvara, genu
valgum/varum/recurvatum, tibial/femoral torsion,
rearfoot varus
planes can be assessed. Gait should be observed
with the patient both barefoot and wearing shoes
(with and without orthoses).
Gait analysis commences with the patient
entering the room. At this point the patient is less
conscious of being observed and is less likely to
act unnaturally. The practitioner's eye should
run from the patient's head to ground level,
observing foot-ground contact. At this stage
there are some key points the practitioner should
address about the patient's gait (Table 8.5).
Gait is divided into a swing phase and a stance
phase; stance phase relates to the period of the
gait cycle when the foot is in contact with the
ground and swing phase to when it is not. Stance
phase is easier to visualise than swing phase; it
consists of the contact, midstance and propulsive
stages (Fig. 8.8). Contact phase starts when the
heel makes ground contact; this is followed by
the rest of the foot. During contact phase the foot
pronates in order to absorb shock from the effects
of ground reaction. Midstance starts when all the
foot is in ground contact and ends with heel lift.
During midstance the foot starts to re-supinate
ready for propulsion. Propulsion starts at heel lift
and ends when the hallux leaves the ground.
168 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 8.4 Anatomical and functional features to observe
during gait
Head position
Shoulder position
Arm swing
Trunk position/rotation
Pelvic tilt
Limb motion
Thigh segment
Patellar position (transverse plane)
Knee position (frontal/sagittal plane)
Tibial position
Ankle
Calcaneal position
Navicular position
Midtarsal joint (position/movement)
Metatarsals (anterior/lateral views)
Toe position
Foot position/shape
Muscle activity
Propulsion
Swing phase
During propulsion the foot continues to
supinate; the fifth metatarsal head is the first to
leave the ground, followed in sequence by the
others. The hallux should be the last to leave the
ground. Assessment of foot-ground contact and
swing phase can be facilitated by high-quality
video recording and playback with freeze frame.
The movement and relationship of both limbs
during gait is summarised in Table 8.6.
The following section considers each of the
specific pointers listed in Table 8.4.
Head. The head should not show excessive
movement. Altered positions may include twisting
(torticollis), due to muscle contracture, or tilting on
one side as a result of pain or limb-length inequal-
ity (LLI). In type I compensation for LLI the head
will tilt down on the long limb side due to cervical
scoliosis. In type II and III compensation for LLI
the head will tilt down on the short limb side.
Shoulder position. Both shoulders should be
level. Unilateral tilting may be due to LLI or sco-
liosis. In children under 12 years with LLI the
shoulders will always tilt down on the short limb
side (type III compensation). In adults where sec-
ondary scoliosis can present the shoulders will
tilt down on the long side (type I and type II com-
pensation). Fixed deformities should be distin-
guished from flexible vertebral deformities (see
static weightbearing examination).
Arm swing. Arm swing is a feature of normal
forward progression. The arms should swing to
even out leg movement. The upper torso will act
to decelerate lower limb motion. Some subjects
fail to swing their arms; this alone is not abnor-
mal but can affect spine position during walking:
there is a tendency to lean either forward or back
as the arms do not swing. Arm and hand position
may point to signs of injury or motor disability
and should be recorded: e.g. flexed position of
arm and hand held close to the body suggests a
cerebral vascular accident (eVA). In addition, in
Table 8.5 Questions the practitioner should consider when assessing the patient's gait
Does the patient lurch or look uncoordinated? This suggests ataxia and requires examination of the cerebellum and
nervous system.
Does the patient have any postural problem? Is the posture abnormal?
Does the spine appear curved?
Does one leg/foot lead, followed by the other without obvious asymmetry or alteration in cadence?
Does the face shows signs of pain or anxiety? Could this be an antalgic gait?
Does the patient appear to be overweight in relation to his/her height?
Does the whole foot contact the ground when shod?
Does the foot look straight, adducted or abducted?
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 169
Table 8.6 Stance phase of gait showing 'normal' movement of the left and right limbs
Left knee/hip Left foot Right knee/hip Right foot
Knee extended Heel contact Knee and hip extended Heellif!
Hip flexed
Knee flexed Foot flat (forefoot loading) Knee and hip flexing to max Toe-off
Hip extending
Knee extended Midstance Knee starts to extend from Midswing
Hip extended maximum flexion
Hip flexed
Knee and hip extended Heel lift Knee extended Heel contact
Hip flexed
Knee and hip flexing to max Toe-off Knee flexed Foot flat (forefoot
Hip extending loading)
A
c
B
D
Figure 8.8 Series of photographs taken at 400 frames per second A. The right heel contacts the ground; forefoot motion is
decelerated by the extensor muscles B. The metatarsal heads have contacted the ground but the toes are still dorsiflexed
C. The right foot completes forefoot contact and the left heel is about to leave the ground (heel lift) D. Propulsion: the fifth
and fourth toes are no longer in ground contact and the third, second and first are about to follow in that order.
170 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
patients with LU, the arm on the shorter limb
side will be held away from the body to help
maintain balance and will hang lower than the
contralateral arm.
Trunk position/rotation. Observe for obvious
structural abnormalities likely to influence gait
posture such as spinal kyphosis, scoliosis or lor-
dosis. Excessive amounts of trunk rotation will
increase energy expenditure during gait and can
often be associated with myopathy such as
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy and spastic
neurological gaits. In addition, excessive upper
body movements with the arms swinging across
the body may be caused by faulty hip or lower
limb mechanics.
Pelvic tilt. This forms the pivot of lower limb
function. The pelvis moves in all three cardinal
planes in order to provide smooth up and down
(sinusoidal) motion. Tilting may arise from neu-
rological problems, spinal deformity, LU (pelvis
tilts down on side of short limb) and injury.
Pelvic tilting can also present in osteoarthritis of
the hip due to weakness of gluteus medius
(resulting in Trendelenburg gait).
Limb motion. Do the limbs present a normal
forward progression during gait rather than the
exaggerated circumducted movements typical of
a CVA patient?
Thigh segment. Thigh movement is a reflection
of the transfer of pelvic motion through the hip
joint. Excessive transverse plane rotation (internal
and external rotation) should be noted; this may be
due to a variety of factors, e.g. abnormal femoral
torsion or version.
Patellar position (transverse plane). As long as
the patella proves to have normal alignment then
it can be used as a reference point to determine
the extent of transverse plane motion of the leg.
The amount of transverse plane rotation at the
knee should be slightly greater than at the hip
and may therefore be easier to observe than at the
thigh. At heel contact the leg should internally
rotate (patellae face inward); throughout mid-
stance and most of propulsion the leg should
externally rotate (patellae face outward) (see Fig.
8.4). Alternatively, if the patella has an abnormal
alignment, a bisection line drawn through the
tibial tubercle with a black felt marker may assist
observation of transverse plane motion. Excessive
internal or external rotation should be noted; it
may be due to proximal or distal abnormality. If
the patellae are squinting with an in-toed gait it
suggests the cause of the in-toeing is suprapatel-
lar, whereas if the patellae are facing forward
with an in-toed gait the inference is that the cause
of the in-toeing is infrapatellar. Excessive exter-
nally facing (fish eye) patellae are generally asso-
ciated with external femoral torsion.
Torque conversion is the means by which
motion of the thigh and leg influences the foot;
the subtalar joint (STJ) is the interface between
the leg and foot and is where torque conversion
takes place. Internal rotation of the leg is trans-
ferred into pronation of the foot (required for
shock absorption) and external rotation of the leg
is transferred into supination of the foot
(required for stability of the foot during propul-
sion). However, excessive transverse rotations of
the leg during gait will influence the angle of
gait and, subsequently, promote prolonged and
abnormal pronation or supination of the foot,
leading to foot and leg pathology.
Knee position (frontal/sagittal planes). Sagittal
plane motion of the knee joint during gait is out-
lined in Table 8.6. Alteration in sagittal plane
knee motion will affect the third determinant of
gait. If the knee does not flex it causes the hip to
lift further and allows greater height on that side.
To swing the leg from stance through swing back
to stance again the pelvis has to rotate more and
has a vertical displacement which should appear
obvious. Excessive extension of the knee (genu
recurvatum) should be noted if it occurs during
gait.
Frontal plane problems (genu valgus/varum)
can be identified from observing the position of the
knees and the tibiae. The normal tibial outline
shows a slight genu varum because muscle distri-
bution results in lateral bulk. Bowing of the legs
(genu varum) or knock knees (genu valgum)
should be noted (see Fig. 8.5). Valgum of the hip
(coxa) can produce the effect of a genu varum. In
addition, osteoarthritis of the medial knee can
cause a genu varum deformity. Conversely, coxa
vara can produce a genu valgum. If a genu varum
or valgumis present, it should be noted if it is bilat-
eral or unilateral. A unilateral deformity may
suggest injury, infection or growth disturbance at
the epiphysis in earlier life. Tumours are a rare
cause but should always be considered.
Tibial position. Bowing of the tibia in the
frontal plane (tibial varus), a cause of rearfoot
varus, or sagittal plane bowing (sabre tibia), seen
in Paget's disease, should be noted.
Ankle. The ankle complex provides smooth
transference of weight from heel to toe. A
minimum of 10 dorsiflexion is required to allow
the leg to pass over the foot during midstance.
Equinus is the term used to indicate loss of
dorsiflexion. Toe walking and/ or an early heel
lift may indicate an ankle equinus but non-
weightbearing examination of the ankle joint
must be carried out before a definitive diagnosis
can be made. Unstable ankles may have frontal
plane instability, which shows as tilting hesita-
tions. The subtalar joint works in concert with
the ankle (talocrural) joint. Inman (1976)
regarded the talocrural (TCJ) and subtalar (STJ)
as the 'ankle joint' because they have a symbiotic
relationship. The TCJ provides predominantly
sagittal plane motion and the STJ frontal and
transverse plane motion. If one of these joints is
unable to produce motion, e.g. after surgical
arthrodesis (joint in fixed position), then the
other compensates.
Calcaneal position. The posterior position of the
calcaneus should be observed. The calcaneus con-
tacts the ground in a slightly inverted position. As
a result of ground contact the calcaneus everts,
without the need for active muscle contraction, in
order to bring the medial tubercle of the calcaneus
into ground contact. The position of the calcaneus
moves very quickly from an inverted to an
everted position; it is therefore often easy to miss
subtle changes. At the end of midstance the calca-
neus lifts off the ground in order to prepare the
foot for propulsion (Case comment 8.2). An early
heel lift or a heel that makes no ground contact
suggests a neurological problem, an ankle equinus
or hamstring tightness. Rapid eversion of the cal-
caneus at heel contact can be associated with com-
pensation for a rearfoot deformity, e.g. fully
compensated rearfoot varus (sometimes described
as a heel strike pronator).
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 171
Navicular position. At heel contact the foot
pronates in order to absorb shock from ground
contact. During pronation the talar head adducts
against the navicular and as a result the distance
between the ground and the navicular reduces.
As the foot progresses into midstance and then
toe-off the foot re-supinates (talus abducts); at
this point the distance between the navicular and
the ground increases. If the talonavicular promi-
nence is visible for more than a moment, or if the
extent of the displacement is abnormal, careful
examination of the cause must be considered
during the non-weightbearing examination.
Midtarsal joint (MTJ). During midstance and
propulsion the MTJ plays an important role in
maintaining foot stability in order to withstand
the forces on the foot generated by uneven sur-
faces and particularly during propulsion.
Functioning of the MTJ is difficult to observe
during gait. However, if there is abnormal prona-
tion at the subtalar joint the forefoot will appear
abducted on the rearfoot at the site of the MTJ; an
increased concavity of the lateral border of the
foot at the level of the calcaneocuboid joint will
be apparent. This is an important sign of dys-
function, which may result in forefoot deformity
(Fig. 8.9). Unlocking of the midtarsal joint,
known as 'abductory twist', can occur during the
last half of midstance should re-supination of the
STJ fail to occur. The MTJ unlocks and causes the
forefoot to abduct on the rearfoot, resulting in a
less springy propulsive phase.
The metatarsals. Forefoot loading during the
contact phase should be observed from the ante-
rior viewpoint (Fig. 8.8A-C). The fifth metatarsal
head makes ground contact first, followed in
sequence by the other metatarsals; the first
metatarsal head is the last to make ground
contact. At propulsion, the reverse should
Case comment 8.2
Given that the average time of contact is between
650 and 750 rns, information has to be rapidly
absorbed by the observer. Practitioners may think
there is an ankle equinus as a result of gait analysis
only to find that on video replay the timing of heel lift
is in correct sequence with the opposite foot.
172 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Figure 8.9 The foot should be viewed from the posterior aspect to determine subtalar joint and midtarsal joint position during
midstance. The midtarsal joint offers a useful gauge to determine deformity due to abnormal pronation, leading to a medial
shift in the talonavicular relationship. The lateral border may be very apparent as the foot pronates abnormally. The
photograph shows moderate pronation with abduction at the midtarsal joint.
happen; the fifth is the first to leave the ground,
followed in sequence by the others, with
the first being the last to leave ground contact
(Fig. 8.80). During propulsion, motion at the first
MTPJ should be observed from the lateral side;
ideally, the MTPJ should dorsiflex to approxi-
mately 70
0
Meninqocel
~ Meninqornyelocel
Dorsal neural groove
Dorsal surface
Spinal cord
Spinal column 08
....: . : ~ , ...... ~
I I I I I ~
:J11!1i j j! i' j!! Ii i Iii,!!!
normal skin covering and absence of dimpling at
the base of the spine over lumbar vertebrae 3/4.
If a patient shows signs of dimpling, or a tuft of
hair at the base of the spine, it may indicate spina
bifida (Figs 14.2 and 14.3).
The presence of a scoliosis, kyphosis or lordo-
sis should be confirmed and whether it is a func-
tional or fixed deformity. A fixed deformity is
usually due to bony abnormality (structural),
whereas a flexible (functional) deformity is due
to soft-tissue deformity. Fixed spinal curvatures
are retained when sitting and flexing the spine,
especially scoliosis. Scoliosis is a frontal plane
deformity but can show signs of vertebral rota-
tion, causing a kyphotic or humped appearance
in the sagittal plane. Progressive thoracolumbar
problems can impair pulmonary function and in
time cause strain on respiration.
Marked scoliosis in children, especially where
epiphyseal growth remains, must be considered
potentially progressive. These patients should be
sent for a specialist opinion. Lordosis is increased
forward curvature in the sagittal plane, which
commonly affects the lumbar vertebrae. This
varies between races, Afro-Caribbeans having a
larger lordotic curvature than Asians and
Caucasians. Early walkers also appear to have an
increased lumbar lordosis but this is due to a pro-
truding abdomen.
Hips. The Trendelenburg sign may be useful in
detecting hip weakness. The Trendelenburg test
Figure 14.3 Hair tuft at the base of the spine seen with spina bifida occulta.
350 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
-----------
is a measure of normal muscle action between
the pelvis and greater trochanter (gluteus
medius). If the mechanism fails, it is deemed pos-
itive (Ch. 8).
Non-weightbearing assessment
Young children may be best examined on a
parent's lap. The lower limb is examined for pain
and swelling, obvious deformity and signs of
weakness. Both limbs should appear the same
regarding position, muscle bulk and tone. On
examination there should be symmetry in ranges
and direction of joint motion on each side.
Ranges of motion change with development;
however, quality of motion should be smooth
and unhindered. The temperature of the limb
should be warm and the limbs should be exam-
ined for dislocations, fractures, soft-tissue lumps
and enlargement of bony areas. Bring the legs
together and visually estimate the limb lengths at
the level of the malleoli.
Pelvis and hips. Altered function of the gluteal
muscles due to hip dysplasia will cause a change
in the shape of the buttocks. As a result the
gluteal fat folds will not appear level ('anchor
sign'). The central crease forms the central anchor
with the two base lines along the buttocks as the
bottom of the anchor. If the base lines are not
level this implies asymmetry. When performing
tests on the hips of children, it must be remem-
bered to avoid damaging the blood supply to the
femoral head. At birth the head of the femur lies
superficially in the acetabulum, which gives the
appearance that the thigh is externally rotated on
the pelvis. As the child develops, the head of the
femur goes deeper into the acetabulum, which in
turn allows the limb to internally rotate. In a
normal neonate there is a ratio of 2: 1 external to
internal hip rotation. With development, the
amount of external rotation reduces as the
amount of internal rotation increases, to the point
where a normal adult value shows equal internal
and external rotation of 45 in each direction.
When undertaking formal hip examination it is
important to evaluate flexion/ extension, abduc-
tion/ adduction and internal!external rotation
in both hip-flexed and hip-extended positions
(Ch. 8). This should be followed by assessment of
hamstring tightness (Fig. 14.4). Comparison of
the lengths of the tibiae and femurs can be per-
formed using the Allis/skyline test (see Ch. 8). A
discrepancy of limb length in an infant may be
indicative of hip dislocation.
In the neonate, ligamentous laxity may be
present, together with instability of the hip. This
is associated with circulating maternal hormones.
Correct technique in hip examination is para-
mount so as to prevent iatrogenic dislocation or
avascular necrosis of the femoral head. Nerves
lying posterior to the hip joint, particularly the
sciatic nerve, are subject to trauma in posterior
Figure 14.4 To determine hamstring tightness, lay the child supine, flex the hip to 90and attempt to extend the knee to 90.
hip dislocation. Damage to the nerve may lead to
motor and sensory loss.
Knees. During childhood the knee undergoes
a swing in the frontal plane from varus to valgus
and then back towards neutral (Beeson 1999).
Normal physiological bow legs (genu va rum)
(Fig. 14.5) will present between birth and 2 years
of age. Physiological genu valgum (knock knees)
is commonly seen between the ages of 3 and
5 years (Salenius & Vankka 1975). At 4 years of
age girls tend to be more knock-kneed than boys
(Heath & Staheli 1993). Physiological genu
valgum is generally outgrown by the age of 8
years (Beeson 1999). Some authors consider that
a second episode of genu valgum may occur
between 12 and 14 years of age (LaPorta 1973);
this is mainly seen in girls due to the pubertal
effects of growth (Cahuzac et al1995).
Knee position can be assessed with the child
either lying supine or standing. In the supine
position the child's knees or ankles are pushed
together with the legs parallel to the examina-
tion couch. The distance between the medial
femoral condyles of the knees and medial malle-
oli of the ankles can then be measured with a
tape measure.
Figure 14.5 16-month-old girl with tibia vara of both legs.
THE PAEDIATRICPATIENT 351
The child should be observed from the side for
genu recurvatum (hyperextension). This defor-
mity occurs in the sagittal plane. In very early
childhood, genu recurvatum may be present but
should reduce with development as the knee lig-
aments tighten. If reduction does not occur the
patient should be tested for ligamentous laxity
(Harris & Beeson 1998a).
The range of transverse plane motion in the
knee should be equal in both directions and be
minimal by the age of 4 years. In the newborn
20-30 of total motion may be available
(Kilmartin 1988). The amount of rotation of the
tibia on the femur should reduce by 10 at
3 years of age and at 6 years of age should show
minimal movement.
Patellae. The position of these large sesamoids
should be noted. Are they facing forward,
inwards or outwards? The patellae may be up to
30 externally rotated at birth. In young children
it is considered normal for the patellae to be
externally rotated, but by 4 years of age the patel-
lae should face forwards. The position of the
patellae is dependent upon normal hip develop-
ment. The change of direction of motion (DaM)
and range of motion (ROM) at the hip, femoral
torsion and reduction of external position of the
femoral head allow the patellae to face anteriorly.
These changes may continue until 10 years of age
and may give rise to an abnormal foot position.
Tibia-fibular segment. The tibiae should
appear symmetrical. Signs of excessive frontal
plane bowing should be noted and conditions
such as Blount's disease and rickets ruled out.
The calf muscles should be assessed for tone,
bulk and symmetry. Exaggerated lateral calf
muscles with forward facing patellae may
suggest medial genicular position.
The tibia and fibula twist with normal devel-
opment. At birth it will be apparent that the
malleoli are on the same level in the frontal
plane. As development ensues, the distal end of
the tibia twists externally (tibial torsion). The
lateral malleolus moves to a more posterior posi-
tion. There is axial rotation of the tibia and fibula
as well as twisting within the bone itself.
Malleolar position will reach an adult value
around 6 years of age with a position of 13-18
352 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
external malleolar positioning. This represents a
true external tibial torsion of around 18-25
(Elftman 1945, Lang & Volpe 1998). Medial tor-
sional deformity (a decrease in malleolar angle)
is associated with flat foot and in-toeing, whereas
lateral torsional deformity (an increase in malle-
olar angle) is seen in pes cavus.
Foot. Careful examination of each joint fol-
lowed by assessment of forefoot to rearfoot align-
ment is indicated. The rearfoot must be examined
with the ankle, the forefoot with the midtarsal
joint and the toes with the metatarsophalangeal
joints. Documentation of the weightbearing foot
shape is also important.
Ankle. In the newborn there is approximately
50 dorsiflexion and 30 plantarflexion at the
ankle. The ROM at this joint decreases with
development. Any limitation of ankle joint ROM
needs further evaluation (see Ch. 8). There
should be no deep creasing anterior to the ankle;
if present, this may indicate a fixed dorsiflexed
ankle (calcaneovalgus deformity). Where persis-
tent toe-walking exists, neurological pathology
needs to be distinguished from habitual causes.
Rearfoot. The calcaneus will have a relatively
low calcaneal inclination angle in the sagittal
plane. In the neonate the neutral position of the
calcaneus is 8-10 varus. The talus undergoes
valgus rotation up until 6 years. The angle of dec-
lination of the talus increases, which helps bring
the foot from its supinated embryonic position to
its more pronated adult position. At birth the
forefoot may be slightly inverted, but this will
reduce with normal development. The young
child has a relatively narrow heel in relation to
the breadth of the forefoot. The foot should have
a straight lateral border. In a rectus foot a line
bisecting the heel to forefoot will demonstrate
equal parts medial and lateral to the line. In an
adducted foot, the medial side will appear
greater and, conversely, in the abducted foot the
lateral side will appear greater (Fig. 14.6).
Forefoot. The midtarsus and metatarsus
should be examined for frontal plane abnormali-
ties as well as transverse abnormalities. The fore-
foot in the newborn is 10-15 inverted on the
rearfoot (Tax 1985). The latter is easier to identify
as it is more obvious. Deformity distal to the
Figure14.6 A line through the heel should bisect the
forefoot through the second or third toe. In this case the line
passes lateral to the second/third toe, demonstrating a mild
metatarsus adductus.
metatarsals may be directly related to the
metatarsals or may be an isolated deformity.
Joint laxity
Lower limb joint pain in children can sometimes
be associated with ligamentous laxity (Bulbena et
al 1992). This can be tested using the Beighton
scale (Beighton et al 1989), a 9-point scale which
assesses the degree of:
elbow hyperextension
thumb hyperextension
fifth finger hyperextension
knee hyperextension
spine - ability to bend and touch hands flat
on the floor (*)
[4 x 2] =8 + (*) =9
Children graded with 5 points or more are con-
sidered ligamentously lax. In addition to the
above, it may be noted that the child with liga-
mentous laxity presents with excessive eversion
of the calcaneus in stance.
Footwear
Evaluation of the child's footwear and hosiery is
important. Children's feet should be measured
on a regular basis to ensure they have not out-
grown their shoes. Footwear should be of the
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 353
-------------------------------------------------- --------------
correct length, width and depth. Often parents
present their children to clinic because they are
concerned about excessive shoe wear. It is impor-
tant to determine whether the shoe wear is
normal or abnormal. In making this decision it is
important to establish how long the shoes are
worn each day, the level and type of activity the
child engages in and the types of material the
shoe is constructed from. Wear marks may be
misleading: i.e. heavy toebox wear associated
with a child using the foot as a bicycle break can
be confused with a child who drags his foot due
to a hemiparesis.
It is important to communicate findings
directly with the child, as they may be undertak-
ing activities at day nursery that their parents are
unaware of. Assessment of footwear is consid-
ered in detail in Chapter 10.
CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE
LOWER LIMB OF CHILDREN
Developmental dislocation of the hip
(DOH)
This is usually detected shortly after birth, during
routine examination of the neonate by the paedi-
atrician. However, it is possible for the condition
to be missed and not picked up until later in the
child's development. The fact that hip dislocation
is not always congenital has resulted in a change
in terminology. Congenital dislocation of the hip
(CDH) is now known as developmental disloca-
tion of the hip (DOH), thereby reflecting the con-
tinuum of developmental dislocation over time
(Coleman 1994, Novacheck 1996). DOH may have
serious repercussions, leading to osteoarthritis,
limb shortening and hip pain.
In a normal hip the quality of motion should
be unimpaired when the hip is taken through its
range of motion. Various tests are used to estab-
lish the presence of DOH, although feeling for
displacement of the femoral head may be all that
is required. It should be noted that clinical exam-
ination may produce false negatives. X-ray and
ultrasound imaging can confirm a diagnosis.
Barlow's test. The baby is placed supine with
hips and knees flexed. Thumb pressure is
applied over the lesser trochanter with the
middle finger of each hand over the greater
trochanter. The femoral head is gently dislocated
by moving the pressure on the hand backwards.
Consequent release of pressure allows the head
to slip back into position. A positive result indi-
cates that the hips are unstable due to ligamen-
tous laxity. The test becomes less useful as the
child becomes older (Valmassy 1993). The
wisdom of this manoeuvre is questionable, as
the potential for avascular necrosis or neurolog-
ical damage is increased by intentionally dislo-
cating the hip joint.
Palmen's sign. This is similar to Barlow's test
and performed in the same manner. It is a
provocative test for a subluxable (but not dislo-
eatable) hip. If the hip is subluxable, the exam-
iner feels a give (but not a clunk) as the femoral
head is displaced partially out of the acetabulum
(Harris 1997).
Ortolani's manoeuvre. This is performed by
flexing the hips to 90
0
The middle fingers are
again placed over the greater trochanter and the
thigh is lifted and abducted. The hip can be relo-
cated with a palpable (rather than audible) click.
This test is reliable up to 6-8 weeks of age, but
clicking can arise from ligaments moving, giving
false positives.
Limitation of hip abduction. This test is used
when the infant's dislocated hips no longer
reduce with Ortolani's manoeuvre (after 2
months). Abducting the hip with the thigh and
knee flexed will be resisted on the dislocated
side. This is due to contracted adductors. The
anchor sign is abnormal.
Galleazi's sign. The infant is observed supine
with hips and knees flexed and with the feet
placed flat on the couch. In normal limbs the
level of the knees should be equal. If one knee is
lower than the other this may indicate hip
pathology on the low side. This is similar to the
skyline test for checking the length of the femur
and tibia.
Telescope (piston) sign. The hip may be out of
the acetabulum but still mobile along the ala of
the ilium. With the infant supine, the thigh in the
sagittal plane and at right angles to the trunk,
longitudinal traction may cause the head to slide
354 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
up and down along the lateral side of the ala
(Harris 1997).
Knee pain in the child
Complaints of significant, persistent knee pain
are relatively uncommon in children and
usually they present with a limp or refusal to
walk. The clinical history should attempt to
localise the pain, determine what activities exac-
erbate the pain and what treatment has been
provided to date. It is also useful to assess the
psychosocial dynamics of the child and his
family. All children between the ages of 5 and 15
years presenting with knee pain must also be
evaluated for ipsilateral hip disorders (Davids
1996). A structured approach to knee assess-
ment is essential (Ch. 8). A number of specific
knee tests are indicated in children:
Patella compression test. With the patient
lying supine and the knee extended, the practi-
tioner compresses the patella against the femoral
condyles. If performed too vigorously it will
cause pain, even in the normal knee. A more sen-
sitive approach of gradually loading the kneecap
is preferred and is less distressing for the patient.
Medial facet tenderness test. The patella is dis-
placed medially and the practitioner palpates the
posterior medial surface. Performing this test
also determines whether there is any tightness of
the lateral capsule tending to pull the patella lat-
erally, increasing shearing forces on the posterior
facets, which may damage the articular cartilage.
Quadriceps muscle bulk evaluation. The patient
is asked to contract the quadriceps muscle group;
the bulk of the vastus medialis muscle is
assessed. Loss of muscle bulk can occur with
chronic pain or poor mechanical function of the
knee.
Muscle function. Quadriceps muscle strength
and hamstring flexibility should also be assessed.
The 90: 90 test will determine hamstring tight-
ness which, when present, will tend to flex the
knee and increase patellofemoral compression.
Squatting test. The patient is asked to stand on
both feet and then crouch down. Patients with
severe pain will express discomfort; as the knee
flexes the posterior surface of the patella is com-
pressed against the femur. The degree to which
squatting is restricted will indicate the severity of
the condition.
Anterior knee pain can occur during adoles-
cence (more common in females). It is a recalci-
trant problem which, in a minority of cases, can
be disabling. The pain will be most intense
during or after vigorous activity, although kneel-
ing or sitting with a flexed knee for long periods
('cinema seat' sign) may also incite discomfort. A
high 'Q' angle (see Ch. 8) has been implicated as
a precipitating factor. Internal femoral rotation,
external tibial rotation and genu valgum are
known to increase this angle.
At certain stages of development an increased
'Q' angle will be normal when physiological
knee valgus is present. The 'Q' angle should
reduce to 15 by 6 years of age.
Osteochondroses causing knee pain. Intra-
articular knee pain due to osteochondritis disse-
cans, characterised by primary necrosis of
subchondral bone, will cause pain over the
lateral side of the medial femoral condyle.
Osgood-Schlatter's disease is a traction
apophysitis affecting the tibial tubercle and is
associated with patellar tendon strain. It pre-
dominantly affects males between 10 and 14
years of age. Pain is anterior and below the knee.
It is made worse by strenuous activity.
Examination demonstrates the presence of a
prominent and tender tibial tubercle and quadri-
ceps wasting may be visible. Extending the leg
against resistance exacerbates the symptoms.
Radiographs may show fragmentation of the
tibial tuberosity at the tendon insertion.
Abnormal frontal plane configuration
of the knee
Parental concern about knock knees or bow legs
is a common presenting complaint.
Genu varum
Genu varum is normally present from birth until
2 years of age. If a child presents with bow legs at
3-4 years of age, further investigation and treat-
ment may be necessary. A distance of more than
Scm between the knees, at any age, is cause for
concern and necessitates further investigation
(Sharrard 1976). Rickets and Blount's disease are
two conditions predisposing to genu vara with
tibial vara.
Rickets. Rickets will present as genu varum as
well as anterior bowing at the junction of the
middle and lower one-third of the tibia. Swelling
of the wrists and ankles and bossing of the
cranium is also seen in rickets. Radiological
investigation will show the epiphyses to be
widened and irregular, whereas the metaphyses
will appear 'cupped'.
Biochemical tests are performed to determine
levels of vitamin 0, calcium and phosphate,
which may be reduced due to dietary deficiency,
malabsorption, renal disease or hypophosphatasia.
If biochemical tests prove normal, Blount's
disease may be suspected.
Blount's disease. This is a condition affecting
the growth of the medial upper tibial epiphysis.
Cessation of the growth plate causes the tibia to
develop a lateral varus tilt. This condition has an
estimated incidence of 0.05 per 1000 live births
and is due to the lateral side of the growth plate
expanding faster than the medial side. Blount's
disease is thought to be a combination of obesity
and marked physiological bowing. This will
have the effect of compressing the medial side of
the growth plate, which causes further bowing of
the tibia. The lateral epiphysis continues to
expand as pressure is released. The medial epi-
physis will appear fragmented on X-ray. Blount's
disease may appear at any time between the ages
of 18 months and 4 years. Referral for treatment
should be initiated as the condition will invari-
ably progress without treatment. In the infant,
Blount's disease is often severe with both knees
affected. Arrest of the medial growth plate may
also affect older children, aged between 6 and 13,
in whom the deformity is usually unilateral and
less severe than the infantile variety, though no
less certain to progress without treatment.
Unilateral tibia vara can contribute to limb-
length discrepancy.
Trauma, infection (McRae 1997) and fluorosis
(Tachdjian 1972) can also result in marked genic-
ular bowing.
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 355
Genu valgum
Genu valgum is normally present between 3-5
years of age and 12-14 years of age. In severe
unremitting cases radiological examination
should be used to rule out developmental or
metabolic abnormalities of the epiphyses.
Surgical correction may have to be considered,
although this is rare. Unilateral knock knee
should be investigated as it is almost always a
pathological defect of the epiphysis associated
with either trauma, osteomyelitis, tumour or
developmental bone disturbance.
Excessive subtalar joint pronation of the foot
has been associated with genu valgum, as it
throws body weight medial to the central axis of
the foot and hence tends to force the foot into
pronation. Conversely, excessive varus deformity
of the forefoot may create frontal plane movement
of the knee, in order to bring the entire forefoot
into ground contact. Genu valgum will result.
Popliteal angle in children
The popliteal angle is defined as the angle of the
tibia to the femur when the hip is flexed and knee
extended. Evaluation of the popliteal angle is
used to assess hamstring tightness in healthy chil-
dren and hamstring contracture in cerebral palsy
(Katz et al 1992). It is also used as an indicator of
gestational age in infants. The mean angle in new-
borns is reported to be 27 and reduces to zero by
age 11 months (Reade et aI1984).
Hamstring, and more specifically medial ham-
string, shortening is a common cause of asym-
metrical hip motion and subsequent in-toeing.
Diagnosis is made by flexing the hip to 90 and
then attempting to extend the knee using the
90: 90 test (see Fig. 14.4). In children under 10
years, less than 70% extension is unsatisfactory.
Quality of motion is also evaluated while per-
forming the 90: 90 test. If the hamstrings resist
the final 30 of motion it is usual for the child to
experience discomfort, which indicates an abnor-
mal tightness. The medial hamstring tension can
be tested by internally rotating the flexed upper
thigh while gradually extending the knee. If,
with internal rotation of the thigh, knee extension
356 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
is limited and uncomfortable, then the medial
hamstring is the principal cause of the complaint.
Children with tight hamstrings can assume a
normal angle and base of stance; however, during
gait, as the knee extends just prior to heel contact,
the tight medial hamstring will abruptly rotate
the leg internally. Such cases will also demon-
strate a windmilling style of running, the lower
leg being circumducted during the late swing
phase of running in order to 'short-cut' around
the extended knee position. Growing pains are
common in such in-toers, Hamstrings should
therefore be tested in any child complaining of
persistent nocturnal leg pains.
In-toeing problems
In-toeing is often a cause for parental or grand-
parental concern because the child doesn't walk
like his peers. Children themselves may not be
unduly affected, unless their gait pattern causes
tripping. It is important to establish exactly what
the family's worries are, because resolving those
fears provides an important goal of treatment.
Sometimes, the concern is related to the child
tripping or a pronated foot.
Thirty percent of children in-toe at the age of 4,
but the condition persists in only 4% of adults
(Svenningsen et al 1990). It was once thought to
cause osteoarthrosis of the hip and poor sporting
ability (Alvik 1960), but it has subsequently been
shown to be unimportant in osteoarthrosis of the
hip (Hubbard et aI1988), while the sporting per-
formance of women with internal femoral posi-
tion has been found to be equivalent to normal
controls (Staheli et aI1977).
Resolution of the in-toeing gait usually occurs
between the ages of 4 and 11 (Fabry et al 1973,
Thackeray & Beeson 1996a, 1996b). Management
of in-toeing depends upon the level at which the
abnormality originates.
Assessment starts with gait analysis. The key
to accurate diagnosis is the position of the
patella. In the in-toeing child, the patella will
either point in the direction of progression or it
will be internally rotated or 'squinting'. A squint-
ing patella indicates that the cause of the gait
defect is proximal to the knee joint. Severely
adducted feet in the presence of a forward-
looking patella occur in cases of internal genicu-
lar position (knee), internal tibial torsion (leg)
and metatarsus adductus (forefoot).
Following gait analysis, the ranges of motion
at the hip and knee joint and the position of the
transmalleolar axis and forefoot should be
assessed. The range of hip rotation is assessed
with the knee and hip extended: the leg is
brought to the neutral position where the patella
is facing directly upwards (parallel with the
frontal plane). While viewing the patella, the leg
is internally and then externally rotated and the
degree of rotation estimated. In children of less
than 4 years, an excessive internal range of hip
motion is considered abnormal and will often
explain an in-toeing style of gait. In children
older than 4, asymmetry of motion may be
significant.
A common finding on hip examination of the
in-toeing child is an increased internal range of
hip motion but reduced external range of
motion. In such cases there is obviously
sufficient range of external motion to allow
normal walking; however, the child continues to
walk in-toed because it is easier to do so. The
parents should be told that the child is simply
walking along the line of least tension. Most
children who present with internal femoral
position grow out of the condition. While inter-
nal rotation falls from about 60 at age 4 to
under 40 in the adult, decreasing 2-3 per year
(Staheli 1993), external rotation remains at a
constant 40 from 4 years of age to adulthood.
The net result is loss of total rotation with age
and less internal bias to gait.
Tibial torsion and internal genicular position
Clinical diagnosis of internal tibial torsion is
made by measuring the transmalleolar axis,
which is formed between the midpoints of the
medial and lateral malleoli and the frontal plane.
The transmalleolar axis increases during the first
few years of life from 2-4 at birth to 10-20 in
the adult. Many complex methods have been
described for measuring tibial torsion (Reikeras
& Hoiseth 1989). A quick clinical estimation is
Figure 14.7 Check malleolar position by placing the
thumbs on the anterior surface of the malleoli. There should
be one thumb's thickness difference between the medial and
lateral malleoli.
made by placing the thumb of each hand anterior
to the malleoli; the medial malleoli should be one
thumb's thickness anterior to the lateral malleoli
(Fig. 14.7).
The incidence of internal tibial torsion has
been reported to range from 1 to 40% (Hutter &
Scott 1949, Michele & Nielsen 1976). In some
cases the transmalleolar axis will appear normal
though it is apparent on gait analysis that the
whole tibia is internally rotated on the knee. This
condition is called internal tibial position or
internal genicular position. An internal genicular
position is an important cause of in-toeing and is
so similar to tibial torsion that it is quite likely to
be misdiagnosed as such.
Internal genicular position only becomes a
cause for concern for the parents when the child
starts to walk. Examination will reveal a normal
transmalleolar axis but an abnormally high inter-
nal range of motion at the knee (Case history
14.2). This is estimated by stabilising the thigh
and grasping the foot and rotating the tibia inter-
nally and then externally (Fig. 14.8). Normally a
small but symmetrical range of motion of 10-20
will be evident. In cases of internal genicular
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 357
position, 45 or more of internal rotation may be
present. External rotation usually remains no
more than 10-20, although in some cases it is
completely absent.
The prognosis without treatment for internal
genicular position and internal tibial torsion is
good. It tends to resolve spontaneously around
5-6 years of age. Its significance lies in the fact
that it can cause frequent tripping. There is also
evidence to suggest that it may be a factor associ-
ated with the development of osteoarthrosis of
the knee (Turner & Smillie 1981). For that reason
it is worthwhile monitoring the child to ensure
that resolution does occur. The patient should be
seen every 6 months, gait analysis performed
and the range of motion at the knee and
the transmalleolar axis measured. If tripping
and clumsiness is severe, treatment may be
considered.
.'
Figure 14.8 Internal tibial position is estimated by
internally and externally rotating the tibia on the knee joint.
358 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Case history 14.2
A 2-year-old child presented with an adducted angle
of gait and tibial varum. Examination revealed a
normal tibial angle for the child's age; however, during
gait the tibiae appeared bowed. Clinical findings
revealed a forward-facing knee, with normal range of
motion at the hip. Transverse motion at the
tibial-femoral interface revealed excessive motion on
medial rotation. An in-toeing gait pattern was evident
and an exaggerated bulging of the gastrocnemius
muscle on the lateral side of the leg observed due to
the internal position of the leg. This gave a false
impression of tibial varum.
Conclusion: Medial genicular position.
Metatarsus adductus
Metatarsus adductus is a transverse plane defor-
mity arising at the tarsometatarsal (Lisfranc's)
joint. It was first recognised in 1864 by Henke,
who labelled the condition metatarsus adductus.
A number of other names, including skewfoot,
metatarsus varus, Z foot, serpentine foot, one-
third of a clubfoot and hookfoot, have subse-
quently been used. Some of these terms have
proved useful when describing more complex
variants of the basic condition. The hallmark of
the deformity is a C-shaped curvature of the
lateral border of the foot (Fig. 14.9). Other clinical
signs help confirm the diagnosis, including wrink-
ling of the skin in the medial longitudinal arch as
a consequence of bunching of the metatarsal
bases, a dorsal plantar crease medial to the first
metatarsal cuneiform joint, a high arch profile
created by adduction of the forefoot on the rear-
foot and, if the child is walking, a marked ten-
dency to lateral weightbearing. Internal tibial
torsion and abnormal knee position may also
occur in combination with metatarsus adductus.
The cause of metatarsus adductus is unknown.
A number of theories have been proposed,
although intrauterine moulding remains the most
popular. This theory is somewhat flawed because
from the 17th week of fetal life the mother is
aware that the fetus is moving, pushing up
against and away from the highly elastic uterine
wall. It is proposed that the direct deforming
influence of constricting amniotic bands (Torpin
1968) or fetal immobility caused by loss of amni-
otic fluid (Blane et al 1971), both of which
are associated with clubfoot, may be responsible
for the development of metatarsus adductus,
often referred to as 'one-third of a clubfoot'
(Ponsetti 1996).
Metatarsus adductus is thought to resolve
spontaneously in more than 90% of cases (Staheli
1993). Ponsetti & Becker (1966) found that only
Figure 14.9 A C-shaped curvature of the lateral border of the foot is the hallmark of metatarsus adductus. This 2-year-old
boy responded poorly to treatment as the deformity was quite rigid. The early management of metatarsus adductus is
desirable.
11.6% of their patients required treatment,
whereas Rushforth (1978), in an Tl-year follow-
up of 83 children, found that 86% demonstrated
complete resolution of the deformity.
Metatarsus adductus represents a spectrum of
mild to severe deformity. Assessment of the
foot's flexibility is the practitioner's primary
objective (Fig. 14.10). If the foot can easily be cor-
rected and the adductus position is mild, the
prognosis for spontaneous resolution is excellent.
As the deformity becomes more marked there is
often a corresponding increase in rigidity. Clinical
features of calcaneal eversion, medial talonavicu-
lar joint bulging and 'humping' of the dorsolat-
eral midfoot indicate that spontaneous correction
is unlikely.
Uncompensated metatarsus adductus presents
as a high-arched supinated foot; symptoms are
usually minimal and may be limited to skin
lesions under the fifth metatarsophalangeal joint.
Accordingly, prognosis is less favourable and
treatment should be instigated as soon as possi-
ble. Another significant finding on assessment is
the presence of a vertical crease overlying the
medial cuneiform. The vertical cuneiform crease
presents only in the more severely affected feet.
Radiographic examination can assist the evalu-
ation of metatarsus adductus in cases of skew- or
Z foot where rearfoot involvement exists. This
complex variant of metatarsus adductus presents
an everted rearfoot with plantarflexed and
adducted talus. Several charting techniques have
been developed to measure metatarsus adductus
and its variants (Berg 1986). The value of radiog-
raphy is limited. This is because the tarsal bones
do not ossify until the patient is 3-4 years old;
furthermore, in a non-weightbearing patient the
plate will simply show the position the foot was
held in for X-ray.
In metatarsus adductus parents are often con-
cerned about the child's adducted style of gait
rather than the foot shape. To ensure consistent
and reliable diagnosis, all other causes of
adducted gait, including internal femoral rota-
tion, internal tibial torsion, genicular position,
compensation for a forefoot valgus and hallux
varus (Jimenez 1992), must be ruled out. In con-
clusion, the 'level of deformity' may be quite
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 359
Figure 14.10 Assessing flexibility of the metatarsus
adductus foot by cupping the heel in inversion while pushing
the forefoot straight.
different. It is important therefore to note any
element of these conditions which may be
superimposed upon the metatarsus adductus,
as management of more than one condition may
be necessary.
Congenital talipes equinovarus
(clubfoot)
In congenital talipes equinovarus (CTEV), the
adductus of the forefoot occurs at the midtarsal
joint and not at the tarsometatarsal joint. There
are four components to the deformity: equinus,
inversion of the rearfoot, adductus and pronation
of the forefoot. The most severe deformities,
however, occur in the rearfoot. The talus is
abducted and the calcaneus is in equinus. The
calcaneus is also inverted, whereas the navicular
is displaced medial to the head of the talus. The
posterior and medial soft tissues, including tib-
ialis posterior, flexor digitorum longus and
triceps surae, are also shortened and atrophied,
forming a 'pipe stem' shape to the leg.
CTEV is difficult to correct and there is a high
incidence of recurrence. It is well documented
360 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
.--------------------- ---
that it is easier to correct a clubfoot deformity in
the first few days of life than after even a few
weeks (Ponsetti 1992).
Assessment of the clubfoot should address the
relative severity of each of the four components of
the condition. The plantarflexed first metatarsal
component is critical but usually yields well to
manipulative correction. The equinus and inver-
sion components of the rearfoot and the adduc-
tion of the forefoot at the talonavicular joint are
more resistant to correction (Ponsetti 1996).
Internal tibial torsion may also occur with club-
foot and must be also be corrected.
No matter how effective initial treatment, club-
foot will always result in shortening of the foot,
reduced calf muscle circumference and reduced
ankle and subtalar joint motion. Medial displace-
ment of the navicular and abduction of the talus
on the calcaneus may also persist. In less well
corrected clubfeet, poor gait and abnormal fore-
foot loading results in plantar callus and shoe-
fitting difficulties. The Ilizarov technique has
been used for the correction of persistent defor-
mities (Wallander et aI1996).
Flat feet
Flatfoot is one of the most common conditions
seen in paediatric podiatry clinics. There is no
universally accepted definition for flatfoot.
Morley (1957) suggested that children under
5 years of age appeared to have flat feet because
the medial longitudinal arch was filled with fat.
Radiological studies of toddlers' feet have
subsequently proved Morley wrong. All children
under 5 years have a depressed medial
longitudinal arch because of the low calcaneal
inclination angle and the underdeveloped
sustentaculum tali. It is only with external
torsion of the tibia, in the first 5 years of life, that
the calcaneus begins to assume its normal 20
angle of inclination and the medial longitudinal
arch becomes apparent. However, in the neonate,
fat deposits are retained for a short period and
tend to be quite marked on the dorsum of the
foot. This fat distribution does contribute to an
immature foot shape, which disappears quite
rapidly after the first 12 months.
'Flatfoot' is a common term used by health care
professionals and lay people alike. 'Excessive
pronation of the foot' is a more accurate term
because, as well as a lowered medial longitudinal
arch, the flat foot may also present the following
clinical signs (Fig. 14.11):
calcaneal eversion
bulging of the talus (talonavicular joint
subluxation)
abduction of the forefoot
'too many toes sign'
'C' -shaped lateral border.
Helbing's sign, described as a bowing of the
calcaneal tendon as it inserts into the calcaneus,
can sometimes be associated with excessive
pronation. Helbing's sign is not always reliable
because in some cases of excessive pronation it is
not seen. This is so when the foot maximally
pronates from a supinated position associated
with rearfoot varus. Pronation can occur using
the available range of subtalar joint motion, but
the calcaneus may still remain in a relatively
inverted position. This is commonly referred to as
'partially compensated rearfoot varus'. Marked
eversion of the calcaneus will inevitably lower
the medial longitudinal arch. With calcaneal ever-
sion there will also be abduction of the distal end
of the calcaneus, allowing the talus to assume a
more adducted and plantarflexed position which
can be seen clinically as medial bulging in the
area of the talonavicular joint. Once congruency
is lost at the talonavicular joint, progressive sub-
luxation of the joint follows. As the talus adducts,
the forefoot will assume an abducted position rel-
ative to the adducted rearfoot. This abnormality
will manifest clinically as the 'too many toes
sign'. When a normal foot is observed from the
rear, it is possible to see the fifth and sometimes
the fourth toe. In a pronated foot the third toe
may be seen as well. The lateral border of the foot
will be C-shaped with the concavity of the 'C'
overlying the calcaneocuboid joint.
The aforementioned clinical signs associated
with excessive pronation will occur with varying
degrees of severity. In some cases the only abnor-
mality will be a lowering of the medial longitu-
dinal arch: all other signs will be absent. Such
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 361
Figure 14.11 A 10-year-old boy with moderate pronation. Calcaneal eversion, medial talonavicular bulging and forefoot
abduction characterise excessive subtalar joint pronation associated with forefoot varus of both feet.
Figure 14.12 Staheli's table of normal arch index values.
The mean value for the arch index and two standard
deviations for each of the 21 age groups. The solid line
shows the mean changes with age; the shaded area shows
the normal ranges. The actual values for each age group
are represented by solid circles for the mean and open
circles for two standard deviations. (Reproduced by kind
permission of the Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery.)
of normal values should be used to determine
which children were abnormal and required
treatment. However, in practice, Staheli's normal
limits have proved to be very wide. Moreover,
the height of the arch alone is not a reliable indi-
cator of excessive pronation of the foot as the
arch is not flat in every pronated foot. Some
feet are not a cause for concern; indeed, a study
of 295 Israeli army recruits undergoing basic
training found that the incidence of stress frac-
tures was reduced in individuals with low-
arched feet (Giladi et aI1985).
When evaluating the child's pronated foot the
practitioner must consider other risk factors that
may affect the foot in its overall development
(Napolitano et al 2000). These contributing
factors may influence the treatment plan. The
risk factors include:
obesity
ligamentous laxity
hypotonia (Down's syndrome)
rotational deformities
frontal plane tibial deformities
equinus
tarsal coalitions.
Objective assessment of the pronated (flat) foot
is vital in order to measure how the patient's foot
is changing with the passage of time or indeed
how it is responding to treatment. Staheli et al
(1987) developed the arch index as an indicator
of foot pronation (Fig. 14.12). The narrowest
point of the arch width was divided by the
widest point of the heel width to give an arch
index value. Staheli recommended that his graph
AlB
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
.8
.6
.4
.2
0
o
2 4 6 8 10 12 1415-19 30's 50's 70+
362 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
patients will present with calcaneal eversion and
talonavicular bulging, but the medial longitudi-
nal arch may still be apparent.
Rose's valgus index (Rose et al 1985) takes into
account the eversion of the foot relative to the leg
and can be used in conjunction with Staheli's
index to obtain more valid information about the
degree of pronation (Fig. 14.13). Rose's technique
measures the displacement of the medial malleo-
lus relative to the weightbearing surface of the
heel. The more the foot pronates, the greater the
medial displacement of the malleoli.
The Rose and Staheli indices should be used to
determine objectively foot position and arch
height. Footprints should be repeated once
yearly in an attempt to identify change. The deci-
sion as to which children require treatment
should be based upon an assessment of the mag-
nitude of their symptoms, family history and the
footprint indices.
The patient with excessive pronation may
suffer from chronic low-grade discomfort in the
medial longitudinal arch, talonavicular area, or
leg muscle pain, or even all three. The tibialis
anterior muscle is particularly prone to causing
Figure 14.13 Rose's valgus index. Footprints to show
diagnostic features A. Theorientation ofthe heel oval, in
this case pointing towards the secondtoe B. The medial
pressure pattern which is commonly found in flat foot
C. To show the measurements for calculation ofthe valgus
index, which equals 1/
2
AB - AC x 1DDIABwhere A and B
are vertically beneath each malleolus and Cis the centreof
the heel print. (Reproduced bykind permission ofthe
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery.)
discomfort where the foot is excessively
pronated. This is because the excessive prona-
tory movement of the foot causes the muscle to
work aphasically, leading to overuse. In many
cases, such leg pain may be written off as
untreatable 'growing pains'. The condition is,
however, very responsive to conservative
orthotic treatment.
Whereas the young patient's foot may be
severely pronated, it usually remains quite
flexible, as demonstrated by the hallux dorsi-
flexion (Jack's test) and tiptoe-standing tests. This
invokes the windlass mechanism associated with
the plantar aponeurosis, affording a rise in arch
height where the foot is flexible (Case history
14.3). This test is negative for rigid flat feet. In a
rigid pronated foot the arch will not rise upon
dorsiflexion of the hallux; neither will the rear-
foot invert when the individual stands on tiptoes.
The swivel test, where the child is asked to turn
their upper body in stance and look over one
shoulder while the foot on that side is observed,
can be useful. If the foot demonstrates a supina-
tion movement with arch rise, this signifies a
flexible foot. The supination resistance test can
also be used. With the child weightbearing, the
examiner places two fingers on the plantar aspect
of the navicular and pushes up. If arch rise is
observed with this manoeuvre a flexible foot is
indicated. All of these tests are used to demon-
strate whether the tarsus is flexible or not.
r---
I Case history 14.3 I
Two brothers age 8 and 10 years presented with
excessively pronated feet in relaxed calcaneal stance
with severe talonavicular bUlging. Both boys
experienced foot fatigue bythe end of the dayand
pain in the styloid process. Their gaitwas excessively
abducted and apropulsive. Jack's test andthe tiptoe
test were positive, demonstrating a flexible flat foot.
Theposterior tibial tendon was anteriorly displaced
overthe medial malleoli, rendering it an inefficient
invertor and plantarflexor ofthe foot. Theperoneal
muscles werecontracted. Both boysdemonstrated 6
on the Beighton scale.
ConclusIon: Adiagnosis of severe flexible flatfoot
primarily caused bymalposition of posterior tibial
tendon and tightness ofperoneal muscles and
aggravated byligamentous laxity.
Rigid flat feet
A rigid pronated foot is a rare but significant
finding, usually indicative of tarsal coalition and
peroneal spastic flat foot. Tarsal coalition is a
fibrous, cartilaginous, or osseous union of two or
more tarsal bones and is congenital in origin
(Mosier & Asher 1984). Coalition between the
calcaneus and the navicular and the middle facet
of the subtalar joint is the most common presen-
tation and is conclusively linked with the syn-
drome of peroneal spastic flat foot, which is a
painful rigid pronation of the foot with tonic
spasm of the peroneal muscles.
Tarsal coalitions usually become painful during
the second decade of life when the coalition starts
to ossify, and may be associated in the rearfoot
with a sudden injury. The child will present with
mild deep pain in the subtalar joint and limitation
of subtalar joint movement. Generally the
more severe the limitation of movement, the more
severe the pain. Talocalcaneal coalition tends to
produce the most severe pronation of the foot.
If the tarsal coalition has ossified, its presence
can be confirmed by radiographic examination of
the foot. The calcaneonavicular coalition is best
demonstrated by a medial oblique radiograph. In
non-ossified calcaneonavicular coalition the
proximity of the two bones and flattening of the
navicular as it approaches the calcaneus should
arouse suspicion. Bone scans are useful for coali-
tions difficult to diagnose radiographically,
particularly of the talonavicular joint. Th.e
talocalcaneal joint most commonly shows a coali-
tion in the middle facet, which can be seen on
plain X-ray (Harris-Beath or ski-jumper's view),
of the rearfoot; however, computed tomography
(CT) is considered the gold standard. Magnetic
resonance imaging (MRI) is particularly useful in
the immature, before ossification of tarsal bones
is complete (Kulik & Clanton 1996).
The peroneal muscle spasm, which may be
occasional or continuous, is probably the
response of the peroneal muscles to effusion into
the subtalar joint. It has been demonstrated that
the posterior subtalar joint intra-articular pres-
sure is less in eversion than in inversion (Kyne &
Mankin 1965). The peroneal spasm can be
reduced by a local anaesthetic block of the
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 363
common peroneal nerve as it passes around the
neck of the fibular (Harris 1965). The spasm, a
protective mechanism, can be induced by force-
ful inversion of the foot.
The swivel test can also be used to determine
whether the subtalar joint (STJ) is at its end of
ROM. This is particularly useful in rigid flat feet.
The child is asked to look over one shoulder
while the practitioner observes the calcaneus of
the foot on the opposite side. If the foot fails to
pronate more, then the STJ is considered to be
functioning at its end of ROM.
Toe deformities
Hallux valgus
While not a common condition, juvenile hallux
valgus is a very significant foot problem.
Although it begins as an isolated abnormality of
the first metatarsophalangeal joint, as the condi-
tion progresses it affects the entire forefoot.
Advanced hallux valgus is known to be associ-
ated with hammer second toe and crowding of
the other lesser digits, widening of the forefoot
leading to footwear-fitting problems, and plantar
callosity and metatarsalgia.
A survey of 6000 9-year-olds determined a 2%
incidence of hallux valgus (Kilmartin et al 1991).
Although it is possible to detect hallux valgus in
children younger than 9 years, the changes are
often very subtle. On the other hand, in adoles-
cents the condition may have already progressed
to the point where it is involving the lesser toes.
Therefore, 9 years is probably the optimum age
for assessment and treatment.
The condition is known to be inherited
(Johnston 1959), so children with the complaint
are often presented by parents who are only too
familiar with the long-term effects of 'bunions'.
Diagnosis may be confirmed using the following
three criteria:
A first metatarsophalangeal joint angle in
excess of 15. This may be measured clinically
with a digital goniometer or on a
dorsoplantar weightbearing X-ray. If
radiographs are taken, the first-second
intermetatarsal angle should also be
364 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
measured. An angle in excess of the normal
9 is known to be the forerunner of clinically
apparent hallux valgus (Kilmartin et al 1994).
Osteophytic thickening of the first
metatarsophalangeal joint. Visible thickening
of the joint indicates hypertrophy of the
metatarsal head caused by loss of congruency
of the joint and subsequent early
degeneration of the joint surface.
A strong family history of the complaint. A
family history of hallux valgus, while not
confirming diagnosis, must arouse suspicion.
When hallux valgus is present in the child,
family history may also indicate the likely
prognosis for the child. A history of severe
deformity affecting siblings, parents and
grandparents is very significant.
Hypermobility may be a predisposing factor
for juvenile hallux valgus; therefore, the screen-
ing of all children with hypermobility for hallux
valgus would be beneficial (Harris & Beeson
1988b).
Pain is not usually a feature of hallux valgus
until the deformity is more advanced. Pain can
be associated with footwear irritation of the skin
overlying the medial eminence. Because of the
progressive nature of hallux valgus, once the
diagnosis is made, assessment and review is
likely to be a long-term commitment for both
patient and practitioner. Dorsoplantar weight-
bearing radiographs will allow accurate assess-
ment of the following:
first metatarsophalangeal joint space
hallux valgus angle
first-second intermetatarsal angle
medial eminence
osteophytic development
sesamoid position.
Radiographic changes are likely to be very
subtle in the short term. Three yearly X-ray
reviews are therefore indicated. Objective clinical
assessment can be made by taking a digital
goniometer measurement of the first metatarso-
phalangeal joint angle. This value should be
recorded after drawing around the weightbear-
ing foot on a blank sheet of paper. When stored in
the patient's records, this can provide a visual
indication of the effectiveness of treatment.
Because hallux valgus is usually a bilateral con-
dition, both feet can be assessed in this manner
even if at first only one foot is affected.
Lesser toe deformity
The following lesser toe deformities are common
cause for parental concern:
adductovarus third, fourth, fifth toes
dorsiflexed second toe
overriding fifth toe
underriding third and fourth toes.
Although the abnormal position is often real
enough, the condition may be quite benign. It is
essential that the practitioner applies the follow-
ing criteria to determine which lesser toe prob-
lems require treatment:
Is weightbearing on the apex of the toe
rather than the soft plantar pulp? Apical
weightbearing may lead to the development
of painful corns and callus.
Is the malposition of one toe likely to influence
the position of an adjacent, otherwise normal
toe? For example, a dorsiflexed second toe will
lead to loss of buttress effect on the hallux,
which will predispose to hallux valgus.
Is the malpositioned toe likely to be irritated
by footwear or cause footwear-fitting problems?
Is the type of toe deformity likely to respond
to conservative or surgical treatment?
Transverse and frontal plane deformities are
resistant to conservative treatment, whereas
sagittal plane deformities and even the sagittal
plane component of complex digital deformities
respond more favourably to conservative treat-
ment. In children older than 9, conservative treat-
ment becomes progressively less effective. In
infants younger than 2, corrective devices are
poorly tolerated and technically difficult to make
because of the size of the toes.
If treatment is indicated, conservative treat-
ment should always be attempted first. Response
to treatment may be monitored using a Harris &
Beath mat. The child should be asked to step on
and then off the mat. Digital purchase will be
recorded by the mat. A Musgrave pressure
system can also provide useful information.
Apical weightbearing by the digits will be
recorded as a very small area of digital contact,
whereas adductovarus will often appear as the
lateral side of the digit in contact with the mat. In
overriding digits, toe purchase with the ground
will be absent. Following treatment, the foot
printing procedure should be repeated.
Drawing around the toes on blank paper,
photocopying the undersurface of the foot while
supporting the child's weight, or photograph-
ing the digits will also facilitate objective assess-
ment of treatment success.
Causes of limping in children
The painful limb/ foot in the child is a cause for
concern. Limping is abnormal, and few parents
tolerate the problem for long before seeking
medical help. The child who limps presents a
diagnostic problem, as there are numerous con-
ditions that may result in limping (Table 14.3). It
is the practitioner's role to determine the likely
cause.
First, localise the problem in terms of anatom-
ical structure. Careful systematic evaluation
from the pelvis distally will help. Next, deter-
mine the cause, e.g. trauma. In young children
physical signs rather than subjective symptoms
will playa major role in determining aetiology.
Communication is limited and so true clinical
acumen is demanded. Thorough questioning of
the parents is crucial. It is easy to be led to false
conclusions, since pain may be influenced by
psychological factors, subjectivity and referred
pain (from the hip to the knee).
History
To arrive at a correct diagnosis it is paramount
that a detailed history is obtained. The exact cir-
cumstances surrounding the onset and duration
of the limp must be carefully and sympatheti-
cally explored. An episode of trauma is fre-
quently blamed as the cause of the limp, but may
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 365
-----------
be misleading. Conversely, an innocuous inci-
dent associated with minimal trauma may frac-
ture a pre-existing unicameral bone cyst of the
calcaneus or bone weakened by a tumour.
A number of specific questions should be con-
sidered (Table 14.4).
Limping after vigorous activity may be the
first clue to an impending stress fracture. Rather
than limp, the child may refuse to walk or stand
and ask to be carried.
If pain is associated with the limp, its exact
location and pattern should be explored with the
child. The pattern of referred pain in children
appears to be stronger than in adults (e.g. pain
referred to the knee due to medial hip problems
such as slipped capital femoral epiphysis (SCFE)
or osteoid osteoma). The character of the pain
may be helpful, such as the constant pain from an
expanding tumour or infection versus pain
related to joint motion. Conditions which lead to
demineralisation of bone frequently cause gener-
alised pain, particularly in the weightbearing
bones. Lower extremity pain and limping may be
the first signs of systemic illness such as juvenile
idiopathic arthritis (JIA), leukaemia, Gaucher's
disease or chronic renal disease.
The age of the patient will make certain diag-
noses more suspect:
developmental dislocation of the hip in the
young child
Perthes' disease or toxic synovitis of the hip
in 5-7 year olds (more common in males than
females on a 6:1 ratio)
Kohler's oseteochondritis of the navicular
(5-12 year olds)
heel pain (Sever's traction apophysitis) in
9-12 year olds
SCFE or anterior knee pain in young
adolescents 02-15 years age).
Osteochondroses such as Perthes', Kohler's,
and Freiberg's diseases are a group of disorders
associated with trauma and altered vascular
supply to bone (DeValentine 1992) which com-
monly cause limping in children. Other examples
of osteochondroses affecting the foot are given in
Table 14.3.
366 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 14.3 Limp relating to specific location
Location Possible causes
Nervous system
CNS
PNS/ muscle
Back
Hip
Femur/tibia
Knee
Ankle/foot
Miscellaneous
Cerebral tumour
Cerebral palsy
Spina bifida
Spinal muscular atrophy
Poliomyelitis
Friedreich's ataxia
Muscular dystrophy
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
Trauma
Acute appendicitis
Herniated nucleus pulposus (slipped disc)
Scheuermann's disease of the spine (osteochondritis of spine)
Spondylolisthesis (forward displacement of vertebra on one distal to it)
Developmental dislocation of the hip (DDH)
Slipped capital femoral epiphysis (SCFE)
Transient synovitis of the hip
Legg-Calve-Perthes disease
Trauma
Coxa vara (provokes waddling gait)
Trochanteric bursitis
Fracture (fractured femur may present as hip or knee pain)
Blount's disease
Limb-length inequality (short femur or tibia)
Osgood-Schlatter's disease (traction apophysitis)
Osteochondritis dissecans
Chondromalacia
Haemophilia
Sickle-cell anaemia
Rickets
Baker's cyst
Referred pain from hip
Fracture/sprai n
Rickets (ankle)
Osteomyelitis (calcaneus)
Unicameral bone cyst (calcaneus)
Sever's disease (traction apophysitis)
Osteochondroses - Mouchet's or Diaz/K6hler's/ Buschke's/Freiberg'slTreve's disease
Haglund's disease (osteochondrosis of accessory navicular)
Iselin's disease (traction apophysitis)
Accessory navicular - type II (Romanowski &Barrington 1991)
Tarsal coalition
Embedded foreign body in foot
Verruca
Onychocryptosis
Subungual exostosis
Septic arthritis (juvenile idiopathic arthritis)
Angioleiomyoma
Leukaemia
Attention-seeking device
Child abuse
Table 14.4 Questions the practitioner should consider
when assessing a child with a limp
Is the limp constant or intermittent?
Is the limp only present in the morning, at the end of the
day when the child is fatigued or is it present throughout
the day?
What is the posture of the lower extremity when the child
is limping?
What is the effect of climbing stairs or running?
Did the limp start following vigorous activity?
Physical examination
Gait assessment should be preferably under-
taken unassisted by the parent. The uncoopera-
tive child is best assessed when he thinks the
examination is finished. Stiffness or limitation of
motion of a single joint forces the surrounding
joints to compensate by increased movements.
This results in an irregular or jerky gait, such as
the forward thrust of the pelvis with a stiff hip or
hiking the pelvis to swing through a stiff knee.
Positional change may occur, such as external
rotation of the foot to accommodate a stiff ankle
and limited dorsiflexion or external rotation of
the entire limb in SCFE. Sometimes it is helpful to
accentuate the limp by asking the child to walk
on his toes or heels. Listening to the gait can be
informative: the slapping of the foot in drop foot,
the scraping sound of spastic gait or the quick
soft steps of an antalgic gait. Inspecting the shoes
for abnormal wear is useful: increased toe wear
in toe walkers, destruction of the medial shoe
counter in severe abnormal pronation.
A non-weightbearing evaluation will help to
clarify initial impressions about the limp. Joints
should be examined individually and compared
to the contralateral side and with expected
normal values, in particular observation for
joint stiffness, limited motion or guarding.
Marked changes to joint angle measurements
indicate disease or injury and should not be
attributed to immaturity. Joint stiffness fre-
quently accompanies synovial swelling and/ or
joint effusion as seen in JIA, whereas laxity of a
joint generally points to a ligamentous problem.
In the hip, telescoping or pistoning are the
classic signs of dislocation. A formal knee exam-
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 367
ination may be required to exclude knee pathol-
ogy. Measurement of limb lengths is important,
as limb shortening may be an early sign of a dis-
located hip. Cutaneous changes should not be
overlooked. Extra skin folds, cafe au lait spots,
erythema or heat may provide an excellent clue
to diagnosis.
A complete neurological examination includ-
ing evaluation of muscle function and strength
is important. A neurological abnormality is fre-
quently the underlying cause of many difficult
to diagnose limp problems (e.g. the child with
early Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease who pre-
sents with a mild cavus foot and toe clawing).
Subtle variations in neurological function may
only be noticeable with weightbearing or fol-
lowing vigorous activity. The Trendelenburg
test (ability to stand on one foot) is a valuable
clue to limb stability. Most normal children over
4 years of age can sustain this position for a
minimum of 30 seconds. Less time (a delayed
Trendelenburg) may suggest weakness of
the hip abductors or hip instability associated
with acetabular dysplasia. Weakness of a
specific muscle is usually due to a local problem
(e.g. quadriceps atrophy accompanying a knee
complaint), whereas weakness of muscle groups
is usually associated with primary muscle dis-
eases, systemic illness or neurological problems
(Hensinger 1986).
Certain limping patterns are characteristically
associated with weakness of specific muscles.
Tightness or spasticity of the muscles and poor
voluntary control are good clues to mild cerebral
palsy. Similarly, running accentuates the flexion
and posturing of the upper limb in a child with
mild spastic hemiplegia. Rupture of the calcaneal
tendon will lead to drop foot; Thompson's test
should be performed (Ch. 8). Hamstring inflexi-
bility can result in a flexed knee gait with abrupt
internal rotation of the leg at heel strike, particu-
larly if the medial hamstrings are tight. Limited
straight leg raising can be associated with ham-
string inflexibility, but also other causes such as
discitis or spondylolysis and spondylolisthesis
need to be excluded (Fields 1981). These usually
give rise to back pain, which radiates laterally
into the buttocks.
368 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Special tests
The history and physical examination may be
supplemented by a variety of radiological or lab-
oratory tests, depending on the clinical assess-
ment of the child. Generally, start with
non-invasive tests, then progress to more inva-
sive tests as indicated. Due to the diffuse nature
of pain patterns in children, a larger area may be
exposed than might be chosen for an adult, e.g.
radiographs of the hip and knee when a problem
is suspected in the femur. Radiographs should
include anteroposterior and lateral views of the
area and comparison views of the uninvolved
side. In acute osteomyelitis where bone changes
may not be seen for 7-10 days a bone scan may
be more helpful.
Laboratory studies include blood count, differ-
ential, erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR),
blood cultures or direct aspiration. The ESR is
normal in trauma, the osteochondroses and
SCFE, whereas it is raised in osteomyelitis, septic
arthritis, JIA and malignancy. More complex and
invasive tests should be reserved for the more
complicated cases.
Infections
Verrucae are endemic in children, particularly
between 6 years of age and the late teens. The
source of the viral infection is often hard to iden-
tify and advice will depend upon duration,
symptoms, activities and attitude toward the
problem. The presence of tinea pedis can be diag-
nosed from skin scrapings; teenage boys are par-
ticularly susceptible to fungal infections
associated with hyperhidrosis.
Juvenile plantar dermatitis
Another seasonal condition is forefoot eczema or
juvenile plantar dermatosis (Ch. 9). The aetiology
is uncertain but it is not thought to be a chronic
contact dermatitis. A rash appears on the weight-
bearing area of the foot. A pink, shiny or glazed
appearance is noted with scaling. The skin thins
and is inflexible, with resultant fissures forming.
Differential diagnosis includes tinea pedis.
Psoriasis
Acute guttate psoriasis is the commonest form in
the young and often related to a minor infection
such as a streptococcal sore throat. The rash
either subsides in about 6 weeks or progresses to
plaque psoriasis (Beeson 1990). Plaque psoriasis
mainly affects the extensor surfaces but occasion-
ally the flexures. The latter may involve the inter-
digital web spaces and nail folds.
Vasospastic disorders
These used to be very common in children
because of poor economic and housing condi-
tions. Their incidence has declined in recent
decades. However, chilblains still occur in chil-
dren who are exposed to extremes of tempera-
ture due to inadequate footwear and hosiery in
winter or poor home conditions. They appear as
red, blotchy, intensely itchy areas. Broken
chilblains may become infected.
Dark mauve swellings around calf muscles,
thighs and buttocks indicate erythrocyanosis.
This affects overweight females in particular.
Acrocyanosis, reddening of the hands and feet,
may also occur in children. Both erythrocyanosis
and acrocyanosis are indicative of poor blood
supply and response to cold.
Juvenile idiopathic arthritis (JIA)
JIA, previously known as juvenile chronic arthri-
tis, is one of the most common chronic illnesses of
childhood. It affects 1 in 1000 children (Malleson
& Southwood 1993) and is a major cause of func-
tional disability. The child with JIA may present
with lower limb pain. Both forefoot and rearfoot
deformities are common; however, the type of
deformity is difficult to predict due to the
influence of other joint deformities and the child's
age when the disease is active (Beeson 1988).
Treatment is based upon maintaining a good
lower limb position with splints/orthoses,
maximum muscle strength, a full range of joint
motion and appropriate footwear. The use of a
team approach in the management of this condi-
tion is paramount (Beeson 1995).
SUMMARY
Although the assessment process is similar, the
skills required to assess the child do differ from
those used to assess an adult.
Assessment of the child requires sufficient
knowledge of normal development and the
ability to differentiate between self-limiting
developmental conditions and significant, persis-
tent abnormalities, and those that warrant
further evaluation. The practitioner must appre-
ciate normal developmental milestones in order
to undertake a thorough assessment.
This chapter has primarily concentrated on
REFERENCES
Alvik L 1960 Increased anteversion of the femoral neck as a
sole sign of dysplasia coxae. Acta Orthopaedica
Scandinavica 29: 301-306
Apgar V 1953 Evaluation of the newborn infant. Current
Research Anesthesia Analgesics 32: 260
Beeson P 1988 Juvenile chronic arthritis: the foot. The
Chiropodist 43(2): 20-26
Beeson P 1990 The clinical significance for chiropodists of
recent advances made in the pathology and treatment of
psoriasis. Journal British Podiatric Medicine 45(3): 43--46
Beeson P 1995 Podiatric perspective: a case study of
rheumatoid arthritis and a multidisciplinary approach.
British Journal Therapy Rehabilitation 2(10): 566-571
Beeson P 1999 Frontal plane configuration of the knee in
children. The Foot 9(1): 18-26
Beighton P H, Grahame R, Bird H A 1989 Hypermobility of
joints, 2nd edn. Springer, Berlin
Berg E E 1986 A reappraisal of metatarsus adductus and
skewfoot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 68-A:
1185-1196
Blane W A, Mattison D R, Kane R 1971 LDS intrauterine
amputations and amniotic band syndrome. Lancet 2: 158
Bulbena A, Duro J C, Porta M et al 1992 Clinical assessment
of hypermobility of joints: assembling criteria. Journal
Rheumatology 19(1): 115-122
Cahuzac J Ph, Vardon D, Sales de Gauzy J 1995 Development
of the clinical tibiofemoral angle in normal adolescents.
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 77-B: 729-732
Coleman S S 1994 Developmental dislocation of the hip:
evolutionary changes in diagnosis and treatment
[Editorial]. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics 14: 1-2
Davids J R 1996 Pediatric knee: clinical assessment and
common disorders. Pediatric Clinics of North America
43(5): 1067-1090
DeValentine S D 1992 Foot and ankle disorders in children.
Churchill Livingstone, New York, pp 452-458
Elftman H 1945 Torsion of the lower extremity. American
Journal Physiology and Anthropology 3: 255-265
Fabry G, McEwan G D, Shands A R 1973 Torsion of the
femur (a follow up study in normal and abnormal
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 369
common paediatric orthopaedic conditions of
the lower limb. Brief discussion has considered
pertinent vascular, dermatological and arthritic
conditions that lead to patients seeking advice.
The practitioner must identify the cause of any
pain and be vigilant for signs of neuromuscular
deficit. In a well-resourced nation such as the
UK, most severe problems associated with the
foot and lower limb are detected at birth.
However, all practitioners should be aware of
problems that may have missed detection or
which are relatively mild but may still lead to
functional problems in later life.
conditions). Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 55A:
1726-1738
Fields L 1981 The limping child: a review of the literature.
Journal American Podiatric Association 71(2): 60-64
Gauthier G, Elbaz R 1979 Freiberg's infraction: a
subchondral bone fatigue fracture. A new surgical
treatment. Clinical Orthopedics Related Research 142:
93-95
Giladi M, Milgrom C, Stein M et al 1985 The low arch, a
protective factor in stress fractures. Orthopedic Review
14: 709-712
Harris E J 1997 Hip instability encountered in pediatric
podiatry practice. Clinics in Podiatric Medicine and
Surgery 14(1): 179-208
Harris R 11965 Peroneal spastic flat foot (rigid valgus foot).
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 47-A: 1657-1667
Harris M-C R, Beeson P 1988a Is there a link netween
juvenile hallux abducto valgus and generalised
hypermobility ? A review of the literature. Part I. The
Foot 8(3): 125-128
Harris M-C R, Beeson P 1988b Generalised hypermobility: is
it a predisposing factor towards the development of
juvenile hallux abducto valgus? Part 2. The Foot 8(4):
203-209
Heath C H, Staheli L T 1993 Normal limits of knee angle in
white children genu varum and genu valgum. Journal
Pediatric Orthopedics 13: 259-262
Hensinger R N 1986 Limp. Pediatric Clinics of North
America 33(6): 1355-1364
Hubbard D D, Staheli L T, Chew D E 1988 Medial femoral
torsion and osteoarthrosis. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics
8:540-542
Hutter C G, Scott W 1949 Tibial torsion. Journal Bone and
Joint Surgery [Am] 31-A: 511-518
Jiminez A L 1992 Hallux varus. In: McGlamry D E, Banks
A S, Downey M S (eds) Comprehensive textbook of foot
surgery, 2nd edn. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, pp
587-588
Johnston 01959 Further studies of the inheritance of hand
and foot anomalies. Clinical Orthopedics 8: 146-159
370 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Katz K, Rosenthal A, Yosipovitch Z 1992 Normal ranges of
popliteal angle in children. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics
12:229-231
Kilmartin T E 1988 Medial genicular rotation: aetiology and
management. The Chiropodist 43: 181-184
Kilmartin T E, Barrington R L, Wallace W A 1991
Metatarsus primus varus. Journal Bone and Joint
Surgery [Br] 73B: 937-940
Kilmartin T E, Barrington R L, Wallace W A 1994 A
controlled prospective trial of a foot orthosis in the
treatment of juvenile hallux valgus. Journal Bone and
Joint Surgery [Br] 76B: 210-214
Kulik S A, Clanton T 01996 Tarsal coalition. Foot and
Ankle International 17(5): 286-296
Kyne P J, Mankin H J 1965 Changes in intra-articular
pressure with subtalar joint motion with special
reference to the etiology of peroneal spastic flat foot.
Bulletin of the Hospital for Joint Diseases 26: 181-186
Lang L M G, Volpe R G 1998 Measurement of tibial torsion.
Journal American Podiatric Medical Association 88(4):
160-165
LaPorta G 1973 Torsional abnormalities. Archives Podiatric
Medical Foot Surgery 1: 47-61
Luder J 1988 Early recognition of cerebral palsy. Update
15 March: 1955-1963
McRae R 1997 Clinical orthopaedic examination. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh, pp 231-238
Malleson P N, Southwood T R 1993 The epidemiology of
arthritis: an overview. In: Southwood T R, Malleson P N
(eds) Bailliere's clinical paediatrics international practice
and research. Bailliere Tindall, London, 1: 635-636
Meadow R 1992 Difficult and unlikeable parents. Archives
Disease in Childhood 67: 697-702
Michele A A, Nielsen PM 1976 Tibiotalar torsion:
bioengineering paradigm. Orthopedic Clinics of North
America 7: 929-947
Morley A J M 1957 Knock knees in children. British Medical
Journal 2: 976-979
Mosier K M, Asher M 1984 Tarsal coalitions and peroneal
spastic flat foot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am]
66-A: 976-984
Napolitano C, Walsh S, Mahoney L et al2000 Risk factors
that may adversely modify the natural history of the
paediatric pronated foot. Clinics in Podiatric Medicine
and Surgery 17(3): 397-417
Novacheck T F 1996 Developmental dysplasia of the hip.
Pediatric Clinics of North America 43: 829-848
Ponsetti I V 1992 Current concepts review. Treatment of
congenital clubfoot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Am] 74-A: 448-454
Ponsetti I V 1996 Congenital clubfoot - Fundamentals of
treatment. Oxford University Press, Oxford, pp 68-80
Ponsetti I V, Becker J R 1966 Congenital metatarsus
adductus, the results of treatment. Journal Bone and Joint
Surgery [Am] 74-A: 702-711
FURTHER READING
Berkow R (ed) 1987 The Merck manual, 15th edn. Merck
Sharp & Dohme Research Laboratories
Reade E, Hom L, Hallum A et al 1984 Changes in popliteal
angle measurement in infants up to one year of age.
Developmental Medicine Child Neurology 26: 774-780
Reikeras 0, Hoiseth A 1989 Torsion of the leg determined by
computerised tomography. Acta Orthopaedica
Scandinavica 60: 330-333
Romanowski C A J, Barrington N A 1991 The accessory
ossicles of the foot. The Foot 1(2): 61-70
Rose G K, Welton E A, Marshall T 1985 The diagnosis of
flat foot in the child. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br]
67-B: 71-78
Rushforth G F 1978 The natural history of hooked forefoot.
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 60-B: 530-532
Salenius P, Vankka E 1975 The development of the tibio-
femoral angle in children. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Am] 57-A: 259-261
Sharrard W J W 1976 Intoeing and flat feet. British Medical
Journal 1:888-889
Smillie I S 1969 Treatment of Freiberg's infraction.
Procedures of Royal Society of Medicine 60: 29-31
Staheli L T 1993 Rotational problems in childhood. Journal
Bone and Joint Surgery 75-A: 939-949
Staheli L T, Lippert F, Denotter P 1977 Femoral anteversion
and physical performance in adolescent and adult life.
Clinical Orthopedics 129: 213-216
Staheli L T, Chew D E, Corbett M 1987 The longitudinal
arch. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 69-A: 426-428
Svenningsen S, Tierjesen T, Auflem M 1990 Hip rotation and
intoeing gait. Clinical Orthopaedics Related Research 251:
177-182
Tachdjian M 0 1972 Pediatric orthopaedics, 2nd edn, Vol 4.
W BSaunders, Philadelphia, p 2826
Tachdjian M 01985 The child's foot. W BSaunders,
Philadelphia
Tax H 1985 Podopaediatrics, 2nd edn. Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore, pp 90-97
Thackeray C, Beeson P 1996a In-toeing gait in children: a
review of the literature. The Foot 6(1): 1-4
Thackeray C, Beeson P 1996b Is in-toeing gait a
developmental stage? The Foot 6(1): 19-24
Torpin R 1968 Fetal malformations caused by amniotic
rupture during gestation. Charles C Thomas, Springfield
Turner M S, Smillie I S 1981 The effect of tibial torsion on the
pathology of the knee. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Br] 63-B: 396-398
Valmassy R L 1993 In: Thomson P (ed) Introduction to
podopaediatrics. W B Saunders, London, pp 29-31
Wallander H, Hansson G, Tjernstrom B 1996 Correction
of persistent clubfoot deformities with the Ilizarov
external fixator. Acta Orthopaedica Scandinavica 67(3):
283-287
Waugh W 1958 The ossification and vascularisation of
the tarsal navicular and their relation to Kohler's
disease. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 403-B:
765-768
Behrman R E, Vaughan V C 1987 Nelson textbook of
pediatrics, 13th edn. W BSaunders, Philadelphia
Drennan J 1992 The child's foot and ankle. Ravens Press,
New York
Ferrari J1998 A review of the foot deformities seen in
juvenile chronic arthritis. The Foot 8(4): 193-196
Illingworth R S 1990 The development of the infant and
the young child. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
McCrea J D 1985 Pediatric orthopaedics of the lower
extremity. Futura, New York
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 371
Pollak M 1993 Textbook of developmental paediatrics.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Sharrard M D 1979 Paediatric orthopaedics and fractures,
Vols I and II, 2nd edn. Blackwell Scientific, London
Sheridan M D 1980 From birth to five years. Children's
developmental progress, 7th edn. NFER-Nelson
Publishing, Berkshire
Thomson P (ed) 1993 Introduction to podopaediatrics.
W B Saunders, London
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 373
Guiding principles 373
Role of the sports podiatrist 374
Assessment environment 375
Injury risk factors 376
Intrinsic risk factors 376
Extrinsic factors 383
History taking 387
Medical history 387
Social history 388
Drug history 388
Sport history 389
Injury history 390
Examiningthe injured structure 391
Specialist investigations 392
Injury grading systems 393
Summary 393
Assessment of the
sports patient
B. Yates
INTRODUCTION
With increasing numbers of people undertaking
regular exercise there has been a corresponding
rise in the number of sports injuries. In 1991it was
estimated that there were 5 million cases of exer-
cise-related morbidity in the United Kingdom
(Nicholl et al 1991). This would equate to 1 in
every 10 people sustaining one injury each year.
With the profile of sport in society increasing, and
the incentive of high salaries for professional
sports men and women, it is likely that injury inci-
dence figures are now even greater among the
general population. Podiatry has a significant part
to play in the management of sports injuries, as
the majority of these injuries occur in the lower
limb. The commonest acute injury is the ankle
sprain (Colville 1998); the commonest tendon
injury is to the Achilles tendon (Marks 1999) and
the most frequently seen joint pathology is
patellofemoral syndrome (Walsh 1994). Podiatric
intervention is often an integral component in the
successful management of these and other lower
limb injuries.
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
As with other areas of assessment it is essential to
take an accurate history and perform a detailed
examination. The majority of sports injuries seen
by the podiatrist are chronic in nature due to
overuse: they represent a diagnostic challenge
due to the long injury period and compensation
mechanisms which may have occurred as a result
373
374 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
of the injury. Both of these factors can make it
difficult to confirm the diagnosis of the injury
and ascertain its aetiological factors.
The history and examination should be aimed
at both diagnosing the injury and determining
the presence or absence of intrinsic (personal)
and extrinsic (environmental) risk factors associ-
ated with the injury. The identification of intrin-
sic and extrinsic risk factors can assist in making
the diagnosis and guiding the management plan.
It is important to gain as much information as
possible about the injury. Information on the
duration, nature, frequency and intensity of
symptoms must be gained along with details of
the injury mechanism, aggravating factors and
previous treatment.
Clinical examination of the patient, which
should include the whole musculoskeletal
system, with a specific focus on the lower limbs
and the injury site, should follow the standard
examination protocol of observation, palpation
and movement. When turning to the injury site
it is imperative to know the anatomical struc-
tures of the region in order to make an accurate
diagnosis. After observing the area for
inflammation, erythema, ecchymosis, structural
defects and malalignment the practitioner
should physically examine the area. The
purpose of the physical examination is to iden-
tify, isolate and then stress individual anatomi-
cal structures to try and reproduce the patient's
symptoms. This should help enable the practi-
tioner to identify whether the pathology is iso-
lated to a specific tendon, ligament, bone, joint,
muscle or nerve. A summary of the assessment
process is given in Figure 15.1.
ROLE OF THE SPORTS PODIATRIST
The podiatrist may be part of an interdisciplinary
sports medicine team, a multidisciplinary sports
medicine team or working as a sole practitioner.
Central members of a sports medicine team are
likely to include a sports physician, orthopaedic
Specialist
investigations
Intrinsic factors
Previous injurY,fitness,
flexibility
Extrinsic factors
Sport, equipment,
surface, training errors,
i
environment
Injury observation
Swelling,
malalignment,
ecchymosis, etc
I
Injury assessment
Identify, isolate and
stress injured structure
Intrinsic factors
Structural alignment,
Flexibility, physical bulid
Extrinsic factors
Equipment, sport
,. !
technique
DEFINITIVE )
DIAGNOSIS
IFFERENTIAL
DIAGNOSIS
HISTORY
(
Medical history
t
Social history
Drug history
(0
Injury history
Location, duration,
mechanism,
Pain profile, +/- factors,
previous treatment
r
Figure 15.1 Assessment of the sports patient.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 375
--------.------------- ----1
Case history 15_1
A 19-year-old female, elite cross-country runner with
pain in her medial longitudinal arch was referred, by
her coach, to a multidisciplinary sports medicine
team. The pain had been present for 4 weeks and
was gradually getting worse. The pain was centred
around the navicular and the insertion of the posterior
tibialis tendon was both prominent and painful. Base
line X-rays were negative for a navicular stress
fracture but demonstrated a type 2 os tibialis
externum. A magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan
was requested by the sports physician to examine the
health of the tibialis posterior tendon and determine
the presence of a stress fracture. The scan confirmed
a navicular stress fracture and healthy tendon. She
was treated with a short leg cast for 6 weeks followed
by prophylactic orthoses to reduce pronatory
compression forces on the navicular. She was also
identified as being oligomenorrhoeic with only four
menstrual cycles per year. This is known to be a risk
factor for stress fractures (Tomten et al 1998). She
was subsequently referred for dual energy X-ray
absorptiometry (DEXA) scanning of her pelvis, spine
and foot, which demonstrated reduced bone mineral
density. She was therefore referred to a
gynaecologist and sports nutritionist to address these
imbalances. Three years on she is still competing at
an elite level and has had no further stress fractures.
surgeon, physiotherapist and podiatrist. Other
members of the team may include a general prac-
titioner (GP), radiologist, osteopath, chiropractor,
podiatric surgeon, masseur, and professionals
from the sports science disciplines such as an
exercise physiologist, sports psychologist, and
nutritionist. Working in such a team is of obvious
benefit to both practitioner and patient. The
patient is likely to be treated more holistically,
with appropriate intervention more readily avail-
able. For the practitioner there should be assis-
tance in making an accurate diagnosis and being
able to treat more of the aetiological factors of the
injury (Case history 15.1).
Working as a sole practitioner is often more
challenging. Assistance in making an accurate
diagnosis through interdisciplinary discussion
or access to specialist investigations such as
magnetic resonance imaging (MRD bone scans
and intracompartmental pressure tests may not
be available. It is important to develop a referral
network with other health care practitioners to
The practitioner may assess and treat the injured
athlete in a variety of different environments: the
majority are likely to be in a clinic or private
practice setting, whereas practitioners involved
with sports clubs will often see athletes in what-
ever medical facilities are available at the club
ground or stadium. Some athletes may require
assessment and treatment at the side of a pitch or
track during an event. In each situation there will
obviously be time, space and equipment limita-
tions. A methodical, well-planned and logical
approach to the assessment will assist the practi-
tioner in whichever environment he is treating
the athlete.
As with any biomechanical examination it is
important to have an area to observe the
athlete's gait. There should be a minimum of
5 m of uninterrupted non-carpeted surface. A
flat bed couch is essential for a number of tests
where the athlete must be able to lie fully prone,
supine or on their side. There should be plenty
of space on either side of the couch for the prac-
titioner to undertake an assessment of the knee,
thigh, hips and lower back. Tape, padding and
temporary orthoses are useful adjuncts to diag-
nosis and should be available in all working
environments.
It is important that the athlete wear clothing
that permits an accurate examination. Shorts must
be worn to allow assessment of the knees and
observation of leg alignment and muscle bulk. It
may be of benefit to have spare shorts of different
sizes available for patients who do not bring their
own. Jumpers and jackets should be removed to
overcome these potential shortcomings and to
be able to offer the patient more beneficial treat-
ment plans. If such a network does not exist the
practitioner may be required to provide treat-
ment and advice using mechanical, physical
and pharmacological modalities as well as
giving advice on appropriate training sched-
ules. Although this may not affect the treatment
outcome, the practitioner must be aware of his
limitations and refer to other practitioners
where necessary.
ASSESSMENT ENVIRONMENT
----- --- -----_._-
Table 15.1 Intrinsic and extrinsic risk factors associated
with sports injuries
Intrinsic risk factors
Age
The age of an athlete can affect both the type of
injury that may occur and the healing mecha-
nisms that follow. Younger and older athletes
tend to be more injury prone for a variety of
reasons. There is generally less muscle mass and
muscle strength in both of these groups com-
pared with older adolescents and young adults.
This can result in greater injury risk both in
contact and endurance sports. Less protective
sports equipment is available for children than
adults, which can lead to greater injury risk from
ground reaction forces and physical contact. The
quality of coaches in children's teams is often
lower than their adult counterparts, which may
cause injury due to improper training and coach-
ing supervision (Dalton 1992).
In children of all ages fractures are more
common than ligamentous disruptions. Even the
location of fractures varies with the age of
the child. Adolescents tend to have fractures in the
physeal areas, whereas preadolescents have more
fractures in the diaphysis (Cantu & Micheli 1991).
Certain bony injuries, such as the osteochondri-
tides, can only occur in the young athlete. Also
traction apophysitis of the calcaneus (Sever's
disease), the fifth metatarsal (Iselin's disease), and
of the tibial tubercle (Osgood-Schlatter's disease)
only occur in children and adolescents, although
rarely the symptoms may persist into adulthood
376 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
assess the spine, hips and shoulder position.
Assessment of the athletes' footwear is essential.
This should involve both the sports footwear and
general footwear, as either or both can contribute
to overuse injuries. Athletes should be advised to
bring their sports shoes to all consultations.
The use of gait analysis equipment can be of
great benefit in assessing the sports patient. The
most commonly used equipment is a treadmill,
with or without the use of a video camera. More
specialist equipment such as force platforms, in-
shoe pressure systems and digitised video gait
analysis are discussed in detail in Chapter 12.
Specialist equipment can be very useful when
assessing more complex sports injury cases or
when treating professional athletes. These
systems can:
aid the diagnosis
identify sporting technique
assist in treatment planning
help explain injury mechanisms to the
patient.
Although the cost would prohibit most practi-
tioners from purchasing such equipment it
would be beneficial to identify where patients
can be referred for this type of analysis.
INJURY RISK FACTORS
The aetiology of both acute and chronic injuries
is undoubtedly multifactorial. To simplify this
process, risk factors are divided into intrinsic
and extrinsic causes. Intrinsic risk factors are
those that are personal and are either biological
or psychosocial characteristics that predispose
the individual to injury. Intrinsic risk
factors account for up to 40-60% of all running
injuries (Cavanagh & Kram 1990, James et al
1978). Extrinsic risk factors are independent of
the person and are related to the type of sport-
ing activity and the sporting environment.
Extrinsic risk factors account for up to 80%
of running injuries (McKenzie et aI1985). Of all
risk factors for overuse injuries training errors
are the most common and may account 60% of
the cases (Hreljac et al 2000). Table 15.1 lists the
intrinsic and extrinsic risk factors to injury.
Intrinsic risk factor
Age
Gender
Previous injury
Structural alignment
Flexibility
Physical fitness
Physical build
Psychological factors
Systemic disease
Extrinsic risk factor
Sporting equipment
Exercise surface
Sporting activity
Sport position
Training errors
Warm up and stretching
Environmental factors
._--------------_._--
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 377
.._---_._--_._---_._-_.. _--_._-----------_._-_.-
in the case of Osgood-Schlatter's disease. Both
traction apophysites in the young athlete and
musculotendinous injuries in the older athlete
have been linked with reduced flexibility. It is
known that reduced flexibility is more common in
both groups (Anderson & Burke 1994, Gerrard
1993). Assessment of flexibility is therefore a key
area when examining both children and older ath-
letes with sports injuries.
Musculotendinous injuries are the commonest
injury in the older athlete (over 40 years). This is
due to a number of cellular changes which occur
with increasing age. Changes in collagen cross-
linking cause an increase in tendon stiffness and
reduce the elasticity of the tendon. This can result
in a muscle being subject to earlier and prolonged
loading in a movement cycle and being unable to
undergo normal stretching, resulting in damage
to the musculotendinous unit. The diameter,
density and cellularity of the collagen fibrils are
also diminished with advancing age, which
results in reduced muscle mass and strength.
Finally, the blood supply to tendons reduces with
age, resulting in an increased risk of tendonitis,
tendonosis or rupture (Strocchi et aI1991).
Overuse injuries in the older athlete may also
develop due to a delayed physiological response
to exercise. When a person starts an exercise pro-
gramme there are gradual positive changes to the
cardiovascular, neurological, endocrine and mus-
culoskeletal systems. As a person becomes fitter
the muscles become stronger and there is an
increase in bone density. These normal adaptive
changes are delayed in the older athlete and may
cause musculotendinous injuries if the athlete
increases their training volume too quickly.
Gender
Physiological differences between the sexes result
in differences in athletic performance. For compar-
ative body sizes women have a reduced cardiac
output, blood volume, vital capacity and mean
muscle mass when compared to males. Whether
this increases the risk of injury in female athletes is
uncertain. Studies involving civilian populations
have not shown significant differences in injury
rates between the sexes; except in children where
boys are twice as likely to be injured as girls
(Bruns & Maffulli 2000). This is in contrast to
studies involving military personnel where injury
rates among female recruits are between two and
four times higher than their male counterparts
(Jones et a11988, Ross & Woodward 1994).
Perhaps of more significance than injury rates
are the differences in the types of injury seen
between males and females. Certain injuries are
associated with certain sporting activities. An
example of this is posterior ankle impingement,
which is most commonly seen in females partic-
ipating in either dance or gymnastics. Pain from
existing structural deformity or natural align-
ment may also occur in the female athlete.
Hallux valgus is far more common in females
and the joint or prominence can become painful
due to the increased ground reaction and fric-
tional forces of sporting activity. A valgus align-
ment of the knee is more common in females,
and this can increase the strain on the medial
soft tissue structures of the knee during sport
involving excessive knee flexion and rotation,
e.g. medial collateral ligament injuries in skiing.
Patellofemoral syndrome is undoubtedly more
common in females than males and this is prob-
ably due to a wider pelvis decreasing the
mechanical efficiency and altering the muscle
mechanics of the patellofemoral joint.
The incidence of stress fractures has also been
reported to be higher in females. Early studies
showed the female incidence to be 10 times
greater than men (Protzman & Griffis 1977).
Although more recent studies have not shown
such a significant difference between the sexes it
is generally accepted that female athletes are
more prone to stress fracture than males, espe-
cially in the military. There are three common
aetiological factors which may be responsible for
this greater relative risk of stress fracture. These
interlinking factors are known as the female
athlete triad or unhappy triad and are usually
present in combination:
amenorrhoea or menstrual irregularities (less
than five menses per year)
osteoporosis (due to menstrual abnormalities,
hormonal imbalance, calcium deficiency or
malnutrition)
378 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
eating disorders (anorexia nervosa, bulimia
nervosa, binge-eating disorders, anorexia
athletica).
Although any of these factors can be present in
the non-athletic female population both amenor-
rhoea and eating disorders are more common
amongst athletes. One prospective study also
demonstrated that stress fractures occurred more
frequently in female athletes with low bone
density (Bennell et al 1996).
It is generally agreed that females are more
flexible than males. Whether this should affect
injury rates between the sexes is unclear, but it
has been reported that greater flexibility may
predispose ligament injuries whereas inflexibility
may predispose musculotendinous injuries. This
would result in females being more prone to lig-
ament injuries and males to musculotendinous
injuries. Some evidence would appear to support
this theory, as both anterior cruciate knee liga-
ment injuries and lateral collateral ankle liga-
ment injuries have been reported to be higher in
females than in males undertaking the same
activity (Almeida et a11999, Griffin 1994).
Previous injury
History of previous injury is a common finding
when assessing the injured athlete. The relative
risk of developing an injury when a history of a
previous injury is present is two to three times
greater than with a history of no injury. The
majority of studies in this area have involved
military subjects or runners. It is not surprising
that a previously traumatised structure may be
re-injured, as the athlete may frequently return to
exercise too quickly or the underlying cause of
the injury has not been addressed. The subse-
quent injury is often more severe than the previ-
ous injury. An example of this is seen in tibial
stress fractures, where there is a history of previ-
ous exercise-induced shin pain in up to 50% of
cases.
The subsequent injury does not necessarily
occur at the same location as the previous injury.
This may suggest compensatory changes have
occurred due to the injury or its treatment. These
------'-'--'-'--
changes may be in proprioception or neuromus-
cular coordination resulting in excessive strain on
adjacent or distant structures (Case history 15.2).
Structural alignment
The assessment of structural alignment must
include an overall impression of the whole body,
with a specific focus on the lower limbs and the
injured area. The purpose is to assess and deter-
mine if the body's structure and function has
caused or contributed to the injury. Bio-
mechanical abnormalities may be identified, but
their relevance to injury must be determined. It is
also important to determine if any abnormality
has occurred due to the injury rather than
causing it.
Structural alignment should be assessed with
the patient non-weightbearing, weightbearing
and dynamically. A thorough examination in all
three components is essential if the practitioner is
to gain a complete picture of the athlete's struc-
ture and function as it relates to the injury. This
,-.----------'----------------1
I Case history 15.2 i
L _
A zs-year-olc male, international rugby player was
diagnosed with right-sided Achilles tendonosis. The
pain in the tendon had been present for 2 months and
had caused him to reduce his training volume. It had
not improved with physiotherapy. The tendon was
painful on palpation 4 cm proximal to its insertion and
there was moderate swelling. There was a history of
right-sided plantar fasciitis that had resolved 8 months
ago with calf stretches, strapping and physical
therapies. All non-weightbearing and static
biomechanical parameters, inclUding limb length,
were the same for both limbs and calf flexibility was
excellent in both limbs.
Dynamic video gait analysis with the athlete
running on a treadmill demonstrated an earlier heel
lift on the right side. Video analysis taken prior to both
injuries was used as a comparison and did not
demonstrate an early heel lift. It appeared that due to
the previous plantar fasciitis the athlete had adapted
his gait by an early heel lift in an attempt to reduce
the impact forces acting on the heel. This had
resulted in excessive muscle activity of the calf
muscle, inducing the tendonosis. The athlete was
successfully treated with gait re-education and a heel
raise in his sports footwear that was gradually
reduced over a 3-month period.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 379
--------_._------------_._----------_._------------------------------------------------------
assessment should include examination of the
joints, muscles and osseous alignment (Ch. 8).
The majority of podiatric interventions in sports
injuries are related to the assessment and treat-
ment of structural alignment and function that
has caused or contributed to the injury.
Chronic or overuse sports injuries are usually
due to the presence of one or both of the follow-
ing situations:
normal structure and function but inadequate
preparation or excessive demands placed on
the tissues
abnormal structure and function with relatively
normal demands placed on the tissues.
Although this is a rather simplistic view, it
can be seen to be true in the majority of cases. If
we consider two runners with patellofemoral syn-
drome: runner A runs over 100 miles/week,
running every day; runner Bruns 20 miles/week,
running 3 times per week with 4 rest days. Apart
from their injuries, they are both healthy and have
taken 6 months to get to this weekly mileage. It
should be clear that runner A is doing too much,
too soon, and too frequently:
running 100 miles/week will often result in
injury
a running volume of 100 miles/week in just
6 months has not allowed the tissues to
undergo the normal adaptive processes
required to meet these demands
running every day does not allow adequate
recovery time for the tissues, resulting in
injury.
Other aetiological factors may also be present
in runner A, but treatment will fail unless the
errors of the training schedule are addressed. In
the case of runner B, the aetiology of his injury
is likely to be due to abnormal structure and
function which has resulted in excessive
patellofemoral joint reaction forces. His struc-
tural assessment should include examination of
factors such as:
muscle inflexibility (hamstrings, iliotibial
band, quadriceps, lateral retinacula of the
knee and calf muscles)
muscle weakness (vastus medialis, gluteus
medius, medial retinacula of the knee)
patella malalignment or hypermobility (in
frontal, transverse or sagittal plane)
patella maltracking (during flexion and
extension)
excessive subtalar joint pronation
frontal plane malalignment of the knee or
tibia.
The presence or absence of these factors should
assist the practitioner in identifying the aetiolog-
ical factors and planning the most effective
treatment (Witvrouw et al 2000).
Asymmetries between limbs may represent the
obvious cause of a unilateral overuse injury.
However, it is important to consider the role of
other factors such as the type of activity, exercise
surface, unilateral trauma and injury history.
Any of these factors may cause a unilateral
injury. If structural asymmetry is identified, then
the practitioner must determine a biomechanical
mechanism by which the asymmetry could have
caused the overuse injury. If we consider stress
fractures as an example, there is a strong associa-
tion between stress fractures and limb-length
inequality (Brukner et al 1999). Stress fractures
tend to occur in the longer limb, and the greater
the inequality the greater the incidence (Friberg
1982). The reasons for this are thought to be due
to the biomechanical consequences of the limb-
length difference, which results in a longer stance
phase, skeletal realignment, greater osseous
torsion and increased muscle activity of the
longer limb.
Flexibility
Hypermobility due to increased muscle flexibil-
ity and ligamentous laxity has been associated
with a greater risk of injury. Hypermobility is
often determined by the Beighton score, which is
based on a nine-point test designed to measure
excessive joint movement (Ch. 14). This test has
been used in a number of studies on flexibility
and injury, which has generally shown that
hypermobility is associated with a greater inci-
dence of ligamentous injury. Rossiter & Galbraith
380 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
(1996) found that hypermobility was present in
34% of military recruits with ankle and knee lig-
ament injuries compared with 19% of control
subjects. Increased flexibility, measured by the sit
and reach test, in the absence of ligamentous
laxity has not been shown to be a significant
factor in injury prediction.
Generalised inflexibility due to muscle tight-
ness has been linked to musculotendinous injury:
while this is likely to be true, it has not been
proven in any long-term prospective study.
However, if a theoretical causal link can be made
between the muscle inflexibility and the injury,
then stretching of those muscles should be
included in the treatment programme. Likewise,
if hypermobility is present, then stretching
should be avoided and athletes encouraged to
perform specific stabilising exercises.
Stretching prior to activity does not appear to
reduce the risk of lower limb injury. This has
been demonstrated in a number of studies,
including two large randomised controlled trials
involving military recruits (Pope et a11998, 2000).
These studies did not measure the level of flexi-
bility of the two groups but demonstrated that
the injury incidences of the two groups were the
same irrespective of whether the athlete
stretched or not prior to exercise. This does not
mean that injured athletes with muscle inflexibil-
ity should not be instructed to stretch, as this is
an effective treatment modality. However, ath-
letes are often questioned as to whether they
stretch before and after activity and encouraged
to do so if they do not. There seems little evi-
dence to support this premise and failure to
stretch before exercise should not be viewed as a
risk factor to injury.
Physical fitness
Physical fitness is known to lower the risk of
injury, as shown in a number of studies based on
military and civilian populations (Neely 1998).
This protective mechanism not only applies to
practising a known sport but also to learning a
new sport or athletic skill. The level of reduced
risk varies amongst the studies, and is dependent
upon the activity being undertaken and the
fitness test used. Pope et al (2000) were able to
demonstrate that the least-fittest group of their
army recruits were 14 times more likely to
sustain a lower limb injury than the fittest group.
The fitness method used was the progressive
20 m shuttle run test, also known as the bleep
test. This test is one of the most popular fitness
tests used today.
When assessing injured athletes it is important
to gauge their fitness level, as you may need to
offer advice on a more appropriate training
regimen. This is often the case for the novice
athlete who enthusiastically embarks on an over-
ambitious fitness programme. This will result in
injury, as the musculoskeletal system is not pre-
pared for such strenuous exercise. When an
injury occurs, the athlete should be advised to
modify his exercise to prevent recurrence or
further injury to other structures. This advice
may include changing the method of exercise or
reducing the intensity, frequency or duration of
the exercise.
Physical build
The relationship of physical strength to injury is
unknown. To avoid injury the musculoskeletal
system must be able to cope with the physical
demand of the sporting activity. Some evidence
suggests that stronger athletes are more injury
prone (Knapik et aI1992). The reasons for this are
unclear, but it may be that the muscular forces
generated by stronger athletes damage their joint
structures and even the muscles themselves. It
may also be that stronger athletes exercise at
greater intensity or duration than weaker ath-
letes, resulting in higher injury rates.
There is a correlation between strength imbal-
ance and injury that is most frequently seen in
the knee joint, where differences between ham-
string and quadriceps strengths have been asso-
ciated with cruciate ligament injuries. The role of
strength differences between limbs has also
shown a greater injury incidence on the weaker
side. There is general agreement that strength
differences greater than 10% can increase the
injury risk to the weaker limb. These injuries may
be acute, as with cruciate ligament injuries, or
chronic, due to fatigue, e.g. tendonitis, muscle
strains and stress fractures. The role of limb dom-
inance in injury incidence is less certain. Limb
dominance in racket or ball sports is associated
with different injury patterns. However, in sports
that require equal stresses through both limbs
there is no evidence to suggest limb dominance is
a risk factor. Herring (1993) was unable to show
any difference in injury incidence based on limb
dominance in elite runners.
Anthropometric data such as height, weight,
body mass index (BM!) and total body fat have
also been examined as injury risk factors. In
general, it is only the BMI that has been shown to
be a positive indicator for injury risk. The BMI is
determined by dividing the body weight in kilo-
grams by the height of the patient in metres
squared (i.e. kg zm"). The normal BMI range is
20-25 with above 25 representing clinically over-
weight, above 30 clinically obese and below 20
representing underweight. As a general rule, the
injury risk doubles for individuals who fall
outside the normal BMI range.
Psychological factors
Psychological factors can playa significant part
in both the development of a sports injury and
the rehabilitation of the injury. Although there is
no definite psychological profile of the injury-
prone athlete, there are certain characteristics
which may predispose the athlete to injury. Acute
injuries may be more frequently seen in athletes
who are extroverts with a low sense of responsi-
bility. These athletes are natural risk-takers who
may put themselves in injurious situations
unnecessarily. The reasons for this type of sport-
ing behaviour may be due to a daredevil attitude,
poor decision making or an attempt to gain pop-
ularity with their peers, coach or supporters.
Chronic overuse injuries may be seen more fre-
quently in athletes who demonstrate high levels
of responsibility and dedication. These athletes
will often train and play beyond the point of
fatigue, resulting in small repetitive trauma to
the tissues. This can cause chronic overuse
injuries such as stress fractures, tendonitis and
muscle strains.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 381
Other obvious psychological injury risk factors
are stress and anxiety levels. Stress may come
from the sport itself or other life stresses.
Changes in personal circumstances, careers and
relationships with family and friends can induce
significant stress on an athlete. The athlete may
then view sport as an escape or outlet to vent
frustration, which can lead to poor decision
making and injury. It is important to be aware of
these factors when treating the athlete, as injury
recurrence will be high if they are not addressed.
This may mean liaising with the athlete's coach
or team physician, so that an appropriate social
support network can be provided.
The psychological response of the athlete to
an injury can vary significantly. Most will go
through a reaction of stress and grief. The grief
response to an injury is like a minor or moder-
ate version of losing a loved one. The severity of
the injury and the importance of sport to the
athlete will determine the level of the grief
response. The grief response is characterised by
three phases:
Phase 1 - shock. The immediate response to
the injury may be one of sudden complete shock.
The athlete may show signs of anger, disbelief
and deny the existence of the injury.
Rehabilitation of the athlete cannot begin until
this phase is over.
Phase 2 - preoccupation. The athlete may
demonstrate signs of depression and guilt about
the injury, becoming isolated from other team
members, family and friends. The athlete may
also show signs of bargaining behaviour when
undergoing treatment during this phase.
Rehabilitation may begin during this phase, but
real progress will not be achieved until the
athlete enters the next phase.
Phase 3 - reorganisation. This is characterised
by the athlete fully accepting the presence of the
injury and demonstrating a renewed interest in
the rehabilitation programme. The athlete is also
likely to show a renewed interest in the sport and
in relationships with family and team-mates.
The practitioner should be aware of the
various emotional states the athlete may
demonstrate. This can help in formulating more
appropriate treatment plans with one of the
382 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
main aims being to guide the athlete to the final
reorganisation phase.
Systemic disease
Practitioners must be aware that not all athletes
are free from systemic disease or medical condi-
tions. Cardiovascular, respiratory, endocrine,
arthritic and neurological complaints are seen
fairly frequently in the athletic population. The
spur for many people to start to exercise may be
the presence of hypertension, cardiovascular
disease or obesity. Patients with systemic disease
are often prescribed exercise programmes by
other medical professionals such as CPs, medical
consultants or physiotherapists. The role of exer-
cise and sport is generally beneficial for patients
with systemic disease as it can improve cardio-
vascular, respiratory and neurological function
and help improve strength, flexibility and mobil-
ity. However, the exercise must be of the right
type, intensity, duration and frequency to ensure
medical complications do not arise. Practitioners
should also be aware that undiagnosed systemic
disease may be the underlying cause of the injury
(Case history 15.3).
Case history 15.3
A 38-year-old male physical education instructor was
referred by his GP with a 2-month history of localised
pain in both forefeet. The patient was otherwise healthy
and participated in a wide variety of sports both at work
and socially. Both he and his GP were unsure of the
nature of his pain and he had been referred for further
investigation and orthotic treatment if appropriate.
A thorough medical history demonstrated no major
illnesses, operations or a history of lower limb injuries.
There was no significant family medical history or social
history. There was also no recent history of a change in
exercise pattern or footwear. The pain was centred
around the left fifth and right third metatarsophalangeal
joints and tended to occur after activity. The pain was
gradually getting worse. Moderate swelling was present
at both joints, particularly in the right second interspace,
with slight splaying of the second and third toes
(Sullivan's sign). A list of differential diagnoses was
considered, includinq stress fracture, capsulitis,
synovitis, flexor digitorum longus tendonitis, neuroma,
bursitis, soft tissue mass (right foot only), osteoarthritis
Patients with cardiovascular conditions such as
peripheral vascular disease or hypertension must
exercise with caution. Dynamic exercise increases
the cardiac output, increases the blood flow to
working muscles and causes peripheral vasodila-
tion. The net result is a rise in systolic pressure in
normotensive athletes. However, with hyperten-
sion there are rises in both systolic and diastolic
pressures from already elevated baseline levels.
This can elevate the blood pressure to dangerous
levels, particularly if the athlete has moderate to
severe hypertension, the exercise intensity is too
high or isometric exercise is performed.
In patients with vasospastic conditions or
peripheral vascular disease, localised tissue
hypoxia can result if the metabolic demands of
the exercising tissues are greater than the blood
supply can provide. It is also important to
remember that certain sports injuries are caused
by cardiovascular changes such as acute and
chronic compartment syndromes of the lower leg
and foot, and popliteal artery entrapment syn-
drome. Exercise can also occasionally be the
cause of cardiovascular pathology, such as effort-
induced deep vein thrombosis or external artery
endofibrosis (Bradshaw 2000).
and systemic joint disease. After a thorough clinical
examination osteoarthritis, stress fracture and tendonitis
were excluded. The examination of the joints caused
pain and there were some neuritic symptoms in the right
foot. The patient was given a local anaesthetic injection
into the web space to exclude a Morton's neuroma and
a temporary orthosis. The patient was also referred for
X-ray.
Upon review the local anaesthetic injection had not
resolved the symptoms but the temporary orthosis had
alleviated some of the pain. The X-rays revealed erosive
changes in both metatarsal heads and the patient was
subsequently diagnosed by a rheumatologist as having
rheumatoid arthritis. The patient is currently taking
disease-modifying drugs, wearing appropriate orthoses
and continues to exercise. His exercise programme has
been modified to avoid high-impact and contact sports.
This case demonstrates the importance of keeping an
open mind when determining the diagnosis of an injury.
Practitioners should consider all potential causes to
avoid unnecessary or inappropriate treatment.
Athletes with diabetes must monitor their
blood glucose levels very closely, especially
when starting or altering an exercise programme.
Exercise increases the demand for glucose in the
exercising tissues, resulting in a sharp drop in
blood glucose levels. This can trigger a hypogly-
caemic attack. Athletes will often have to reduce
their dosage of insulin before exercise and should
always have a ready source of glucose available
when they exercise. It is important that diabetics
exercise to help reduce cardiovascular complica-
tions and limited joint mobility associated with
the disease.
Neurological conditions such as upper or lower
motor neurone lesions, hereditary motor and
sensory neuropathies and nerve entrapments
may occur in athletes. Patients with neurological
disorders are often advised to exercise. Such
patients may have altered sensation, altered
muscle function and gait and a pes cavus foot
deformity. These patients must be carefully
assessed to ensure they undertake the appropri-
ate exercise programme using appropriate sup-
ports as required. Avoidance of high-impact and
contact sports is essential in neuropathic patients.
Extrinsic factors
Sporting equipment
The most important piece of sporting equipment
in the assessment of chronic overuse injuries is
the athlete's footwear. The athlete's shoes can
assist in the diagnosis of the injury as they are
often a contributory aetiological factor. They also
represent an adjunct to treatment, as the practi-
tioner will often modify the footwear or use it to
accommodate an orthosis. In certain circum-
stances the practitioner may recommend chang-
ing the footwear completely. Recommending the
right shoe for the patient is not easy. Sports shoe
manufacturing is a multi-billion pound industry
and company research data on shoe design and
function are closely guarded secrets. Each
company produces a number of different models
for the same sport making it hard to know which
is the best one. The most expensive model does
not mean it is the best. The use of 'motion control
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 383
systems' or special air or gel pockets to aid shock
absorption is often used to market the brand as
being better than that of the competition. The evi-
dence to support such claims is often lacking.
The practitioner should appraise the athlete's
shoe, identifying good and bad attributes and, if
recommending a change in footwear, advise the
athlete of what to look for when buying new
sports shoes. To recommend one specific model
for all patients will fail, as many patients will
return dissatisfied if the injury does not resolve
or complain that the shoe is uncomfortable.
The aim for the practitioner is to ensure that
the patient is exercising in a shoe that is:
comfortable
correct fit in length and width
appropriate for the patient's sport
does not show signs of excessive wear
has appropriate tread, studs, spikes, cleats for
the sport and exercise surface
provides sufficient shock absorption,
especially in the midsole
provides appropriate motion control for the
patient
firm fastening
lightweight.
Many sports shoes do not meet all of these cri-
teria and can playa significant part in the devel-
opment of an overuse injury. Worn shoes have
been identified as risk factors in the incidence of
a number of injuries such as stress fractures, exer-
cise-induced leg pain and Achilles tendonitis due
to a lack of shock absorption (Gardner et a11988,
Myburgh et al 1988). The shoe is the interface
between the foot and the ground and must
absorb significant ground reaction forces gener-
ated by sporting activity. As the shoe ages or
becomes more worn, its ability to absorb these
forces is reduced, resulting in increased forces
being passed on to the musculoskeletal system. It
has been estimated that the average running shoe
loses 50% of its shock-absorbing capabilities after
300-500 miles of running (Cook et al 1985). Old
shoes may not only demonstrate signs of exces-
sive wear but also material degradation can
occur, even further reducing the shock-absorbing
capabilities of the shoe.
384 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
An uneven wear pattern on the sole of the shoe
or the insole inside the shoe can give a guide to
biomechanical abnormalities or sporting tech-
nique of the athlete. Excessive lateral wear of the
rearfoot can indicate a varus alignment or strike
pattern and may cause inversion ankle sprains or
lateral foot and leg injuries. Excessive wear
across the ball of the foot will cause a loss of trac-
tion and control, which may induce injury.
Different wear patterns between the shoes may
indicate different biomechanics or sporting tech-
nique. The most common example of uneven
wear is limb-length inequality due to structural,
functional or environmental factors.
The weight of the shoe is important to optimise
performance: the heavier the shoe, the greater the
muscle exertion and energy expenditure. This
can cause fatigue in the lower leg muscles and
therefore affect performance. Light running
shoes may enhance speed but should only be
worn for racing as they do not offer appropriate
support or shock absorption.
The importance of comfort and correct fit
cannot be overstated. Shoes that are too tight or
narrow will obviously cause irritation, resulting
in corns, calluses, subungual haematomas and
other nail pathologies. It is common in kicking
sports such as soccer and rugby that the athlete
will wear a boot that is too small in order to get
a better 'feel' for kicking the ball. This practice
should be discouraged as it can often lead to
clawing of the toes and exacerbate nail patholo-
gies. Shoes that are too narrow or fastened
too tightly can cause pain in the arch and neu-
ritic pain in the forefoot during exercise. A shoe
that is too long will allow excessive movement
of the foot, resulting in friction blisters and heel
slippage.
Exercise surface
The role that the exercise surface may play in the
development of overuse injuries is a contentious
issue. It was previously thought that athletes
who exercise on hard unyielding surfaces
such as concrete would have an increased inci-
dence of osteoarthritis due to accelerated wear
and tear of the joints. There is very little evi-
dence to support this despite several long-term
prospective studies. However in athletics,
harder synthetic track surfaces can increase
performance but also increase the incidence of
musculoskeletal injury. If athletes exercise solely
on hard surfaces, increases in the incidence of
medial tibial stress syndrome by 28%
and Achilles tendonitis by 17% have been
demonstrated (Nigg & Yeadon 1987).
Artificial grass was first used for sport in 1964
and has since become a major playing surface in
a wide number of sporting activities. The injury
profile of this surface is different to that of
natural grass. Bowers & Martin (1976) identified
an injury virtually unique to this surface. Turf toe
is a hyperextension injury of the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint resulting in a sprain of the
plantar capsuloligamentous structures. It is
caused by shoes with a flexible sole in the fore-
foot bending excessively on a hard unyielding
surface. It is primarily seen in American football
but can occur in any sport played on artificial
grass surfaces such as AstroTurf.
Harder surfaces invoke greater ground reac-
tion forces, which must be absorbed by the shoe
and musculoskeletal system. The body absorbs
these forces primarily through the joints and
eccentric muscle activity. The harder the exercise
surface, the greater the eccentric muscle activity
(Richie et al 1993). Theoretically, exercising on
harder surfaces should cause greater knee
flexion, ankle dorsiflexion and greater or pro-
longed subtalar joint pronation to aid the
absorption of the higher ground reaction forces.
No biomechanical studies have shown this to
date.
In addition to the hardness of the exercise
surface, it is important to consider the friction
and energy loss of the surface. Friction, or hori-
zontal stiffness, is integral in acceleration and
deceleration. Artificial athletic surfaces have
greater friction than grass, allowing greater accel-
eration and deceleration. However, these greater
frictional forces must be absorbed by the body
and can result in increased injuries. These
injuries may be to the musculotendinous units or
the ligaments designed to limit joint movements
such as the cruciate ligaments of the knee.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 385
Table 15.2 Common injuries named after a sport
Injury name Injury definition
string muscle activity. Downhill running requi-
res greater ankle plantarflexion and eccentric
muscle activity of the foot dorsiflexors. This par-
ticularly affects the tibialis anterior muscle,
which becomes active for longer and elongates
further as it decelerates foot slap. Downhill
running also increases the load on the quadri-
ceps muscles and is known to exacerbate condi-
tions such as patellofemoral syndrome and
patella tendonitis.
Sporting activity
The type of sport the athlete plays and the tech-
niques they use are integral to the development
of overuse injuries. Certain injuries are even
named after certain sports or activities (Table
15.2). This does not mean that these injuries are
unique to that particular sport, but they occur
frequently due to the forces the anatomical struc-
ture has to absorb. Metatarsal stress fractures are
not unique to military personnel who march, but
this activity involves repetitive impact forces
through the forefoot, which can result in a
stress fracture. Patella tendonitis is most com-
monly seen in jumping sports due to the high
ground reaction forces (up to eight times body
weight) that this activity produces. A significant
component of these forces is absorbed by eccen-
tric quadriceps activity, which can cause patella
tendonitis.
Anterior ankle impingement
Rupture/tear of medial head of
gastrocnemius
Exercise-induced shin pain
Metatarsal stress fracture
Patella tendonitis
Patellofemoral syndrome
Medial epicondylitis
Medial (forehand) epicondylitis,
lateral (backhand) epicondylitis
Rotator cuff pathology Swimmer's shoulder
Footballer's ankle
Tennis leg
Fresher's leg
March fracture
Jumper's knee
Runner's knee
Golfer's elbow
Tennis elbow
Energy loss of a surface is related to its elastic
behaviour and deformation properties. Surfaces
that deform when loaded are termed compliant
and result in increased contact time. This
increases cushioning as peak contact forces are
reduced. However, it may reduce performance as
the contact time is greater, resulting in slower
acceleration. Exercising on softer surfaces can
also alter joint positions. Consider an athlete
running on sand. The greatest contact force
occurs at heel strike, so the sand will be maxi-
mally displaced at this time. This results in
greater ankle dorsiflexion, requiring greater
muscle activity of the calf muscles. Thus, exercis-
ing on softer surfaces may reduce injuries associ-
ated with high-impact forces but may lead to
increases in muscle activity resulting in musculo-
tendinous injury.
It is also important to consider the terrain and
incline of the exercise surface. Uneven terrain
such as grass will mean the body having to
adapt to maintain ground contact and stability.
These adaptive changes mainly occur in the
frontal plane and can result in greater supina-
tory and pronatory moments within the foot
and ankle. If these forces become excessive then
frontal plane injury will result. The most
obvious example of this is the inversion ankle
sprain. Pronatory injuries can occur and usually
involve the posterior tibial tendon. If an athlete
exercises on uneven terrain with frontal plane
movements of the foot and ankle limited by
strapping, a brace or boots, then greater forces
will be transferred to the knee. This can result in
collateral ligament and cruciate damage. This
injury pattern has been seen in skiing. Uneven
terrain can also exist on surfaces which are per-
ceived to be flat. The camber of roads is usually
canted up to 14. This can cause pronatory
moments on one limb and supinatory moments
on the other, resulting in an environmental
limb-length difference.
The importance of exercising on an incline
should not be overlooked. Both uphill and
downhill running are associated with different
joint angular relationships and muscle activity
patterns. Uphill running requires greater ankle
joint dorsiflexion and eccentric calf and ham-
386 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
It is important the practitioner has an under-
standing of the type of sport the athlete plays and
its biomechanics. This will help the practitioner:
understand the forces involved in the sport
identify the structures at risk of injury
determine the potential biomechanical
mechanism of injury
formulate the most appropriate treatment
plan.
These four factors are all interrelated.
Identifying the structures most at risk of injury
requires knowledge of the forces involved in the
sport. This knowledge is related to the biome-
chanical movements of that particular sport.
Determining the biomechanical mechanism of
injury is crucial to formulating the most appro-
priate treatment plan.
Without this knowledge it is difficult to
reduce or prevent the forces that caused the
injury. Appropriate treatment planning must
also take into account the limitations of the
sport on the treatment. This will include the ath-
letes' footwear and other sporting equipment.
Some sports do not allow the use of mechanical
supports as they may compromise player safety
or give the athlete an unfair advantage.
It is also important to be aware of individual
variation in sporting technique, which not only
determines the athlete's skill and ability at a
sport but can also predispose injury. Minor dif-
ferences in sporting technique can have a
significant effect on injury development. An
example is in running techniques between fore-
foot and rearfoot strikers. Forefoot striking is
associated with increased impact forces, a
reduced stance phase and reduced subtalar joint
pronation. These three factors combined could
increase the forces being absorbed both in the
forefoot and more proximally in the calf muscles,
shin and knee.
The team position will also help determine
the sporting technique of the athlete. The posi-
tion played may be based on anthropometric
characteristics, limb dominance and skill levels.
Team position may be important to the practi-
tioner, as the biomechanical movements and
sporting techniques used by the athlete can vary.
This will result in different injury profiles seen
between positions: e.g. a prop forward and
wing back in rugby, a wicket keeper and fast
bowler in cricket, a linebacker and wide receiver
in American football.
Training errors
As discussed earlier, athletes may do too much,
too soon, and too frequently. Training errors are
one of the commonest causes of chronic overuse
injuries, and practitioners must identify these
errors for successful treatment planning. Failure
to do so will lead to a recurrence of the injury or
development of other overuse injuries. To avoid
injury athletes who wish to exercise regularly
must find the correct balance of exercise intensity,
duration and frequency. This will normally
involve:
participating in more than one sport
combination of strength, flexibility and
endurance training
incorporation of rest days in the weekly
training schedule
periods during the year of greater
training/ sport levels, i.e. seasons
variation in training methods to help
maintain interest.
When athletes first begin to train they often
overestimate their baseline fitness level. This can
result in injury, as the musculoskeletal system is
not physiologically prepared for this volume of
exercise. Common injuries at this stage are muscle
strains and exercise-induced leg pain (shin
splints). Increasing the volume of exercise too
quickly can also occur when an athlete is return-
ing from injury or training for a specific competi-
tion that they are not prepared for.
Bones, like muscle, also undergo a normal
physiological strengthening process during the
early period of an exercise programme. This
remodelling process is characterised by initial
bone porosity due to osteoclastic channelling,
which is then followed by osteoblasts laying
down new bone matrix. The result is that the bone
is initially weakened by exercise and then eventu-
ally strengthened beyond its pre-exercise level.
This whole process usually takes 6 months and
during the first 2 months the bone is especially
prone to injuries such as stress fracture. This is
one of the main reasons stress fractures are
usually seen during the first 2 months of starting
an exercise programme or significantly increasing
the exercise level (Beck 1998).
Environmental factors
Changes in temperature, humidity and altitude
can all affect performance and may increase
injury risk. Practitioners providing treatment at
endurance events should be particularly aware
of the consequences of environmental factors.
High temperatures and humidity levels can
produce heat-intolerance illnesses including
syncope, heat cramps, exhaustion and stroke.
These are most frequently seen in athletes who
have not fully acclimatised to the environment
and become dehydrated and salt depleted.
Most cold-related sports injuries are seen in
submaximal endurance sports such as marathon
running or wilderness sports such as moun-
taineering and skiing. Cold climates reduce per-
formance as the body must use energy stores for
thermogenesis. Cold-induced injuries include
chilblains, trench foot, frostbite and hypother-
mia. Pre-existing conditions, such as asthma,
Raynaud's phenomenon and cold urticaria, can
also be triggered by the cold.
High altitude ranges from 1500 to 3500 m
above sea level. Above 1500 m, the maximum
oxygen uptake by the body reduces by 10% for
every 1000 m. This results in reduced perfor-
mance at endurance events. The opposite is true
for performance at short anaerobic events, due to
lower air resistance. Illnesses associated with
high altitude include acute mountain sickness,
pulmonary oedema, cerebral oedema and retinal
haemorrhage.
HISTORY TAKING
A significant part of the patient's initial consul-
tation is likely to involve history taking. It is
important to cover all relevant areas, otherwise
vital clues may be missed, resulting in misdiag-
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 387
nosis or inappropriate treatment planning. The
consultation will start with noting the patient's
personal details. In addition to the patient's
name, address, date of birth, GP, information on
other health care practitioners treating the
athlete should also be recorded. Recording the
contact details of the athlete's coach(es) is
useful, as communication with them may assist
the practitioner in identifying risk factors and
ensuring the athlete adheres to any treatment
plan.
The following areas should be covered to
achieve an accurate history:
medical history
social history
drug history
sport history
injury history.
Medical history
Taking an accurate medical history is essential
in determining an athlete's suitability to
perform a sport. As already discussed, poor
physical fitness or systemic disease may predis-
pose an athlete to injury. Diseases of the cardio-
vascular, respiratory, neurological, endocrine,
gastrointestinal and genitourinary systems can
affect performance and predispose injury. If
medical conditions are identified, it is important
to gain information about the onset, the type of
symptoms experienced, the treating physician
and the type of treatment. This information will
help the practitioner to determine whether it is
necessary to recommend participation in a dif-
ferent sporting activity or participation at a
reduced level.
The history of any surgical procedures should
also be recorded. Surgical procedures due to sys-
temic disease or previous injury may have direct
relevance to the assessment of the current injury.
Information related to all surgical procedures is
important as it provides an indication of the
overall health status of the athlete and the
athlete's healing capacity. Also, any recent opera-
tions that may have resulted in a reduced training
programme and fitness level, which may have
388 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
contributed to the current sports injury, need to be
noted.
Both the patient and practitioner often over-
look the role of nutrition in sports performance
and injury. The practitioner should be aware of
the nutritional requirements of athletic perfor-
mance. Energy for exercise comes from carbohy-
drates, fats and, to a lesser extent, proteins.
Muscle hypertrophy and skeletal development is
reliant on proteins, vitamins and minerals.
Homeostasis is dependent upon water, fibre and
minerals. A healthy diet will incorporate the right
balance of these foodstuffs. Athletes will often
manipulate this balance in order to enhance per-
formance: e.g. carbohydrate loading prior to
endurance events, protein supplements to
increase muscle mass and anaerobic power.
Manipulation of foodstuffs may not be detrimen-
tal as long as it does not increase one source at
the expense of reducing another. However, if the
practitioner is in doubt and suspects the athlete's
diet is contributing to the injury then referral to a
dietitian or sports nutritionist is warranted.
Other indications for referral may include rapid
changes in body weight, vitamin deficiencies and
BMIs below 18 or above 27.
Accurate assessment of physical fitness is
difficult without resort to specific exercise physi-
ology tests. These tests are used to measure an
athlete's ability to exercise aerobically or anaero-
bically. An impression of athletes' fitness can be
gained from questioning them about their exer-
cise programme, athletic performance, speed of
recovery from exercise and injury history. Rapid
increases in exercise intensity may not be associ-
ated with increases in physical fitness. Exercise at
too Iowan intensity will also not produce
improvements in fitness. As a general rule aerobic
exercise must be performed at a level equivalent
to 70-80% of the maximum heart rate. Exercising
below this level will not produce significant
improvements in fitness and exercise above this
level may overstrain the cardiovascular system. A
slow recovery from exercise may either be due to
poor physical fitness or exercising at too high an
intensity. Signs of a slow recovery may include
laboured breathing post-exercise, severe fatigue
or delayed-onset muscle soreness.
Social history
The social history of the athlete will involve
questioning them regarding their occupation,
dietary and alcohol habits and whether they
smoke. High alcohol consumption, smoking and
a poorly balanced diet may all predispose the
athlete to injury due to their effect on physical
fitness. A patient's occupation is often over-
looked but may be a significant factor in both the
aetiology of the injury and its management. It
may be difficult for an athlete to truly rest an
injured structure if their occupation involves
heavy manual work or standing for prolonged
periods. The social network of family and friends
may be a cause of stress to the athlete. If these
stresses become significant they may contribute
to the development of injury. Questioning the
athlete on these issues may be necessary if the
practitioner suspects psychological stress as an
aetiological factor in the injury.
Drug history
A thorough pharmacological history should
include any current prescription only or over-
the-counter medicines, previous medication and
drug allergies. Current or past medication may
indicate pathology not identified in the medical
history. Drug allergies are obviously important,
as they may contraindicate certain treatment
options. Over-the-counter medicines may
include nutritional supplements, homeopathic
remedies, topical agents or pain medication. Pain
medication is of particular importance, as it will
mask some of the symptoms of the injury. This
can result in the athlete and practitioner under-
estimating the severity of the injury, in addition
to the potential long-term complications of such
medication.
The use of pharmacological aids to enhance
sporting performance is now more common-
place. Such practices are not confined to the elite
level. The practitioner should be aware of the
potential risks associated with pharmacological
abuse, particularly their role in injury develop-
ment. This is mainly confined to anabolic
steroids, which can significantly increase muscle
mass, muscle strength and the psychological
drive to exercise. These drugs may cause injury
due to the increased forces placed through the
musculoskeletal system from the greater exercise
intensity. There is also some evidence to suggest
that continual long-term use causes weakening
of collagen structures, resulting in injury to
tendon, ligament and muscle. Other more serious
long-term effects can include cardiomyopathy,
liver damage and testicular atrophy. Abuse at the
elite level is further complicated by athletes
using masking agents, which may themselves be
detrimental to health. Evidence on the effects of
other ergogenic aids such as protein, vitamin and
mineral supplements, creatine, caffeine, blood
doping and human growth hormone is currently
lacking. Although these aids are commonly used,
their potential benefit to athletic performance has
not been clearly proven.
Sport history
It is important to gain as much detail about the
athlete's sporting history as possible. This should
include the following:
type or types of sport
frequency (number of times/week)
duration
intensity
level.
The main sport the athlete participates in is of
obvious importance but the practitioner should
also focus on secondary sporting activities the
athlete may undertake. These activities may be
for interest or fitness but they can play a
significant part in the development of an injury
and should not be overlooked. Other factors to
note would include the sports surface, footwear,
limb dominance and sporting position.
The frequency, duration and intensity of sport-
ing activity will help the practitioner determine if
the athlete is over- or under-training: both can
lead to injury. Over-training can cause overuse
injury, as there is insufficient time for tissue
replenishment and regeneration. Under-training
can cause injury due to inadequate levels of
fitness or strength. As a general rule, to improve
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 389
cardiovascular fitness it is recommended to exer-
cise three times a week for a minimum of 20 min
each time at an intensity of 70-80% maximum
heart rate.
The duration of activity is important: too
short an exercise period will not produce the
desired physiological improvement in fitness,
and too long a period will cause fatigue and
possible injury. Duration should also include
how long the athlete has been participating in
that particular sport, as this will impact on his
fitness and skill level. When questioning the
athlete on his sporting activity, it is important to
determine at what frequency, duration and
intensity he was exercising at when the injury
occurred. The practitioner should pay particular
attention to recent changes to the training
schedule (Case history 15.4).
The level at which the athlete undertakes his
sport is also important. This will help the practi-
tioner determine the athlete's motivation to play
Case history 15.4
A 23-year-old semi-professional soccer player
returned for treatment complaining of bilateral shin
pain. Eighteen months previously he had been
successfully treated for patellofemoral syndrome after
being prescribed an exercise programme and
orthoses for his football boots and AstroTurf training
shoes. His shin pain had been present for 6 weeks
and was gradually deteriorating. It was initially
suspected that the shin pain was due to the orthoses
becoming worn and less effective. Additional support
was therefore added to the orthoses and the athlete
was reviewed 2 weeks later. The pain was still
present and it was at this stage that the athlete
revealed that his training schedule had changed
slightly. In addition to his normal soccer training,
which consisted of 5 hours' practice and one game
per week, he had started to attend a high-impact
aerobics class. This was in a school hall with a non-
sprung hardwood floor. For the gO-minute classes he
wore an old pair of running shoes in which his
orthoses did not fit.
He was advised to discontinue the aerobics class
and the shin pain resolved within 10 days. High-
impact aerobics on hard surfaces is associated with
significant ground reaction forces and this had
caused him to develop medial tibial stress syndrome.
The lack of orthotic control and the poor shock
absorption of his old running shoes had probably
exacerbated the situation.
390 'SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
sport and may also guide the treatment plan.
Elite or professional athletes may find it harder to
rest or modify their activity than novice athletes.
Convincing a professional athlete to take time
out from their sport is often very difficult and
should involve collaboration with other
members of the sports medicine team or coach-
ing staff. These athletes are often more demand-
ing of the practitioner and can present a
management challenge.
When assessing an athlete's current participa-
tion level it is important to determine his athletic
goals. Athletes may strive to achieve certain
goals or reach a specific level of performance,
such as running a distance in a given time or
becoming a regular first team player for a sports
club. Although these goals may be achievable the
athlete will often have unrealistic expectations of
the time it will take to reach that level of skill or
fitness. Part of the assessment of the athlete and
his injury may involve the practitioner giving
advice on whether the athlete's goals are achiev-
able in the short term.
Injury history
As much information as possible should be
gained about both previous lower limb injuries
and the current injury. Previous injuries are
important as they can make the athlete more sus-
ceptible to injury and they may also cause struc-
tural or functional compensations. Information
on this area can be gained easily by asking ques-
tions such as:
Have you broken any bones within the lower
limb?
Have you ruptured or torn any ligaments or
tendons in the lower limb?
Is there a history of prolonged or intermittent
swelling of any joints in the lower limb?
Have you had any injuries, which have
resulted in missing more than 2 weeks from
sport?
With acute injuries there is often a history of a
single traumatic event. The athlete may be able
to describe how the injury occurred, making it
easier for the practitioner to determine the
mechanism or pattern of injury. This informa-
tion can enable the practitioner to identify the
injured structure and the likely level of force
that caused the injury. Diagnosis of both the
injured structure and the injury severity is
therefore easier.
Identifying the injury mechanism in chronic or
overuse injuries is harder as these injuries are
usually associated with multiple minor traumatic
events and the injury may have led to functional
compensation.
The location, duration and the type of pain can
all assist the diagnosis of the injury. The location
of pain may be diffuse and generalised or focal
and specific to a single structure. This character-
istic is important, as both generalised and focal
pain can be typical of specific conditions. As an
example, consider patellofemoral syndrome and
patella tendonitis, which are both causes of ante-
rior knee pain. Patella tendonitis will cause pain
within the tendon or its sheath and is focal in
nature. Patellofemoral syndrome is characterised
by pain medial, posterior or lateral to the patella
and is generalised in nature. This is sometimes
referred to as the 'grab' sign, as the patient will
grab the whole of the front of the knee when
asked to locate the area of pain.
The duration of pain will inform the practi-
tioner both of how long the injury has been
present and its severity. As a general rule, the
longer the injury has been present the longer the
recovery period will be from the initiation of
treatment. This is usually because the injury has
become more severe. Consider pathology of
tendons as an example. Long-standing tendonitis
can be associated with the formation of adhe-
sions, scar tissue and mucinous degeneration of
the tendon itself. This is referred to as tendonosis
and will require more intensive and prolonged
treatment that may take many weeks or months
to resolve. Injuries which are intermittent in
nature may be less severe or specifically associ-
ated with a sporting activity.
Descriptions of the type of pain experienced
are somewhat subjective. However, certain pain
descriptions are characteristic of trauma to
specific anatomical structures. Neurogenic symp-
toms usually involve paraesthesia, numbness or
a burning sensation. A dull or intense aching sen-
sation usually represents an injury to deep struc-
tures, especially muscle or bone. Sharp or
throbbing pain may represent trauma to articular
structures. The severity of the pain is especially
subjective, as patients have differing tolerance
and pain coping strategies. It is therefore best to
assess the pain severity in conjunction with all
other injury factors.
Other factors to note about the injury are pre-
vious conservative treatment and what exacer-
bates or improves the injury. The majority of
sports patients have usually been treated by
another health care practitioner or attempted
self-treatment prior to attending the podiatrist.
This information may be particularly useful in
determining injury severity and appropriate
treatment planning. Accurate information on
treatment by other health care workers may
require communication between practitioners,
which can also assist in making an accurate
diagnosis through case discussion. Factors
which exacerbate injury are usually sport-
related and may include any of the intrinsic and
extrinsic risk factors discussed earlier. Factors
outside of the athlete's sport may also con-
tribute, such as occupation, social activities and
non-athletic footwear.
Many injuries have such characteristic histo-
ries that the injury diagnosis requires only
minimal examination. A common example of this
is exercise-induced leg pain, traditionally known
as shin splints. The characteristics of the common
causes of exercise-induced leg pain are shown in
Table 15.3. The relationship of the pain to exercise
is very diagnostic, as each condition significantly
varies. In chronic compartment syndrome the
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 391
pain is induced by exercise and the athlete must
stop or reduce their exercise intensity. Upon ces-
sation of exercise the pain goes completely
within minutes. In medial tibial stress syndrome
pain is rarely present during exercise but occurs
within hours following exercise and may last up
to 2 days post-exercise. The pain from stress frac-
tures is exacerbated by exercise and usually
becomes constant in nature unless the athlete
completely rests.
EXAMINING THE INJURED
STRUCTURE
Following a thorough injury history, the practi-
tioner may have formulated a provisional list of
differential diagnoses. This process is assisted by
observation of the injured site and adjacent struc-
tures. Marked swelling, bruising and erythema
often accompany acute injuries, whereas in
chronic injuries these signs may be minimal or
absent. Observation of adjacent structures is
useful to gauge the level of any swelling or to
determine deformity. Unilateral injuries should
always be visually compared with the asympto-
matic side. This will require having the athlete
prone when the injury is on the posterior surface
such as with Achilles tendon injuries.
From the history and visual inspection the
practitioner should be able to identify the
potential injured anatomical structures. The
next phase of the examination will be to indi-
vidually isolate the structures and then apply
stress to them in a controlled manner. The appli-
cation of stress should be gradually increased
until the athlete's symptoms are reproduced.
Stress is initially applied by gentle and then firm
Table 15.3 Characteristics of the common causes of exercise-induced leg pain
Pain characteristic Medial tibial stress syndrome Tibial stress fracture Chronic compartment syndrome
Location Tenoperiosteal junction Bone Muscle compartment
Nature Diffuse Focal Diffuse
Description Dull ache Intense ache Tightness, fullness, cramping
Relationship to Post-exercise, lasts <2 days Constant, made Induced by exercise,
exercise worse by exercise immediate relief with rest
392 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
---,--------
palpation. The level of pressure required when
palpating the area is determined by the tissue
type and depth. Deep dense structures such as
tendon or bone will require firmer pressure than
more superficial structures or those that are less
dense such as muscle or ligament.
Movement of the injured structure should also
be performed. This should initially be passive,
with the practitioner directing the movement. If
this is pain-free, the patient should be directed to
move the structure actively with no resistance
applied. In the majority of sports injuries both of
these types of movements are unlikely to cause
pain. The next step is to apply active resistance to
the movement. This should first be performed
with concentric contraction and then eccentric if
the first movement did not induce symptoms.
These contractions should be held for between 10
and 20 seconds. In the majority of cases resisted
eccentric or concentric contraction will induce
symptoms.
The method of achieving the greatest stress is
to have the athlete perform dynamic or func-
tional exercises: examples of these movements
are double or single knee squats to stress the
patellofemoral joint and the single leg tiptoe test
to stress the posterior tibial tendon or have the
athlete go up and down on their forefoot with the
heel over the edge of a stair to stress the Achilles
tendon. A dynamic functional assessment should
be included in any orthopaedic examination. For
the athlete with a sports injury this may require
the practitioner to observe the athlete's sporting
technique in addition to normal static stance and
gait analysis. Many of these sporting movements
can be performed in a relatively small space or
on a treadmill. Occasionally, a practitioner may
have to go and observe the athlete in his natural
sporting environment.
Specialist investigations
As with any investigation, specialist tests should
only be performed if the results may change the
treatment plan. Specialist investigations in sports
medicine are primarily used to assist in diagnos-
ing and grading the severity of an injury. A
summary of the various tests and the common
sports injuries they may be used to diagnose is
given in Table 15.4. X-ray remains the mainstay
diagnostic test for osseous pathology and MRI or
ultrasound for soft tissue pathology. A number of
Table 15.4 Specialist investigations used in sports injury assessment
Investigation
X-ray
Computed tomography (CT)
Magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI)
Nuclear bone scanning
Ultrasound
Intracompartmental pressure
studies
Nerve conduction studies
Arteriography/venography
Main uses
Articular and osseous
pathology
Osseous, especially cortical
pathology
Tendon, ligament, muscle,
cartilage, bone marrow pathology
Abnormal bone activity
Tendon, ligament, muscle,
fascial pathologies
Muscle/fascial pathology
Nerve pathology
Arterial and venous pathology
Common sports injuries diagnosed
Fractures, ligament ruptures or laxity,
osteochondral defects, osteochondritides
Stress fractures, cartilage tears, osteochondral
defects
Tendonopathies, ligament injuries, muscle tears,
cartilage tears, stress fractures, osteochondral
defects
Stress fractures, medial tibial stress syndrome,
osteochondritides
Tendonopathies, plantar fasciitis
Compartment syndromes
Exercise-related nerve entrapments
Effort-induced deep vein thrombosis, arterial
entrapment syndromes
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 393
----------------------------------------------------, ---,
conditions such as stress fractures, osteochondral
defects and the osteochondritides may be diag-
nosed by several different modalities. In these
cases the choice of modality will depend upon
the injury history, and the cost and access of the
modalities.
Injury grading systems
As with many pathologies, sports Injuries are
often graded by their severity. These classification
systems are primarily used to direct treatment
protocols. As an example, grade one ankle sprains
are treated differently from grade three sprains.
Grading systems are also useful when communi-
cating with other health care practitioners in the
sports medicine team about the patient. They can
also be used to help explain the nature of the
pathology to the athlete or coach. Grading
systems may describe an injury to a tissue type
such as ligament, bone or tendon, or be specific to
a certain injury such as posterior tibial tendon
dysfunction, osteochondral talar defects or
Achilles tendon injuries. The grading systems for
muscle and ligament injuries and tendonitis are
given in Table 15.5.
SUMMARY
The practitioner should involve the patient as
much as possible in the assessment process.
Table 15.5 Grading systems for ligament injuries and tendonitis
Athletes are often well educated in their area of
sport and this can greatly assist the practitioner.
Likewise, the practitioner must educate the
patient, as this will play a crucial role in the
success of the treatment. The majority of sports
injury treatments require the athlete to follow
specific advice or instructions. Compliance is
intricately linked to understanding so the practi-
tioner must educate the athlete about the injury
and the purpose of any treatment.
A structured holistic approach is essential in
the assessment of the sports patient. The practi-
tioner should develop a logical assessment
scheme that meets the patient's and his own
needs in whatever assessment environment
they are working in. The successful treatment of
lower limb sports injuries requires the practi-
tioner to assimilate knowledge from areas as
diverse as sports psychology, exercise physiol-
ogy and sports biomechanics. This knowledge
will assist in the diagnosis of the injury risk
factors. Identification of these intrinsic and
extrinsic risk factors should form the main focus
of the assessment. Diagnosis of the injury itself
requires detailed knowledge of the regional
anatomy and common sports injuries that affect
the lower limb. Athletes with chronic overuse
injuries can be very difficult to treat. The assess-
ment principles outlined in this chapter are
designed to help the practitioner meet these
management challenges.
Grade Ligament injuries Tendonitis Muscle tears
One
Two
Three
Four
Stretching of the ligament
without macroscopic tears
Partial macroscopic tear
Complete rupture
Pain after exercise
Pain pre- and post-exercise, pain
reduced during exercise
Pain before, during and after exercise
Constant pain and volume of
exercise reducing
Minimal tear with no loss of strength
Macroscopic tear with loss of
strength
Complete tear with no function
394 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
REFERENCES
Almeida S A, Trone D W, Leone D M, Shaffer R A, Patheal
S L, Long K 1999 Gender differences in musculoskeletal
injury rates: a function of symptom reporting. Medicine
and Science in Sport and Exercise 31(12): 1807-1812
Anderson B, Burke E R 1994 Scientific, medical, and
practical aspects of stretching. In: Delee J C, Drez D (eds)
Orthopaedic sports medicine, Vol 1. W BSaunders,
Philadelphia
Beck B 1998 Tibial stress injuries: an aetiological review for
the purposes of guiding management. Sports Medicine
26(4): 265-279
Bennell K L, Malcolm S A, Thomas S A et al1996 Risk
factors for stress fractures in track and field athletes: a 12
month prospective study. American Journal of Sports
Medicine 24: 810-818
Bowers K D, Martin R B 1976 Turf toe: a shoe surface related
football injury. Medicine and Science of Sports 8: 81-83
Bradshaw C 2000 Exercise related lower leg pain: vascular.
Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise S34-36
Brukner P, Bennell K, Matheson G 1999 Stress fractures.
Blackwell Science, Oxford
Bruns W, Maffulli N 2000 Lower limb injuries in children in
sports clinics. Sports Medicine 19: 637-662
Cantu R, Micheli L (eds) 1991 American College of Sports
Medicine guidelines for the team physician. Lea &
Febiger, Philadelphia
Cavanagh P R, Kram R 1990 Stride length in distance
running. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise
21(4): 467-479
Colville M R 1998 Surgical treatment of the unstable ankle.
Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic
Surgeons 6: 368-377
Cook S D, Kester M A, Brunet M E 1985 Shock absorbing
characteristics of running shoes. American Journal of
Sports Medicine 13: 248-253
Dalton S E 1992 Overuse injuries in adolescent athletes.
Sports Medicine 13(1): 58-70
Friberg 0 1982 Leg length asymmetry in stress fractures: a
clinical and radiological study. Journal of Sports
Medicine 22: 485-488
Gardner L I, Dziados J E, Jones B H et al 1988 Prevention of
lower extremity stress fractures: a controlled trial of a
shock absorbent insole. American Journal of Public
Health 78: 1563-1567
Gerrard D F 1993 Overuse injury and growing bones: the
young athlete at risk. British Journal of Sports Medicine
27(1): 14-18
Griffin L Y 1994 The female athlete. In: Delee J C, Drez D
(eds) Orthopaedic sports medicine Vol 1. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Herring K 1993 Injury prediction among runners.
Preliminary report on limb dominance. Journal of
American Podiatric Medical Association 83(9): 523-528
Hreljac A, Marshall R N, Hume P A 2000 Evaluation of lower
extremity overuse injury potential in runners. Medicine
and Science in Sports and Exercise 32: 1635-1641
James S 1, Bates BT, Osternig L R 1978 Injuries to runners.
American Journal of Sports Medicine 6: 40-50
Jones B H, Vogel J A, Manikowski R et al1988 Incidence of
and risk factors for injury and illness among male and
female army basic trainees. US Army Research Institute
of Environmental Medicine technical report T19-88
Knapik J J, Jones B H, Bauman C L, McArthur-Harris J 1992
Strength, flexibility and athletic injuries. Sports Medicine
14(5): 277-288
McKenzie D C, Clement D B, Taunton J E 1985 Running
shoes, orthotics and injuries. Sports Medicine 2: 324-327
Marks R M 1999 Achilles' tendonopathy. Foot and Ankle
Clinics 4(4): 789-809
Myburgh K H, Grobler N, Noakes T D 1988 Factors
associated with shin soreness in athletes. Physician and
Sports Medicine 16: 129-134
Neely F 1998 Intrinsic risk factors for exercise-related lower
limb injuries. Sports Medicine 26(4): 253-263
Nicholl J P, Coleman B A, Williams B T 1991 Pilot study of
the epidemiology of sports injuries and exercise related
morbidity. British Journal of Sports Medicine 25(1):
61-66
Nigg B M, Yeadon M R 1987 Biomechanical aspects of
playing surfaces. Journal of Sports Science 5: 117-145
Pope R P, Herbert R D, Kirwan J D 1998 Effects of flexibility
and stretching on injury risk in army recruits. Australian
Journal of Physiotherapy 44: 165-172
Pope R P, Herbert R D, Kirwan J D, Graham J B 2000 A
randomized trial of pre-exercise stretching for the
prevention of lower limb injury. Medicine and Science in
Sport and Exercise 32(2): 271-277
Protzman R, Griffis C 1977 Stress fractures in men and
women undergoing military training. American Journal
of Bone and Joint Surgery 59(6): 825
Richie D, Devries H, Endo C 1993 Shin muscle activity and
sports surfaces: an electromyographic study. Journal of
American Podiatric Medical Association 83(4): 181-189
Ross J, Woodward A 1994 Risk factors for injury during
basic military training: is there a social element in injury
pathogenesis. Journal of Occupational Medicine 36:
1120-1126
Rossiter N, Galbraith K 1996 The incidence of
hypermobility in a military population (abstract).
Meeting of the Combined Services Orthopaedic Society,
Aldershot, UK, 165
Strocchi R, DePasquale V, Guizzardi S et al1991 Human
Achilles tendon: morphological and morphometric
variations as a function of age. Foot and Ankle 12: 100-104
Tomten S E, Falch J A, Birkeland K I et al1998 Bone mineral
densities and menstrual irregularities: a comparative
study on cortical and trabecular bone structures in
runners with alleged normal eating behavior.
International Journal of Sports Medicine 19: 92-97
Walsh W M 1994 Patellofemoral joint. In: Delee J C, Drez 0
(eds) Orthopaedic sports medicine Vol 2. W BSaunders,
Philadelphia
Witvrouw E, Lysons R, Bellemans J, Combier D, Vander
Straeton G 2000 Intrinsic risk factors for the development
of anterior knee pain in an athletic population. American
Journal of Sports Medicine 28: 480-489
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 395
FURTHER READING
Brukner P, Khan K 1993 Clinical sports medicine. McGraw-
Hill, Sydney
Brukner P, Bennell K, Matheson G 1999 Stress fractures.
Blackwell Science, Victoria
Delee J C, Drez D (eds) 1994 Orthopaedic sports medicine,
Vols 1-3. W B Saunders, Philadelphia
Hartley A 1995 Practical joint assessment: lower quadrant.
2nd edn, Mosby, St Louis
Nicholas JA, Hershman E B 1995 The lower extremity and
spine in sports medicine. Mosby, St Louis
Subotnick S (ed) 1999 Sports medicine of the lower
extremity, Vol 2. Churchill Livingstone, New York
CHAPTERCONTENTS
Introduction 397
Factors to consider when assessing 397
Examinationof the patient with foot pain 398
Measurement and assessment of pain 398
Tools of assessment - how do we score pain? 399
CAUSES OF PAININ THE FOOT 403
Articular and bone conditions 403
Osteoarthritis (OA) 403
Footballer's ankle 404
Osteochondritis dissecans(ankls/talocrural joint) 405
Hallux rigidus 406
Accessory ossicles 407
Stress fractures 408
Subungual exostosis 408
Tarsal coalition 409
Metatarsalgia 410
Sesamoiditis 411
Tumours 411
Soft tissue, tendons and ligaments 412
Tendonitis 412
Subluxing peroneal tendons 413
Chronic ankle sprain 413
Sinus tarsi syndrome 414
Compartment syndrome 414
Nerves 415
Tarsal tunnel syndrome 415
Other entrapments 416
Peripheral neuropathy 417
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma) 417
Skin and subcutaneous tissues 418
Retrocalcaneal bursitis 418
Heel pad syndrome 419
Plantar fasclitis 419
Soft tissue masses or tumours 420
General 420
Crystal arthritis 420
Hereditary and motor sensory neuropathy 421
Infection 422
Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD) 423
Referredpain 424
Summary 424
The painful foot
W. Turner
R. Ashford*
INTRODUCTION
Before embarking on a description of conditions
that affect the foot and can cause pain it is impor-
tant to have a working knowledge of the concept
of pain: how it manifests, how it is measured and
assessed, other indicators of pain and current
thought regarding the treatment of pain.
Why do we need to measure pain? Pain in the
foot has plagued mankind for as long as humans
have existed. As practitioners it is only relatively
recently that the importance of monitoring foot
pain has been recognised. Previously we may
have asked the patient 'how' their pain was pro-
gressing between treatments; however, rarely did
we chart this most important aspect of patient
management. Needless to say, as practitioners we
need to chart and monitor all aspects of treat-
ment intervention so as to provide the informa-
tion to compare single patients as well as groups
of patients. This, in turn, gives the practitioner
the facility to monitor the progress of individual
patients as well as objective data to validate new
treatment regimens.
Factors to consider when assessing
It is essential to recognise that pain is subjective.
Only the person experiencing the pain knows
how it feels, its intensity, location and the restric-
tion it places on their lives. 'Pain is whatever the
experiencing person says it is, existing whenever
"The editors wish to acknowledge the work of David Tollafield. This chapter is based on his
work in the previous edition.
397
398 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
the experiencing person says it does' (McCaffery
& Beeke 1989).
A simple illustration of a misconception of a
painful foot is when a healthy patient seeks treat-
ment for what looks like the tiniest corn on the fifth
toe. The patient complains of severe pain, finds it
difficult to walk and complains of throbbing when
the bed clothes are pressing on it. Compare this to
the frail patient who presents with heavy callosi-
ties over the first and fifth metatarsals and with
deep-seated corns located beneath. The patient
complains of moderate pain from the lesions.
Practitioners may intuitively select the frail patient
as the one suffering the most pain. Is this assess-
ment justified? With any assessment it is important
to remember that pain is relative; it is a very indi-
vidual thing and it is important to distinguish
between bias and inaccuracy.
Studies have shown that practitioners find it
difficult to assess pain accurately and to assess
the degree of pain experienced by the patient
(Sutherland et al 1988). Such inaccuracies can in
some way be overcome by the use of validated
and reliable clinical tools dedicated to the assess-
ment of pain. However, clinical tools must be
seen as an adjunct to patient assessment of pain
and not a panacea. It is suggested that a clinical
picture is built up before undertaking charting of
pain levels. As discussed in Chapter 3, it is
important to consider the following:
What eases or aggravates the pain?
At what time of the day is it worse?
Is the pain constant or intermittent?
What type of medication is the patient taking?
What is the previous medical history and
history of injury?
Examination of the patient with foot
pain
Your first observation should be to look at the
patient, not the foot. It is useful to highlight those
traits that have been discussed under medical
history (Ch. 5) as the source of pain may be
explained by general disease processes. Assess
the patient's attitude. This may reveal psycholog-
ical variations from normal and may influence
the outcome in terms of treatment.
Pointers concerning general health include:
Does the patient look well?
Is the patient well nourished (obese or thin
and wasted)?
Colour (pale and anaemic, jaundiced)?
Look at the hands, are they misshapened
(rheumatoid arthritis)?
The physical examination may reveal findings
that raise concerns. For example, a manual
worker who has thick calluses on his hands, yet
says he cannot work because of the pain in his
foot, may be less than fully honest.
Examination of the foot begins with watching
the patient walk (Ch. 8). An antalgic limp, where
the patient will spend only a short period of time
on the painful foot, is a clear positive sign. The
limp may be linked with other problems associ-
ated with proximal joints or the back; these
should be excluded. Look at shoe wear on the
sole; this may indicate an abnormal gait pattern.
Are the toes severely clawed, suggesting a neu-
rological problem? It is important to note any cal-
losities, both dorsally and on the sole, as these
indicate areas of high pressure and friction.
Similarly, one must remember all the structures
running under any area of tenderness.
The sources of pain are numerous (Table 16.1)
and can be subdivided for convenience into
problems affecting different tissues, generalised
disorders and referred pain. The table provides
an overview of typical problems associated with
the painful foot. In many cases the origins are not
clear and assessment and investigations are nec-
essary to isolate the cause.
Measurement and assessment of pain
Measurement and assessment of pain is an inte-
gral part of the assessment and treatment plan-
ning process. It gives the practitioner
information regarding the patient's readiness for
treatment, the focus of the appropriate interven-
tion and a quantifiable measure of the disrup-
tiveness of the problem.
With pain being such a personal experience,
many measures of pain are based on patient self-
reports. More objective measurements of pain
THE PAINFUL FOOT 399
Table 16.1 Sources of pain classified under tissue types.
The table provides an overview of typical problems
associated with the painful foot. In many cases the origins
are not clear and assessment and investigations are
necessary to isolate the cause
Table 16.1 (Cont'd)
Condition Aetiology
Tools of assessment - How do we
score pain?
Visual analogue scales (VAS) are used to measure
pain, treatment satisfaction and other related
treatment interventions. The main advantages of
this measure are that it is quick, easy to adminis-
ter, cheap and easily attached to any patient
record card. The disadvantages are that these
scales only measure one dimension of pain, give
Repetitive injury/mechanical
rheumatoid
Obesity/occupational referred
from back
Repetitive injury,
biomechanical
Iatrogenic/congenital
Infective
Biomechanical/deformity/
endocrine/footwear design
Vascular/infective/traumatic/
dermatological/neoplastic
tend to rely on a single dimension - namely, pain
intensity. These measures tend to focus on three
aspects of pain: physical, functional and behav-
ioural. Physical pain can be measured in terms of
intensity, location or physical symptoms.
Functional measurements of pain rely on assess-
ing such things as walking distance or activity
levels, whereas behavioural aspects are more
difficult to assess and include assessing patients'
behaviour towards protecting the affected
painful area or assessing the abnormal gait which
may have developed because of the pain. Other
measurements of pain include multidimensional
analyses. Such tools attempt to assess pain in a
number of different dimensions. They tend to use
multiple visual analogue or number ranking
scales. Listed below is a selection of single and
multidimensional pain assessment tools.
Ulcers
Plantar fasciitis
Skin and subcutaneous
Retrocalcaneal bursitis
Heel pad
Onychocryptosis
Plantar warts
Callosity/corns
Degenerative/biomechanical
Metabolic/endocrine/proximal
entrapment or trauma
Repetitive injury and (Morton's)
degenerative
Congenital with hereditary
predisposition
Lumbar referred pain
Most of these are associated
with injury
Socioenvironmental/endocrine
and metabolic
Secondary to other factors,
e.g. atherosclerosis
Ethnic and social factors
predispose to manifestation
Degenerative/trauma or
rheumatoid manifestation
Dermatological/rheumatoid
Ganglia/cysts
Aetiology
General degeneration
Chronic injury
Chronic injury
General degeneration
Congenital and acquired
Congenital/injury
Repetitive injury
Repetitive injury
Injury/dislocation/
biomechanical
Congenital
General degeneration/referred/
multifactorial/rheumatoid
Repetitive injury/degenerative
Neoplastic metastasis,
primary or secondary
Infective/neoplastic metabolic/
autoimmune reactive
Acute embolism
Nodules
Nerves
Tarsal tunnel
Peripheral neuropathies
Hereditary and motor
sensory neuropathies
(HMSN)
Radicular pain
Vascular
Peripheral vascular disease
Buerger's disease
Soft tissue
Tendonitis
Subluxing peroneal }
tendons
Chronic ankle sprain
Compartment syndrome
Sinus tarsi
Sesamoiditis
Bony or cartilaginous
tumours
Periosteal/joint
Interdigital neuromata
Tarsal coalition
Metatarsalgia
Condition
Articular and bone
Osteoarthritis
Footballer's ankle
Osteochondritis dissecans
Hallux rigidus
Toe deformities
Accessory ossicles
Stress fractures
Subungual exostosis
Exostoses
400 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
a single reading and misinterpretation of the
scoring mechanism, particularly among the
elderly, who frequently mark the wrong place or
misinterpret the scoring continuum. The VAS
consists of a 10 cm line that ranges from 'no pain'
to 'worst possible pain'. Patients are asked to
mark on the line their reported level of pain (Fig.
16.1). Another form of VAS can be presented as a
pain thermometer (Fig. 16.2).
Verbal scales
On similar lines, the simple verbal scales (VS) cat-
egorise pain into discrete groups such as mild
pain, moderate pain, severe pain or worst pain.
Again, these can be presented to the patient in a
linear fashion (Fig. 16.3). Patients are then
instructed to circle the most appropriate descriptor
of pain. One major advantage, like all scale mea-
surements of this nature, is that they are cheap to
administer; another major advantage is that each
No Worst
pain possible
pain
Figure 16.1 A visual analogue scale 10 em in length.
Worst
possible
pain
descriptor is a discrete item, and therefore patients
are only allowed to choose one. The main disad-
vantage revolves around the type of data that can
be extrapolated from measurements of this kind.
One way round this problem is to give each of the
descriptors a number, so that the data collected
can then be analysed as nominal data (see Ch. 4).
Questionnaires
A multidimensional pain tool, the McGill Pain
Questionnaire (MPQ) (Melzack 1975) was
devised in Canada and contains sets of words
that are used to quantify pain levels. The full
questionnaire consists of 78 adjectives arranged
into 20 groups. The groups are set out to reflect
similar pain qualities. The advantage of such a
comprehensive verbal descriptive scale is that it
offers patients the opportunity to describe their
pain on a number of dimensions; for example, it
endorses both emotional and sensory descrip-
tors. The MPQ is a comprehensive reliable multi-
dimensional pain assessment tool. It has been
extensively tested in the clinical arena for both
reliability and validity and consistently scores
well in these domains. The major disadvantage,
especially in a busy clinic, is the length of time
the questionnaire takes to complete. It is there-
fore not ideal for continual use in monitoring
chronic pain, and a short version of the MPQ has
been developed which is easy to administer and
can be repeated easily at short return dates.
Figure 16.3 Examples of verbal scales.
No pain
Figure 16.2 Another form of the visual analogue scale can
be presented as a pain thermometer.
.. '.'W "npra.
No Mild
pain pain
I
Moderate
pain
OR
No pain
Mild pain
Moderate pain
Severe pain
Worst pain
I
Severe
pain
l
Worst
pain
A similar and briefer pain scale is the 52-item
West Haven-Yale multidimensional pain inven-
tory (WHYMPI). This scale is specifically based
on cognitive behavioural models of pain behav-
iour and is used mainly for chronic pain monitor-
ing. It comprises three parts: the impact of pain on
the patient's life, the patients' perception of the
response of others to their communication of pain
and suffering and their levels of participation in
daily life. The major advantages compared with
the long PMQ are that this tool is much quicker to
administer and it gives a rounder picture of the
patient's distress in relation to pain.
Two further tools are worth noting: the
Wisconsin brief pain inventory and the pain per-
ception profile developed by Tursky and col-
leagues. Again, both are quicker to administer
than the MPQ and have a number of disease-
specific advantages when assessing pain.
Observational techniques
Although not particularly relevant to painful foot
management, but included for completeness, a
short description of this technique is outlined. As
the name suggests this technique involves the
practitioner recording observed patient pain
levels. This might include time spent resting, med-
ication used, sleep patterns and verbal! motor
pain behaviour. These techniques are notoriously
difficult and unreliable because precisely defined
behaviours are required and staff are then
required to score these subjective behaviours.
These techniques are particularly useful in the
assessment of patients with severe learning dis-
abilities or communication problems.
Physiological measures
Unfortunately, little use of physiological moni-
toring of pain has been reported in the clinical
setting. Researchers have attempted to measure
autonomic function or disease activity as ana-
logues for the experience of pain. The results
from these studies and similar work is equivocal
and suggest that at present physiological mea-
sures of pain are unreliable and really should not
be considered for monitoring purposes.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 401
Related measurement tools
As well as measuring pain, many of the generic
tools currently available also assess quality of life
(QoL) issues. It is arguable that pain, particularly
in relation to foot health (see below), cannot be
seen in isolation. Other measurements of disease
have to be considered when assessing and moni-
toring patients' health status. Therefore, coupled
with pain measurement and assessment, another
important dimension has entered the patient
assessment arena. It has become increasingly clear
that one cannot separate a patient's pain from
their current QoL. Quality of life, in this context,
can be defined as 'the impact of disease and treat-
ment on disability and daily living or a patient-
based focus on the impact of a perceived health
state on the ability to lead a fulfilling life' (Price
1996). In this context, tools such as the sickness
impact profile (SIP) have been introduced. Not
designed specifically for the measurement of pain,
this tool assesses the effect of certain treatment
interventions in relation to quality of life. It is
designed to look at aspects of activities of daily life
affected by chronic low-level sickness.
Finally, other related tools have been devised,
again not specifically to measure and assess pain
but to quantify the extent of a patient's health
status. Included in such tools are measures of
dimensions such as mobility, physical activity,
dependency and pain. A good example of such a
generic measurement scale is the Arthritis Impact
Measurement Scales (AIMS). As the name sug-
gests, this tool was specifically designed to assess
how a designated disease impacts on the ability
of a patient to function in daily life.
The short form-36 (SF-36) is also worth a
mention in this context. This particular question-
naire was devised from the Rand health batteries
(Stewart & Ware 1992). The SF-36 includes in
its eight dimensions: physical function, social
functioning, role limitations due to emotional
problems, mental health, energyIvitality, pain
and general health perceptions. Also included is
a single item about perceptions of health changes
over the past 12 months. There are many more
examples of these health status tools: some are
disease-specific and others are much more
402 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Instructions: The line next to each item represents the amount of pain you typically had in each situation.
On the left is "No pain" and on the far right is "Worst pain imaginable." Place a mark on the line to indicate
how bad your foot pain was in each of the following situations during the past week.
If you were not involved in one or more of these situations mark them as NA.
Questions: How severe was your foot pain:
1. At its worst?
2. Before you get up in the morning?
3. When you walked barefoot?
4. When you stood barefoot?
5. When you walked wearing shoes?
6. When you stood wearing shoes?
7. When you walked wearing orthotics?
8. When you stood wearing orthotics?
9. At the end of the day?
Figure 16.4 The Foot Function Index pain subscale.
generic. If such tools are to be considered the
practitioner is well advised to check the reliabil-
ity and validity of the selected measuring tools in
the context of the condition they are proposing to
monitor (Bowling 1995).
Foot specific (pain) questionnaires
The pain tools described above are generic and not
specific to the foot. They are useful and have been
used in clinical settings and a selection of research
studies. A foot-specific pain scale that is reliable
and valid has yet to be developed. The develop-
ment of the Foot Function Index (FFI) by
Budiman-Mak et al (1991) marked the first attempt
to measure foot dysfunction. The index is split into
three discrete sections: foot pain (Fig. 16.4), dis-
ability and activity restriction. The pain section of
FFI consists of nine questions that address the
severity of the pain experienced during specific
circumstances. Astudy by Saag et al (1996) demon-
strated the reliability of this section (pain) of the
FFI in relation to arthritic foot pain. Being easy to
administer and foot-specific, the pain section of the
FFI is well worth considering in the clinical arena.
Another foot-specific questionnaire worth con-
sidering for foot monitoring is the Foot Health
Status Questionnaire (FHSQ) developed at
Queensland University of Technology, Australia.
This tool was developed to measure foot health
related quality of life. Although not pain-specific,
this tool includes pain as an indicator in one of
the three subsections. In the section including
pain there are a further three hypothesised
domains of foot health: namely, foot function,
footwear and general foot health (Table 16.2)
(Bennett & Patterson 1998). Bennett et al (1998)
demonstrated the validity of this tool in their
study and concluded that a tool such as this
could be used by researchers and practitioners to
identify changes to foot health status as a result
of different interventions (remember this is one
of the key points when monitoring pain). It is
short and easy to administer, particularly in the
clinical setting; it can also be administered by a
postal survey. One of the major disadvantages in
relation to pain monitoring is that this tool incor-
porates pain as a dimension of foot health. As a
consequence, pain per se cannot be analysed sep-
arately using this tool.
CAUSES OF PAIN IN THE FOOT
ARTICULAR AND BONE
CONDITIONS
Osteoarthritis (OA)
Degenerative arthritis may affect any of the joints
of the foot and ankle. The joints most commonly
affected are the ankle, subtalar, calcaneocuboid,
talonavicular, first tarsometatarsal and first
metatarsophalangeal joint (MTPJ). The first MTPJ
will be considered separately under the heading
of hallux rigidus.
Aetiology
This may be primary with no known cause but,
while such arthritis is common in the hip and
knee, it is rare in the ankle. Far more commonly
OA is secondary to some insult to the joint and
may follow major injury, such as a fracture
extending into the joint, a dislocation or repeated
minor trauma. Fractures of the neck of the talus
may also lead to OA of the ankle. Other causes
can include:
Infection in the joint. Septic arthritis, unless
diagnosed and treated early, will lead to lysis
of cartilage and secondary OA.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 403
Inflammatory arthropathies such as rheumatoid
arthritis (RA) and the seronegative
arthritides, e.g. psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's
disease and ankylosing spondylitis.
Metabolic disorders such as gout and
pseudogout.
Systemic diseases such as diabetes mellitus,
which can lead to Charcot foot or ankle; the
ankle is affected in about 10% of Charcot
foot cases.
Proximal malalignmeni, e.g. following a
malunited fractured tibia, has frequently been
stated to lead to arthritis by imposing
abnormal stresses on distal joints. While some
authors have allowed up to 10 in the sagittal
or frontal plane (Nicoll 1964), others have felt
that even a few degrees of angulation may
lead to significant problems (Johnson 1987).
Merchant disputed this in a long-term follow-
up study when he could find no correlation
between the degree of malunion and the
occurrence of OA (Merchant & Dietz 1989).
Other miscellaneous conditions such as
haemophilia or avascular necrosis (Freiberg's
disease affecting second metatarsal head).
Presenting symptoms
Generally these will be pain and stiffness in the
area of the affected joint. Symptoms may start as
Table 16.2 The four basic domains of foot health as evaluated by the Foot Health Status Questionnaire (FHSQ)
Domain No. of items Theoretical Meaning of Meaning of
construct lowest score (0) highest score (100)
Foot pain 4 Evaluation of foot pain Extreme and significant No pain or discomfort in any
in terms of type of pain, foot pain that is acute part of the foot
severity and duration in nature
Foot function 4 Evaluation of feet in terms Severely limited in performing Can perform all desired
of impact on physical a broad range of physical physical activities: walking,
function activities because of feet: working and climbing stairs
limited in walking, working
and moving about
Footwear 3 Lifestyle issues related Extremely limited in access No problems with obtaining
to footwear and feet to suitable footwear suitable footwear
General foot 2 Self-perception of feet Generally perceives feet Perceives feet to be in an
health (individual's subjective to be in a poor state of excellent state of health and
assessment of body health and identifies poor condition
image related to feet) condition of feet
404 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
aching after exercise and progress of pain after
walking a distance. With time and progression of
the arthritis the distance the patient can walk
without pain gradually reduces. Pain may
become constant and also present at night, dis-
turbing sleep. How much pain the patient is
experiencing is important to know but quantify-
ing pain is difficult, because individual patients
will have different tolerances to pain and differ-
ent attitudes to the degree of their disability.
While one can ask the patient to quantify their
pain on a visual analogue scale of, say, 1-10, it is
function which probably influences us most
when it comes to determining treatment. While
one must beware the stoic who pushes himself
on regardless of the pain (and vice versa), how
much a patient can do is often a good indicator of
how severe the symptoms are. Stiffness may ini-
tially occur after the joint has been rested for a
while, but with time the range of movement in
the affected joint will decrease. Dorsiflexion is
usually the first movement to be lost, and shoes
with a slight heel raise may therefore be more
comfortable. In severe OA the joint may com-
pletely lose movement and become virtually
ankylosed. Patients may also complain of a limp,
swelling or joint deformity.
Signs
The joint may appear swollen or deformed or be
held in an abnormal position. The joint may feel
warm if the underlying cause is infection or an
inflammatory arthropathy, but otherwise not.
An effusion may be present in ankle OA but is
not usually clinically detectable in OA of other
foot joints. Osteophytes may be felt in
superficial joints as hard bony swellings and
represent new bone formation around the
periphery of affected joints. Localised tender-
ness may also be found. The range of movement
of the joint will be reduced, the degree depend-
ing on how advanced the arthritis is, and move-
ment will be painful, more so at extremes. Often
movement may feel 'dry', rather than smooth
and easy. In advanced OA grating or crunching
may be felt by the examiner as the joint is
moved.
Investigations
Plain X-rays, generally standing anteroposterior
(AP for ankle, DP (dorsiplantar) for foot) and
lateral, are essential (Ch. 11). The cardinal signs
of OA are reduced joint space, sclerosis, cysts and
osteophytes (see Fig. 11.27). Standing films are
helpful as they may demonstrate deformity
under load and the true loss of joint space due to
cartilage erosion. Special views may be helpful to
show the subtalar joint; Anthonsen's view shows
the medial and posterior subtalar facets. If infec-
tion is suspected then any open wounds can be
swabbed. Aspiration of the joint to obtain bacte-
riology may be helpful. Results from blood tests
will be normal and are unhelpful unless the OA
is secondary to a systemic disease, infection or
metabolic cause such as gout (Ch. 13). Further to
the discussion on pain it should be noted that the
degree of X-ray change does not always correlate
in a linear fashion with the patient's symptoms
or disability. It is always important to treat the
patient and not the X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
In early OA, when X-rays are normal, a pre-
sumptive diagnosis may be made solely on infor-
mation from the history, symptoms and signs.
Other periarticular causes should be considered
however. In established OA, with X-ray changes,
the differential diagnosis will usually lie in deter-
mining the underlying cause.
Footballer's ankle
Aetiology
This condition was well described by McMurray
in 1950 and occurs in soccer players as a result of
repeated kicking of the ball with the foot held in
equinus (McMurray 1950). In this position the
anterior capsule largely takes the strain, as the
extensor tendons are mechanically disadvan-
taged, and bony traction spurs develop.
Presenting symptoms
These will be pain, often on kicking a stationary
ball, but also on dorsiflexion of the ankle. The
Figure 16.5 X-ray showing footballer's ankle with an
anterior tibial spur - lateral view.
patient may complain of some restriction of
dorsiflexion.
Signs
Local tenderness over the neck of the talus and
anterior tibial margin; pain on dorsiflexion of
the ankle and perhaps some restriction of this
movement.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate a dorsal talar spur
and also a spur on the anterior lip of the tibia.
The spur on the anterior lip of the tibia can be
subtle, appearing as a convex margin rather than
the normal concave one (Fig. 16.5). Both these
spurs are intracapsular, although this may be
difficult to appreciate on a plain X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
This mainly associated with early OA of the
ankle. It should be noted, though, that in a true
footballer's ankle the articular surfaces are
normal when these bony spurs are removed sur-
gically (Case history 16.1).
THE PAINFUL FOOT 405
.... ~ s history 16.1
Patient: 24-year-old professional footballer.
Presenting symptoms: 1 year history of pain over
dorsum of the right ankle. This had gradually
increased and was painful especially when running.
There was no history of instability. 3 months
previously the patient had undergone removal of 'bony
spur' by the club doctor, but symptoms had persisted
and he was currently unable to play football.
Signs: Some discomfort on full dorsiflexion but no
discernible loss of movement.
Investigations: Plain X-rays showed osteophytic
lip to anterior margin of right tibia, with evidence of
previous removal of talar spur.
Diagnosis: Partially treated footballer's ankle.
Operative findings: Arthroscopy showed synovitis
of ankle and confirmed osteophytic anterior tibial
margin. This was resected.
Postoperatively the patient made a good recovery
and returned to the first team.
Osteochondritis dissecans
(ankle/talocrural joint)
Aetiology
This is an interesting condition in which an
osteochondral fragment becomes separated from
the talar dome, usually posteromedially or mid-
laterally. It is now thought that all of the lateral
and most of the medial lesions originate from
trauma, probably associated with inversion
injuries of the ankle (De Smet et aI1990).
Presenting symptoms
Because of the aetiology the diagnosis may be
missed acutely and the patient treated for a simple
sprain or malleolar fracture. If, however, symp-
toms persist after adequate treatment of the recog-
nised injury, an osteochondral fracture should be
suspected. Acute symptoms will be those of a
sprained ankle, with the patient complaining of
pain, swelling and difficulty walking. Chronic
symptoms are more general, with patients com-
plaining of discomfort, pain and perhaps stiffness
during or after exercise. If an osteochondral frag-
ment has become detached from the talar dome,
then there may be locking and giving way in the
ankle, suggestive of a loose body.
406 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Signs
Acute signs will include swelling and tenderness
over the lateral ligament complex with pain on
inversion of the ankle. It may be possible to
locate tenderness over the talar dome midlater-
ally or behind the medial malleolus.
Investigations
AP, lateral and oblique (l0 of medial rotation)
plain X-rays of the ankle should initially be
requested. Lateral lesions classically are shallow,
horizontal and often detached or elevated.
Medial lesions are frequently cup-shaped and
deeper (Canale & Belding 1980), shown by line
drawing in Figure 16.6. In the acute stage X-rays
may appear normal, especially if the lesion is
stage I, i.e. only the articular cartilage is
damaged (Berndt & Harty 1959). Even in a
chronic lesion it may be difficult to detect any
changes on plain X-ray. A bone scan is extremely
useful as it will usually be positive. Magnetic res-
onance imaging (MRI) is the most sensitive, as
well as the most expensive way of demonstrating
Figure 16.6 Osteochondritis dissecans: line drawing of
anterior view of the ankle mortice. Lateral lesions tend to be
horizontal and shallow, medial ones tend to be deeper and
cup-shaped.
the osteochondral fractures. Blood tests are of no
value in the investigation of this condition.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely, this will be the coexistent trauma.
Chronically, it will be other conditions around the
ankle such as anterolateral impingement syn-
drome, tendonitis of any of the tendons crossing
the ankle joint and early GA.
Hallux rigidus
Aetiology
Hallux rigidus is a condition in which
dorsiflexion of the MTPJ of the hallux is restricted
and painful on movement. Plantarflexion may
also be limited but dorsiflexion is the functional
movement affected by the pathology. It may
occur secondary to an osteochondritis dissecans
of the first metatarsal head in adolescents, usually
females. In adults, males tend to predominate and
it can be secondary to a systemic disease such as
RA or gout, but most commonly is primarily due
to a local arthritic degeneration. Various theories
have been advanced for the primary cause, such
as a long first metatarsal and hallux and repeated
minor trauma; patients tend to have pronated,
narrow, long feet with a flat longitudinal arch.
Hallux plexus was a term originally used to
describe hallux rigidus. It is now used in conno-
tation with a severe form where the proximal
phalanx becomes flexed at the MTPJ and the first
metatarsal becomes secondarily elevated.
Presenting symptoms
Intermittent pain in adolescents, who may expe-
rience episodes of acute pain made worse by
walking. Adults present with pain on walking,
stiffness and pain over the dorsal exostosis in
more advanced cases, although lateral joint pain
may be observed as well.
Signs
The hallux is commonly straight and a dorsal
bony prominence, with perhaps a bunion (soft
bursa swelling), may be found. Locally there may
be some tenderness over the exostosis and
around the first MTPJ. The range of movement
should be assessed with the foot in a plantigrade
position but also in a plantarflexed position. A
grind test, in which the hallux is compressed
longitudinally with rotation, may be painful
where the joint is not stiff. In advanced cases
compensatory secondary hyperextension of the
interphalangeal joint (IPJ) may be found and
commonly there is a callosity on the medial
plantar aspect of the head of the proximal
phalanx or base of the distal phalanx.
Investigations
Plain X-rays of the first MTPJ may be normal or
show a dorsal exostosis with a normal-looking
joint. In more advanced cases degenerative
changes will be apparent with progressive OA. If
hallux rigidus is due to gout or RA then periar-
ticular erosions may be present with osteoporo-
sis. Blood tests are only indicated if a systemic
disease is suspected.
Differential diagnosis
In flexor hallucis longus tenosynovitis, dorsi-
flexion of the hallux may be restricted and painful.
Resisted plantarflexion of the hallux will be
painful and local tenderness may be felt posterior
to the medial malleolus.
Accessory ossicles
Aetiology
There are at least 15 accessory ossicles around the
foot and ankle (Romanowski & Barrington 1991).
Most are anatomical variants in origin (see Fig.
11.18). Only two are rarely likely to cause symp-
toms. Around the hindfoot there is the as
trigonum, on the posterior aspect of the talus
close to the lateral tubercle, and the accessory nav-
icular (Fig. 16.7 and see Fig. 11.19). The type II
accessory navicular is roughly 1em in size and
united to the main body of the navicular by a
synchondrosis of about 12mm (Romanowski &
Barrington 1991).
THE PAINFUL FOOT 407
Figure 16.7 X-ray showing accessory navicular - dorsiplantar
view.
Presenting symptoms
The os trigonum causes symptoms with activities
in repeated plantarflexion, affecting football
players and dancers standing 'en pointe'.
Patients complain of posterolateral ankle pain
when the ankle is plantarflexed and impinge-
ment occurs. An accessory navicular may cause
rubbing in a shoe, because of local pressure, or
may become symptomatic following a twisting
injury to the foot.
Signs
With a symptomatic os trigonum tenderness
may be felt behind the lateral malleolus and
peroneal tendons and forced passive plantar-
flexion of the ankle will be painful. When
an accessory navicular is present there will
be local tenderness in association with a promi-
nent navicular and perhaps pain on resisted
inversion.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate the presence of
accessory ossicles but their presence is not proof
408 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
------------------------------
of their guilt. A bone scan may help to demon-
strate a symptomatic os trigonum.
Differential diagnosis
A symptomatic os trigonum may be mistaken for
peroneal tendonitis, flexor hallucis longus ten-
donitis or a fracture of the lateral process of the
posterior talar tubercle. A symptomatic accessory
navicular is usually obvious because of local ten-
derness but should not be confused with tibialis
posterior tendonitis.
Stress fractures
Aetiology
Stress fractures occur due to overuse in
unadapted feet or when surgery in the foot leads
to high stresses elsewhere. Fractures have been
reported in groups such as runners, army
recruits and dancers. They may also occur,
though rarely, after first ray surgery, e.g. Keller's
excisional arthroplasty operation, which
increases stresses on the lesser metatarsals. From
whatever cause the most common site is a
metatarsal shaft. Stress fractures have also been
reported in the calcaneus, navicular, cuboid and
proximal phalanx of the hallux.
Presenting symptoms
Pain occurs in relation to activity. Initially it
may be vague and difficult to localise but settles
on rest. With time the patient may complain of a
limp.
Signs
In the early stages there may be little to find on
clinical examination but if activity continues then
local tenderness and swelling will develop. A
limp may be present.
Investigations
Plain X-rays may often be normal in the early
stages and it can be 2-3 weeks before changes
become apparent for metatarsal stress fractures
and up to 5 weeks for calcaneal ones. In the
metatarsal shafts early changes may be a fine
line of bone resorption followed either by scle-
rosis or periosteal callus, depending on whether
the cortex has been breached. In the calcaneum
the fractures tend to occur in the posterior
part and appear as endosteal callus with an
intact cortex on X-ray. Because of the delay in
plain radiographs a bone scan may be helpful if
there is doubt about the diagnosis. Computed
tomography (CT) or magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI) scans may be helpful to show
stress fractures which are difficult to depict on
plain X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
The clinical picture, relation to activity and local
tenderness should point towards the correct
diagnosis. One should beware of metatarsal
'stress fractures' in the diabetic as they may be
the precursor of a Charcot foot.
Subungual exostosis
Aetiology
This is a bony spur usually ansmg from the
dorsomedial aspect of the distal phalanx of the
hallux. Rarely it may arise from the lesser toes. It
is generally a benign osteochondroma, congeni-
tal in origin, and may be noticed from adoles-
cence up to early middle age. There is some
suggestion that those occurring in young adult
athletes may be the result of repetitive minor
trauma inside the shoe.
Presenting symptoms
Patients may notice a swelling under the nail or
may complain of pain on walking or running
with shoes on.
Signs
The nail may be elevated and there may be
a darkish discoloration, resembling a haema-
toma, apparent under the nail. The distal nail
edge may be elevated, suggesting an enlarged
distal tuft.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will show the exostosis. Medial
oblique views are most helpful but DP and
lateral may be required to establish the extent of
the projection. As cartilage is not radio-opaque,
the practitioner should not be lulled into think-
ing that the swelling is small (see Fig. 11.32).
Differential diagnosis
A subungual exostosis may be confused with
other conditions, such as a glomus tumour or
subungual wart.
Tarsal coalition
Aetiology
This is a congenital condition, inherited as an
autosomal dominant trait, in which adjacent tarsal
bones have a fibrous, cartilage or bone connection
or bridge which progressively restricts normal
movement. This may be termed syndesmosis,
synchondrosis or synostosis, respectively, and
occurs in less than 1%of the population (Mosier &
Asher 1984). Generally, it begins as a fibrous union
in infancy and progresses to cartilaginous and
then bony union; however, it may remain fibrous.
The most common coalition is probably talocal-
caneal, followed by calcaneonavicular (Stormont
& Peterson 1983). Although rare, most other pos-
sible combinations have been described.
Presenting symptoms
Although these coalitions usually ossify between
8 and 16, symptoms may not develop until late
childhood or into adulthood. Sometimes patients
never develop symptoms and the diagnosis is
made incidentally. When they do present,
patients may complain of stiffness and ankle
pain where playing sport. They may also com-
plain of recurrent ankle sprains.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 409
Signs
Stiffness in the subtalar or midtarsal joint move-
ments is usually the predominant sign. Patients
may also have a valgus flatfoot with subtalar irri-
tability, characterised by pain on forced
plantarflexion of the ankle joint and some per-
oneal spasm. In childhood, presentation like this
is known as peroneal spastic flatfoot.
Investigations
Appropriate plain X-rays may demonstrate a
coalition; DP, lateral and medial oblique films
should be taken. Medial oblique views show the
calcaneonavicular coalition (Fig. 16.8). A Harris
axial view may show a talocalcaneal coalition.
Dorsal beaking on the head of the talus is a sec-
ondary change to abnormal movement, also
suggesting this type of pathology (Case history
16.2). A long anterior calcaneal process may
indicate a calcaneonavicular coalition, although
this coalition is usually well demonstrated on
plain films (see Fig. 11.35). If X-rays are not
diagnostic then a CT scan in the frontal plane
may confirm the diagnosis.
Figure 16.8 X-ray illustrating calcaneonavicular coalition-
medial oblique view.
410 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
r------------------- -----1
I Case history 16.2 I
Patient: 25-year-old female.
Presenting symptoms: The patient has a history
of bilateral flat feet since childhood. She was now
getting pain on walking after half a mile which was
interfering with normal living.
Signs: There was a normal range of movement in
both ankle joints but both subtalar joints were rigid;
there was slight decreased range of movement in the
midtarsal joints bilaterally.
Investigations: Plain X-rays showed talar beaking
bilaterally. A CT scan showed bony left talocalcaneal
fusion. On the right there was virtual talocalcaneal
apposition but bony fusion could not be demonstrated
and a fibrous union was surmised.
Diagnosis: Bilateral talocalcaneal tarsal coalition
with secondary arthritic changes in the midtarsal
joints.
Operative: Planned staged triple arthrodeses to
give the patient plantigrade pain-free feet for walking.
Differential diagnosis
Other conditions leading to stiff subtalar or mid-
tarsal joints, such as degenerative or inflamma-
tory arthritis.
Metatarsalgia
Aetiology
Metatarsalgia is characterised by pain felt under
one or more metatarsal heads when weightbear-
ing. It may be due to a number of causes:
Atrophy of the plantarfat padwith age. This
results in a generalised metatarsalgia because
of loss of the cushioning effect of the fat pad.
Increased pressure under the lesser metatarsals
following first MTPJ surgery, e.g. for hallux
valgus of Keller's operation.
Metatarsophalangeal joint problems.
Subluxation or dislocation of the proximal
phalanx may lead to a pistoning effect which
depresses the metatarsal head, increasing its
load. This may occur in inflammatory
arthropathies or in a cavus foot with claw
toes. Claw toes that dorsiflex on the
metatarsal head pull the fat pad forward,
exposing the metatarsal head to greater
loading during stance. Case history 16.3
illustrates the effect of hallux valgus on the
forefoot.
A prominent fibular (lateral) condyle on a
metatarsal head may cause a very local plantar
callosity with pain on weightbearing.
Proximal stiffness of malalignment, e.g. a pes
cavus foot, may lead to excessive loading on
one side of the foot.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain under the ball of the
foot on walking, made worse by walking bare-
foot. Well-padded shoes such as trainers can
reduce symptoms effectively. Patients may also
complain of hard skin continually building up
under the foot, which adds to the general dis-
comfort.
Signs
The main sign is tenderness under the metatarsal
heads on palpation; callosities may be present
under the symptomatic heads, indicating the
increased load. With a prominent fibular condyle
the callosity is small and well-defined and has a
Patient: 58-year-old garage mechanic.
Presenting symptoms: The patient presented
with a large bunion on his left foot and discomfort
under the centre of the ball of his foot on walking.
Signs: A gross hallux valgus was present, along
with pronation of the hallux. There was some callosity
formation under the second and third metatarsal
heads. The rest of the foot was normal.
Investigations: Plain x-rays showed hallux valgus
of 55with lateral subluxation of the proximal phalanx
at the first MTPJ. Some minor degenerative changes
were present in this joint.
Diagnosis: Gross hallux valgus with secondary
transfer metatarsalgia due to unloading of the first ray.
Operation: Arthrodesis of the first MTPJ to correct
the hallux valgus and allow better weightbearing
through the first ray, thus relieving the transfer
metatarsalgia. Usually a secondary reduction in the
hallux valgus is difficult with realignment (osteotomy)
operations. Postoperatively the patient's symptoms
were relieved.
central keratotic core. This may be described as a
localised intractable plantar keratoma. The other
type of callosity observed will be a diffuse lesion
without a central keratotic core. Prominent
metatarsal heads may be palpated and their
degree of rigidity should be assessed, as should
the mobility of the toes. It is important to access
the mobility of the proximal joints to ensure they
are supple.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate evidence of any
inflammatory arthropathy and any changes in a
metatarsophalangeal joint. If available, dynamic
pressure studies will show the distribution of
pressure under the metatarsal heads. The plain
X-ray view has not been shown to provide an
objective measurement of metatarsal plantar-
flexion in the case of lesser metatarsals.
Differential diagnosis
This lies between the various causes of
metatarsalgia. A wart may cause a plantar cal-
losity but does not normally occur under a
metatarsal head. A Morton's neuroma is com-
monly referred to as Morton's metatarsalgia,
although the pain and tenderness is actually
between metatarsals, radiating into toes (digital
neuritis).
Sesamoiditis
Aetiology
Flexor hallucis brevis inserts into the base of the
proximal phalanx of the hallux and within its
tendons two sesamoid bones lie under the first
metatarsal head. These may give rise to pain if
they become arthritic. This can occur secondary
to hallux rigidus or inflammatory arthropathies
such as rheumatoid arthritis. Chondromalacia-
type changes have also been reported. Rarely,
sesamoids may fracture following trauma
and stress fractures have been reported. Hyper-
trophy of a sesamoid can lead to a painful plantar
callosity.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 411
Presenting symptoms
Pain under the first metatarsal head on weight-
bearing is the main symptom; patients may
notice this particularly on toe-off.
Signs
Tenderness may be localised to one or both
sesamoids. Extension at the first MTPJ may be
limited and painful and a plantar callosity may
be present.
Investigations
A standing DP and lateral X-rays should be
taken and also a skyline view of the sesamoids.
If X-rays are normal a bone scan may be helpful.
Differential diagnosis
Other causes of pain around the first MTPJ, such
as hallux rigidus. The high incidence of bipartite
sesamoids (figures vary from 10 to 30%) may
lead to a false diagnosis of a fracture (Hubay
1949).
Tumours
Aetiology
Bony or cartilaginous tumours are fortunately
rare in the foot. Nevertheless, a number have
been reported, both benign and malignant.
Among the most common benign ones are osteoid
osteoma, enchondroma and osteochondroma. Osteoid
osteomas may occur in the tarsus in the foot,
enchondromas in metatarsals or phalanges and
osteochondromas normally only occur as subun-
gual exostoses (Fig. 16.9). Malignant tumours
reported include osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma
and Ewing's tumour. Osteosarcomas and chon-
drosarcomas have been reported in the tarsus
and metatarsals, Ewing's in the tarsus. Although
a secondary deposit is the most common bony
tumour in the body as a whole, secondaries are
rare in the foot but may occur: if they do, the
most likely primary is a bronchial carcinoma.
412 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Figure 16.9 Subungual exostosis on dorsum of third toe
with gross nail displacement.
Presenting symptoms
This will depend on the individual tumour.
Osteoid osteomas tend to occur in young adults
and classically give rise to night pain relieved
by aspirin. Enchondromas may cause cortical
thinning of a metatarsal and therefore present
with acute pain from a pathological fracture.
Malignant tumours may present with pain
and/ or swelling.
Signs
These depend on the diagnosis and may vary
from nil to tenderness and swelling from a patho-
logical fracture.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate most of these
lesions, showing areas of bone destruction,
expansion or new bone formation. An osteoid
osteoma may be seen as a central nidus with sur-
rounding sclerosis, but can be very difficult to see
and a bone scan may help by showing it as a con-
centrated hot spot. MRI is extremely helpful both
in diagnosis and delineating the extent of a
malignant tumour. Before any definitive treat-
ment is planned a biopsy of the tumour is usually
necessary. As well as imaging bony tumours, a
full blood screen will usually be performed,
along with a chest X-ray and bone scan, unless
the tumour is simple and benign.
Differential diagnosis
The first consideration with any lesion suspected
of being a tumour is whether it is benign or
malignant. Infection should always be consid-
ered as it may sometimes be difficult to differen-
tiate. Although it should not cause any confusion
in diagnosis, an old fracture may sometimes look
suspicious to the untutored eye.
SOFT TISSUE, TENDONS AND
LIGAMENTS
Tendonitis
Aetiology
Peritendonitis may affect any of the tendons
crossing the ankle into the foot but most com-
monly involves the tendo Achilles and tibialis
posterior. Achilles tendonitis occurs usually in
young adults who are joggers or athletes. Tibialis
posterior tenosynovitis (inflammation of its
tendon sheath) normally occurs in late middle
age. Less commonly, tenosynovitis of a peroneal
tendon may occur and in dancers tenosynovitis
of the flexor hallucis longus tendon can occur
where it passes in a groove behind the talus.
Presenting symptoms
Patients with peritendonitis will present with
pain on exercise, usually along the course of the
tendon; they may also notice some swelling. It is
worth enquiring whether they have recently
changed running shoes.
Signs
In Achilles tendonitis the tendon will be painful
to palpation about 5 cm proximal to its distal
insertion; with time, swelling and crepitus may
be found. In tibialis posterior tenosynovitis there
will be tenderness behind the medial malleolus
with pain on resisted inversion and perhaps
passive eversion. It is important to rule out rup-
tured tibialis posterior tendon. In this case the
patient may present with vague pain on the
medial aspect and a spontaneous flat foot. The
hindfoot will be in valgus and the heel will not
invert if the patient stands on tiptoe. When
looked at from behind, the forefoot is abducted,
producing the 'too many toes sign' (Johnson
1983).
For the peroneal tendons, tenderness will be
felt distal to the lateral malleolus, along the
course of the tendons, with pain on inversion
and plantarflexion. Differentiating between
brevis and longus may be difficult; tenderness
on the sole of the foot between the cuboid and
base of the first metatarsal will suggest prob-
lems with peroneus longus. Evert the hindfoot
actively against resistance to clarify such
involvement.
In tenosynovitis of flexor hallucis longus there
will be tenderness posterior to the medial malle-
olus with pain on passive extension of the hallux.
Occasionally, tenderness can be found at the level
of the sesamoids and may cause limitation of
movement at the first MTPJ.
Investigations
Peritendonitis is largely a clinical diagnosis; if
doubt exists then MRI may be helpful in showing
fluid in the tendon sheath. Abolition of the
patient's symptoms by injection of local anaes-
thetic may also be diagnostic.
Differential diagnosis
In Achilles tendonitis it is important not to miss a
rupture. Up to 25% of acute ruptures are missed
(Lutter 1991). Similarly, with tibialis posterior
tenosynovitis, rupture should be looked for.
Tenderness at the insertion may be due to an
accessory navicular.
Subluxing peroneal tendons
Aetiology
The peroneal tendons are held behind the lateral
malleolus by the retinaculum and this may be
ruptured in an acute injury. Following that the
tendons are free to sublux.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 413
Presenting symptoms
The patient may complain of a painful snapping
sensation at the ankle on certain movements.
Signs
There will be tenderness along the peroneal
tendons behind the lateral malleolus and the
tendons may sublux anteriorly with resisted
eversion and dorsiflexion.
Investigations
Again, this is mainly a clinical diagnosis but if
doubt exists then a peroneal tenogram may show
dye leakage, indicating a torn retinaculum.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely with a sprained ankle and more chroni-
cally with peroneal tenosynovitis.
Chronic ankle sprain
Aetiology
Chronic lateral pain following an acute inversion
injury of the ankle is common, being reported in
up to 50% of some patient groups (Ferkel et al
1991). This may be due to residual instability,
causing recurrent sprains, but most commonly is
due to soft tissue impingement in the lateral
gutter. The initial sprain leads to inflammation,
synovitis and then scar tissue and fibrosis.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain over the anterolateral
aspect of the ankle on walking, and often weak-
ness and a feeling of giving way.
Signs
Tenderness is present over the anterolateral
gutter of the ankle. Ankle and subtalar joint
movement is usually normal. Instability should
be carefully looked for. Clinically, this is done by
comparing inversion between the two ankles and
414 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
doing an anterior drawer test. In this test the
patient lies supine with the knee flexed and the
examiner sits on the patient's foot to stabilise it.
The tibia is then pushed back on the talus.
Instability is shown by excessive movement by
comparison to the other ankle. A clunking sensa-
tion may be elicited sometimes. This may be a
difficult test to do without the patient fully
relaxed under a general anaesthetic.
Investigations
Plain X-rays are usually normal but may show
small bony spurs or calcification. Stress X-rays
for instability will be normal. A bone scan may
show mildly increased uptake and is only useful
in excluding other causes of pain. MRI is the only
tool which can show increased soft tissue in the
lateral gutter.
Differential diagnosis
Other local causes of pain should be excluded,
such as an osteochondral fracture, peroneal
tendon problems and arthritis of the ankle joint.
Sinus tarsi syndrome
Aetiology
This condition was first described in 1958 by
O'Connor, but has remained somewhat nebulous
(O'Connor 1958). It follows a sprained ankle
which does not resolve in the normal time and
may be due to degeneration of the fatty soft
tissue in the sinus tarsi. Although such changes
have been shown, in O'Connor's original series
of 14 patients treated operatively histology of
excised tissue was normal. Some practitioners
consider that the condition represents a mild
form of subtalar instability.
Presenting symptoms
The patient will complain of chronic pain, situ-
ated laterally, following a sprained ankle.
Signs
Apart from tenderness over the sinus tarsi, there
is little to find.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will be normal. An injection of local
anaesthetic into the sinus tarsi should provide
some temporary relief of symptoms and is diag-
nostically useful.
Differential diagnosis
Other causes of continued pain following a
sprained ankle.
Compartment syndrome
Aetiology
The muscles and nerves in the leg are contained
within four compartments, each of which has
fascial or fascial and osseous boundaries. The
foot also has four compartments. A compartment
syndrome results from ischaemia to muscles, and
may involve nerves, secondary to raised pressure
within that compartment. It may occur acutely
following a fracture or soft-tissue trauma or
chronically with symptoms after a certain level of
exercise. Mild compartment syndromes are not
infrequently missed following a fractured tibia
and present with residual sequelae such as claw
toes. Chronic compartment syndromes only will
be discussed.
Presenting symptoms
Chronic compartment syndromes of the leg will
present with pain in the involved compartment
after a degree of exercise, usually running. The
pain settles on rest but symptoms may become
worse with time. If the anterior compartment is
involved, then pain and paraesthesia may radiate
into the dorsum of the foot and ankle from
involvement of the superficial peroneal nerve. If
the deep posterior compartment is involved,
then pain and paraesthesia over the sole of the
foot, in the distribution of the posterior tibial
nerve, may be felt.
Signs
At rest physical examination may be normal,
although there may be some tenderness over the
distal tibia. This may become more marked if
the patient exercises on a treadmill to produce
symptoms.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken to exclude a stress
fracture or other osseous causes of leg pain.
Measuring compartment pressures with a
catheter introduced under local anaesthetic is the
most useful way to confirm the diagnosis.
Pressures are measured before and after
exercise. There is some debate as to the correct
abnormal compartment pressures. Generally,
intracompartmental pressures at rest should be
less than 15mmHg and 5-10 min following exer-
cise should have returned to 15mmHg or less
(Pedowitz et aI1990).
Differential diagnosis
Shin splints or stress fractures of the tibia will be
the main differential diagnosis for leg pains. For
neurological symptoms in the foot an entrap-
ment neuropathy should be excluded.
NERVES
A number of nerves may be compressed at sites
around the ankle and foot, resulting in entrap-
ment neuropathies.
Tarsal tunnel syndrome
Aetiology
The posterior tibial nerve, a branch of the sciatic
nerve, may become compressed as it passes
under the flexor retinaculum behind the medial
malleolus (Fig. 16.10). Interestingly, tarsal
tunnel syndrome is a relatively new diagnosis,
having only been properly first described in
1962 (Keck 1962, Lam 1962). The condition is
analogous to carpal tunnel syndrome in the
wrist but nowhere near as common. The com-
THE PAINFUL FOOT 415
r . iiii ii\\\--uiliilimc---+--- Posterior
f> tibial nerve
- ~ - - \ - - Flexor
retinaculum
----
Medial and lateral plantar
nerves emerging
Figure 16.10 Line drawing to show gross anatomy of the
tarsal tunnel - lateral view.
pression may cause direct pressure, leading to
motor and sensory symptoms, or may compress
the vascular supply, the vasa nervorum, causing
sensory symptoms only. Aetiology of tarsal
tunnel syndrome is idiopathic, trauma or asso-
ciated with bony alignment (Cimino 1990).
Other cases may be related to problems such as
rheumatoid arthritis or compression within the
tunnel associated with a ganglion, lipoma or
venous varicosities.
Presenting symptoms
The patient is likely to complain of a diffuse,
burning type of pain on the sole of the foot.
With time symptoms may become more
localised. Often pain is worse on activity and
better at rest. A proportion of patients get night-
time pain and some 30% have proximal radia-
tion of pain to the midcalf region, known as the
Valleix phenomenon (Mann 1993).
Signs
Sensory or motor weakness is rare to find but
should be carefully looked for. Most useful is a
positive Tinel sign, obtained by starting proximally
and percussing along the course of the nerve.
At the site of entrapment percussion will cause
radiation of pain along the course of the nerve.
Case history 16.4
416 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Investigations
Plain X-rays may demonstrate any post-trau-
matic bony spurs causing compression but do
not in themselves make a diagnosis. Electro-
diagnostic tests are necessary for this: nerve con-
duction studies looking at sensory conduction
velocities and the amplitude and duration of
motor-evoked potentials (Ch. 7). Tests should be
performed bilaterally and a peripheral neuropa-
thy should be excluded. If an extrinsic compres-
sion in the tunnel is suspected then an MRI may
be helpful.
Differential diagnosis
Because of the diffuse nature of the symptoms
the differential diagnosis is quite wide, but two
possibilities should be particularly looked for. A
peripheral neuropathy, e.g. from diabetes, may
cause burning pains in the foot, but is usually
bilateral. Sciatica with nerve root irritation
causing distal pain also needs to be excluded.
Straight leg raising will be restricted and painful.
Other entrapments
Aetiology
Other entrapments which have been described
include the deep peroneal nerve under the infe-
rior extensor retinaculum and the superficial per-
oneal nerve as it exits the deep fascia about
11.5em above the lateral malleolus, the medial
plantar nerve at the master knot of Henry and the
first branch of the lateral plantar nerve between
abductor hallucis and quadratus plantae
muscles. Most of these entrapments occur in
runners or athletes.
Symptoms and signs
Deep peroneal nerve. Patients complain of
pain over the dorsum of the foot and sometimes
numbness and paraesthesia in the first web
space. There may be altered sensation in the first
web space and a positive Tinel sign.
Superficial peroneal nerve. Symptoms include
pain over the dorsum of the foot and ankle and
inferior lateral border of the calf. As a sensory
nerve there are no motor signs but there may be
a positive Tinel sign. A fascial defect or muscle
herniation where the nerve exits the deep fascia
should be looked for.
Medial plantar nerve. Patients complain of an
aching pain over the medial aspect of the arch,
often radiating into the medial three toes, becom-
ing worse on running. Again, a positive Tinel
sign may be found and also tenderness under the
medial arch (Case history 16.4).
First branch of lateral plantar nerve. Patients
complain of chronic pain, often increased on
running but sometimes present on waking. On
examination there will be tenderness over the
nerve deep to abductor hallucis and pressure
reproduces the patient's symptoms.
Investigations
Nerve conduction studies may help with the
diagnosis of deep peroneal nerve entrapment,
but are less useful in diagnosing the others. More
--- ----_._--..
;
1-------------------------_
1
Patient: 48-year-old keen runner; squash and
badminton player.
Presenting symptoms: 18-month history of
bilateral paraesthesia affecting the medial aspect of
the soles of both feet, in the distribution of the medial
plantar nerve, when running. Symptoms initially
settled after exercise but over the next 6 months the
patient developed shooting pains without any pattern
of onset with increasing numbness in both feet.
Signs: A positive Tinel sign above both medial
malleoli. Some loss of sharp and blunt sensory
discrimination on the medial aspect of the sole was
identified.
Investigations: Nerve conduction studies showed
conduction blocks bilaterally at the level of the tarsal
tunnel. Medial plantar responses were absent on the
right and delayed on the left.
Diagnosis: Bilateral tarsal tunnel syndrome.
Operative findings: On both sides there was a
high division of the posterior tibial nerve into medial
and lateral plantar branches. A sharp edge to
abductor hallucis was found to be compressing the
medial plantar nerve bilaterally. In addition there was
a large vascular pedicle crossing the medial plantar
nerve and compressing it more proximally. Pain
settled following surgery.
recently, abnormalities of nerve conduction and
electromyography have demonstrated plantar
nerve abnormalities (Schon et al 1993). Injection
of local anaesthetic at the site of entrapment may
act as a diagnostic test if it abolishes symptoms.
Differential diagnosis
As for tarsal tunnel syndrome.
Peripheral neuropathy
Aetiology
Peripheral neuropathies may be due to a variety
of causes. In the West the leading cause is dia-
betes and in the Third World it is leprosy. Other
causes include spina bifida, pernicious anaemia,
drugs and alcoholism. The different patterns of
peripheral neuropathy may vary but in diabetics
the most common is a symmetrical distal
polyneuropathy, encompassing motor, sensory
and autonomic components.
Presenting symptoms
Patients may notice no symptoms at all if the
neuropathy presents as a painless one. The first
inkling of a problem may be when a patient pre-
sents with a complication such as ulceration or
infection. In a diabetic who normally has a pain-
less foot with no sensation the presence of pain is
important and may indicate deep infection, such
as an abscess or osteomyelitis. If the presentation
is of a painful neuropathy the patient may com-
plain of a burning sensation in the legs and feet,
commonly worse at night.
Signs
In a diabetic the foot may adopt a cavus appear-
ance with clawed toes. In the absence of vascular
disease the foot will feel warm and there may be
distended veins. Sensation to light touch and pin-
prick will be reduced and joint position sense
may be impaired. The toes may be clawed with
wasting of the intrinsic foot muscles and the ankle
jerk absent. Callosities may be present under the
metatarsal heads and heel.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 417
Investigations
In evaluating a peripheral neuropathy it is
important to look for an underlying cause.
The urine should be tested for sugar and a
random blood glucose test performed to look
for the most common cause. A careful history
and examination should uncover evidence
of other causes. Nerve conduction studies
may be helpful to rule out an entrapment
neuropathy.
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma)
Aetiology
This condition is a type of entrapment neuropa-
thy affecting a plantar digital nerve. It most com-
monly affects the common digital nerve to the 3/4
interspace, but may also occur in the 2/3 inter-
space. The diagnosis probably does not exist in
the first or fourth webspaces, although there has
been much debate about this. The incidence of a
second neuroma in the same foot is 4%
(Thompson & Deland 1993). Women are affected
at least four times more often than men and the
condition can affect adults of any age. The nerve
develops a fusiform swelling, just proximal to its
bifurcation, at the level of the intermetatarsal
bursa (Fig. 16.11). Although frequently termed a
neuroma, technically it is not as the histology
shows a degenerative process rather than a prolif-
erative one.
Presenting symptoms
The patient complains of a burning pain on the
sole of the foot, at the level of the metatarsal
heads and commonly radiating into one or two
toes. It may feel to the patient like walking on a
sharp pebble. Occasionally, pain will radiate
proximally. Pain is often worse on walking and
may be particularly exacerbated by tight-fitting
shoes, as these will compress the metatarsal
heads together, thus 'trapping' the nerve. Resting
or removing tight shoes may settle the pain. Less
than half the patients complain of numbness in
the toes.
418 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Figure 16.11 Resected Morton's neuroma showing
terminal digital branches following operation.
Signs
On palpation of the relevant interspace the
patient's pain will be reproduced, sometimes
with radiation into a toe. However, it may be
difficult to elicit conclusive evidence on examina-
tion. If pressure is maintained in the interspace
with one hand, while the other alternately
squeezes the forefoot from side to side to com-
press the metatarsal heads together, then a
painful click may be obtained. This is known as
Mulder's click and is only helpful if it reproduces
pain (Mulder 1951). It is important to ensure that
any tenderness is not over the metatarsal heads,
rather than intermetatarsal, although in rare
cases nerves may become entrapped under a
metatarsal head. Sensation in the toes is usually
normal, but may vary.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken to rule out other
pathology. Although ultrasound and MRI have
been used to look for the swelling in the nerve
they have not generally proved reliable enough
to be used as diagnostic tools. Ultrasound has
been reported as useful if the neuroma is 5 mm in
diameter (Pollak et al 1992). Nerve conduction
studies are not helpful. A diagnostic injection of
local anaesthetic may be helpful if it abolishes the
patient's pain.
Differential diagnosis
Problems affecting the metatarsal head, such as
synovitis, intermetatarsal bursa and Freiberg's
disease, should be considered. It is important
to be careful about whether the tenderness
is under a metatarsal head or intermetatarsal.
Pain from a neurological cause, such as tarsal
tunnel syndrome, peripheral neuropathy or
referred pain from the back should be
excluded.
SKIN AND SUBCUTANEOUS TISSUES
Retrocalcaneal bursitis
Aetiology
There are two bursae at the heel; one is deep to
the tendo Achilles and the other lies superficial to
its insertion. The deep bursa is infrequently
affected but, as it has a synovial lining, symp-
toms may be early indicators of an inflammatory
arthropathy such as rheumatoid arthritis. Men
are affected more often than women. Symptoms
in the subcutaneous bursa affect adolescent
females most frequently.
Presenting symptoms
For the subcutaneous bursa the symptoms are
well described by some of the eponyms for the
condition, sucha as 'pump or heel bumps'. The
patient complains of a tender prominence at the
heel when wearing shoes (Fig. 16.12).
Figure 16.12 Bilateral heel bumps with superolateral
prominence on the heel, also known as Haglund's deformity.
Signs
Inflammation of the deep bursa will produce ten-
derness deep to the tendo Achilles. In heel
bumps there is variable tenderness over a thick-
ened bursa situated just lateral to the tendo
Achilles attachment.
Investigations
A plain lateral X-ray should be taken. With deep
bursitis calcaneal erosions should be looked for.
In heel bumps the X-ray is usually normal with
no evidence of any posterosuperior prominence
to the calcaneus.
Differential diagnosis
This is mainly with other causes of heel pain and
with Achilles tendonitis.
Heel pad syndrome
Aetiology
This is a chronic inflammatory process within
the heel fat pad. The heel is subject to repetitive
impact loading on walking which can exceed
body weight; with running these forces can
rise to 3-8 times body weight (Riegler 1987).
THE PAINFUL FOOT 419
Predisposing symptoms may be running on
hard surfaces, e.g. roads, obesity and increasing
age.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of heel pain, worse in the early
morning and on weightbearing. They may have a
limp.
Signs
There is localised central tenderness under the
heel.
Investigations
This is essentially a clinical diagnosis. X-rays or
ultrasonography are not helpful.
Differential diagnosis
This will include plantar fasciitis and entrapment
neuropathies, particularly of the nerve to abduc-
tor digiti quinti.
Plantar fasciitis
Aetiology
This is a chronic inflammation at the site of the
attachment of the plantar fascia to the medial
tubercle of the calcaneum. It possibly represents
a traction periostitis and may be precipitated by
overuse and occurs in middle-aged people and
with a male predominance.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain under the heel on
weightbearing; this may be particularly acute on
getting up in the morning.
Signs
There is tenderness along the anteromedial
border of the calcaneum which may be increased
by passive dorsiflexion of the toes.
420 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Investigations
The diagnosis is clinical although a bone scan
may show increased uptake locally. Plain X-rays
may show a spur on the inferior border of the cal-
caneum but this is equally found in asympto-
matic people.
Differential diagnosis
As in heel pad syndrome.
Soft tissue masses or tumours
Aetiology
Some benign soft-tissue masses, such as ganglions,
are common in the foot. A ganglion is a mucoid
cyst which usually arises from an underlying joint.
In the foot they most commonly occur over the
dorsum of the ankle (Fig. 16.13). Plantar fibromato-
Figure 16.13 Large ganglion on lateral aspect of the ankle.
sis is analogous to Dupuytren's contracture in the
hand and is a proliferation of the plantar aponeu-
rosis to form discrete nodules, usually in the
instep. A glomus tumour is a benign bright red vas-
cular tumour, the size of a small pea, and is usually
located subungually or in a web space.
Presenting symptoms
A ganglion presents as a painful lump inside
footwear. Plantar fibromatosis may present with
painful nodules, although often the patient only
notices some mild discomfort or simply a
swelling. A glomus tumour, however, may
present with marked pain.
Signs
A ganglion will appear as a mobile subcutaneous
lump of variable size. Small ones may appear
quite firm, whereas larger ones often have a more
spongy feel. The nodules of plantar fibromatosis
are felt as firm, fairly immobile nodules, often
along the edge of the plantar fascia and under the
instep. A glomus tumour will appear as a subun-
gual mass or may be palpated as a small nodule
in a web space.
Investigations
Plain X-rays may distinguish a glomus tumour
from a subungual exostosis; otherwise, the diag-
nosis is made from clinical information.
Differential diagnosis
Multiple ganglions around the extensor tendons
on the dorsum of the ankle should arouse suspi-
cion of rheumatoid arthritis. A lipoma may be
mistaken for a ganglion and is commonly located
on the dorsolateral aspect of the ankle.
GENERAL
Crystal arthritis
Aetiology
Arthritic changes may be caused by the deposi-
tion of crystals within a joint. This may be sodium
urate crystals in gout or calcium pyrophosphate
dihydrate crystals in pseudogout. Gout is a disease
characterised by a disorder of purine metabolism
and is associated with hyperuricaemia. It may
be primary with a strong hereditary factor or be
secondary to other problems such as renal failure.
Pseudogout is sometimes associated with other
metabolic conditions, such as hyperparathy-
roidism, but otherwise it is idiopathic.
Presenting symptoms
Up to 75% of initial attacks of gout affect the big
toe (Jacoby & Dixon 1991). The patient complains
of acute onset of a swollen, very painful first
MTPJ. Pseudogout may present with gout-like
attacks but these are usually less severe. About
50% of patients, however, will present with pro-
gressive degeneration of joints. In the foot the
ankle, subtalar and talonavicular joints are most
commonly affected.
Signs
In the acute stage of gout the great toe will be
swollen, inflamed and very tender (Fig. 16.14). In
Figure 16.14 Acute gout in the first metatarsophalangeal
joint.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 421
chronic cases the signs of osteoarthritis will be
present. Gouty tophi (deposits of sodium urate)
may be found in the cartilages of the ears and in
bursae, tendons and soft tissues generally.
Investigations
Acutely, the serum uric acid may be raised but
acute attacks can occur with a normal uric acid
level. Aspiration of joint fluid and examination
under a polarising lens will show brightly bire-
fringent needle-like crystals in gout and more
pleomorphic rectangular crystals in pseudogout.
Chronically, X-rays will show degenerative
changes in joints affected. Gout gives a character-
istic appearance of sharp, punched-out juxta-
articular lesions, with little reactive sclerosis and
no general osteoporosis.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely, this will be with acute infection and
septic arthritis. Chronic forms will be associated
with other causes of degenerative joint disease.
Hereditary and motor sensory
neuropathy
Aetiology
This condition is also known as peroneal muscular
atrophy and was first described by Charcot, Marie
and Tooth in 1886. Essentially, it is an inherited
neuropathy with a predominantly motor compo-
nent affecting the lower limbs. Motor weakness
begins in the peronei, then the dorsiflexors, and
may involve all the muscles below the knee.
There may also be sensory changes and involve-
ment of the upper limb. The initial symptoms are
usually in childhood but the neuropathy then
slowly progresses. The adult may then present
with a cavus foot, claw toes and pain and callosi-
ties over the metatarsal heads. Fixed deformities
may develop with equinus of the forefoot and
varus of the hindfoot (Mann 1993).
Presenting symptoms
This will d"epend on how far the disease has pro-
gressed. Initially, the patient may present with
422 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
just a clumsy gait and perhaps a history of recur-
rent ankle sprains. With time the weakness and
changes in the shape of the foot become more
apparent. The patient may then complain of
footwear problems and pain along the lateral
border of the foot because of the varus heel.
Signs
In the established case there will be a cavus foot
with a high arch, a plantarflexed first ray, clawing
of the toes and peroneal and intrinsic muscle
weakness. Weakness of other muscle groups
should be looked for and the hands examined.
Sensory changes, if present, are usually mild.
Investigations
A careful clinical examination is important
because of the differential diagnosis. Plain X-
rays, standing AP and lateral, will show the
cavus and demonstrate any degenerative
changes when fixed deformities are present.
Nerve conduction studies and electromyography
are important for accurate diagnosis and to rule
out other causes of pes cavus.
Differential diagnosis
This is from other causes of pes cavus, which will
include idiopathic, muscular diseases such as
muscular dystrophy, neurological problems such
as cerebral palsy, Friedreich's ataxia, polio-
myelitis and spinal cord problems. In addition,
pes cavus may be due to residual clubfoot or
compartment syndrome.
Infection
Aetiology
Infection may occur in the soft tissues, as
osteomyelitis in the bone or as septic arthritis in
a joint. The cause may be direct inoculation fol-
lowing an open wound, either traumatic or sur-
gically created, or via haematogenous spread.
Traumatic or surgical infection may occur at
any time but septic arthritis is more likely to
occur in the very young or the elderly or
immunocompromised. Bony infections are most
commonly due to Staphylococcus aureus but strep-
tococci may also be associated with soft-tissue
infections.
Presenting symptoms
These will vary according to the tissue involved
and degree of infection. Cellulitis will present
with pain, swelling and erythema of the
involved area. Because the bones are very
superficial in the foot, osteomyelitis should
always be suspected under any area of eel-
lulites. Septic arthritis is likely to present with
exquisite pain on moving a joint, usually the
ankle, and with overlying swelling and ery-
thema. However, in the elderly or immunocom-
promised, symptoms may be strikingly muted,
reducing suspicion of an underlying joint infec-
tion. In acute septic arthritis or osteomyelitis the
patient is likely to have systemic signs of being
unwell.
Signs
Swelling, tenderness and erythema of the soft
tissues will be noted. In septic arthritis there is
likely to be marked pain on very limited move-
ment of the joint. If marked local tenderness is
elicited over a bony area this should alert you to
the possibility of underlying osteomyelitis. If
infection spreads to a tendon sheath, causing a
tenosynovitis, then passive movement of the
tendon will be limited and very painful and ten-
derness may be present along the length of the
tendon.
Investigations
Plain X-rays are necessary to exclude or demon-
strate osteomyelitis. However, it may take
10 days to show any changes. A bone scan will
be positive well before plain X-rays and may
help. In septic arthritis a diminution in joint
space or adjacent osteomyelitis may be seen.
Aspiration of fluid from a joint and Gram stain
and culture can provide a diagnosis. Blood cul-
tures should also be done: a full blood count will
show a raised white cell count and the erythro-
cyte sedimentation rate (ESR) or C-reactive
protein will be high. Obviously, if there is an
open discharge with pus then swabs should be
taken.
Differential diagnosis
Infection is a clinical diagnosis. Usually the ques-
tion to be decided is whether there is underlying
bony or joint infection.
Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD)
Aetiology
This is an interesting condition which is poorly
understood but results from a dysfunction of the
sympathetic nervous system. It can follow
trauma, sometimes minor in nature, after a frac-
ture or following surgery. Pain can become so
unremitting that the patient wishes amputation
and may also develop depression and personal-
ity changes.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of a burning pain, often out of
proportion to the injury. Initially, this will be due
to the trauma of surgery but, instead of settling,
the pain increases and becomes the dominant
complaint. Pain can occur at rest, with movement
and may well trouble the patient at night. The
weight of blankets on the bed, or even a sheet,
may be intolerable. As well as affecting the
injured area, the patient may experience pain
over the whole foot in a global distribution.
Signs
These may vary according to the stage of the con-
dition. The limb may be swollen and may have a
shiny dry appearance. There may be hair and
nail changes, joint stiffness and sudomotor
changes, with dry skin or excessive sweating.
The affected area may become very sensitive and
even light touch may evoke considerable and
prolonged pain. Because of muscular spasm,
patients may develop fixed equinus at the ankle
or claw toes.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 423
Investigations
Plain X-rays may show osteopenia within a few
weeks and subperiosteal bone resorption. A
bone scan is very helpful as it will show gener-
alised increased uptake in the affected area.
Patients have a characteristic delayed bone
scan pattern of diffuse increased tracer through-
out the foot, with juxta-articular uptake accen-
tuation (Holder et al 1992). Temporary pain
relief from a lumbar sympathetic block is also
a useful test, although a negative test does not
exclude RSD. Case history 16.5 belies some of
the problems of treating and diagnosing this
pain syndrome early. Both psychological and
organic problems can arise, making the problem
intractable.
Case history 16.5
Patient: A 13-year-old schoolgirl presented following
a nail surgery (phenolisation) with positive subungual
exostosis over the left hallux. This was confirmed by
X-ray. Following an exostectomy to remove the bone,
intractable pain developed in a pattern unusual for
postoperative events.
Presenting symptoms: Pain following two
operations at 6 weeks. Stabbing and crushing pain
was described, with extreme sensitivity over the foot.
Signs: The foot was swollen and blue. Analgesics
were of minimal help. The patient had a tendency to
hysterical fits. Over an 18-month period the
contralateral side became affected.
Investigations: Infection was excluded. Surgery
was performed on two further occasions by different
surgeons in case an exostosis was still present.
Amitriptyline 10 mg at night provided minimal help in
reducing vasomotor activity. A lumbar sympathectomy
(guanethidine) only gave temporary relief. Psychiatric
assessment was considered.
Diagnosis: Reflex sympathetic dystrophy with
hysteria.
Conclusion: This case history highlights the ease
with which inappropriate management and additional
physical insult can elevate the patient's problem. RSD
is a difficult problem to manage and non-invasive
techniques should be emphasised, with total pain-
blocking control and maintenance of mobility if the
pain syndrome is diagnosed (Tollafield 1991).
424 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Differential diagnosis
It can be difficult sometimes to decide if mild
RSD is present or if the patient simply has a very
painful injury, or one is missing a component of
that injury.
Referred pain
Aetiology
Referred pain has been mentioned in connection
with compartment syndrome involving the deep
peroneal and posterior tibia nerves. The main
source of referred pain, however, is sciatica due
to nerve root compression in the back. Most com-
monly this is due to a prolapsed intervertebral
disc and over 90% of these occur at the L4/5 or
L5/S1Ievels.
Presenting symptoms
Patients will usually complain of low back pain
radiating into a buttock and down the leg. They
may have little back pain and mainly leg pain. A
careful history may indicate the nerve root
involved. Pain radiating down the back of the leg
into the sole of the foot is generally Sl in origin
and down the lateral border of the leg and into
the hallux is generally L5 in origin.
Signs
In an acute disc prolapse the patient experiences
considerable pain and is unable to move easily.
He may have a scoliotic tilt to the spine when
viewed from behind, paraspinal muscle spasm
REFERENCES
Bennett P J, Patterson C 1998 The Foot Health Questionnaire
(FHSQ): a new instrument for measuring outcomes of foot
care. Australian Journal of Podiatric Medicine 32(3): 87-92
Bennett P J, Patterson C, Wearing S, Baglioni T 1998
Development and validation of a questionnaire designed
to measure foot-health status. Journal of the American
Podiatric Medical Association 88(9): 419-428
Berndt A L, Harty M 1959 Transchondral fractures
(osteochondritis dissecans) of the talus. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 41-A: 988-1020
and tenderness in the buttock. Straight leg
raising will be restricted and causes pain in the
distribution of the nerve root. Sensory changes
and muscle weakness appropriate to that nerve
root may be found but not invariably. Reflexes
may be diminished; the knee jerk is L3/4 and the
ankle jerk is L5/Sl.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken of the lumbosacral
spine. If surgery is contemplated, or the diagno-
sis is unclear, then an MRI scan or CT scan is
necessary.
Differential diagnosis
The symptomatology is usually clear but back
pain is very common and a more distal problem
coexisting with long-standing back pain and
sciatica should always be considered.
SUMMARY
There are many causes of foot pain. Knowledge
of the methods of quantifying and monitoring
pain will aid the practitioner in his understand-
ing of this most elusive construct. It has been
highlighted that pain is subjective and is a very
personal experience, and that the pain associated
with certain foot conditions can manifest at
various levels. Practitioners must undertake a
careful history, examination and relevant investi-
gations, and an appropriate monitoring tool
must be selected to chart the progress of any pain
manifestation.
Bowling A 1995 Measuring disease: a review of disease-
specific quality of life measurement scales. Open
University Press, Buckingham
Budiman-Mak E, Conrad K J, Roach K E 1991 The Foot
Function Index: a measure of foot pain and disability.
Journal of Clinical Epidemiology 44: 561-570
Canale S T, Belding R H 1980 Osteochondral lesions of the
talus. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 60-A: 97-102
Cimino W R 1990 Tarsal tunnel syndrome: a review of the
literature. Foot and Ankle 11: 47-52
------------------
De Smet A A, Fisher D R, Burnstein M I et al 1990 Value of
MR imaging in staging osteochondral lesions of the talus
(osteochondritis dissecans). American Journal of
Roentgenology 154: 555-558
Ferkel R D, Karzel R P, Del Pizzo W et al1991 Arthroscopic
treatment of anterolateral impingement of the ankle.
American Journal of Sports Medicine 19: 440-446
Holder L E, Cole L A, Myerson M S 1992 Reflex sympathetic
dystrophy in the foot: clinical and scintigraphic criteria.
Radiology 184(2): 531-535
Hubay C A 1949 Sesamoid bones of the hands and feet.
American Journal of Roentgenology 61: 493-505
Jacoby R K, Dixon A StJ 1991 The painful foot in systemic
disorders. In: Klenerman L (ed) The foot and its disorders,
3rd edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford
Johnson K A 1983 Tibialis posterior tendon rupture. Clinical
Orthopaedics and Related Research 177: 140-147
Johnson K D 1987 Management of malunion and nonunion of
the tibia. Orthopaedic Clinics of North America 18: 157-172
Keck C 1962 The tarsal tunnel syndrome. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 44-A: 180-182
Lam S J S 1962 The tarsal tunnel syndrome. Lancet 2:
1354-1355
Lutter L D 1991 Achilles tendon rupture. AAOS fourth
annual comprehensive foot and ankle course
McCaffery M, Beeke A 1989 Pain: clinical manual for
nursing practice. C V Mosby, Toronto
McMurray T P 1950 Footballers ankle. Journal of Bone and
Joint Surgery 32-B: 68-69
Mann R A 1993 Diseases of the nerves. In: Mann R A,
Coughlin R J (ed) Surgery of the foot and ankle, 6th edn.
C V Mosby, St Louis
Melzack R 1975 The McGill Pain Questionnaire: major
properties and scoring methods. Pain 1: 277-299
Merchant T C, Dietz F R 1989 Long term follow-up after
fractures of the tibial and fibular shafts. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 71-A: 599-606
Moiser K M, Asher M 1984 Tarsal coalitions and peroneal
spastic flat foot. A review. Journal of Bone and Joint
Surgery 66-A: 976-984
THE PAINFUL FOOT 425
Mulder J D 1951 The causative mechanism in Morton's.
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 33-B: 94-95
Nicoll E A 1964 Fractures of the tibial shaft. A survey of 705
cases. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 46-B: 373-387
O'Connor D 1958 Sinus tarsi syndrome. A clinical entity.
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 40-A: 720
Pedowitz R A, Hargens A R, Mubarak S Jet al1990
Modified criteria for the objective diagnosis of chronic
compartment syndrome of the leg. American Journal of
Sports Medicine 18: 35-40
Pollak R A, Bellacosa R A, Dornbluth N C et al 1992
Sonographic analysis of Morton's neuroma. Journal of
Foot Surgery 31(6): 534-537
Price P 1996 Defining and measuring quality of life. Journal
of Wound Care 5(3): 139-140
Reigler H E 1987 Orthotic devices for the foot. Orthopaedic
Review 16: 27-37
Romanowski C A J, Barrington N A 1991 The accessory
ossicles of the foot. Foot 2: 61-70
Saag K G, Saltzman C L, Brown K, Budiman-Mak E 1996
The Foot Function Index for measuring rheumatoid
arthritis pain: evaluating side-to-side reliability. Foot and
Ankle International 17(8): 506-510
Schon L C, Glennon T P, Baxter D E 1993 Heel pain
syndrome: electrodiagnostic support for nerve
entrapment. Foot and Ankle 14: 129-135
Stewart A L, Ware J E (eds) 1992 Measuring functioning and
well-being: the medical outcomes study approach. Duke
University Press, Durham, North Carolina
Stormont D M, Peterson H A 1983 The relative incidence of
tarsal coalition. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related
Reasearch 181: 28-36
Sutherland J E, Wesley R M, Cole P M 1988 Differences and
similarities between patient and physician perception of
pain. Fam Med 20: 243-246
Thompson F M, Deland J T 1993 Occurrence of two
interdigital neuromas in one foot. Foot and Ankle
14: 15-17
Tollafield 1991 Reflex sympathetic dystrophy in day case foot
surgery. British Journal of Podiatric Medicine 3(1): 2-6
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 427
The at-risk foot 427
Tissue viability 429
Factors essential for tissue viability 429
Factorswhich can result in loss of tissue viability 429
Classifying loss of tissue viability 430
Aetiological classification 431
Approachesto determiningdegree of risk 433
Holistic overview 433
Local indicators 435
Systems approach to risk assessment 438
Clinical decision making 447
Summary 448
The at-risk foot
W. Turner
J. McLeod Roberts
INTRODUCTION
Increasingly, assessment and subsequent man-
agement of the high-risk patient is forming a
major part of the practitioner's workload. As the
population ages and more people live to old age,
the incidence of conditions which place the foot
at risk increase. Furthermore, a restructuring of
clinical caseloads to focus service delivery to
those in greatest medical need is resulting in
high-risk case mixes. Knowledge of factors
which increase risk for foot disease, together
with practical approaches to assessment of the
high-risk foot, is essential for safe and effective
service delivery.
Normal function of the lower limb is depen-
dent on viability of a wide range of tissues.
Optimum function requires that skin, bone,
muscle, nerve, vessels and connective tissues
are structurally sound. Loss of viability results
in reduction of normal function, eventual
total loss of function or systemic complications.
Maintenance of tissue viability enables func-
tional ability, keeping the patient mobile and
independent and maintaining quality of life.
For the lower limb practitioner, skin is the most
common tissue to lose viability, resulting in
potentially serious consequences for the patient.
Key functions of the skin are given in Table 17.1.
THE AT-RISK FOOT
The term 'at-risk foot' is used to describe a foot
which is at risk of loss of tissue viability. Usually,
427
428 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 17.1 Functions of the skin Table 17.2 Factors responsible for an at-risk foot
Prevents dehydration
Contains other tissue of the body
Communication
Sensation (touch, heat, cold, pain, etc.)
Immunological (direct barrier, cellular)
Protects body from ultraviolet light
Thermoregulation
Shock absorption
Vitamin 0 production
Protection from irritants (chemicals, etc.)
the increased risk relates to intrinsic factors
which reduce the ability of the soft tissues to
withstand normal minor environmental stresses
(extrinsic factors). Therefore, an at-risk foot may
be seen to be one where soft tissues are more vul-
nerable to the effects of environmental stresses.
Additionally, an at-risk foot is one which is often
less likely to recover quickly from minor stresses
and minor wounds than the normal foot. Often
recovery is likely to be complicated, delayed or
incomplete. In severe cases, recovery is not possi-
ble and stasis, spread or deterioration of the con-
dition occurs.
The role of the practitioner is often to first iden-
tify factors which may place a patient's lower
limb status at high risk. Some factors which may
be responsible for an at-risk foot are given in
Table 17.2.
It is important to bear in mind that in many
cases most at-risk feet are victims of more than
one causal factor. Many at-risk feet have a com-
plicated series of factors responsible for causing
disease risk. A good example of this is the dia-
betic foot ulcer. Diabetic foot ulcers are either
neuropathic, ischaemic or a combination of both
factors. Additionally, the patient may be
immunocompromised, have a coexisting infec-
tion or be suffering abnormal weightbearing
traumas on already damaged tissues. It is impor-
tant for the practitioner to identify and eliminate
all risk factors if such an ulcer is to be given the
best chance of healing.
From the clinical perspective, an at-risk foot is
one which is more likely to develop significant
pathologies such as:
Classification
Vascular - ischaemia
Vascular - venous stasis
Neurological
Neoplasia
Infections
Immune system
dysfunction
Conditions
Peripheral vascular disease
Critical limb ischaemia
Occlusion (e.g. tourniquet)
Severe anaemia
Deep vein thrombosis
Compartment syndrome
Buerger's disease
Microangiopathy
Incompetent lower limb
valves
Congestive heart failure
(right-sided)
Obesity
Failure of respiratory/
abdominal pump
Calf muscle pump failure
Pericapillary fibrin deposition
Oedema - pitting/non-pitting
Distal symmetrical
polyneuropathy
Mononeuropathies
Radiculopathies
Upper motor neurone lesions
Lower motor neurone lesions
Diabetes mellitus
Tabes dorsalis
Leprosy
Alcoholism
Vitamin B
12
deficiency
HIV/ AIDS
Malignant melanoma
Basal cell carcinoma
Squamous cell carcinoma
Malignant transformation of
wounds
Erysipelas
Osteomyelitis
Cellulitis
Lymphangitis
Lymphadenitis
Bacteraemia
Septicaemia
Dermatophyte infection
Yeast infection
Herpes infection
DiGeorge syndrome
HIV/AIDS
Malnutrition
Diabetes mellitus
Long-term steroid use
Immunosuppressive drugs
Radiation
Effects of ageing
Leukaemia
Lymphoma
(Cont'd)
TISSUE VIABILITY
Factors essential for tissue viability
Viable tissue is, by definition, that which is able
to withstand normal environmental stresses
without loss of structure or function. For tissue
viability to be maintained, the following factors
are essential:
ulceration
infection
necrosis
amputation
malignant lesions
severe deformity.
Correct determination of risk factors is essen-
tial in order that effective preventative, curative
or rehabilitative management can be planned.
Adequate oxygen supply:
good quality and quantity of blood
Adequate nutrient supply:
sufficient nutrients to meet the respiratory
need of cells
Adequate removal of respiratory metabolites:
removal of carbon dioxide, lactate, etc.
Adequate sensory, motor and autonomic
nerve supply
Adequate immune function:
local and systemic immune mechanisms
are effective
Table 17.2 (Conf'd)
Classification
Trauma
Musculoskeletal
Conditions
Heat
Cold
Radiation
Chemicals (acids and alkalis)
Mechanical (pressure,
shear, friction)
Rheumatoid arthritis
Gout
Osteoarth ritis
Psoriatic arthropathy
Reiter's syndrome
Neuroarthropathy
(Charcot foot)
Ankylosing spondylitis
THE AT-RISK FOOT 429
Freedom from infection:
local or systemic
Freedom from major environmental stresses:
heat, cold, radiation, mechanical trauma,
chemical trauma
Freedom from malignant disease:
skin, soft-tissue, vascular or bone
malignancy
Freedom from intrinsic (systemic or local)
disease
Ability to compensate for minor changes to
the environment:
production of melanin in response to
ultraviolet radiation
production of hyperkeratosis in response to
mechanical trauma
ability to regulate constant pH,
temperature, etc.
Factors which can result in loss of
tissue viability
Whenever skin viability is lost, the patient may
lose one or more of the normal functions of skin.
For example, a large full-thickness skin wound
can cause a patient to lose significant volumes
of body fluids, body heat and to place the
person at high risk of infection. Additionally,
the affected area of skin will be unable to with-
stand normal weightbearing traumas and will
be susceptible to damage from ultraviolet light.
Any pharmacological (or other) product placed
on the affected area is liable to systemic absorp-
tion. A potentially significant factor can be
where patients choose to place - e.g. steroid or
iodine ointments - on their wounds. This com-
bination of risks has the potential to create
significant complications, including infection,
dehydration, shock, hypothermia, irradiation
trauma and unintended systemic action of
topical medicaments.
Even small wounds can have significant conse-
quences for some patients. Any wound provides a
potential portal of entry for microorganisms. In a
susceptible or immunocompromised host this
may lead to serious and potentially limb- (or even
life-) threatening infection. A good example of this
is small open interdigital fissures, resulting in
430 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
rapidly spreading beta-haemolytic streptococcal
infection (erysipelas) in immunocompromised
patients. In this example, the minor structural
change to the skin (i.e. the fissure) is no longer
suited to the skin's function as a barrier to micro-
organisms. Tissue viability is therefore lost.
Traumatic versus trophic wounding. Skin and
soft tissue failure can be said to occur therefore
when environmental stresses exceed the struc-
tural strength of the soft tissue. Major environ-
mental stresses (e.g. burns, lacerations, incisions)
are likely to exceed the strength of even normal
tissues and result in traumatic wounding.
However, minor environmental stresses are
encountered more regularly. Minor stresses
might include friction, pressure, shear, ultraviolet
radiation, etc. In most cases these minor stresses
will be dissipated or absorbed (attenuated) by
soft tissues and result in no noticeable degenera-
tion of the tissues. However, even minor envi-
ronmental stresses such as these have the
potential to result in wounding when the
integrity of the soft tissues is compromised.
Compromise may arise in the form of atrophic
skin, ischaemia, loss of sensation or other
significant changes to normal tissue structure. In
such cases minor environmental stresses may
result in trophic ulceration.
Classifying loss of tissue viability
It is not enough to determine whether or not
there is loss of tissue viability. This will only tell
us that something has gone wrong and that some
action should be taken, but gives us no idea of
the cause or severity of the situation and there-
fore no guide as to appropriate action.
Much more information will be needed from
the assessment process. In order to gain that
information in a logical manner, it is important to
use a system to classify the loss of tissue viability.
The purpose of a classification system is to aid:
diagnosis
prognosis/degree of risk
treatment plan
monitoring
research and audit.
Any system which is to be used In clinical
practice on a daily basis should be:
simple to use
easy to remember
validated.
Some systems are designed primarily for
research and audit purposes and may of neces-
sity require complex or costly apparatus such as
that to measure the transcutaneous oxygen
tension (TcpOz) (Ch. 6) or a complex question-
naire. Such systems are more suited to specialist
centres rather than the routine clinic.
Several of the earlier systems were designed to
record wounds rather than loss of tissue viability
and therefore do not accommodate conditions
where there is no actual loss of tissue although
these can usually be adapted to do so.
As pointed out in his excellent chapter in The
Foot in Diabetes, Young (2000) draws the distinc-
tion between a classification system and a
descriptive system.
A classification system is applied at the first
presentation of the patient. The loss of tissue
viability will be assigned to a particular cate-
gory and will remain in that category, no matter
what the progression and final outcome. For
example: a system based on the aetiology of the
loss of tissue viability would place a blister
caused by the persistent rubbing of an ill-fitting
shoe on the back of the heel as a traumatic loss
of tissue viability and would remain in that cat-
egory throughout the treatment process to final
outcome.
On the other hand, a descriptive system will
change with each occasion of assessment. For
example, there may be blood in the fluid of the
blister initially, which may disappear as the
blister heals. Other descriptors could be surface
area, colour, appearance of margins or presence
of infection. The difficulties here are threefold:
first, in deciding which factors to include among
the many possibilities. Decisions should be evi-
dence based, where the factors chosen have been
shown to have a significant influence on healing,
or other valid reasons for inclusion, such as an
indicator of efficacy of treatment or a guide to
management. Where the classification system is
THE AT-RISK FOOT 431
Table 17.3 An example of an aetiological system of
classification of lower limb ulcers
can be altered according to the wishes of the
practitioner. For example, vascular could be
divided into arterial, venous and lymphatic cate-
gories and iatrogenic could be included as a type
of traumatic cause of ulceration.
It must be borne in mind that infection can
complicate many lower limb ulcers, but is rarely
a cause of ulceration. Nonetheless, this system
has some limitations. It tells us nothing about the
degree of loss of tissue viability. For this we could
add a descriptive section, based on measurement
of depth of the deepest part of the wound. This
has been shown to have a strong correlation with
prognosis and so would be helpful in determin-
ing the degree of risk of slow healing, ulceration
and amputation. It is also possible that a particu-
lar lesion can be assigned to more than one cate-
gory, which detracts from the precision of the
system. For example, a basal cell carcinoma is a
skin cancer and could be classified as both a neo-
plastic and a dermatological lesion and the ulcer
seen in the diabetic foot could be classified as
both endocrine and neurological.
Meggit-Wagner wound classification system
(Table 17.4). This is another well-validated
system which chiefly yields information as to the
severity of the wound and therefore relates to
prognosis and degree of risk. It has the further
also used to indicate the degree of risk, the
number of possible factors increases further,
making the designing of an easy-to-use system
all the harder.
The second task is to obtain clear definitions
of these factors. The lack of universal consensus
on definitions makes comparison difficult. For
example, a very simple classification system of
ulcers which nonetheless is an aid to prognosis
and degree of risk, is to determine whether the
ulcer is superficial or deep. However, unless
there are clear definitions as to exactly what is
understood by these two terms, we cannot be
sure that an ulcer graded as superficial by one
practitioner, which subsequently deteriorates,
would not have been classified as deep by
another.
Thirdly, an accurate but simple means is needed
to measure the factors concerned, and such means
are not available for all factors. For example, it is
generally held that if an ulcer can be probed to
bone, it is assumed that osteomyelitis is present,
regardless of whether it can be detected on X-ray,
but this rule has not been validated by research.
Similar problems apply to the presence of
ischaemia and neuropathy (Chs 6 and 7).
So far, no single system has been designed
which is appropriate to all situations: each has its
limitations and many practitioners will use a
combination of classification and description to
record both details of loss of tissue viability and
to estimate the degree of risk.
Aetiological classification
One example of a well-validated classification
system for lower limb ulcers is the aetiological
system (Table 17.3). This is appropriate for use by
practitioners in a clinical setting as it is a useful
guide for a treatment plan, since removal or ame-
lioration of the cause will be a fundamental step
in the treatment. There is also some correlation
between cause and prognosis, e.g. an uncompli-
cated neuropathic ulcer has a significantly better
prognosis than a similar-sized ischaemic ulcer.
Although used more often for the classification of
ulcers, this system can be easily adapted to clas-
sify loss of tissue viability. The precise categories
Category of lesion
Dermatological
Endocrine
Haematological
Iatrogenic
Immunological
Infectious
Neoplastic
Neurological
Traumatic
Vascular
Examples of conditions
Atopic eczema
Diabetes mellitus
Sickle-cell anaemia,
cryoglobulinaemia
Stevens-Johnson syndrome
Rheumatoid arthritis
Tuberculosis
Squamous cell carcinoma,
malignant melanoma, Kaposi's
sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma
Hansen's disease (leprosy),
diabetes mellitus, syringomyelia
Burns, friction blisters, cuts,
pressure sores
Peripheral vascular disease,
venous hypertension
432 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 17.4 Meggitt-Wagner wound classification
Grade Appearance Implication
Loss of tissue involves
}
dermis only
2 Loss exposes tendon No significant
or bone ischaemic component
3 Loss exposes tendon or
bone, with osteomyelitis
or abscess
4 Gangrene of digits or
}
forefoot Primarily an
5 Extensive gangrene of ischaemic problem
the foot
advantage of dividing tissue loss into that with
no significant ischaemic component and that
where peripheral vascular disease is a major
factor and so is of help in determining the most
important steps in the subsequent treatment,
since wounds which are primarily ischaemic will
not heal unless steps are taken to improve the
blood supply.
However, it has limitations, since it was
designed to assess wounds and has no place for
preulcerative conditions such as callus. This
system has been adapted by some practitioners
for the classification of loss of tissue viability by
the addition of a grade acategory for such con-
ditions where no break in the epidermis has
occurred. In addition, it would usually be
expected that a patient with a grade 4 ulcer
would have significant large-vessel disease of
the lower limb and one would expect to find
non-palpable pedal pulses. However, in patients
with diabetes, it is quite possible for them to
have digital gangrene and palpable pedal
pulses, suggesting a grade 4 ulcer but with no
significant major vessel pathology, the gangrene
being a result of septic vasculitis or embolism.
Small-vessel disease (i.e. thickening of the base-
ment membrane) is no longer considered to be a
prime cause of digital gangrene in patients with
diabetes. Another limitation to this classification
system is that there would be no place for the
Charcot foot, even though this condition carries
a high degree of risk of ulceration. A more
detailed but similar classification system, which
includes a grade afor intact skin and a separate
grade for spreading infection, is the Sims
classification (Sims et al 1988).
Almost all other systems are mainly descrip-
tive and designed more to assess the degree of
risk of ulceration/ amputation than of classifying
the ulcer per se. If they are to meet the criteria for
simplicity and ease of use, they inevitably focus
only on aetiological and local factors, e.g.
ischaemia and infection present, which gives a
limited view of factors contributing to risk.
San Antonio/Texas System (Armstrong,
Harkless and Lavery). This group of practition-
ers designed two systems: one system is
designed to classify the total range of loss of
tissue viability, but has yet to be validated; the
second system is concerned only with actual
ulcers. The advantage of the first system is its
comprehensiveness; both systems are an aid to
prognosis and management.
The second system has been validated and
grades ulcers according to depth, presence or
absence of sepsis and presence or absence of
ischaemia. No reference is made to the presence
or absence of neuropathy however, which is
considered by some practitioners as the single
most important contributory factor to diabetic
ulceration.
Using this system to assess the lesions of
people with diabetes, Lavery et al (1996) were
able to show that patients with infection and
ischaemia were 90 times more likely to have an
amputation than patients with lower-grade
lesions, thus showing the importance of local
wound conditions on outcome.
S(AD) SAD system (Table 17.5). This is a com-
prehensive system based on the San Antonio
system but with modifications and extensions
(Macfarlane & [effcoate 1999). It is also aimed at
patients with diabetes but is designed for research
and audit rather than as a guide to management.
However, it could be adapted for management
purposes (Serra 2000). The key elements of this
system are size of a wound, as measured by both
depth and surface area, infection, ischaemia and
neuropathy. Each of these elements is assigned a
grade from ato 3 according to severity, with grade
arepresenting a normal foot and grade 3 repre-
senting the worst situation. The advantages of this
Table 17.5 The S(AD) SAD classification
THE AT-RISK FOOT 433
Grade Area Depth Sepsis Arteriopathy Denervation
0 Skin intact Skin intact No infection Pedal pulses palpable PinpricklVPT sensation normal
1 <10 rnrn- Skin and subcutaneous Superficial: Diminution of both pulses Reduced or absent pinprick
tissues slough or exudates or absence of one sensation. VPT raised
2 10-30 rnrn- Tendon, joint capsule, Cellulitis Absence of both pedal Neuropathy dominant: palpable
periosteum pulses pedal pulses
3 >30 rnm'' Bone and/or joint Osteomyelitis Gangrene Charcot foot
spaces
system are that it covers the whole range of loss of
tissue viability and includes the Charcot foot.
However, the authors suggest testing either rather
than both small and large nerve fibres for neu-
ropathy which could lead to a false-negative
result since denervation of each type of nerve fibre
does not necessarily progress at the same rate. The
measurement of the vibratory perception thresh-
old requires the availability of a neurothesiometer
for the latter, which may not be readily available
in a routine clinic, but the authors do suggest the
cheaper alternative method of using a 10 g
monofilament. The authors acknowledge that
measurement of neuropathy is an imperfect
science. The system awaits full evaluation but
there is a report of its successful use in a large
multidisciplinary clinic in Portugal.
Edmonds and Foster system. This system is
designed specifically to aid management of dia-
betic foot lesions by assigning the foot to a stage
of graded severity, according to the criteria
shown in Table 17.6, and dividing the lesions into
one of two aetiological categories (neuropathic or
neuroischaemic), as management differs for
Table 17.6 Staging the diabetic foot
Stage Clinical status
Normal. No presence of callus, ischaemia,
neuropathy, deformity, swelling
2 High risk. One or more of the above is present
3 Skin breakdown or presence of blister,
splits or grazes for more than 1 week
4 Ulcer and cellulitis
5 Necrosis
6 Advanced necrosis, foot cannot be saved
these two categories. Edmonds & Forster (2000)
acknowledge that their system of staging does
not accommodate the Charcot foot and that the
system would need extending for research and
audit purposes.
APPROACHES TO DETERMINING
DEGREE OF RISK
Holistic overview
To fully determine the degree of risk for any
patient, one would need to take into account all
factors which can influence healing, including
not only the local condition of the lesion but also
the patient and his environment. Although few
of these latter factors are included in any pro-
posed classification system, because such inclu-
sion would make the system very cumbersome,
much of the data will be recorded as part of a
primary patient assessment (Ch. 5) and will be
taken into account by the practitioner when
assessing the degree of risk. Most work has been
carried out on people with diabetes, as these
people form the group with highest risk of
worst-scenario lower limb complications of
ulceration and non-traumatic amputation:
40-70% of all non-traumatic lower limb amputa-
tions are related to diabetes mellitus and 85% of
all such amputations are preceded by a foot
ulcer (International Working Group on the
Diabetic Foot 1999).
Psychological factors
Recent research has started to focus on patients'
own perceptions of their health and their degree
434 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
of risk. There is a strong association between
non-compliance with therapy and amputation in
a number of studies on patients with diabetes.
The patient with diabetic neuropathy who has
been told emphatically of the importance of
checking his footwear and of the consequences of
failure to heed this advice, but who returns later
with an ulcer due to a foreign object in the shoe,
possibly believes himself to be invulnerable: it
won't happen to me. Education is seen as a vital
part of the management of such patients, but
simple transfer of knowledge is not enough. The
patient's perception of his health status and the
desire to alter behaviour are important
influencing factors.
Complex interactions of psychological factors
in people with at-risk feet can result in denial
or detachment syndromes. In these cases patients
perceive their foot health of low importance or
relevance, often psychologically detaching them-
selves from their foot problems. These situations
can be a particular challenge for practitioners to
manage and call for a multiprofessional approach
to assessment and management.
Other behavioural factors can be detrimental
to health in general, such as tobacco smoking and
excessive alcohol drinking, as well as having par-
ticular negative effects on healing outcomes.
Socioeconomic factors
Low economic status has been shown to be asso-
ciated with a higher risk of amputation. A person
on a low income is less likely to be able to afford
good footwear, adequate heating in the home, a
balanced diet, etc. The socioeconomic status of an
individual is more important than whether the
person belongs to an ethnic minority group.
Support in the form of family and friends and
religious or social groups is important in reduc-
ing the risk, especially so in patients who suffer
visual or other impairments, and this could be
one reason why ethnic minorities are not at a dis-
advantage in terms of risk of lower limb ulcera-
tion and amputation. Lack of education in
general is also an influencing factor: e.g. this may
lead to inability to understand footcare advice or
to realise the importance of adequate diet.
Environmental factors
Reduced access to health care is also associated
with increased risk. No matter how well moti-
vated a patient may be, if there are inadequate
footcare facilities, or those facilities are out of
reach due to lack of transport, then there is
always the possibility that a lesion will develop
or worsen before adequate help is received.
Other environmental factors such as inadequate
heating in the home or poor hygiene are closely
related to socioeconomic factors and lack of edu-
cation, as discussed in the previous section.
Occupational factors
Apart from the earnings-related factor, certain
occupations independently place the person at a
higher risk of lower limb complications. For
example, people who have sedentary jobs are at
higher risk of obesity, heart disease and venous
stasis problems than people in more active jobs.
People such as top executives who spend long
hours in flight are also at high risk of deep vein
thrombosis. Occupations involving exposure to
the elements will increase that person's chance of
developing cold-related conditions such as
chilblains, which can lead to ulceration.
Previous medical history
Past medical history is important, since previous
ulceration or amputation will place the person in
a high-risk category for further ulceration and
amputation. This is because the factors that con-
tributed to the development of the first ulcer are
likely to still be present and, once amputation has
been performed, the extra stress on the already
compromised contralateral limb will place that
limb at high risk.
Age
The individual's healing ability will vary from
person to person across any age band but in
general healing slows with age. A more significant
factor is the presence of coexistent disease, the
likelihood of which increases with age.
Coexistent disease
All too often a practitioner will be confronted
with a non-healing ulcer: this, despite the
fact that extreme care, the most appropriate
dressings, antibiosis and careful observation
and monitoring have all been carried out.
In many such cases there is an underlying sys-
temic condition which is delaying healing.
There are many conditions which can delay
healing and will therefore place the person in a
higher risk category, some examples of which
are shown in Table 17.7. In addition, the treat-
ment itself for coexisting conditions may also
impair healing.
A thorough primary patient assessment, as
described in Chapters 5-10, should detect rele-
vant underlying conditions/treatment.
Local indicators
Having assessed the patient holistically for risk
factors, it is necessary to turn our attention to
the area of tissue viability loss itself and make
an accurate recording of lesion details. This
will often be carried out as part of the routine
assessment of skin and the appendages in the
clinic (Ch. 9). Some of the systems used have
been discussed earlier in this chapter. Methods
of obtaining descriptive details will now be
discussed.
THE AT-RISK FOOT 435
Surface area of wound
The surface area of the wound is an important
piece of data, since it enables the practitioner to
chart the progress of a lesion and thus determine
the success or otherwise of treatment.
Evidence of surface area as a prognosis for
healing is contradictory, with a meta-analysis of
wound healing studies by Margolis et al (2000)
on diabetic neuropathic foot ulcers showing no
correlation, whereas a recent paper by Oyibo et al
(2001) looked at 194 patients with diabetic foot
ulcers and found ulcer area at presentation was
greater in the amputation group compared with
healed ulcers, so the authors conclude that ulcer
area does predict outcome and should be
included in a wound classification system. The
same authors found that the patient's age, sex,
duration/type of diabetes, and ulcer site had no
effect on outcome.
Methods of measuring surface area vary from
the very simple to the very complicated.
The simplest method is to use a sterile, dispos-
able millimetre ruler and record the longest axis
of the wound as the length, L, and the width, W,
as the longest dimension perpendicular to L. One
of two formulae can then be used to calculate the
surface area:
A =L x Wx 0.785
or
A =L x Wx 0.763
Table 17.7 Examples of conditions or treatments which may delay healing
Category Examples
Cardiovascular
Endocrine/metabolic
Immunological
Immunosuppressive agents
Infectious
Haematological
Musculoskeletal
Neoplasia
Respiratory
Renal
Traumatic
Exogenous factors
Peripheral vascular disease, venous insufficiency, lymphatic obstruction
Diabetes mellitus, malnutrition, deficiency syndromes, obesity
DiGeorge syndrome, hypogammaglobulinaemia, human immunodeficiency virus, rheumatoid
arthritis, hypersensitivity
Long-term steroids, immunosuppressive drugs, radiation, cytotoxic drugs
Cytomegalovirus, infectious mononucleosis, severe bacterial, mycobacterial or fungal disease
Leukaemia, anaemias, haemophilia, sickle-cell anaemia
Deformities, hypermobility
Carcinomas, lymphomas, sarcomas
Chronic obstructive airways disease
Chronic nephropathy
Burns, foreign bodies, repeated minor trauma, tight clothing (tourniquet effect)
Inappropriate dressings, antiseptics, environmental conditions, caustics and irritants
436 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
For derivations of these calculations, see
Schubert (1997).
A second method requiring only simple appara-
tus is to place a sterile, flexible, transparent grid
over the wound: the grid has a removable backing
and is marked into J-cm squares. The margins of
the lesion can then be traced on to the grid and the
surface area calculated by counting the squares.
Disposal of the removable backing prevents cross-
infection, and the tracing can be stored in the
patient's notes for future reference. There are
various strategies for calculation of surface area,
such as including all whole squares and all partial
squares on the right, discarding all partial squares
on the left, etc., or using a formula such as:
A
c
=N
c
A c-r =(N
c
+ (0.4 x N
p
) )
where A
c
is the surface area of whole squares,
A c-r is the surface area of whole and partial
squares, N
c
is the number of complete squares
and N
p
is the number of partial squares within
the traced area.
If the grid is divided into smaller squares, such
as 0.5 cm x 0.5 em then each formula has to be
multiplied by 0.25 to obtain the area in em-
(Richard et aI2000).
Both of these methods have the advantage of
being quick, simple to use and inexpensive. The
disadvantages are that it is more difficult to
obtain an accurate tracing if the lesion is on a
curved surface such as the heel and that these
methods are very subjective.
A more objective measurement is made by
using a camera to take a photograph of the
lesion. The camera must always be placed at a
set distance from the lesion and a scaled ruler
should be positioned at the top or bottom of the
lesion, in the same vertical plane. The area of the
lesion can then be calculated from the devel-
oped photograph. The advantages are that the
measurement will be more objective and there is
no risk of cross-infection, but disadvantages are
that errors will again be present if the wound is
on a curved surface, the equipment is much
more expensive than use of a transparent grid
and the result is not instantly available unless a
Polaroid camera is used.
A further development is to use a digital camera
and associated software, which will enable the
image to be displayed on a computer screen. The
operator can click on to various points around the
margin of the lesion and the software will
instantly calculate the surface area. The advan-
tages are increased accuracy and instantaneous
results. The disadvantages are the initial expense
of the equipment and the need to develop a skill in
operating the equipment.
A group of workers from France have devel-
oped a planimetry software program, which
uses the tracing of the wound on a transparent
grid together with the computer mouse acting
as a digitiser, to transfer the tracing to the com-
puter, whereupon the software automatically
calculates the surface area. This method was
compared with calculating the surface area by
length and width, by square counting and by
using image-processing software and was
found to be highly reproducible and accurate.
The advantage of this method is that it does not
require the expense of a digital camera, but on
the downside it is more time-consuming
(Rajbhandari et aII999).
Depth of wound
The depth of the wound is an important piece of
data, since as mentioned earlier, depth shows
strong correlation with prognosis and degree of
risk. The usual method is to use a blunt, sterile
probe and measure the depth at the deepest part
of the wound. The advantages are ease of use and
low cost. The disadvantages are risk of cross-
infection and deciding exactly where the deepest
part of the lesion lies. It is also difficult to measure
the depth of very narrow lesions such as fissures
or splits in the epidermis. Lesions of unbroken
skin will of course have zero depth.
Volume of wound
Although some research is being undertaken
using stereoscopic equipment, no very satisfac-
tory method of measuring the volume of a
wound has been developed. Other methods tried
have included injecting normal saline and mea-
suring the volume used to fill the wound - but
this assumes the wound to have no pre-existing
fluid present - or using some other medium to
fill the cavity, such as an inert foam or a hydrogel.
None of these methods work very satisfactorily
and there is no great advantage in measuring
volume rather than depth.
Colour of wound
The colour of the wound can either be a mere
recording of colour by name, referring to either
the base of the wound or the surrounding epider-
mis, or using some sort of standard colour chart.
Successful use has been made of ordinary house-
hold paint colour charts for this purpose, which
have the advantage of reducing observer bias and
making it easier to compare the lesion at a later
date. Colour has some bearing on prognosis, since
a red base will suggest good granulation tissue
and better prognosis for healing than a grey base,
which suggests poor blood supply, or a yellow
base, which suggests presence of infection.
Margins of wound
Margins of wounds can also be related to progno-
sis. A 'saucer-shaped' wound suggests healing is
under way, whereas undermined edges suggest
the presence of a sinus, straight edges suggest no
Table 17.8 'PREPSOCS' indicators of foot infection
THE AT-RISK FOOT 437
change and rolled edges may indicate malignant
change.
Infection
Infection is one of the most important indicators
for risk (Carlson 1999). Table 17.8 lists useful
indicators of foot infection. The exudate can
further be described in terms of colour and con-
sistency, which gives some indication of the
pathogens involved. A more precise way of
determining which pathogens are present is to
take a swab (Ch. 13). The usual method is to
swab deep in the wound before any lavage of the
wound has taken place. However, controversy
rages concerning the detection of infection, since
it is recognised that any swab taken of a wound
will show the presence of pathogens, but
whether these are merely commensals or true
pathogens is more difficult to decide. It is rec-
ommended by some that tissue scrapings are
collected from the base of the wound using the
blunt edge of a scalpel blade and that the blade
and adherent tissue be sent to the pathological
laboratory for analysis. A similar controversy
surrounds the detection of osteomyelitis, since
X-rays are not reliable in the early stages and
clinical signs such as a 'sausage' toe and failure
to heal are often the only indicators. Probing to
bone is used by many as a rule of thumb but this
Pain
Redness
Exudation
Pyrexia
Slow healing
Oedema
Colour change (blue, grey, black)
Smell
Not necessarily present (especially with sensory neuropathy). Throbbing, pulsatile or
persistent pain. May also have generalised malaise
Soft tissue infection produces a diffuse area of cellulitis radiating from a central point
(often a portal of entry). May spread via lymph vessels, presenting as clear red lines
(lymphangitis). May herald onset of systemic spread
Amount of exudate produced is proportional to blood supply to wound. Consistency and
colour altered by microorganisms (e.g. creamy-yellow pus indicates staphylococcal
infection, green pus indicates pseudomonas infection)
Local rise in temperature may be present. Need to distinguish from other causes of
temperature increase (e.g. Charcot foot). Rise in systemic temperature is common in
severe infection, or indicates systemic involvement
If wound is slow to heal or failing to heal, suspect underlying infection
Acute inflammatory response associated with infection produces local oedema. Oedema
may impede normal function (e.g. reduce range of motion of a joint)
Change in colour usually indicates presence of infection and/or tissue necrosis
Malodour indicates presence of microorganisms, e.g. presence of anaerobes
438 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
is not entirely accurate as a study by Armstrong
et al (1998) showed using bone biopsies to
confirm infection.
Pain
The presence or degree of pain does not always
bear relation to the severity of a lesion since, in
conditions such as diabetes mellitus, peripheral
sensory neuropathy may mean that the foot is
insensate and the patient feels no pain at the site
of a lesion. Indeed, the first time such a patient
may realise he has a problem is on noticing
hosiery or footwear being soaked in exudate, or
on routine visit for a foot inspection at the clinic,
or by the observation of a relative or friend.
However, practitioners usually record the
presence and nature of any pain experienced by
the patient, since alleviation of the pain is one
of the therapeutic objectives and, whereas
absence of pain does not necessarily indicate all
is well, presence of pain is usually a strong indi-
cation of an underlying problem. Pain is often
recorded using the patient's own description of
the pain. A more objective method is to use the
visual analogue scale (VAS) to show intensity of
pain, with one end of the line indicating no pain
and the other end indicating worst pain ever
(Ch. 3). The patient is asked to mark a point on
the line corresponding to the intensity of pain
felt at that moment.
A second often-used method is the McGill Pain
Questionnaire (MPQ), or a modification of it,
which consists of the patient selecting adjectives
from various groups to show the nature and
intensity of pain. Both methods are useful in mon-
itoring pain and pain relief, but pain is a very
difficult entity to compare from one patient to
another. The VAS is more suited for use in a busy
clinical practice than the MPQ, which takes time
to complete, but yields more information and is
more suited for research purposes.
Systems approach to risk
assessment
As can be seen from Table 17.2, pathological
changes within the body systems can threaten
tissue viability. Each physiological system will
now be considered in turn and attention drawn
to changes from the norm which increases the 'at-
risk' status of the patient. Details of actual assess-
ment procedures will not be included, as these
can be found in the relevant chapters of this text-
book.
Cardiovascular system
Tissue viability is compromised whenever local
circulation is compromised. An inefficient
drainage system can be as threatening as a
reduced blood supply as both can produce local
ischaemia, leading to reduced diffusion of nutri-
ents and gases with subsequent reduction in
tissue metabolism. The cause may be local factors
such as a local vasculitis caused by local infection
or vasospasm as seen in chilblains or Raynaud's
phenomenon, a stenotic artery due to atheroscle-
rosis or stasis following incompetent veins or a
damaged lymphatic system; 85% of lower limb
ulcers are venous ulcers and they are often very
resistant to healing. Chapter 6 discusses causes
and signs and symptoms of venous stasis in more
detail. Systemic factors such as congestive heart
failure or severe anaemia can lead to ischaemia in
the lower limb and external factors such as tight
footwear, hosiery or dressings can also be a cause
of localised ischaemia.
Vasospastic disorders such as Raynaud's
disease or phenomenon, acrocyanosis, erythro-
cyanosis and chilblains (perniosis) can result in
loss of tissue viability; prolonged vasospasm is
triggered by exposure to a cold environment or
to sudden changes in temperature.
Thromboangiitis obliterans (Buerger's disease)
is a small-vessel disease affecting smokers. This
mainly affects young men, and causes small areas
of necrosis on the tips of the fingers, toes, nose
and ears.
The cardinal signs of a compromised circulation
are absence of pedal pulses, an ankle/brachial
pressure index below 0.9, ischaemic pain on exer-
cise or at rest and oedema (Ch. 6). Sudden tem-
perature change or a difference in temperature
between the two lower limbs is also an important
sign. Colour changes and absence of hairs are not
THE AT-RISK FOOT 439
Table 17.9 Examples of conditions affecting the skin which
increase the at-risk status of the patient
trauma such as friction from footwear or due to a
systemic condition such as bullous pemphigoid,
as well as callus and corns produced at sites of
increased mechanical stress, can all ulcerate,
exposing the patient to risk of infection. Often the
first sign of increased trauma is a slight redden-
ing of the skin at the sites of increased stress,
such as on the dorsum or apices of toes from ill-
fitting footwear. This is the initial inflammatory
response to trauma and should never be disre-
garded. If the lesion is pruritic, such as in atopic
or venous eczema, or in tinea pedis, then the
chances of infection from scratching are even
higher.
In addition, ulcers and other skin lesions such
as pigmented naevi, may undergo malignant
change, which is obviously a threat not just to the
affected limb but to the whole person. Any
patient with a lesion which shows rapid change
in colour, size or wound margins or which
exhibits bleeding or other discharge should be
immediately referred for further investigation
such as biopsy and pathological examination.
sufficient signs on their own, but help to build the
whole picture of a limb or foot with a compro-
mised circulation. The absence of one pedal pulse
in a foot indicates a compromised circulation but
if the other pedal pulse is intact, significant
ischaemia is unlikely. Although calcification may
lead to a false high value for the ankle/brachial
index, a low value always indicates some reduc-
tion in blood flow: the lower the index, the higher
the risk. Digital pressures can also be measured
using an appropriate pressure cuff. Further evi-
dence can be obtained by observing or listening to
the waveform or flow sounds of major arteries
and veins using a hand-held Doppler or measur-
ing the transcutaneous oxygen diffusion pressure
(Tcp02) on the dorsum of the foot or at digital
level. Values below 50 mmHg on the leg or
dorsum of the foot indicate some degree of
ischaemia.
Dermatological system
As explained in Chapter 9, the intact skin is an
important barrier to pathogens and any break or
potential break in that integrity, such as cuts and
bruises, poses a risk of infection. If infection is
already present, as in paronychia or onychia,
then there is risk of the situation worsening with
development of cellulitis and lymphangitis. Any
condition which produces a localised change,
resulting in the altered ability of the epidermis
and dermis to withstand normal daily trauma -
such as an excessively moist or dry skin - poses
a threat to the integrity of the skin (Plates 29 and
30). Examples of such conditions can be seen in
Table 17.9.
Alteration in the hydration of the stratum
corneum, such as is seen in the dry skin of people
exposed to wind and sun, due to ageing, certain
drugs such as those used in chemotherapy, or a
systemic condition such as hypothyroidism, all
render the epidermis more likely to form fissures
and thus portals of entry to pathogens. Similarly,
excessive hydration as seen in the macerated skin
due to occlusive dressings, prolonged immersion
in water or poor attention to personal hygiene
can lead to moist fissures. Blisters, including
vesicles and bullae, whether caused by external
Symptom
Dry fissures
Wet fissures
Callus and corns
Blisters
Pruritic lesions
Malignant lesions
Trauma
Infection
Condition
Sun, wind, ageing, hypothyroidism,
chemotherapy
Occlusive dressings and footwear,
poor hygiene, hyperhydrosis, certain
occupations, e.g. baker, cook
Foot deformities, abnormal foot
function, ill-fitting footwear, ichthyosis
Epidermolysis bullosa, pompholyx,
pemphigus, urticaria, pustular
psoriasis, juvenile plantar dermatitis,
ill-fitting footwear
Tinea pedis, atopic eczema, venous
stasis eczema, contact dermatitis,
asteatotic dermatitis
Melanoma, squamous cell
carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma,
Kaposi's sarcoma
Cuts, bruises, ingrown toenail, insect
bites
Paronychia, onychia, erysipelas,
necrotising fasciitis
440 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Malignant naevi can arise under the nail as well
as on skin and not all malignant naevi arise from
pre-existing pigmented naevi. In addition, not all
melanomas are pigmented.
Endocrinological system
Metabolic and endocrine disorders can cause
widespread effects of morbidity and even mor-
tality and need to be noted when taking the
patient's medical history, but their effects on the
at-risk status of the lower limb vary from none to
extremely marked consequences, as can be seen
from Table 17.10.
In addition to direct effects on the lower limb,
many endocrine and metabolic disorders produce
other symptoms which may place the person at
risk of lower limb complications: for example,
ocular muscle weakness, as sometimes seen in
Graves' disease, may lead to blurred and double
vision, and retinopathy associated with diabetes
mellitus indirectly places the person at a higher
risk of lower limb problems, because of reduced
ability to notice any problem or to carry out
routine nail care safely.
Certain endocrine disorders can place the
patient at risk when undergoing surgery and
require appropriate prophylaxis, extreme vigi-
lance and prompt treatment if an emergency
arises. A thorough assessment is essential to
ensure awareness of such conditions.
Hyperthyroidism can sometimes lead to a life-
threatening situation, thyrotoxic storm, where
the patient may present with cardiovascular col-
lapse and shock. The practitioner must be aware
that infection, surgery, trauma, fright, diabetic
Table 17.10 Endocrine and metabolic disorders with effects on the lower limb
Endocrine/metabolic disorder
Acromegaly/gigantism (excess pituitary
growth hormone)
Addison's disease (adrenocortical
plus insufficiency)
Cushing's syndrome (excess cortisol); may be
due to excess pituitary ACTH (Cushing's disease)
or exogenous ACTH or steroids
Diabetes mellitus (a relative or absolute lack
of insulin secretion, leading to elevated
blood glucose levels and alterations in lipid
metabolism)
Hypocalcaemia (most common causes are
deficiency of parathyroid hormone, vitamin D
or kidney disease)
Hypercalcaemia (idiopathic hypersecretion
of parathyroid hormone)
Hyperthyroidism (the most common form
is an autoimmune condition called
Graves' disease, but other forms also exist)
Hypothyroidism (the most common form
is an autoimmune disease called
Hashimoto's disease)
Postmenopausal syndrome (fall in
oestrogens leads to bone resorption)
Effects on the lower limb
Enlargement of feet; erosion of articular surfaces leading to joint problems;
thickened, sweaty skin
Increased pigmentation over bony prominences and extensor surfaces,
generalised effects of dehydration, weight loss, weakness, fatigue,
orthostatic hypotension
Muscle wasting and weakness; thin, atrophic skin; poor wound healing;
reduced inflammatory response; tendency to bruising; osteoporosis;
plus generalised effects of hypertension and glucose intolerance
Arteriosclerosis, leading to calcification and atherosclerosis of arteries
Peripheral vascular disease is 50-100x more common in patients with
diabetes
Neuropathy can appear in various forms. The most common form is
bilateral, symmetrical, peripheral sensorimotor polyneuropathy, but wasting
of hip and thigh muscles (diabetic amyotrophy) predominantly affects elderly
males and single nerves can also be affected
Tetany (paraesthesia of lips, tongue, fingers, feet, muscle spasm). Lack of
vitamin D will lead to reduced calcium absorption in the gut,
compensated for by parathyroid hypersecretion, leading to bone resorption,
rickets or osteomalacia, with a tendency for bowed legs and fractures
Muscle weakness, bone resorption of phalanges and soft tissue
calcification, osteitis fibrosa cystica (rare)
Moist, warm skin, pretibial myxoedema (infiltrative dermopathy), muscle
weakness, wasting
Dry, scaly, coarse, thickened skin; a tendency to tarsal tunnel syndrome
Osteoporosis, leading to crush fractures of spine, and fractures of wrist
(Colles' fracture) and of neck of femur (Perthes' fracture)
acidosis or discontinuation of antithyroid med-
ication can all precipitate a thyrotoxic storm,
which is a medical emergency requiring immedi-
ate hospitalisation.
A patient who is receiving or who has
received long-term steroids in the previous year,
such as a person with rheumatoid arthritis, will
show a reduced inflammatory response, poor
healing ability and increased risk of infection
and at times of injury or surgery is at risk of
cardiovascular shock due to a sudden fall in
blood pressure.
The endocrinological condition which has
extremely important consequences is diabetes
mellitus. Whatever the cause, be it an autoim-
mune disease causing type 1 diabetes or a multi-
factorial response to obesity, genetic input and a
host of other factors, producing type 2 diabetes,
the consequences on the lower limb are equally
serious. The major consequences are an increased
risk of peripheral vascular disease and a high
risk of peripheral neuropathy. In patients with
diabetes, the single most important risk factor for
ulceration is the presence of peripheral neuropa-
thy and the most important contribution to
delayed healing is ischaemia. Thus, a thorough
assessment of both the cardiovascular and the
neurological systems are essential for patients
with diabetes (Chs 6 and 7).
There are several forms of neuropathy that
may affect the person with diabetes, but the
most common is peripheral polyneuropathy,
which can affect all branches of the peripheral
nervous system, i.e. sensory, motor and auto-
nomic nerves.
Sensory neuropathy leads to lack of aware-
ness of injury and a reduction in the protective
function of proprioceptive reflexes. Motor neu-
ropathy leads to wasting of intrinsic foot
muscles and eventual foot deformities such as
claw toes and a pes cavoid-type foot (Plate 31).
This in turn leads to increased pressure
on metatarsal heads, apices of digits and the
heels, with formation of callus and, if no pre-
ventative measures are taken, to tissue break-
down and ulceration (Plate 32). Autonomic
neuropathy leads to dry skin, with increased
callus formation and loss of the normal sympa-
THE AT-RISK FOOT 441
thetic reflex which adjusts vasomotor tone, so
that blood flow to the foot is increased. The foot
will appear warm with bounding pedal pulses
(Case history 17.1). However, because of the
lack of vasomotor tone, appropriate vasocon-
striction as a postural reflex is missing, leading
to orthostatic hypotension and arteriovenous
shunting, depriving skin and superficial tissues
of an adequate blood supply. This shunting also
leads to the characteristic sign of engorged
dorsal veins. Although the patient may lose the
ability to detect a painful stimulus, when single
nerves are affected the common symptom is a
severe, lancinating pain, often following the dis-
tribution of a single dermatome. This gives rise
to the phenomenon of the sensitive, insensate
foot.
Neuropathy is also a factor in the develop-
ment of the Charcot foot, where absence of
pain and other protective reflexes plus abnor-
mal blood flow to bone leading to osteopenia,
result in gross neuroarthropathy developing
from a seemingly trivial injury or even the
repetitive trauma of walking. The first signs of
such a process are usually a marked increase in
the temperature of one foot, with swelling, but
with no apparent cause such as infection. Any
Case history 17.1
Mr Brown, a 35-year-old Caucasian male, with type 1
diabetes present for 14 years, attended the podiatry
clinic for treatment of neuropathic ulcers. He weighed
15 stone and wore trainers bought in a high street
store. Mr Brown had recently completed a short
prison sentence where the ulcers had developed. He
had a deep, heavily exuding ulcer under the first
metatarsal head right foot, surrounded by callus and
a shallow ulcer on the plantar surface of the left heel.
A full assessment revealed the presence of bounding
pedal pulses, dry, warm skin, insensitivity to a 10 g
monofilament as far as the knees and inability to
distinguish between warm and cold or sharp and
blunt stimuli in both limbs. Some wasting of intrinsic
foot muscles was observed, with slight clawing of
toes and prominent metatarsal heads and heels.
Diagnosis: diabetic neuropathic ulcers. The risk
factors contributing to the ulcerations were deemed to
be peripheral neuropathy, excessive body weight
acting on bony prominences and failure to remove
callus build-up.
442 SPECIFIC CLIENTGROUPS
temperature difference of 2C or more between
the two feet of a patient with diabetes should be
immediately investigated to rule out infection
or acute neuroarthropathy. If early detection is
missed and the foot goes on to develop a
chronic Charcot foot, it will be at high risk of
ulceration, due to the abnormal pressure points
created by the deformity (Plate 33).
Diabetes is an important risk factor for athero-
sclerosis and peripheral vascular disease. The
pathology is identical to that in non-diabetic
patients, but gender difference is lost so that
females are equally at risk at all ages. The hyper-
glycaemia and dyslipidaemia associated with
diabetes appears to upset the delicate balance of
endothelial events that maintains the integrity
and patency of the large and medium vessels,
tipping them over towards atheroma formation
sooner than in non-diabetic patients.
Atherosclerosis also develops more distally in
people with diabetes, with tibial vessels fre-
quently affected and focal stenotic lesions being
more common. In addition, development of col-
lateral circulation is impaired, so that proximal
lesions will have a more profound effect on
distal regions than in non-diabetic patients.
Early calcification of the tunica media of arteries
is also seen. This is a separate process from the
calcification process of Monckebergs sclerosis,
which develops with ageing in medium and
small muscular arteries independently from
atherosclerosis and is clinically insignificant as
it does not interfere with blood flow (Cotran et
al 1994). Pedal vessels are rarely affected by
either atherosclerosis or calcification, an impor-
tant point to bear in mind when deciding on
appropriate tests for measuring the degree of
ischaemia in the foot.
H was commonly believed that a similar
pathology affected small vessels, giving rise to
the term diabetic microangiopathy, and being
put forward as the cause of isolated events of
digital gangrene in the presence of palpable
pedal pulses. However, no evidence exists for
such a pathology and although functional abnor-
malities of small vessels do exist, the only
demonstrable pathology is that of thickening of
the basement membrane. Such events are no
longer thought to be responsible for necrosis in
the absence of large-vessel disease and are no
longer considered an impediment to the success-
ful outcome of vascular reconstruction.
If ischaemia is present and remains uncor-
rected, loss of tissue viability is inevitable. This
alone is unlikely to lead directly to tissue break-
down, but will almost certainly do so in the pres-
ence of other factors, such as ill-fitting footwear,
tight hosiery, etc. Similarly, uncorrected
ischaemia will delay or prevent healing of any
ulcer. Thus, if ischaemia is present, part of the
management must be to improve blood supply if
at all possible.
Ischaemic ulcers, whether associated with dia-
betes or not, have characteristic features which
distinguish them from neuropathic and venous
ulcers, as shown in Table 17.11 (Plates 34 and 35)
(Mason et al 1999).
It is considered that at least 35% of all diabetic
patients will have asymptomatic neuropathy
(Edmonds & Foster 2000). Various studies into
the aetiology of diabetic ulcers have shown that
over half will be neuropathic and a very small
number will be ischaemic, the remainder having
both neuropathy and ischaemia. Bearing in mind
the role of neuropathy and ischaemia in the pre-
vention and healing of ulcers, most practitioners
assign their patients with diabetic ulcers into
either a neuropathic group or a neuro-ischaemic
group and treat accordingly. Careful cardiovas-
cular and neurological assessment of the lower
limb is therefore essential.
The foot that is at highest risk will be the insen-
sate, pulseless foot and a common cause of ulcer-
ation is poorly fitting footwear (Fig. 17.1) (Case
history 17.2). Often such a patient will be
wearing shoes that are one or more sizes too
small, to avoid the sensation that the shoe is slip-
ping off the foot. This of course further compro-
mises the poor circulation, and the tissues with
an already reduced tissue viability will be unable
to withstand the increased ischaemia, resulting
in breakdown. Thorough footwear assessment
(Ch, 10) is therefore also essential.
Diabetes also increases the susceptibility of
the patient to a wide range of infections, both
bacterial and fungal, probably with hypergly-
THE AT-RISK FOOT 443
Table 17.11 Characteristic features of ischaemic, neuropathic and venous ulcers
Ischaemic ulcers
Usually very painful, pain alleviated
by limb dependency
Small, shallow, punched-out
appearance
Dry or small amount of exudate
Pale, grey or yellow base
On dorsum or apices of toes, under
nails, borders of feet (see Plate 2)
Thin surrounding skin, often a halo of
erythema
Neuropathic ulcers
Often painless
Often very deep
Often copious exudate, may be bloody
Red or yellow (infected) base
Under metatarsal heads, apices of
clawed toes, heels
Thick border of callus surround
Venous ulcers
Associated with an aching or bursting
pain, alleviated by limb elevation
Shallow, spreading, with irregular
borders
Copious, often smelly exudate
Red or yellow (infected) base
Distal third of leg (see Plate 8)
Often associated with skin scoriation
or eczema, telangiectases and
haemosiderosis. Varicose veins may be
visible (see Plate 6)
caemia, impaired leucocytic function and poor
blood supply all playing a role. As mentioned
earlier, infection is rarely a cause of ulceration,
but once a portal of entry is created, infection is
very likely. The practitioner must be alert to
any signs of infection, e.g. swelling, pain,
redness, warmth, pus and any signs that the
infection is spreading, e.g. cellulitis, lymphangi-
tis. The practitioner needs to be aware of the
possibility of spread of infection to bone (osteo-
myelitis) which is not initially detectable on x-
ray, especially in the neuropathic foot. Severe
infection in both types of foot can lead to the
blue-black discoloration of necrosis (wet gan-
grene). Where ischaemia is a prominent feature,
necrosis can occur in the absence of infection,
Figure 17.1 Ischaemic foot after dancing shoes.
due to an inadequate oxygen supply to the
tissues, i.e. dry gangrene (see Plate 3).
The hyperglycaemia of diabetes also affects
soft tissue such as tendons, leading to a
restricted range of motion at joints (cheiro-
arthropathy) and Dupuytren's contracture, both
of which are associated with an increased risk of
foot ulceration.
Case history 17.2
Mrs Shaw, a 55-year-old Caucasian female, with type
2 diabetes diagnosed 12 years ago, presented to the
podiatry clinic with a very painful ulcer over the
dorsolateral aspect of her right fifth toe (Fig. 17.1).
She was an enthusiastic ballroom dancer and had
been taking part in a contest the previous evening, for
which she had worn a pair of new dancing shoes. A
full primary assessment revealed a small ulcer with
no surrounding callus. There was little exudate
present, but there was erythema surrounding the
area. No pedal pulses were palpable on the right foot.
A Doppler tracing revealed dampened waveform of
both dorsalis pedis and tibialis posterior.
Anklelbrachial pressure index for DP was 0.7 and for
TP was 0.65. Tcp02 measurement of the dorsum of
the right foot was 40 mmHg.
The patient was able to detect sharp and blunt
stimuli on some toes but unable to detect a 10 g
monofilament or the vibrations of a 128 Hz tuning,
fork as far as the ankles.
Diagnosis: neuroischaemic ulcer. The main risk
factors were ischaemia, neuropathy and trauma from
ill-fitling shoes.
444 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
There are also certain occasions when the
patient with diabetes is at increased risk, even
though his physical condition remains un-
changed, such as when on holiday abroad, par-
ticularly in hot countries, when the danger of
burns from hot sand or blisters from plastic
beach shoes are high possibilities.
Thus, in a patient with a diabetic ulcer that is
failing to heal, an holistic re-assessment is
needed, to discover any contributory risk factor
which may have been overlooked, such as non-
compliance with prescribed treatment/advice,
ill-fitting footwear, poor blood glucose control,
occult infection, peripheral vascular disease or
neuropathy.
Haematological system
Mention has already been made of the general
effects of anaemias on the lower limb in reducing
available oxygen to the tissues. However, certain
haematological conditions have a more direct
effect on the tissue viability of the lower limb
(Table 17.12).
Patients with sickle cell anaemia (homozy-
gous condition) or sickle cell trait (heterozygous
condition) are at increased risk of thrombotic
episodes, causing small-vessel obstruction due
to sickling of red blood cells in hypoxic condi-
tions. Any situation which could promote this
must be avoided. In the clinic this applies to
techniques such as the use of tourniquets and
tight dressings.
Table 17.12 Lower limb disease and haematological disorders
Patients suffering from vitamin B
12
deficiency
are at risk of neuropathic ulceration, due to
peripheral sensory neuropathy.
The haematological system is also very useful
as an aid to diagnosis. Case history 17.3 gives
an example of where simple haematological
tests prove diagnostic for a rheumatological
condition which has contributed to an at-risk
foot. Such tests can be useful for staging of this
disease (Ch. 13).
Case history 17.3
Mrs Black is a 50-year-oldschool dinner lady. She
was diagnosed with rheumatoid arthritis 6 years ago
following an acute episode in which her toes and
fingers became painful and swollen. She has been
prescribed prednisolone to control her inflammation
during acute attacks. Her feet have become
deformed with severe hallux abductovalgus
deformities, digital retraction, plantar metatarsal
bursae and associated callosity. She finds it difficult
to walkduring acute stages of her disease. Recent
bloodtests confirm the presence of rheumatoid
factor (immunoglobulin M: IgM) and she has both
high erythrocyte sedimentation rate and C-reactive
protein level, indicative of severe or prolonged
inflammation. Recently, the medial eminence of her
left hallux valgus deformity has ulcerated and she
has presented with an acute infection of this lesion.
She has been prescribed Augmentin to manage her
current infection. Her footwear is inappropriate,
being slip-onstyle. Mrs Blackfinds laces or other
methods of fastening difficult, owing to her hand
pain and loss of dexterity. Her peripheral perfusion
is good, with Tcp02 levels of 60 mmHg and normal
ankle: brachial pressure indices. She has no
significant neurological dysfunction.
Condition Effects on lower limb
Sickle cell anaemia
Thalassaemias
Pernicious anaemia (Vitamin B
12
deficiency)
Polycythaemia
Haemophilia
Chronic punched-out ulcers around the ankle, aseptic necrosis of
femoral head, peripheral vascular disease
Leg ulcers
Glove and stocking anaesthesia, loss of vibration and position sense,
muscle weakness
Increased riskof thrombosis and haemorrhage
Risk of haemorrhage, bleedinginto jointswith eventual destruction
Musculoskeletal system
There are a wide range of diseases in this cat-
egory, many of which reduce tissue viability.
Joint conditions producing foot deformities
threaten tissue viability when unaccommodating
footwear is worn or when the tissue overlying
the deformity is not protected from ground reac-
tion forces.
Rheumatoid arthritis. This is an inflammatory
joint condition characterised by rapid subluxa-
tion and deformation of joints, especially of
hands and feet, giving rise to ulnar deviation of
the hands and hallux abductovalgus deformity
of the feet. In 70% of cases it is correlated with
the presence of the rheumatoid factor, an anti-
body produced in response to the altered
immunoglobulin M (IgM) antibody which acts
as the trigger for autoimmune destruction of
joint structure. In addition, rheumatoid arthritis
is characterised by formation of soft tissue
nodules over subluxed joints, by atrophic skin,
muscle wasting and weakness and vasculitis. All
these factors compromise tissue viability.
Nodules are likely to break down due to pres-
sure and form deeply perforating ulcers. Muscle
weakness leads to vascular stasis and this, com-
bined with thin skin, increases the likelihood of
ulceration. Vascular involvement in rheumatoid
arthritis may be limited to discrete digital ateri-
tis, forming small lesions in the skin of digits
around nails folds or may involve a generalised
vasculitis, leading to thrombotic lesions of larger
vessels and leading to dry gangrene. Sadly, in
such cases, internal organs such as the heart are
also likely to be affected, often with fatal out-
comes. Vasculitis may also affect the vasa nervo-
rum, leading to peripheral sensorimotor
neuropathy with subsequent deformities such as
foot drop and with the tissues being at risk of
unnoticed trauma.
Sero-negative arthritides (e.g. psoriatic arthri-
tis, Reiter's disease, ankylosing spondylitis,
enteropathic arthritis, Behcet's disease) are a
range of arthritic conditions which, like rheuma-
toid arthritis, are inflammatory processes, but
which all test negative for the rheumatoid factor
and show a marked correlation with the presence
of the HLA B-27 antigen. They share certain char-
THE AT-RISK FOOT 445
acteristics in common, although not all character-
istics will be displayed in each case. All show a
tendency to involve the sacroiliac joints as well as
peripheral arthritis. Their effects on lower limb
tissue viability varies from one condition to
another.
Psoriatic arthritis. This condition tends to
involve terminal interphalangeal joints which
may precede skin and nail lesions by months or
years. Although slowly progressive, the condi-
tion can be extremely destructive, causing
absorption of the phalanges. Deformities and
skin lesions all compromise tissue viability.
Reiter's disease. This condition is usually sex-
ually transmitted and almost entirely confined to
males. The inflammatory arthritis involves toes,
ankles and knees and painful heel is a common
symptom. Skin and nail lesions (keratodermia
blennorrhagica) closely resemble those of psoria-
sis. Both the joint deformities and skin lesions
compromise tissue viability.
Ankylosing spondylitis. This condition affects
males far more often than females, but here the
spine, hips and shoulders are usually affected.
The feet are rarely involved and the condition
has little effect on tissue viability of the lower
limb.
Enteropathic arthritis. Linked to Crohn's
disease, enteropathic arthritis shows a flitting
peripheral arthritis of lower limb joints, which
remits as the bowel disease improves. Effects on
tissue viability of the lower limb are transitory.
Behcet's disease. This is a rare condition
which, in addition to peripheral arthritis, exhibits
vasculitis, venous thrombosis and neurological
defects. The patient is therefore at increased risk
of gangrene and amputation.
Other inflammatory conditions which do not
belong to the preceding groups are gout and
infective arthritis.
Gout. Gout is an inflammatory condition pro-
duced by the presence of high levels of uric acid,
which crystallises out in joints, provoking an
inflammatory response. The most common site is
the first metatarsophalangeal joint, producing
symptoms of acute pain, swelling and inflamma-
tion. Even if untreated, the symptoms subside
after 2-3 weeks and tissue viability returns to
446 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
normal, but if repeated attacks occur, crystalline
deposits eventually cause destructive changes in
articular cartilage and underlying bone, with
permanent deformities. In severe cases, topha-
ceous ulcers may arise - especially over bony
prominences.
Infectious (syn: septic, pyogenic) arthritis.
Infectious arthritis is a rapidly evolving inflamma-
tory condition that can destroy a joint very quickly
if not arrested. The condition is usually extremely
painful and a portal of entry can usually be
detected. Patients particularly at risk of this condi-
tion include those on long-term steroid therapy or
on immunosuppressive drugs.
Degenerative joint conditions. Conditions such
as osteoarthrosis also result in deformities but are
usually slow to develop. The metatarsopha-
langeal joint of the first digit is the most com-
monly affected joint, giving rise to a hallux
limitus/rigidus or hallux valgus deformity. They
are often the result of injury or the wear and tear
of ageing.
Connective tissue disorders. These disorders
have many features in common, especially vas-
culitis and fibrosis of ground substance. Each is
a multisystem disease with variable characteris-
tics: several, including systemic lupus erythe-
matosus, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyositis and
dermatomyositis exhibit muscle and joint pains.
The vasculitis can lead to partial or total
obstruction of small vessels, in turn resulting in
tissue necrosis.
Neurological system
We have already seen how degeneration of the
peripheral nervous system, as seen in diabetes
mellitus, can lead to profound deterioration in
tissue viability of the lower limb. Other condi-
tions (Table 17.13) can also produce peripheral
neuropathy with similar associated high-risk
problems.
Conditions affecting the spinal cord produce
symptoms which can be those of a sensory
and/ or a motor deficit, depending on the areas
affected. Examples are syringomyelia (sensory
and motor); motor neurone disease (motor only);
tabes dorsalis (tertiary syphilis)(sensory only);
subacute combined degeneration (vitamin B
12
deficiency) (sensory and motor) and Friedreich's
ataxia (sensory and motor). Demyelinating dis-
eases such as multiple sclerosis also produce
combined symptoms - in this case, upper motor
neurone symptoms and sensory loss. In ad-
dition trauma, disc protrusion and neoplasms
can all produce acute sensory and motor
symptoms.
Conditions affecting the brain such as strokes
can produce symptoms of hemiplegic or
quadriplegic upper motor lesions or contralateral
sensory impairment.
Impaired sensory perception is a severe threat
to tissue viability, since it may rob the person of
the pain-warning system which normally alerts
the person to imminent or actual injury.
Postural instability, as seen in Parkinson's
Table 17.13 Conditions producing peripheral neuropathy of the lower limb
Condition Effect
Alcoholism
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease (peroneal atrophy)
Connective tissue diseases, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis,
systemic lupus erythematosus, polyarteritis nodosa, sarcoidosis
Drugs, toxins
Gutllaln-Barre syndrome
Hansen's disease (leprosy)
HIV/AIDS
Malignancies
Poliomyelitis
Trauma
Sensorimotor neuropathy
Predominantly motor neuropathy
Sensory or mixed neuropathy, mononeuritis multiplex
Generalised neuropathy
Predominantly motor neuropathy
Sensory neuropathy
Distal symmetrical polyneuropathy
Predominantly sensory
Motor neuropathy
Sensorimotor neuropathy
disease, renders the person liable to falls. Motor
neuropathies threaten tissue viability by creat-
ing deformities leading to high pressure points
which make the tissue vulnerable during every-
dayambulation.
For a fuller discussion of neurological condi-
tions and their effects on the lower limb, the
reader is directed to Chapter 7.
Renal system
Chronic renal failure results in a failure of the
kidney to carry out its important regulatory roles
of water and electrolyte balance, acid-base
balance, production of active vitamin 0
3
and pro-
duction of haemopoietins. Even with dialysis,
careful diet and medication, these disturbances can
lead to hypertension and thus increase the risk of
atherosclerosis or occasionally lead to peripheral
neuropathy. As the delicate calcium: phosphate
balance is disturbed, hypocalcaemia and hyper-
phosphataemia occur, leading to an increase in
parathyroid hormone and bone resorption with
rickets or osteomalacia as a consequence. Anaemia
can result from lack of erythropoietin.
Chronic glomerulonephritis which is charac-
terised by diffuse sclerosis of the glomeruli, is
usually accompanied by hypertension.
A familial disease of the kidney which also
results in rickets is characterised by impaired
renal resorption of phosphate and reduced
intestinal absorption of calcium. This in turn
leads to resorption of bone to raise plasma
calcium levels, resulting in rickets or osteomala-
cia. It is called vitamin O-resistant rickets to dis-
tinguish it from the deficiency disease.
Respiratory system
Chronic diseases affecting the respiratory
system, such as chronic obstructive airways
disease, chronic bronchiectasis, silicosis or
asbestosis, will affect the ability of the lungs to
fully oxygenate the blood pumped from the
right ventricle. Poorly oxygenated blood will
then be delivered to the tissues and will impair
healing ability.
THE AT-RISK FOOT 447
CLINICAL DECISION MAKING
The role of the practitioner in assessing the at-
risk foot is to achieve a rational diagnosis based
on key facts from the history, presenting problem
and physical examination of the patient. It is
important to recognise that in many cases the
patient will be consulting several health profes-
sionals about the primary underlying disorderts)
which have placed their feet at risk. The lower
limb practitioner should ensure liaison with
these other professionals to ensure that all practi-
tioners involved are in possession of the full facts
relating to the case, and that effective shared care
can be planned.
In many cases patients will have more than
one, or even multiple causes for their at-risk
feet. It is important to identify all potential risk
factors when assessing the patient. Failure to do
so can render management ineffective, delay
resolution or in severe cases result in deteriora-
tion of the patient. The key to full identification
of risk factors is a comprehensive and system-
atic physical examination and history-taking
approach.
Communication, and where necessary, referral
to other agencies or health professionals is of
utmost importance when dealing with the at-
risk foot. It is important for the lower limb prac-
titioner to ensure that the patient's general
medical practitioner is aware that the patient has
an at-risk foot, reasons for this risk status, the
chosen management plan, and that he is
informed when the patient's foot health status
improves or deteriorates. Similarly, if the patient
is under the shared care of hospital medical or
nursing staff, the lower limb practitioner should
ensure that these are likewise kept informed.
From time to time the lower limb practitioner
will fail to achieve the desired therapeutic inten-
tions. For example, an ulcer may fail to heal,
infection may spread, or pain may become
difficult to manage. In these cases the practi-
tioner should recognise as early as possible that
the treatment being provided is not able to bring
about the desired therapeutic effect. In these
cases the patient should be referred to the practi-
tioner best suited to provide intervention, which
448 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
may be outside the scope of practice of the refer-
rer. Such a referral should not be seen as an
admission of failure, rather part of an overall
management plan. The earlier into the process
this referral takes place, the better the likely
outcome for the patient. Many patients have suf-
fered because practitioners have failed to recog-
nise that they are no longer in a position to help
the patient. Typical indications for referral to
medical or surgical colleagues are presented in
Table 17.14.
Practitioners should recognise the importance
of review and reassessment of at-risk patients.
Most people working with the at-risk foot have
felt a sinking feeling when an at-risk patient has
failed to attend several consecutive appoint-
ments, only to find that the patient has deterior-
ated and either been hospitalised or is sick at
home. Assessment and diagnosis is not an exact
science at the best of times. In cases of high risk,
and in situations where rapid change is likely, it
is therefore important to keep diagnosis and
treatment plans under review. Formal reassess-
ment of the patient should be undertaken at
regular intervals. Shorter intervals for reassess-
Table 17.14 Indications for medical or surgical referral
ment will clearly be necessary for patients with
risk factors which are likely to undergo rapid
change (e.g. infection).
Second and even third opinions are often good
practice when dealing with the at-risk foot. The
lone practitioner is often not the best option for
the patient with severe foot disease. Practitioners
need to be sure that they have reached a correct
diagnosis, have devised appropriate and achiev-
able therapeutic objectives, and have put in place
effective management strategies. The views of
another practitioner (podiatric, medical or
nursing) can be invaluable in ensuring effective
clinical care for high-risk cases.
SUMMARY
Management of the at-risk foot can be a chal-
lenging but highly rewarding area of clinical
practice. This is an area of medicine with a
growing and strong evidence base. Practitioners
practising in this area need to be committed to
continuing professional development to ensure
that they are capable of practising safely, effec-
tively and with up-to-date knowledge.
Indicator
Severe ischaemia
Deteriorating wound
Extensive necrosis
Risk of infection
Spreading infection
Cellulitis
Pyrexia
Osteomyelitis
Systemic spread
Worsening medical/physical state
Sudden loss of weight
Malaise
Fatigue
Change in conscious level
Failure to prevent weightbearing
Pain which cannot be managed by over-the-
counter remedies
Unusual/suspicious changes in lesion
Extreme anxiety, depression or stress
Onset of confusion and/or dementia
Indicative referral
Vascular surgeon
Orthopaedic surgeon
GP
Consultant physician
Surgeon
GP
Consultant physician
GP or hospital consultant
GP
GP or dermatologist
GP or psychiatrist
GP or psychiatrist
Potential outcome
Reconstructive surgery
Amputation
Systemic antibiotics
Intravenous antibiotics
Surgical debridement or amputation
Medical review or hospitalisation
Hospitalisation for total bed rest
Prescription analgesics
Biopsy or excision
Psychiatric evaluation
Psychiatric evaluation
REFERENCES
Armstrong D G, Lavery LA, Harkless L B1998 Validation of
a diabetic wound classfication system. Diabetes Care 21:
855-859
Carlson G L 1999 The influence of nutrition and sepsis upon
wound healing. Journal of Wound Care 8: 471--474
Cotran R S, Kumar V, Robins S L 1994 Pathologic basis of
disease. W BSaunders, Philadelphia, p 484
Edmonds M E, Foster A V M 2000 Managing the diabetic
foot. Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 3,17-22
International Working Group on the Diabetic Foot 1999
International Consensus on the Diabetic Foot, pp 12,
66-67
Lavery L A, Armstrong D G, Harkless L B 1996
Classification of diabetic foot wounds. Journal of Foot
and Ankle Surgery 35: 528-531
Macfarlane R M, Jeffcoate W J 1999 Classification of diabetic
foot ulcers: the SCAD) SAD system. The Diabetic Foot 2:
123-131
Margolis D J,Kantor J, Berlin J A 2000 In: Boulton A J M,
Connor H, Cavanagh P (eds) The foot in diabetes. John
Wiley and Sons, Chichester, p 63
Mason J, O'Keefe C, McIntosh A, Hutchinson A, Booth A,
Young R J 1999 A systematic review of foot ulcers in
FURTHER READING
Banks V 1998 Wound assessment methods. Journal of
Wound Care 7: 211-212
THE AT-RISK FOOT 449
patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. 1: prevention.
Diabetic Medicine 16: 801-812
Oyibo S 0, Jude E B, Tarawneh I et al 2001 The effects of
ulcer size and site, patient's age, sex and type and
duration of diabetes on the outcome of diabetic foot
ulcers. Diabetic Medicine 18: 133-138
Rajbhandari S, Harris N D, Sutton M et al1999 Digital
imaging: an accurate and easy method of measuring foot
ulcers. Diabetic Medicine 16: 339-342
Richard J L, Daures J P, Parer-Richard C, Vannereau 0,
Boulot I 2000 Wounds 12: 148-154
Schubert V 1997 Measuring the area of chronic ulcers for
consistent documentation in clinical practice. Wounds
9: 153-159
Serra L 2000 Clinic currently testing the SCAD) SAD
classification system -letters. The Diabetic Foot 3: 10
Sims D S, Cavanagh, Ulbrecht J S 1988 Risk factors in the
diabetic foot. Recognition and management. Physical
Therapy 68: 1887-1902
Young M 2000 Classification of ulcers and its relevance to
management. In: Boulton A J M, Connor H, Cavanagh P
(eds) The foot in diabetes. John Wiley and Sons,
Chichester, pp 61-62
Letters 2000 The Diabetic Foot 3: 42
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 451
Assessmentof the. elderly population 452
Definitionsof ageing 453
Lower limbconsequencesof ageing 453
Assessmentof the elderly 455
Assessment of the elderly vascular system 455
Assessment of the elderly neurological system 456
Assessment of the elderly musculoskeletal
system 457
Assessment of elderly skin 458
Assessment of the elderly endocrine system 459
Assessment of the elderly haematological
system 459
Assessment of the elderly respiratory system 460
Functional assessment of the elderly 461
Assessment of gait in the elderly 462
Determinants of the quality of life 463
Assessment of cognitive status 463
Assessment of ability to perform basic foot care 464
Risk assessment and the elderly 465
Summary 466
Assessment of the
elderly
W Turner
INTRODUCTION
The majority of people seeking advice for foot
problems are over the age of 65 years. Surveys of
podiatry caseloads identify people over this age
as the largest consumers of foot health services.
As the population ages, so the demands on
providers of foot health services are likely to
increase. It is, therefore, essential for elderly
people to receive a structured and systematic
assessment of their foot/lower limb problem if
effective care is to be provided.
Whereas the general principles of assessment
of the lower limb apply to the elderly, there are
some particular considerations which practition-
ers need to consider when assessing the elderly.
Growing old is sometimes perceived as a disease
process. However, unlike a disease, growing old
is an inevitable, time-dependent process which
will occur to all individuals, providing that life is
not prematurely ended. Ageing is therefore an
unstoppable process for which there is no escape
or cure. The role of the practitioner is, therefore,
to minimise the effects of age-related degenera-
tion of body systems, and to enable the elderly to
compensate for such changes.
The aim of any intervention is to enable the
elderly person to continue to meet the chal-
lenges presented to them by their particular
environments and circumstances. For example,
a painful bunion joint may prevent an elderly
person walking to the shops. Appropriate
foot care provision may relieve the patient's
pain and improve physical function, thereby
451
452 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
enabling the patient to walk to the shops
without pain and discomfort. Even relatively
simple foot problems, such as neglected long toe
nails, can limit an individual's ability to cope
with the demands of daily living. Nail problems
may prevent a person from wearing outdoor
shoes, and therefore restrict the person's living
environment to their home. Such confinement
can result in social isolation, causing further
health deterioration and severe reductions to
the quality of life.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY
POPULATION
The size of the elderly population has increased
over the last century. For example, in the United
Kingdom, the number of people of pensionable
age has risen from 2 million in 1901 to 10 million
in 2001 - Office for Census and Population
Statistics (OPCS) data. In the UK, the over 65s
now make up around 20% of the general popula-
tion. Reasons for improved longevity include
improved water and sewage treatment, better
nutrition, improvements in housing and better
social and economic circumstances. The impact
of improvements in medical care on average life
span is less quantifiable.
Community podiatry services predominantly
provide foot health services to people over the
age of 65 years. In 1997 a total of 975 000 new
referrals were made to NHS podiatry services in
the United Kingdom. Of these, 63% (614250)
were for people aged 65 years or over (Hansard
1998). In the same year, a total of 9 million face-
to-face contacts were carried out by community
podiatry services, costing a total of 99.6 million
(US$149 million).
The prevalence of foot morbidity amongst
elderly populations is difficult to determine.
There have been relatively few studies which
have quantified foot morbidity amongst the
elderly. In those surveys of foot morbidity which
have been published, the most commonly
reported foot problems amongst the elderly were
difficulties with nail cutting, corns and hard skin,
respectively (Crawford et al 1995). In the same
survey, around half of people over the age of 75
years complained of two or more foot problems.
A recent meta-analysis of the literature shows
forecast prevalence data for foot pathologies
for populations over the age of 65 years
(Table 18.1). However, this does not include
studies of high-risk groups (e.g. people with
diabetes) and probably underestimates the true
prevalence of foot conditions in general popula-
tions. The large standard deviations and
confidence intervals for many of the pathologies
reviewed demonstrate the relatively high varia-
tion of reported prevalence of foot disease in the
literature. Nevertheless, these data can be used
to provide a rough estimate of foot morbidity
for a given population.
There is certainly evidence that the likelihood
of experiencing foot problems, and the likely
need for community foot health services,
increases with advancing age. This is particu-
larly true for elderly women, who are the largest
consumers of UK NHS podiatry services
(Harvey et al 1997).
Table 18.1 Forecast prevalence of foot pathologies amongst the elderly population (from Turner et a12001)
Condition Mean prevalence 95% confidence interval Standard deviation
Hyperkeratosis
Hypertrophic nails
Toe deformity
Onychomycosis
Hallux deformity
Diminished sensation
Vascular insufficiency
Poor foot hygiene
Foot ulceration
54.88
39.8
30.68
40
23.14
19.83
16.98
20.9
4.15
47.78,
19.76,
9.91,
16.77,
14.77,
14.69,
10.4,
4.99,
0,
61.98
59.84
51.45
63.23
31.51
24.97
23.56
36.81
8.36
11.46
14.42
23.64
23.7
9.56
4.54
7.52
11.45
3.04
DEFINITIONS OF AGEING
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 453
Table 18.2 Typical characteristics of elderly groups
The fact that ageing is a reproducible and pre-
dictable process enables recognition of the signs
of ageing to be made. Ageing is a process begin-
ning at conception and continuing until death.
The medical concept of ageing is to treat ageing
as a disease process. However, ageing is not a
disease, in spite of the fact that as one ages dis-
eases become more common. The elderly, there-
fore, experience greater numbers, variety and
severity of diseases than the young. However, for
a process to be due to ageing, it must be univer-
sal, progressive, intrinsic and deleterious
(Bennett & Ebrahim 1995). It is not surprising,
therefore, that the elderly are the greatest users of
health care services.
Arbitrary conventions tend to define 'the
elderly' as those over the age of 65. For the pur-
poses of population assessment, it is probably
more helpful to divide this group into three more
distinct categories (Bennett & Ebrahim 1995):
65-74 years: the young old
75-85 years: the old old
85 years + the oldest old.
Typical characteristics of each group are given
in Table 18.2.
LOWER LIMB CONSEQUENCES OF
AGEING
Group
Young old
65-74 years
Old old
75-85 years
Oldest old
85 years +
Characteristics
Recently retired
Active
Generally fit
Independent
Often able to drive
Able to take vacations
Relatively wealthy
Wide social network
Often care providers to 'oldest old'
parents/relatives
Often widowed
Increasing number of minor
medical problems
Increased likelihood of major medical
problems
Becoming less mobile
Often unable to drive
Dependent on public transport
Rarely take vacations
Generally not wealthy
Social network reducing, owing to
death of friends/relatives
Usually widowed
Coping with major and minor
medical problems
Generally poor
Dependent on others to assist with
everyday tasks
Unable to drive
Travels for essential purposes only
Usually does not take vacations
Physical limitation to activity
Social network confined to close
friends/relatives/carers
The lower limb often suffers the degenerative
effects of ageing owing to the fact that the foot is
a weightbearing structure which bears the
stresses of years of supporting and carrying the
body. As tissues deteriorate with advancing
years, disruption to the normal structure and
function of the foot is inevitable. Structural
change (e.g. joint disease, skin callus) will invari-
ably lead to a degree of loss of function, with
more severe structural disturbances leading to
greater functional impairment. Individuals are
often able to compensate for minor structural
deterioration in order to retain functional ability.
Multiple minor structural defects or single major
defects are likely to result in failed compensation
and adversely affect functional ability.
From an assessment point of view, it is helpful
to determine what the individual patient is able
and unable to do. Functional ability is affected
by disease and/or the compensatory (coping)
mechanisms for the effects of disease. For
example, an elderly person may be unable to cut
her nails. The person is, therefore, defined as
being functionally unable to perform that activ-
ity. The practitioner may be able to determine a
range of diseases/age-related changes which
have resulted in this functional deterioration.
Often for any given individual, a combination of
coexisting factors contribute to functional loss.
Deterioration of vision, arthritic fingers, joint
diseases affecting the hips / spine, hiatus hernia
and motor weakness are typical examples of
454 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 18.3 Age-related structural changes to tissues of the
foot
conditions which commonly lead to such loss of
function.
Table 18.3 identifies common structural
changes which occur to tissues of the foot and
which are related to the ageing process. Most
elderly people will frequently show signs of one
or more of these structural changes. The underly-
ing mechanisms responsible for such changes are
complex and often relate to combined, multiple
degeneration arising in other systems (e.g. vascu-
lar, endocrine and neurological systems).
Common foot pathologies seen in the elderly
are often not directly related to the physiologi-
cal effects of ageing but to the chronic, long-
term exposure to exogenous factors (Table 18.4).
For example, age-related changes to the skin are
most likely to arise as a result of a lifetime of
exposure to ultraviolet light. In the absence of
Skin
Nail
Joints
Skin moisture content reduces
Skin becomes drier
Skin more prone to fissuring
Skin is less flexible/elastic
Skin becomes weaker, more likely to tear or split
Atrophy or displacement of subcutaneous fat
may occur
Weightbearing forces on skin increase as foot
function worsens
Hyperkeratotic lesions become more likely
Number of pigmented lesions is likely to
increase
Extravasation of blood into skin is more likely
Loss of skin viability is more likely as a result of
deterioration in circulation
Rate of nail growth reduces
Nail plate becomes drier
Nail plate becomes thicker
Increased likelihood of debris/callus in nail sulci
or beneath nail plate. Increased incidence of
subungual lesions
Involution of nail plate more likely
Nail plate becomes more brittle, and liable to
split/crack
Increased likelihood of degenerative arthropathy
in weightbearing joints. Long-term compensation
for functional foot abnormalities likely to
contribute to joint pathology (e.g. hallux valgus,
hallux limitus)
Thickening of joint margins with resultant
decreased range of motion is likely
Overall mobility of foot joints reduced
Increased likelihood of joint deformity
Table 18.4 Exogenous factors associated with age-related
changes to the foot
Ultraviolet light (sunlight)
Diet
Smoking
Alcohol consumption
Chemicals/drugs
Occupation
Sports, hobbies and activities
Trauma
Footwear
Cosmetics
exposure to sunlight the skin ages very little
with time. The action of ultraviolet light expo-
sure to skin results in the production of free rad-
icals which have a long-term damaging effect on
cells. Many skin disorders which are commonly
associated with ageing are related to ultraviolet
exposure (Table 18.5). The foot is often at a
reduced risk of these ultraviolet light lesions
compared with more exposed parts of the body
(e.g. the face), owing to the fact that for most
people for most of the time the skin of the foot
is covered by footwear.
Foot disorders which occur as a direct result of
ageing tend to be associated with general systemic
(intrinsic) disease. The incidence of systemic
disease increases with advancing age. Elderly
people are also more likely to have several coex-
isting systemic disorders. The combined effects on
the foot of several systemic diseases occurring
simultaneously can be significant. Assessment of
the elderly patient should always, therefore,
include a full and comprehensive medical history
Table 18.5 Skin conditions seen in elderly people
associated with lifelong exposure to sunlight
Wrinkles
Hyperpigmentation
Hypopigmentation
Solar keratoses
Basal cell carcinoma
Squamous cell carcinoma
Malignant melanoma
Dry, inelastic skin
and physical examination. Likewise, a familial
history is also important in assessment of the
elderly patient.
The consequences of lower limb disease for the
elderly patient can be significant. Foot disorders
can make a significant contribution to the risk for
falls, loss of mobility, loss of independence,
inability to carry out activities of daily living,
pain, depression, social isolation, deterioration of
quality of life, loss of tissue viability and ampu-
tation. What may appear to be minor foot pathol-
ogy can have a significant effect on the lifestyle of
the patient. The assessment of the elderly patient
should therefore seek to determine how the
patient's foot health is affecting lifestyle.
It is also important to bear in mind that condi-
tions can deteriorate very quickly for elderly
people. What is a minor problem one day can
become a major limb or life-threatening problem
the next. There are several reasons why patholo-
gies in the elderly patient are likely to deterio-
rate faster. These include a less effective immune
system, poor peripheral circulation, diminished
peripheral sensory perception, motor weakness,
confusion, loss of tissue resilience, combined
systemic pathology, effects of drugs, inability to
self-care, poor nutrition, poor hygiene and inad-
equate footwear.
Evidence for rapid change of foot health
amongst an elderly population has recently
been borne out of a study of the discharge of
elderly patients from a community podiatry
department (Turner et al 2001). In this study
5000 people over the age of 65 who were
assessed as being of 'low risk' for serious foot
pathology were discharged from the service.
Within a 2-year period following discharge 712
(14%) of these patients were re-referred to the
department with serious foot problems which
caused them to be classified as 'high risk'
according to the department's criteria. Reasons
for re-referral included infection or ulceration
(162 re-referrals), diabetes (178 re-referrals),
peripheral vascular disease or neuropathy (310
re-referrals), increased risk due to change of
medication (62 re-referrals).
Practitioners need to be aware that assess-
ments of the foot health status of elderly patients,
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 455
and in particular risk assessment, can only repre-
sent foot health status at a specific point in time.
Inferences for the future foot health needs of a
patient based on such 'snapshot' assessments
carry significant risks. A single major event - e.g.
cerebrovascular accident (eVA), trauma and
infection - or multiple minor events (e.g. neglect
of self-care, minor trauma, change to footwear)
can have a dramatic effect on an individual's foot
health status. Since the occurrence of these events
is unpredictable in elderly people, it is important
to review or reassess the foot health status and
needs of the elderly patient regularly.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY
The practical approach to the assessment of the
elderly patient varies little from the standard
approach to assessment. However, some addi-
tional points are worthy of consideration. For
several systems, assessment will take the form of
history taking and physical examination (e.g. vas-
cular, neurological, orthopaedic, dermatological).
For some systems, history taking alone is nor-
mally required (e.g. endocrine, renal). Specialist
tests or investigations may be required for com-
plete assessment of other systems where appro-
priate (e.g. respiratory, haematological).
Assessment of the elderly vascular
system
Leonardo da Vinci cheerily recognised the
importance of vascular degeneration in the
elderly when he wrote:
veins which by the thickening of their tunics in the
old, restricts the passage of their blood and by this
lack of nourishment destroys the life of the aged
without any fever, the old coming to fail little by little
in slow death
(in Bennett & Ebrahim1995)
Age-related changes to the vascular system in
the elderly arise as a result of age-dependent
(physiological) changes and disease (pathologi-
cal) processes. It is thought that the physiological
changes contribute very little to the overall dete-
rioration of vascular function, and that disease
processes are more significant (Wei 1992).
456 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
The most significant changes to the arteries
include calcification of the tunica media (arterio-
sclerosis), fibre-fatty occlusion of the vessels (ath-
erosclerosis) and arterial complications of these
processes (aneurysm, thrombosis, embolism). The
prevalence of peripheral arterial insufficiency
amongst the elderly is around 16% (Turner et al
2000). One of the most important factors con-
tributing to the pathology of arterial disease in
the elderly is elevation of arterial blood pressure.
Both systolic and diastolic pressures tend to rise
with advancing age. The reasons for this are
complex, but include increased peripheral resis-
tance and physical fitness.
To reduce the risk of age-related arterial
disease, control of blood pressure is important. It
is therefore beneficial for all patients to have their
blood pressure reviewed at least annually.
Treatment for high blood pressure is generally
beneficial in terms of improvements to mortality
and morbidity up to the age of 80 years. How-
ever, side effects of antihypertensive therapy
(especially diuretics) in the elderly can be
significant and lead to additional health con-
cerns, including postural hypotension, falls,
dehydration and occasionally gout.
Apart from hypertension, other major risk
factors for arterial disease in the elderly include
hyperglycaemia and hyperlipidaemia. Undetec-
ted or poorly controlled diabetes mellitus is the
commonest cause of hyperglycaemia in the
elderly. Early detection of impaired glucose toler-
ance (or elevated glycosylated haemoglobin
levels) coupled with resultant management of
hyperglycaemia is therefore useful in the long-
term prevention of vascular disease. Similarly,
screening for hyperlipidaemia and where appro-
priate dietary modification and/or use of lipid
lowering drugs can be important in an overall
plan of action to reduce an individual's risk of
vascular disease.
The consequences of poor arterial supply to
the feet vary from minor changes to poorly nour-
ished tissues, like dry skin, brittle nails, hair loss,
atrophy of fat pad, to more severe foot problems
like ischaemia, ulceration and gangrene. A struc-
tured vascular assessment as detailed in Chapter
6 is, therefore, essential for all elderly patients.
Deterioration of the peripheral venous system
is also common in elderly people. Venous hyper-
tension in the elderly may arise as a result of
right-sided congestive heart failure, lack of exer-
cise (inactive skeletal muscle pumps), valvular
dysfunction, deep vein thrombosis, venous
occlusion, respiratory disease (poor respiratory
pump mechanism) or abdominal masses (e.g.
tumours). The lower limb consequences of
venous hypertension include venous stasis
eczema, venous ulceration, oedema, hyperpig-
mentation (especially haemosiderosis) and in
rare, usually long-standing cases, malignant
(fungating) wounds.
The role of the inter-professional team is
important in conducting an assessment of the
vascular system in elderly patients with periph-
eral vascular pathologies. Frequently, patients
who demonstrate lower limb signs of peripheral
vascular disease will also have coexisting vascu-
lar degeneration affecting other tissues and
organs of the body (e.g. kidney, eye, brain, heart).
Similarly, vascular disease affecting multiple
organ systems is a good reminder to the practi-
tioner to conduct a thorough assessment of the
lower limb vascular supply.
As previously stated, the elderly patient is sus-
ceptible to rapid change in vascular status.
Therefore, frequent reassessment and update of
vascular assessment is necessary, especially for
the 'old old' and 'oldest old' patients who are
likely to be most at risk.
Assessment of the elderly
neurological system
Age-related changes to the peripheral nervous
system can result in deficiencies in the motor,
sensory or autonomic nerves of the lower limb.
Signs of such deficiencies include defects of
sensory perception, muscle weakness, deformity,
dry skin and vasodilation.
The literature suggests that defective sensory
perception is present in around 20% of people
over the age of 65 years (see Table 18.1). The
prevalence of peripheral neuropathy is greatest
in older people with diabetes mellitus, where up
to 43% of people can be expected to have some
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 457
---------------------------------------
abnormal neurological assessment findings
(Plummer & Albert 1996). Loss of vibration per-
ception as detected by the use of a tuning fork,
and loss of touch/pressure sensation as detec-
ted by a 10 g monofilament are the commonest
findings in the elderly. The likely presence of
neurological abnormalities increases with
advancing age.
Defects affecting upper motor neurones are
often related to disorders which occur more fre-
quently in the elderly (e.g. CVA). These disorders
may result in severe functional disturbance, and
limit mobility. Disorders which a younger person
could normally compensate for are often difficult
for an elderly person to adjust to. Reasons for
failure to compensate for neurological distur-
bance might include limited capability to re-learn
skills (rehabilitation), coexisting or multiple
pathologies and severity of disruption to normal
function. As a result, many elderly lose a degree
of mobility and independence following a
sudden deterioration in neurological function.
Key neurological indicators include those
tests described in Chapter 7. However, practi-
tioners should avoid making long-term predic-
tions of risk based on clinical assessment. As for
vascular assessment, deterioration in neurologi-
cal function can occur suddenly and may go
undetected by the patient. Regular review of
neurological status is important in the overall
risk management of people over the age of
65, and is particularly important for those over
the age of 85 years.
Deterioration of nervous system function in
the elderly is often clinically significant because
other systemic problems coexist. Many elderly
people with peripheral sensory neuropathy will
also have some degree of vascular insufficiency,
and also foot deformities. Abnormal weight-
bearing pressures, poor footwear, skin lesions,
poor hygiene & self-care or trauma can there-
fore place the patient at high risk of loss of
tissue viability.
The relationship between foot neuropathy and
foot ulceration is a significant one. In one study of
308 patients, 28% of people who could not detect
a 10 g monofilament at any of 10 sites on the foot
developed foot ulcers, compared with 3% of
people who could perceive the monofilaments at
all sites (Plummer & Albert 1996).
Assessment of the elderly
musculoskeletal system
Musculoskeletal problems are extremely
common in the elderly. Disorders such as
osteoarthritis, osteoporosis and osteomalacia
have an increased prevalence with advancing
age. Deterioration of the musculoskeletal is
responsible for much of the impaired mobility
seen in elderly people.
As far as the lower limb is concerned, the
elderly are more likely to suffer from common
lower limb disorders, including hallux valgus
and lesser toe deformities. Around 23% of the
elderly are likely to have hallux deformities and
around 30% have lesser toe deformity (see Table
18.1). Practitioners are therefore likely to see the
consequences of these deformities arising from
pressure from footwear on deformed joints or
normal weightbearing forces. These associated
pathologies include corns, calluses, blisters and
thickened or deformed toe nails. In patients with
vascular or neurological deficit, ulceration is
commonly seen to affect deformed toes.
Assessment of the musculoskeletal system in
an elderly person is not significantly different
from that of a younger person. However, it is
often impractical to examine joints of the hip and
knee in as much detail (and as vigorously') as for
young patients. It should be remembered that
old people bruise easily, skin may be weak and
joints unstable. Rough examination has the
potential to cause the elderly severe discomfort
or even harm.
Most of the information about musculoskeletal
system disease can be gained from gross exami-
nation and noting any obvious findings (e.g.
obvious foot deformities, swollen joints,
inflamed areas). The medical history may reveal
a history of musculoskeletal disease (e.g. rheu-
matoid arthritis, osteoarthrosis, fracture, back
problems). Observing the patient during walking
can also provide important indications of func-
tional ability. However, care should be taken with
elderly people if using a motorised treadmill for
458 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
the observance of gait. Elderly people may find it
difficult to adjust their cadence to the speed of
the treadmill, become unstable and/or fall.
Another risk of treadmill use in the elderly is
demanding unaccustomed levels of exercise from
the patient and placing the patient at risk of acute
ischaemia. This may manifest as acute skeletal
muscle cramps, or (worse) acute angina or even
myocardial infarction.
Skin lesions are another useful indicator of
musculoskeletal problems. Skin lesions such as
corns or calluses tend to arise as a result of trauma
to the skin exacerbated by deformed joints,
difficulty accommodating the foot in appropriate
shoes or compensation for functional pathologies.
Elderly people are more likely to be offered
conservative treatment for lower limb joint
pathologies rather than surgical intervention.
This is particularly true where the patient has
complex or multiple systemic problems includ-
ing cardiovascular or neurological disease. A
significant proportion of elderly people are there-
fore prescribed drugs to manage musculoskeletal
pain and inflammation. The most common cate-
gory of drugs prescribed for this purpose is the
nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs).
Use of these drugs can result in gastric irritation
and bleeding, particularly when used long term.
Therefore, any elderly patient taking NSAIDs
showing signs of anaemia or gastric disturbance
should be more closely investigated.
Assessment of elderly skin
As stated above, most of the changes to the skin
which occur with advancing age do so as a result
of cumulative exposure of the skin to ultraviolet
light (sunlight) (see Table 18.5). Increased colla-
gen cross-linking, drying and thinning of the
skin are all a result of ultraviolet light exposure.
Many of the effects of ageing on the skin can be
prevented by avoidance of exposure to sunlight,
or use of appropriate covers/barrier creams.
Bruises and other vascular lesions are more
likely in the elderly patient. These lesions arise as
a result of increased capillary fragility, with cap-
illaries more likely to leak blood into the skin. In
the elderly patient reabsorption of extravasated
blood is much slower than in a younger person.
These lesions are often collectively referred to as
'senile purpura'. Spider naevi, telangiectasiae
and haemosiderosis are skin conditions which
are more common in elderly people. These vas-
cular /haemorrhagic skin lesions are more
common and significant in elderly people taking
anticoagulant drugs (e.g. warfarin) following
thrombosis.
Corns and calluses are likely to be a greater
problem for the elderly. Dryness and reduced
skin resilience predispose to hyperkeratotic skin
lesions. In addition, the elderly are more likely to
have functional foot pathology and/or deformi-
ties which cause abnormal weightbearing lesions
or lead to problems accommodating the foot in
shoes. Vascular or neurological impairment may
then lead to reductions in tissue viability and
infection, ulceration or gangrene.
The elderly are more likely to be troubled by
difficult toe nails. Nails become thicker and
harder with advancing age. Years of repeated
minor trauma from footwear can result in nail
plate abnormalities. Periungual and subungual
lesions may also be a problem (e.g. onychopho-
sis). Inability to self-care may result from poor
eyesight, back pain, hiatus hernia, arthritic
fingers, hip pathologies or obesity. Neglect of
simple routine nail care can result in potentially
serious foot pathology (e.g. infection, ulceration),
particularly where there are coexisting medical,
vascular or neurological abnormalities.
The skin of the elderly patient has a less effec-
tive immune function than younger skin. The
number and function of Langerhans' cells and
epidermotrophic lymphocytes reduce as a result
of ageing. Skin infection is therefore more likely
in old age. This is a particularly significant
problem for elderly patients with hypergly-
caemia, vascular insufficiency or on long-term
steroid therapy.
Some elderly people have very thin, 'papery'
skin. This is known as 'transparent skin syn-
drome' and results in a skin which looks and
feels a little like tissue paper. Skin becomes
wrinkled and loose, has poor elasticity and
bruises and bleeds very easily. Skin tears easily,
and is slow to heal. Vascular /haemorrhagic skin
lesions are very common. This syndrome is
commonly associated with osteoporosis. A
similar skin condition can be seen in some
patients following long-term steroid treatment
(e.g. for rheumatoid arthritis).
Many elderly patients complain about severe
itching of the skin (senile pruritus). This can be
an important indicator of an underlying pathol-
ogy. The practitioner should attempt to identify
the cause of any pruritus. Table 18.6 identifies
some of the common causes of pruritus in the
elderly.
Assessment of the elderly endocrine
system
Endocrine dysfunction is more common in the
elderly. The most significant endocrine disorder
for the lower limb is diabetes mellitus. Type
2 (noninsulin-dependent) diabetes mellitus
becomes much more prevalent with advancing
age. The chronic complications of hypergly-
caemia result in damage to nerves (neuropathy)
and arteries (angiopathy). These disorders
create an increased risk of infection, ulceration,
gangrene and amputation, and account for
significant morbidity for a large number of
elderly people. The primary clinical signs of
diabetes mellitus may often first be identified in
the lower limb. Signs of neuropathy, recurrent
skin infection or arterial disease in an elderly
patient should always be followed up with
testing for diabetes (e.g. glucose tolerance test).
Table 18.6 Causes of pruritus in the elderly
Excessive dryness of the skin
Haematological disorder (e.g. polycythaemia rubra vera)
Hepatic disease
Renal disease
Malignant disease
Drugs
Infestations (e.g. scabies, lice, fleas)
Inflammatory skin diseases (e.g. eczema, psoriasis)
Incontinence
Autonomic dysfunction
Hypersensitivity
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 459
Other consequences of ageing include the
menopause. In women the menopause is an
inevitable consequence of ageing. It results in a
depletion of oestrogen production, with a rise
in the secretion of gonadotrophic hormones -
follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinis-
ing hormone (LH). A reduction in oestrogen is
associated with osteoporosis, dryness of the skin
and flushing/sweating. Osteoporosis is a
significant risk, and occurs because the bone
cannot metabolise vitamin D and calcium
without oestrogen. Pathological fractures may
occur in response to relatively minor trauma in
patients with advanced osteoporosis. The most
significant site for osteoporotic fracture in the
lower limb is the neck of the femur. Fracture at
this site commonly occurs from falls and can be
extremely disabling, and is even responsible for
premature death in some people.
Postmenopausal changes to the skin can
result in dryness and increased fissuring of
'fatty' areas of skin. A common complaint in
postmenopausal women is dry heel fissures,
which may be inflamed and prone to bleeding.
This condition is referred to as keratoderma
climaciericum. It is aggravated by summer con-
ditions (evaporation of surface water), excessive
bathing (including foot spasl), open-backed
shoes and hard soles.
Thyroid dysfunction is also a common problem
in the elderly, but can be difficult to diagnose or
recognise. Hypothyroidism is a common finding
in elderly people as a result of decreased secretion
levels of thyroxine. The signs of hypothyroidism
in the elderly may be subtle, and reflect common
symptoms associated with being elderly. Signs
include constipation, tiredness, dry skin and hair,
weight gain and cold intolerance. Elderly people
with hypothyroidism are at an increased risk of
winter chilling: hypothermia is a significant risk
for people with inadequate household heating or
poor nutrition.
Assessment of the elderly
haematological system
Blood disorders such as anaemia can complicate
an already compromised lower limb. Just
460 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
------- -----------------
because the foot is warm and has bounding
pulses does not always guarantee adequate
tissue nutrition. The quality of the blood is
important too. Anaemia is relatively common in
elderly people, and in mild cases can be difficult
to recognise. Symptoms of anaemia can be slow
to develop, and can be mistaken for 'growing
old'. Lethargy, general malaise, intermittent clau-
dication, pallor, headache, breathlessness, angina
and skin atrophy are all features of anaemia but
are also features which can be seen as part of the
ageing process.
The lower limb consequences of anaemia can
be particularly significant for the elderly patient.
This is particularly true if the anaemia is 'super-
imposed' on coexisting vascular disorders.
Adequate tissue nutrition is dependent upon
both adequate quantity and quality of blood
reaching the tissues. Quantity is affected by
change in the diameter and resilience of the blood
vessels. Quality is affected by disorders of blood
cells, oxygen-carrying capacity or increased ten-
dency to form blood clots. Loss of tissue viability
may occur where reductions in either the quantity
or quality of blood fails to meet the basic nutritive
requirements of respiring cells.
The commonest types of anaemia to affect the
elderly are iron-deficiency anaemia, pernicious
anaemia and folate-deficiency anaemia. Iron-
deficiency anaemia commonly arises following
haemorrhagic disorders, including those caused
by gastric bleeding following long-term use of
NSAIDS. In addition to the general symptoms of
anaemia given above, clinical features of iron-
deficiency anaemia may include koilonychia
(spoon-shaped nails) and brittle nails.
Pernicious anaemia is a common form of
anaemia seen in the elderly. The incidence is
around 1 : 8000 people over the age of 60 years. It
arises as a result of vitamin B
12
deficiency. Usually
this occurs due to a lack of intrinsic factor, which
is normally produced by the gastric parietal cells.
Intrinsic factor is essential for the absorption of
vitamin B
12
in the ileum. Abnormalities of intrin-
sic factor secretion usually arise as a result of
autoimmune processes. The disease is more
common in people with other autoimmune dis-
eases including thyroid disorders, Addison's
----------
disease and vitiligo. For males with pernicious
anaemia, there is an increased incidence of gastric
carcinoma.
In addition to the general symptoms of
anaemia, clinical features of pernicious anaemia
may include weight loss and peripheral neuropa-
thy. Peripheral neuropathy can be significant and
is similar to that seen in diabetes mellitus.
Posterior and lateral columns of the spinal cord
are involved (subacute combined degeneration).
Patients often complain of paraesthesia of toes,
and demonstrate poor vibration perception,
touch/ pressure sensation and proprioception.
Progressive muscle weakness may result in
digital deformity and ataxia. Other features may
include a sore red tongue (glossitis), purpura and
mild fever.
Folate-deficiency anaemia is sometimes seen in
elderly people and is associated with malnutri-
tion. The daily requirement for folate is around
100 p.g. Dietary sources include green vegetables,
kidney, liver and other offal. Cooking can destroy
folate. Anaemia due to folate deficiency produces
generalised symptoms as described above.
Assessment of the elderly respiratory
system
The respiratory system serves to oxygenate the
blood and to eradicate waste gases from the
body. Disorders of the respiratory system may
therefore result in a failure to adequately oxy-
genate the blood, or an accumulation of waste
gases. The latter condition results in acidosis,
which is ultimately fatal.
Assessment of the elderly patient should
include observations of respiratory function.
Age-related changes to respiration may include
an elevated respiration rate, shallower breaths,
altered chest sounds and chronic cough. These
changes are more likely in people who are or
have been smokers. Respiratory abnormalities
may also lead to significant problems for elderly
people with asthma, bronchitis, emphysema and
congestive heart failure.
Respiratory problems are a significant factor in
the pathology of some lower limb disorders. As
with many systemic conditions seen in elderly
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 461
------------------_.--_...----------_.----------_._--------
Table 18.7 Examples of functional assessments of the
elderly patient
tional assessment strategies which can provide
the practitioner with useful information as part of
an overall assessment of the patient.
people, respiratory problems seen in combina-
tion with other coexisting disorders present the
greatest threat. For example, elderly people with
emphysema coupled with peripheral vascular
disease may suffer ulceration of the foot. In this
example, the reduction in oxygenation of the
blood may complicate an already compromised
tissue viability.
Functional assessment of the elderly
Functional assessment of the elderly patient is an
important part of the assessment process. A good
functional assessment will provide the practi-
tioner with a clear impression of a patient's capa-
bilities and limitations and identify the effect of
lower limb disorders on lifestyle. It will also
assist with risk assessment of the elderly person.
Table 18.7 details aspects of functional assess-
ment which may be included as part of the
general assessment of the elderly patient.
Assessment of function before and after clini-
cal intervention can be a useful means for the
determination of clinical effectiveness. Some of
the key therapeutic objectives for managing
lower limb pathology in the elderly are con-
cerned with the following:
1. maintaining or improving the patient's
independence
2. improving the patient's mobility
3. improving the patient's quality of life
4. enabling the patient to undertake activities of
daily living (ADLs).
These objectives are as important as disease/
symptom specific objectives (e.g. reducing
pain). Therapeutic interventions which have an
effect on the above will often make a significant
difference to the patient. This is true even where
cure of the presenting problem is not possible.
Most patients are more concerned about reduc-
tions in functional ability and becoming depen-
dent on others (i.e, becoming a 'burden') than
anything else.
An inter-professional approach to therapy
can be particularly useful to the assessment of
function. Physiotherapists and occupational ther-
apists, for example, make use of a variety of func-
Independence
Mobility
Activities of
daily living
Quality of life
Cognitive state
What are the patient's capabilities?
Can the patient carry out activities of daily
living without assistance?
Is the patient adequately compensating for
the effects of disease?
Can the patient adjust to changes in her
environment?
What does the patient need the help of
other people to do?
What does the patient's social network
consist of?
Is the patient able to move around her
environment without assistance?
Does the patient drive?
Can the patient climb stairs safely?
Can the patient manage to do her own
shopping, visit hairdresser, chemist, doctor,
etc.?
Does the patient require special aids to
assist her mobility (e.g. stick, frame,
wheelchair)?
Is the patient stable when standing or
walking?
Is the patient likely to fall?
What activities does the patient feel
she needs to do on a daily basis?
Can the patient cope with feeding and
grooming herself?
Can the patient dress/undress
independently?
Can the patient manage to cut her own
toe nails and/or apply creams to the feet?
Can the patient maintain a clean and
hygienic home?
Is the patient satisfied with her life?
Is the patient happy or sad?
Is the patient lonely or isolated?
Does the patient keep herself occupied?
Are there things which the patient enjoys
doing?
Does the patient feel guilty about anything?
Is the patient worried, frightened or
concerned?
Is the patient experiencing painful
symptoms?
Does the patient feel that physical disease
or pain is affecting her lifestyle?
Is the patient confused?
Is the patient forgetful?
Can the patient describe her symptoms?
Is the patient capable of giving informed
consent?
462 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Functional assessment often focuses on the fol-
lowing:
mobility and independence
quality of life
ability to perform ADLs.
In addition, there are other functional assess-
ments which may be particularly relevant to the
lower limb:
gait analysis
ability to self-care for feet.
The most popular means of assessing mobility
and independence is the Barthel index. This was
first developed by Mahoney & Barthel (1965) for
the assessment of long-stay hospital patients with
neuromuscular or musculoskeletal problems. It
has since been used for the assessment of com-
munity- (home-) based patients with a variety of
pathologies. The index is designed for the assess-
ment of function both before and after treatment.
It is therefore useful for the determination of the
efficacy of clinical intervention. Table 18.8 shows
the key elements of the Barthel index.
The Barthel index does not include some
important activities of daily living such as shop-
ping, cooking, social activities and gardening,
which probably reflects the fact that the index
was originally designed to assess institution-
alised populations.
Deterioration in independence and mobility
usually progresses through:
1. Social activities of daily living - i.e. how the
person relates to the 'outside world' - e.g.
shopping, visiting friends and relatives,
vacations, going to the pub, etc.
Table 18.8 Key aspects of Barthel index
Feeding
Mobility (from bed to chair)
Personal toilet (washing, etc.)
Getting on/off toilet
Bathing
Walking on a level surface
Going up/down stairs
Dressing
Continence (bladder/bowel)
2. Domestic activities of daily living - i.e. how
the person manages household tasks - e.g.
cooking, cleaning, gardening, etc.
3. Personal activities of daily living - i.e. how
the person manages to care for herself - e.g.
washing, bathing, cutting toe nails,
continence, etc.
Therefore, an elderly person will usually expe-
rience difficulty with visiting the shops before
having problems with cooking or bathing.
Similarly, incontinence usually occurs later on
after the person has developed other functional
limitations. This can make continence a particu-
larly difficult situation to manage for both the
patient and carers. Many other factors often con-
tribute to the onset of incontinence, including
loss of mobility, urinary tract infection, auto-
nomic neuropathy, prostatism, stress inconti-
nence, unstable bladder, retention with overflow
and central nervous system (eNS) pathology.
There are a variety of means to test an individ-
ual's mobility. A simple mobility assessment is
known as the 'timed up and go' test. In this test,
the elderly person is asked to stand from a chair,
walk 10 feet, turn and return to the chair. The
person is timed during this activity. Most adults
can complete this activity in less than 10 seconds.
Frail elderly people may take from 11 to 20
seconds for this task. People taking longer than
20 seconds are generally amongst the most
immobile elderly. For this latter group a more
detailed mobility assessment is indicated. There
is a strong association between the results of this
test and a person's functional independence in
activities of daily living.
Assessment of gait in the elderly
Assessment of gait in the elderly patient can
often be a useful indicator of mobility. It can also
enable the practitioner to determine whether
walking aids (e.g. sticks, frame) are indicated. A
reduction in walking speed is one of the early
features of gait disturbance in the elderly.
Healthy adult cadence is about 1m/s. A frail
elderly person may walk at less than half this
speed.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 463
--------------------------------
Elderly stride length is often shorter than that
of a younger adult. Gait is often apropulsive,
with limited toe-off evident. This appears as a
'shuffling' gait. The base of gait is often wide, in
an attempt to improve balance and stability. The
elderly person may grasp fixed objects to
improve stability. In this way, elderly people
often use objects around their room to move
around safely. This is especially common for
elderly people with sight problems.
Frail elderly people placed in an unfamiliar
environment will often show a much slower
and more 'unsure' gait than they would nor-
mally have at home. Lack of familiar objects for
stability or an unfamiliar walking surface can
cause perceptual problems and lack of
confidence. Therefore, asking an elderly person
to walk down a long corridor in a hard-floored
clinic can give an unrepresentative picture of
the person's gait. Gait is best observed in an
environment which is familiar to the patient
(e.g. home).
Peripheral sensory neuropathy may produce a
'high stepping' gait with a characteristically
heavy heel strike. Parkinson's disease produces a
'festinating' gait where the person appears to
chase their centre of gravity forwards, shuffling
and stooping. Musculoskeletal problems, joint
pain or foot pain can result in an antalgic (pain-
avoiding) gait. This often manifests as limping or
avoiding certain movements or positions of the
limb during gait.
Determinants of the quality of life
Quality of life is affected by a complex interac-
tion of multiple factors, some of which can have
a large impact on quality of life (Table 18.9).
There are many measurement tools for the
assessment of quality of life. The most popular
tool used in UK health care for the assessment of
quality of life in studies of adults with disease
states is the short form-36 questionnaire (SF-36).
The SF-36 questionnaire consists of 36 questions
divided into the following categories: physical
health, physiological health, mental health and
social well-being. Its popularity has resulted in a
large number of studies which are able to attest
Table 18.9 Major factors affecting quality of life
Loss of mobility
Dependence on others
Acute or chronic pain
General health status
Life-threatening! terminal disease
Poverty
Social isolation
Loneliness
Mental state - e.g. depression
Bereavement
Difficulty sleeping
Boredom
Inability to perform activities of daily living
Loss of ability to make decisions
Lack of control
the validity and reliability of the questionnaire
for a wide variety of clinical situations.
The SF-36 assessment tool is available free of
charge from the UK Clearing House for
Information on the Assessment of Health
Outcomes, Nuffield Institute for Health Service
Studies (see References for web site address).
More informal assessment of the quality of life
of the elderly can be achieved through normal
clinical conversation. The practitioner, as part of
a normal discussion with the patient, can gain a
fair idea of the patient's quality of life. Podiatry is
a profession which is well suited to this task,
since patients are often seated for treatment for
20 min or so, and treatment does not usually
prevent the patient from talking. Patient and
podiatrist are usually sitting face to face, and
one-to-one communication is established. Where
a podiatrist is concerned that the patient has a
poor quality of life, or feels that the patient is
unusually sad or depressed, a more formal
assessment of quality of life can be undertaken.
This may involve a referral to other members of
the health and social care team: e.g. health visitor,
social worker or general practitioner (GP).
Assessment of cognitive status
Assessment of cognitive function in the elderly
can be important for all health care workers.
464 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
-------------------------------------
This is particularly important where a practi-
tioner seeks informed consent from a patient for
a clinical procedure. Those changes most fre-
quently associated with the ageing process are
forgetfulness and confusion. Forgetfulness is a
behaviour which affects all people, young or
old. The fact that elderly people appear to forget
things more often may be related to several
factors. First, people who are old today received
a different education to people who are young
today. Some elderly people will have received a
very basic education, had poor schooling and,
as a result, may appear less intelligent and more
forgetful. Coupled with this is the fact that most
elderly people had limited exposure to the
media when they were young compared with
young people today who are exposed to a mass
media. This cohort effect is probably an impor-
tant factor in explaining why elderly people
have difficulty remembering certain facts,
recalling events and handling complex ideas. It
is important to remember that forgetfulness is
not necessarily indicative of the onset of brain
disease or dementia.
Dementia is another cause of forgetfulness. It is
a relatively common finding in elderly people.
Dementia can arise as a result of reductions in
supply to the brain of oxygen, nutrients or hor-
mones. Dementia is not a single disease, but a
term used to encompass a variety of brain dis-
eases. The most common causes of dementia in
the elderly are Alzheimer's disease and multi-
infarct dementia (recurrent mini-strokes of corti-
cal/subcortical areas).
Confusion is where an individual has difficulty
placing herself in terms of time and/or place. It
can lead to disorientation, loss of short-term
memory, changed levels of activity, speech
defects, hallucinations and clouding of con-
sciousness. Acute confusion (delirium) is a rela-
tively common finding amongst elderly people.
It may also be an important indicator of an
underlying systemic disease (e.g. CVA, infec-
tion). Confusion may be aggravated by drugs
(e.g. alcohol), sight or hearing defects and pres-
ence of other brain diseases (e.g. Parkinson's
disease). Confusion may also be a feature of
acute or chronic dementia.
Table 18.10 Mental test score
1_ Name
2. Date of birth
3. Age
4. Date and time of day
5. Address
6. Name of prime minister
7. Date of First World War
8. Place
9. Remember an address 5 min later
10. Count backwards from 20 to 1
Assessment of mental state can easily be
achieved by means of a mental test score (Table
18.10). This is performed by the practitioner
asking 10 simple questions to the patient. A low
score (less than 7) indicates confusion and war-
rants referral to other agencies (e.g. GP, psychia-
trist). Deterioration in mental test score may
indicate the presence of a chronic dementing
illness (e.g. Alzheimer's disease).
Assessment of ability to perform
basic foot care
For the practitioner, accurate determination of an
elderly patient's ability to perform basic tasks
relating to foot care will be important. The fol-
lowing activities are important as part of per-
sonal activities of daily living:
cutting and/ or filing of toe nails
filing of hard skin
application of cream to the sole of the foot
washing and drying of feet
putting on stockings, tights or socks
putting on and fastening shoes
change of a dressing applied to the foot
(where appropriate)
inspection of feet for lesions.
Inability to perform the above activities may
place an elderly person at greater risk of deterio-
rating foot health. This is particularly likely
where the elderly person is not able (or eligible)
to receive podiatric care and where there is an
assumption that the person will manage her own
feet. Failure to perform these basic activities may
ultimately also contribute to deterioration in
mobility, independence and quality of life. For
example, patients may feel less inclined to go
outside of the house if putting on shoes and
hosiery becomes difficult. Provision of simple
aids, such as elasticated laces and stocking
helpers, can sometimes rectify this problem, by
providing assistance with difficult activities.
Inability to check and clean feet can be a
major risk for deterioration in foot health status.
This is especially true for patients with either
peripheral vascular insufficiency or defects of
sensory perception. Sight defects may com-
pound the problem. In these cases, the patient
should be encouraged to ask a carer to check
their feet regularly, or seek regular professional
assessment.
The best way to assess an individual's ability
to perform basic foot care tasks is to observe
them being performed. Practitioners should
spend some time with patients looking for
signs of difficulty reaching feet, putting on
shoes and hosiery, and problems with manual
dexterity (e.g. arthritis of fingers). This can often
be determined during the course of a normal
consultation:
Is the patient able to take off and put back on
her own shoes and hosiery?
Can the patient touch areas of her feet?
Is the patient able to manipulate a pair of
scissors / nippers?
Can the patient manage the use of a file?
Can the patient apply a cream to the foot?
Is the patient able to change a dressing on her
foot?
It is important for the practitioner observing
these skills to bear in mind that conditions in the
patient's own home may be totally different to
those in the clinical environment. Patients may
find it easy to manage their feet while seated in a
podiatry chair, but find the same tasks difficult in
an armchair or on a sofa or bed.
RISK ASSESSMENT AND THE
ELDERLY
Limited resources for public podiatry services
have resulted in attempts to prioritise services to
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 465
those people most at risk. Usually, notions of risk
have centred on medical need for foot care. It is
clearly a worthy desire to focus limited resources
on those most at need. However, risk assessment
of the elderly can be a hazardous pursuit and
should not be undertaken without appropriate
validation of risk assessment protocols.
The risks of prioritisation are enormous, both
to individuals and to health services. Getting it
wrong has major consequences for individuals
(ulceration, infection, falls, gangrene, amputa-
tion) and for health services (litigation, com-
plaints, costs of managing complications, effect
on other service providers, etc.).
Generally, the elderly can be divided into three
groups in respect of risk status: high risk,
medium risk and low risk (Table 18.11). What
Table 18.11 Definitions of elderly risk groups
High risk Patients with systemic pathology presenting a
risk to foot health (e.g. diabetes mellitus,
Cushing's disease, leukaemia, anaemia, etc.)
Patients with existing foot ulceration or other
loss of lower limb tissue viability
Patients who have a history of falls
Patients with peripheral vascular disease
Patients with peripheral neuropathy
Patients with hip joint pathology or prosthesis
Patients who are bed-ridden
Malnourished patients
Patients taking certain medications (steroids,
anticoagulants, anticancer drugs, etc.)
Patients with severe cognitive impairment
Patients unable to self-care with poor carer
support
Infirm or frail people living alone
Poor patients
Socially isolated patients
Medium risk Patients with poor skin quality or skin disease
Patients with thickened nails
Patients with calluses or corns
Patients with toe deformities
Immobile patients
Patients with superficial fungal infections of
skin or nail
Patients unable to self-care with adequate
carer support
Low risk Patients with mild foot pathology
Patients with good circulatory status
Patients with good neurological status
Independent patients or those receiving good
levels of home care
Mobile patients
Patients with good personal care/hygiene
466 SPECIFIC CLIENTGROUPS
becomes clear when looking at these definitions
is that most podiatry departments are already
focusing on those at greatest risk.
Several providers of foot health services have
attempted to use risk 'scoring' methods to make
decisions on eligibility for podiatry services.
These criteria are often rigidly applied, allow no
professional discretion and are sometimes
administered by people other than those spe-
cialised in the assessment of the lower limb.
Where risk assessment protocols are used, it is
important for practitioners using such protocols
to be able to obtain second opinions, and identify
patients who they feel are at risk but who do not
fit the 'rigid' criteria.
Risk assessment of the elderly is further com-
plicated by the fact that elderly people tend to
deteriorate much faster than young people. An
elderly person who seems quite fit today may be
infirm or ill tomorrow. This effect can have dev-
astating consequences for foot health where a
patient is under the impression that they are no
longer eligible for foot care.
Reassessment of the elderly patient is neces-
sary at regular intervals. Risk status changes with
corresponding changes in general health status,
physiological changes and social circumstances.
Even changes in time of the year can have a pro-
found effect on risk status. For example, during
the summer a patient may appear to have ade-
quate peripheral circulation, but the same patient
might assess as high risk during the winter when
circulation deteriorates.
The most effective risk assessment protocols
have used qualitative descriptors of risk rather
than rigid/quantitative risk-scoring mecha-
nisms. Effective risk assessment is dependent
upon the following:
REFERENCES
Bennett G C J, Ebrahim S 1995 health care in old age, 2nd
edn. Arnold, London
Clearing House's web site:
(http://www.leeds.ac.uk Inuffield I infoservices IUKCHI
home.html)
Crawford V L S, Ashford R L, McPeake B, Stout R W 1995
Conservative podiatric medicine and disability in elderly
existence of a valid risk assessment protocol
patient understanding of the process
compliance of the patient with advice
availability and motivation of carers (where
appropriate)
awareness of CPs (and others) of the
protocols / eligibility for re-referral
ability to reassess/review risk status as required.
Even the most effective risk assessment proto-
col fails from time to time and patients who were
identified as low risk may develop serious
pathology. Where risk assessment does fail,
departments need to ensure that patients can
receive rapid assessment and treatment to
prevent the likelihood of significant adverse con-
sequences.
It is impossible to be completely certain when
assessing the risk of individuals, particularly the
old. Health providers need to weigh up the costs
(personal, social and economic) of risk assess-
ment with the costs of universal provision of
podiatry services.
SUMMARY
This chapter has examined a range of factors that
are pertinent to the assessment of the elderly.
Although the overall assessment process for the
elderly should be no different to that of any
other age group there are specific factors that
should be taken into consideration. It is essential
that practitioners are aware that any assessment
of the elderly provides a snap shot of the elderly
person at the time of the assessment. In view of
the ageing process and increased risk of acquir-
ing a range of diseases the status of the elderly
person may change from low to high risk within
a relatively short period of time.
people. Journal of the American Podiatric Medical
Association 85(5): 255-259
Hansard 1998. HMSO, London
Harvey I, Frankel S, Marks R, Shalom 0, Morgan M
1997 Foot morbidity and exposure to chiropody:
population based study. British Medical Journal 315:
1054-1055
Mahoney F I, Barthel D W 1965 Functional evaluation: the
Barthel Index. Maryland State Medical Journal 14:
61-65
Plummer E S, Albert S G A 1996 Focused assessment of
foot care in older adults. Journal of the American
Geriatrics Society 44: 310-313
Turner W A, Campbell J A, Milns D et al 2000 Prevalence of
foot problems amongst the elderly. Society of
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 467
Chiropodists & Podiatrists Annual Conference,
Commonwealth Institute, London, May 2000
Turner W A, Campbell J A, Milns D 2001 The cruelest cut?
Effects of podiatric discharge on 5000 'low risk' elderly
people over two years. Podiatry, People & Politics
Conference, University College, Northampton,S April 2001
Wei J Y 1992 Age and the cardiovascular system. New
England Journal of Medicine 327(24): 1735-1739
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 469
Preoperative assessment 470
The systems enquiry 473
Factors affecting operative risk 478
Laboratoryinvestigationsand imaging modaHties 480
Postoperative assessment 481
Summary 482
Pre- and postoperative
assessment
1. Reilly
INTRODUCTION
Corrective surgery can provide a resolution to
many chronic foot conditions that have tradition-
ally been treated by conservative care, e.g. ingrown
toe nails, hammer toes, hallux abductovalgus.
The majority of surgical procedures on the foot
performed by podiatrists in the UK are undertaken
on an elective basis under local or regional anaes-
thesia rather than general anaesthesia. This
chapter focuses on the assessment of patients
having surgery under local anaesthesia. Many
texts assume preoperative assessment means
surgery to be performed under general anaesthe-
sia. Such texts may state that, for example, the
insulin-controlled diabetic patient is not fit for day
surgery. However, as long as the insulin-diabetic
patient has been appropriately assessed and there
are no major contraindications it is possible to
undertake surgery under local anaesthesia on an
outpatient basis. Moreover, early and effective
intervention in the diabetic could prevent later
amputational and salvage surgery.
The process of surgery can be broken down
into three distinct phases: the pre-, intra- and
postoperative phases. These phases are collec-
tively known as the perioperative period and
may overlap and vary in relative importance,
depending on the individual patient and the
nature of the planned surgical procedure. The
overall results of surgery depend upon the
effective assessment and management of each
phase. Table 19.1 identifies the key issues in the
assessment process.
469
470 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 19.1 The preoperative assessment process
Diagnosis
Information from the primary patient assessment
What is the diagnosis?
What are the important facets of the history?
What further investigations are required?
Fitness for surgery
Is the patient fit for surgery?
Are there any concomitant diseases that increase the
perioperative risk?
Is the patient on any drugs that could influence the surgical
outcome?
The anaesthetic
Local anaesthetic (or general anaesthetic)
Which technique will be used?
The operation
What is the surgical plan?
Does the surgery itself pose any special problems?
Has informed consent been obtained?
After the operation
Can any problems be anticipated?
Have redressing appointments been arranged?
PREOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT
Clear communication between the practitioner
and the patient is vital and forms the basis of
informed consent, which is a prerequisite to any
invasive procedure. The decision to recommend
surgery to the patient is taken in light of the pre-
senting problem after non-surgical treatment
options have been tried (or at least considered)
and when the potential risks and benefits of
invasive techniques have been calculated in the
surgeon's mind. It is the responsibility of the
practitioner to determine the most likely diag-
nosis of the problem based on a detailed history
taking and physical examination. Appropriate
laboratory investigations and diagnostic
imaging support and confirm the provisional
diagnosis.
The purpose of the preoperative assessment
The purpose of the preoperative assessment is to:
review the history of the presenting illness or
complaint
review the major systems of the body and
ascertain whether these systems are
functioning within normal limits and, if not,
to facilitate the management of this
arrive at an informed position regarding the
medical appropriateness of the planned
surgical procedure
identify any factors that may contraindicate
surgery or place the patient 'at risk'.
At the end of the assessment the practitioner
will have an opinion in his mind as to whether
the patient is fit for surgery. This will allow the
practitioner to proceed knowing that the risk of
encountering an intra- or postoperative compli-
cation has been reduced to a minimum.
An inadequate assessment of the patient's
health status may have serious consequences for
the surgical patient.
The patient is placed at risk. Inappropriate or
unsafe surgery is performed because of inade-
quate knowledge of the patient's medical history.
Surgery carried out on patients with certain sys-
temic pathologies carries an increased risk of
postoperative morbidity. Medical disorders can
complicate surgical practice in various ways: e.g.
a patient with rheumatoid arthritis on steroid
therapy is prone to impaired healing and infec-
tion. An occult condition may manifest under the
stress of surgery: e.g. a cerebrovascular insult
may occur intraoperatively in patients with un-
diagnosed hypertension. Invasive treatment on
haemophiliacs or patients taking anticoagulant
therapy requires special consideration because of
the likelihood of very slow blood clotting and
haemorrhage. The use of postoperative analge-
sia, especially if obtained on group protocol,
requires that the practitioner is familiar with the
indications, contraindications, interactions and
side effects of the analgesic medication.
The surgeon is placed at risk. The practitioner
will inevitably encounter blood and tissue fluids
on a regular basis. Inadequate history taking
with regard to identifying known or potential
blood-borne diseases such as hepatitis B places
the practitioner and his assistants at risk.
An increased risk of clinical emergencies. A
number of intraoperative emergencies, such as
hypertensive crises, can arise. A detailed pre-
operative assessment should identify those at
greatest risk.
Table 19.2 American Society of Anesthesiologists' (ASA)
surgical risk classification
Poor treatment outcomes. A combination of
any of the above factors can lead to a poor treat-
ment outcome. Without judicious use of labora-
tory investigations, certain disease states can
be overlooked. Assessment of preoperative
radiographs are essential if the practitioner is to
effectively plan the appropriate surgical proce-
dure.
A systematic approach to the assessment
process will ensure that the practitioner covers
all relevant areas in the enquiry process. The use
of questionnaires give the patient time to
sider his answers, reduces the amount of time
spent during the consultation and ensures that
the patient answers relate to their current and
past health status (Ch. 5).
Health status can be classified using the
American Society of Anesthesiologists' (ASA)
scale (Table 19.2). Patients who fall into either
Class 1 or 2 will be the most suitable for elective
procedures. . ..
As already noted in the introduction It IS
assumed that the practitioner undertakes a full
medical and social history as detailed in Chapter
5. There are specific issues that need to be taken
into consideration when assessing a patient for
elective surgery under local anaesthesia. These
are considered below.
Class
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Class 5
Symptoms
The patient has no organic, physiological,
biochemical or psychiatric disturbance. The
pathological process for which the operation. is to
be performed is localised and does not entail
systemic disturbance
Mild to moderate systemic disturbance caused
either by the condition to be treated surgically or
by other pathophysiological processes
Severe systemic disturbance or disease from
whatever cause, even though it may not be
possible to define the degree of disability with
finality
Severe systemic disorders that are already life
threatening, not always correctable by operation
The moribund patient who has little chance of
survival but is submitted to operation in
desperation
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 471
Current health status
Body mass. Obesity is a condition that may be
more complicated than simple overeating.
Obesity is associated with various endocrine
disease, type 2 diabetes mellitus, peripheral vas-
cular disease, hypertension and cardiac disease,
anaemia, deep vein thrombosis (OVT), cholecys-
titis and nutritional imbalances. Obese patients
have an increased risk of postoperative OVT and
wound complications such as infection and
dehiscence.
It is commonly assumed that malnutrition is
rare in Western societies. However, the malnutri-
tion status among the elderly is alarmingly high. A
percentage weight loss of 20% or greater is associ-
ated with a lO-fold increase in operative mortality
following major surgery, and a threefold increase
in postoperative infection. Vitamin B
I
(thiamine)
and B deficiencies are associated with peripheral
Vitamin C and serum zinc deficiencies
may impair wound healing. Seriously under-
weight patients may be suffering from a range of
systemic conditions or they could be poorly nou:-
ished due to alcoholism, drug abuse or anorexia
nervosa. Fatigue and weight changes are symp-
toms of many systemic illnesses and are always
worthy of note, especially if weight change
appears to be rapid.
General health. In general, patients who are
unwell are not good candidates for surgical pro-
cedures or treatments which are likely to demand
close compliance on their behalf.
Pregnancy. Rarely will elective surgery be indi-
cated on a pregnant woman.
Past and current medication
Information about the patient's past and current
drug therapy can provide useful information
about the patient's health status. Patients should
be asked if they are currently taking, or have
taken in the past, any tablets or medicine or used
any ointments or creams that have been pre-
scribed by their doctor or bought over-the-
counter. The practitioner should refer to the
British National Formulary (BNF) or other phar-
macological text if with any drugs the
patient is taking. In particular, details of adverse
472 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
reactions, either by the patient or any member of
the patient's family, to previous local anaesthetic
injections and other drugs (e.g. penicillin) should
be sought and explored.
Steroids such as prednisolone are commonly
used in the treatment of asthma, obstructive
airway disease and rheumatoid arthritis. They
have three main effects, which can be of impor-
tance during the perioperative period:
suppression of the hypothalamus/pituitary
adrenal (HPA) axis
poor wound healing
a predisposition to infection.
There will be a suppression of the HPA if the
patient has taken more than 7.5 mg/ day of pred-
nisolone for more than 1 week. In such instances,
consideration must be given to the administra-
tion of exogenous steroids to prevent hypoten-
sion or cardiovascular collapse. For minor
procedures a typical regimen would be 15 mg PO
(by mouth) at 6 a.m. on the day of surgery; and
the same dose 12 and 24 hours later.
Anticoagulants are used in ischaemic heart
disease, mitral stenosis, atrial fibrillation and in
the prevention of postoperative thrombosis for-
mation. Heparin inhibits the intrinsic clotting
pathway and is used in the short-term prophy-
laxis of DVT. Warfarin inhibits the extrinsic clot-
ting pathway and is used in long-term therapy.
The use of an oral anticoagulant has obvious
implications if surgical treatment is planned
(Case history 19.1). Adjustment of the dosing
regimen can be undertaken by the patient's
Case history 19.1
A 54-year-old lady presented with an interdigital corn
that has failed to respond to many years of palliative
treatment. The history and physical examination
revealed that she suffered from atrial fibrillation for
which she took warfarin (to prevent ventricular
thrombosis).
Outcome: surgery was indicated for the patient. At
first assessment her INR was 4.1. In consultation with
her general practitioner, her dosage was adjusted to
reduce the INR to below 2.5. Surgery was carried out
with the INR 1.9 on the day. The postoperative
course was unremarkable and the patient was
discharged after the 12-week follow-up visit.
general practitioner (GP) to allow surgery to
proceed with relative safety. Drugs that alter
platelet function include aspirin, nonsteroidal
anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), steroids and
antihistamines. With patients who regularly take
aspirin it may be necessary to cease its use
because of delayed clotting after surgery. If
aspirin use is to be stopped, with the consent of
the patient's GP, in order for surgery to proceed,
it should be done so 1 week before surgery. It
should be noted that women who take oral con-
traception carry a slightly increased risk of post-
operative DVT formation.
The use of all recreational drugs should be
recorded. Patients who use injectable drugs are at
a higher risk of hepatitis and human immuno-
deficiency virus (HIV). Long-term or heavy use of
tobacco can affect wound healing due to the
immediate vasoconstrictive effect of nicotine as
well as the long-term effect of increased platelet
adhesiveness and atherosclerosis. Tobacco
smokers are also at greater risk of bronchitis,
asthma and lung cancer. Heavy alcohol consump-
tion can affect peripheral sensation, immune
response, postoperative healing and the metabo-
lism of local anaesthetics, as well as having impli-
cations for treatment compliance.
Past medical history
The past medical history consists of information
about previous lower limb problems and the
treatment received, as well as details about any
problems that have affected the patient's general
health. The nature of previous treatment, the
name of the practitioner, details of relevant inves-
tigations such as X-rays and the patient's view of
the treatment success should be recorded. This
information may prevent the repetition of tests or
treatments which have previously been ineffec-
tive. Of particular interest is the operative history
of the patient. In an audit of an NHS surgical
caseload, 10% of patients were referred for revi-
sionary surgical intervention.
Home circumstances
It is important to assess the patient's home situ-
ation. In the case of surgical treatment, the prac-
titioner must establish who is going to transport
the patient to and from surgery and who is
going to assist her through the immediate post-
operative recovery period. Lack of home
support may rule out surgical intervention
(Case history 19.2).
~
I Case history 19.2 I
A 59-year-old widow was referred for treatment for a
tailor's bunion. Palliative treatment did not control the
symptoms. A preoperative assessment was
undertaken with a view to performing a metatarsal
osteotomy of the fifth metatarsal head. The patient
lived alone and had no children. The only home
support the patient was able to organise was from
neighbours. This support was not very reliable as the
neighbours were out at work all day.
Outcome: the typical postoperative course is to
rest completely for 2 days and to be on 'light duties'
for between 2 and 4 weeks. Patients are asked not to
perform any household duties and to have someone
to stay with them for the first 2 days in case an
emergency should arise. In view of the lack of home
support, surgery was not offered to the patient.
Occupation
A patient's occupation may be a contributory
cause of the lower limb problem and may
influence whether surgery could or should be
offered. Some patients may experience particular
difficulties in taking time off from work to attend
for treatment and need to be aware of the vari-
able amount of time needed to recuperate from
surgery (Case history 19.3). The patient who
cannot or will not devote the time to heal after
surgery is not a good surgical candidate.
Sports and hobbies
Details of any sporting hobby should be sought
from the patient. As indicated in Case history 19.3,
the patient needs to devote time to postoperative
healing, and therefore cessation of sporting activ-
ity must be emphasised to the patient.
Foreign travel
Details of foreign travel should be recorded in
case the patient has acquired an unusual foot
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 473
\-------------------------,
I Case history 19.3 !
A 47-year-old publican attended for a surgical
opinion. He suffered from a complex digital
deformity and the preoperative assessment
indicated that he required extensive digital and soft
tissue reconstruction. While discussing his
occupation as a landlord, the patient expressed his
intention to return to bar work the evening followinq
surgery. He equated the surgery he was to receive
as akin to that of a tooth extraction under local
anaesthesia from a dentist. Clear (and written)
advice was given regarding the need to rest in the
postoperative period.
Outcome: the patient did not comply with the
advice given. He presented at his first redressing
appointment with marked forefoot swelling and pain -
more than would have been expected from the
procedure performed. The final result was a less than
satisfactory 'sausage toe', through a failure to take
appropriate advice. This example highlights the need
to document the advice given to patients during the
perioperative period to protect the surgeon from
litigious action.
infection. In particular, travel to tropical coun-
tries and any foot injuries sustained while
walking barefoot should be recorded. Many
countries have a higher incidence of HIV than
the UK. A history of blood product transfusion
abroad could, therefore, be important.
The systems enquiry
The cardiovascular system
A history of cardiovascular disease should be
taken with respect to systemic, peripheral and
haematological disease states, followed up by a
review of symptomatology.
Patients with ischaemic heart disease (IHD)
may present with a history of previous myocar-
dial infarction (M!), stable or unstable angina or
a history of previous coronary artery bypass
graft (CABG). A detailed history must be taken
of all patients who have suffered previous
cardiac problems or have high-risk factors
such as obesity, hypertension, shortness of
breath on exercise, smoking or a family history
of cardiac problems. Ten percent of patients
over 50 years old presenting for non-cardiac
surgery had previously suffered MI. This is
474 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
significant because there is a known risk of re-
infarction in the perioperative period. The rela-
tive significance of that risk is dependent on the
time elapsed since the first MI. A quarter of
patients presenting for non-cardiac surgery are
likely to have another MI if less than 3 months
has passed since their first attack. However, if
more than 6 months is allowed to elapse, the
incidence of repeat MI falls to less than 5 in
every 100 patients.
Angina may be classified as stable or unsta-
ble. Stable angina takes the form of chronic, pre-
dictable, exertional chest pain. In these
circumstances, when there is no history of a pre-
vious MI, and other risk factors are absent, the
risk of perioperative MI is low provided that the
patient is not exposed to any excessive stress.
The patient's anti-anginal medication should be
continued perioperatively. An assessment needs
to be taken of how the patient will respond to
having surgery under local anaesthesia - in
other words, while the patient is awake. Some
patients may find this very stressful and, there-
fore, would be considered unsuitable. Unstable
angina is characterised by increased frequency,
severity and duration of painful attacks that is
not easily controlled by their medication.
Angina of recent onset, angina at rest or with
minimal exertion or angina awakening the
patient from sleep should also be considered
unstable. Such unstable angina symptoms carry
the same perioperative risk as having had an MI
in the previous 6 months. Surgery is contraindi-
cated until the angina has been stabilised by
medical or surgical means.
A history of CABG should also be taken into
consideration. In essence, these patients have
had their symptoms controlled by surgery but
they may still have limited cardiac reserve and
may not be able to respond well to the additional
stress of surgery.
Patients in congestive heart failure (CHF)
have diminished cardiac reserve and do not
respond well to perioperative stress. CHF carries
a high perioperative risk of MI in patients
undergoing general anaesthetic and therefore
elective surgery must be avoided in patients pre-
senting with third heart sounds, an elevated
jugular venous pulse or pulmonary oedema. As
patients who undergo procedures under local
anaesthesia frequently experience considerable
stress from fear and apprehension, those in
cardiac failure represent a high risk of an
adverse perioperative cardiac event. Conduction
defects represent a low risk in elective foot
surgery under local anaesthesia; however, the
opinion of the general practitioner and anaes-
thetist is useful.
Patients with a history of fainting attacks may
require specific assessment before any elective
surgery under local or general anaesthesia.
Patients will often offer a history of palpitations,
'missed heart beats' or fainting attacks. Any
patient who gives a history suggestive of an
arrhythmia should have an electrocardiogram
(ECG) that can then be carefully assessed by a
cardiologist prior to local anaesthesia.
Major heart valve disease is becoming rarer
but a heart murmur is still a regular finding in
routine medical examinations. Most murmurs
are related to turbulent flow of blood in the heart
and are not significant and do not represent
heart valve damage. A history of valvular heart
disease is of concern because it carries a risk of
bacterial endocarditis, CHF and MI. The
American Heart Association recommendation
for cases with mitral valve prolapse and a
detectable murmur is that antibiotic prophylaxis
should be prescribed in all procedures where a
transient bacteraemia is created. In the main,
bone surgery on the foot is clean and prophy-
laxis is not required. Antibiotic prophylaxis is,
however, required in nail surgery where there is
paronychia or in any incision and drainage pro-
cedures of infected tissue.
Well-managed, mild to moderate hypertension
poses no increased perioperative risk, although
in all cases hypertensive medication should be
continued perioperatively. Treated hypertension
is associated with ischaemic heart disease and
stroke. In cases of uncontrolled hypertension, the
patient may present with a variety of symptoms,
including headaches, transient visual impair-
ment, anorexia or even nausea. Two very
significant findings are impaired renal function
manifesting clinically as proteinuria and/or
retinopathy. All patients who have blood pres-
sures above 160/95 on more than one occasion
should be investigated and treated prior
to surgery. Diastolic pressures greater than
120 mmHg are of grave concern and contraindi-
cate any surgical intervention; they require
urgent medical referral.
A comprehensive literature review regarding
perioperative considerations of the patient with
cardiovascular disease has been performed by a
member of the Trent Region Podiatric Forum,
and is presented in Table 19.3.
Anaemia represents a reduction in the oxygen-
carrying capacity of the blood. Since there are mul-
tiple causes and types of anaemia, preoperative
consultation is appropriate. Both cardiopulmonary
integrity and wound healing are dependent on
tissue oxygen levels. Anaemia is rarely a con-
traindication to surgery unless it is of a severe
magnitude. Haematocrit values below 30 are con-
sidered insufficient for elective foot surgery.
Table 19.3 Surgical recommendations for the
cardiovascular patient (information included with thanks to
Dr T Kilmartin of the Trent Forum)
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 475
Haemophiliacs and other patients with clot-
ting abnormalities require thorough history
taking. Enquire about bruising, nose bleeds and
any previous surgical problems. Further studies
that will be indicated include a platelet count and
bleeding time.
Sickle-cell disease affects those of African or
West Indian descent. It is an autosomally inher-
ited haemoglobinopathy resulting in the forma-
tion of haemoglobin S (HbS) instead of HbA.
Small changes in oxygen tension cause HbS to
polymerise and form pseudocrystalline struc-
tures, which distort red blood cells into the char-
acteristic sickle shapes. Sickle cells increase blood
viscosity and obstruct microvascular blood flow,
leading to thrombosis and infarction. A compre-
hensive literature review regarding the use of
tourniquets in this condition has been under-
taken by a member of the Trent Region Podiatric
Forum, and is presented in Figure 19.1.
For a surgical wound to heal uneventfully, ade-
quate peripheral circulation is a prerequisite.
Assessment of the vascular status of the lower
limb is covered under physical examination, and
in detail in Chapter 6.
Myocardial
infarctions (MI)
Angina
Coronary artery
bypass graft
(CABG)
Congestive
heart failure
(CHF)
Conduction
disturbances
Arrhythmia
Valvular heart
disease
Hypertension
Surgery should be avoided in patients
who have had an MI within the previous
6 months
In stable angina, where there is no
history of an MI or other risk factors, the
perioperative risk of an MI is low. In
unstable angina, surgery is
contraindicated until the angina has been
controlled by medical or surgical means
A history of a CABG should be
considered a low perioperative risk
Patients in CHF represent a high risk of
adverse cardiac events from the stress of
surgery
Conduction defects represent a low
perioperative risk
Any patient with a history suggestive of
arrhythmia should have an ECG performed
Prophylactic antibiosis is not required in
clean podiatric surgery to prevent
bacterial endocarditis. It is, however,
required in nail surgery
Elective surgery is contraindicated in
uncontrolled hypertension
The respiratory system
Postoperative morbidity and mortality from
atelectasis and infection are significantly
increased in individuals with pulmonary disease,
whether anaesthesia is local or general. These
effects are most often noted in those individuals
with known pulmonary risk factors, such as a
history of heavy smoking, pre-existing pul-
monary disease, obesity and in the elderly. The
preoperative goal is to identify pulmonary risk
factors and request an expert opinion as indi-
cated. Preoperative management by consultants
may include pulmonary function testing.
Smokers should discontinue at least 1 week prior
to surgery.
The alimentary system
Gastrointestinal (GD disorders are common and
have many implications for the lower limb and
its treatment.
476 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Arrange appointment
with sickle-cell service
for screening and issue
of risk card
Inform patient of risks
and complications 8------......
'-------..,...-
Consider
alternative care:
orthotics
clinopody
referral on
New Patient
Afro-caribbean
Asian
Mediterranean
Have you been
screened or tested for
sickle-cell disease?
Surgery
without
tourniquet
Tourniquet as necessary
Examination of the
foot prior to inflation
of the tourniquet
Figure 19.1 Decision-making algorithm for patients with sickle-cell anaemia (with thanks to Mr C Bicknell of the Trent
Forum).
Patients with severe liver damage may be
metabolically unstable and may be unable to
withstand the stress and the demands of surgery.
Liver cirrhosis is not uncommon and should be
identified in the history. Chronic alcoholism may
cause osteoporosis, complicate anaesthesia (the
metabolism of), increase bleeding risk, decrease
wound healing, increase the risk of infection and
diminish adrenocortical responses to stress.
Serious coexisting nutritional imbalances are
often noted.
The genitourinary system
The kidneys regulate the body's electrolyte and
fluid balance; this has implications for lower limb
circulation and oedema and can delay wound
healing. The presence of any renal symptoms
such as haematuria, dysuria, polyuria, oliguria or
flank pain mandates a specific evaluation.
Although the perioperative risks for patients with
renal disease are primarily related to disturbances
of fluid and electrolyte balance, hypertension and
oedema may be related to renal dysfunction.
Confirmation of kidney disease requires specific
investigation. Screening urinalysis remains the
classic measurement of renal performance
(Ch. 13). Abnormal findings include the pres-
ence of glucose, protein, ketones, bilirubin,
more than four red or white blood cells per
field, bacteria, casts and crystals. Surgery
should be postponed until renal function is
stabilised.
The central and peripheral nervous system
Diseases of the nervous system may cause pain
in the lower limb, deformity or gait abnormali-
ties. The significance of some symptoms in the
neurological enquiry will be very difficult to
interpret because the enquiry relies on the
patient's subjective account. However, inade-
quate assessment of the neurological basis of foot
pathology can lead to inappropriate surgical
intervention through a missed diagnosis. A
detailed assessment of the peripheral nervous
system can be found in Chapter 7.
Endocrine system
Diabetes, thyroid disease, growth disorders,
obesity and problems associated with the
menopause are particularly relevant. Diabetes
mellitus is a complex systemic disease that may
manifest as vascular, neurological, dermatologi-
cal and structural changes in the foot and lower
leg. The perioperative goal is to reduce hypo- or
hyperglycaemia. In the normal subject, hypergly-
caemia activates insulin production, but in the
diabetic this feedback control loop is defective.
Surgical stress causes a catabolic reaction, result-
ing in glucagon, adrenaline (epinephrine) and
cortisol secretion. Blood glucose levels rise and
other fuel pathways are mobilised.
The practitioner should ensure that a good
metabolic balance is obtained preoperatively.
Avoidance of the extremes of hypoglycaemia or
hyperglycaemia will help optimise wound healing
and host defence function. Hyperglycaemia
impairs wound healing by retarding wound
closure, delaying wound contraction, slowing col-
lagen synthesis, impairing granulocytes and
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 477
reducing red blood cell viscosity. Elective surgery
should be avoided in diabetic patients with blood
sugar values greater than 200mg/dI. Chronic
hyperglycaemia greatly increases the risk of post-
operative infection. The use of haemoglobin AlC,
an index of hyperglycaemia, is helpful in evaluat-
ing trends in diabetic control. Inadequate nutrition
and reduced total plasma albumin have been
shown to deter wound healing in patients with
diabetes and should be normalised preoperatively
when possible. Diabetics with a propensity
towards ketosis require intraoperative intravenous
insulin and monitoring. Wide blood sugar varia-
tions are associated with unpredictable healing
ability and an increased surgical risk. A patient
who is taking multiple medications is more prone
to drug interactions, which may also affect dia-
betes management.
General anaesthesia creates a greater perioper-
ative risk because of increased insulin demands,
the risk of silent MI, nausea and vomiting, and
delays in food and oral medication intake. Early-
morning surgery allows the optimal equilibrium
between insulin dose and caloric intake, with
immediate oral nutrition postoperatively.
The locomotor system
To determine the presence of musculoskeletal
disease the patient should be asked if they have
ever had:
any form of arthritis
back, hip, knee, ankle or foot pain
fractured bones in the legs or feet
pulled or injured muscles in the legs
joint swelling or stiffness
limb pain during any specific activity.
Arthritic patients may be considered to include
persons with single-joint osteoarthrosis and
those with more complex multiorgan arthritides,
including rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus
erythematosus (SLE) and seronegative arthritis.
Osteoarthrosis. There are no specific perioper-
ative considerations for the management of the
osteoarthritic patient. However, the patient may
be on a range of analgesic and anti-inflammatory
preparations, which must be considered in the
478 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
overall assessment of the patient. NSAIDs alter
bleeding times and some authors recommend
their cessation.
Rheumatoid arthritis. Many patients coming to
surgery have been on long-term steroids. These
drugs suppress the HPA axis, and patients may
require corticosteroid coverage during the peri-
operative period. This should be given even if it
has been 1 year since the patient has received
medication (it is not necessary to treat a patient
with steroids if they have only received intra-
articular injections of cortisone). Disease-remit-
tive drugs, e.g. methotrexate, suppress the bone
marrow and can cause leucopenia and thrombo-
cytopenia, increasing the likelihood of infection.
They can safely be stopped for several days
during the perioperative period, in consultation
with the prescribing doctor.
Systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE). Since SLE
is a multisystem disease, a careful history and
assessment should be performed prior to
surgery. If the patient has received cortico-
steroids within the last year prior to surgery, con-
sideration should be given to stress-coverage
replacement during the perioperative period.
Raynaud's phenomenon is also associated with
this disease and constitutes a contraindication to
the use of adrenaline (epinephrine) in foot
surgery and may affect wound healing.
Seronegative spondyloarthropathies. If possi-
ble, elective foot surgery should be performed
during periods between active disease flare-ups.
Otherwise, there are no specific perioperative
considerations for Reiter's syndrome, psoriatic
arthritis or enteropathic arthritis.
Gout. Any patient with a history of gout is
at a substantially increased risk of a postopera-
tive gouty attack. This may be due to local sur-
gical trauma, dehydration and the temporary
interruption of uricosuric medication. Those at
highest risk have had an attack within the last
year or are on hyperuricaemic medication.
Septic arthritis. Septic arthritis is a serious con-
dition. The patient is likely to be generally
unwell and should not undergo surgery if there
is any chance the joint is infected. Synovial fluid
analysis should be considered where there is a
recent history of infection.
Physical examination
The format of the physical examination is summa-
rised in Table 19.4. The aim of the physical exami-
nation is to identify abnormality and delineate
those patients who are fit for surgery. Opinions
vary as to the level of the examination required for
the patient undergoing elective surgery under
local anaesthesia. The practitioner is expected to
have undertaken a detailed physical assessment
involving the systems (Ch. 5), peripheral vascular
status (Ch. 6), peripheral neurological status
(Ch. 7), orthopaedic status (Ch. 8) and skin (Ch. 9).
As the physical examination has been considered
in these chapters, it will not be dealt with in this
chapter.
Factors affecting operative risk
The use of local anaesthetics
Local anaesthetic agents can be defined as drugs
which are used clinically to produce a reversible
loss of sensation in a circumscribed area of the
Table 19.4 Physical examination
The cardiovascular system
Blood pressure
Ankle brachial pressure index (ABPI)
Temperature
Palpation of pulses
Capillary refilling time (CRT)
Oedema
The respiratory system
Shortness of breath (SOB)
Observe for clubbing of fingers
The alimentary system
Rarely performed
The genitourinary system
Midstream urinalysis reagent testing
The central nervous system
Gait
The motor system
The sensory system
The endocrine system
Blood glucose monitoring for diabetics
The locomotor system
Joint range and quality of motion
NCSP/RCSP
Arch profile
Digital position
body. Because surgical techniques require their
use, any contraindication to local anaesthetics
must be identified. The following contraindica-
tions should be considered:
Unstable epilepsy. High blood levels of local
anaesthetic agents are known to cause convul-
sions in some epileptic patients through their
action on brain tissue. Their use is therefore best
avoided in such individuals.
Methaemoglobinaemia. Methaemoglobin is a
form of haemoglobin consisting of globin with
an oxidised haem-containing ferric iron. Met-
haemoglobin is unable to transport oxygen and
therefore compromises cardiovascular function.
When prilocaine is metabolised by the liver, small
amounts of a chemical called O-toluidine are pro-
duced which inhibits the enzyme involved in the
conversion of methaemoglobin to haemoglobin.
In patients with known methaemoglobinaemia,
an alternative local anaesthetic agent to prilocaine
should be utilised.
Pregnancy and breastfeeding. The British
Medical Association suggests that drugs should
only be used during pregnancy where the poten-
tial benefit outweighs the risk of harm to the
fetus, particularly during the first trimester
where all drugs should be avoided if possible.
There is no specific guidance on the risks associ-
ated with the low doses of local anaesthesia used
in the foot of a pregnant woman. However,
because of the ability of local anaesthetics to
cross the placental barrier, they are probably best
avoided whenever possible during pregnancy. If
a local anaesthetic were to be given during preg-
nancy it would seem prudent to avoid prilocaine
hydrochloride, as fetal haemoglobin is more sus-
ceptible to the development of methaemoglobi-
naemia. Both lidocaine (lignocaine) and
bupivacaine are considered safe for use with
breastfeeding mothers, as the quantities secreted
into breast milk are small.
Porphyrias. The porphyrias are a group of
metabolic disorders. Included in the list of drugs
contraindicated for use in patients with por-
phyria are some local anaesthetics. These drugs
must therefore be avoided in known carriers of
the porphyrogenic gene to avoid precipitating an
acute attack.
PRE AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 479
Where surgery is still indicated, the use of a
general anaesthetic should be considered and the
patient referred.
Psychiatric status
Patients approach surgery with an understand-
able amount of fear and anxiety. They know that
they will be in an unfamiliar environment to
which they are unaccustomed. Some fear that
they will experience pain during the operation.
Most of their anxiety is down to inadequate
knowledge based on hearsay and rumour.
During the preoperative assessment it is impor-
tant that the practitioner recognises the hyper-
nervous patient and provides appropriate
information and counselling to allay any concerns.
However, it is important that the practitioner
recognises when a patient is unsuitable for surgery
under local anaesthesia and, if surgery is neces-
sary, refers the patient for general anaesthesia.
Age
Older patients. An increasing percentage of the
population is over 65 years of age, a trend that is
expected to continue well into the 21st century.
Independent ambulation is an important compo-
nent of wellness, although a majority of patients
over the age of 65 complain of foot pain limiting
their activity. In geriatric patients who have foot
conditions which can be surgically corrected, and
where the physical condition is satisfactory,
surgery can safely be performed. The chronolog-
ical age of the patient is less important, as long as
the physiological age of the patient is adequate
for the planned surgical procedure.
The problems of surgery on the older patient
include:
an adverse physiological status
impact of surgery on the patient's lifestyle
selection of the operative procedure - simple
procedures versus complex procedures - even
though the latter would give a better result.
Generally, in the older patient, it is found that
destructive rather than functionally reconstruc-
tive procedures are often more appropriate.
480 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Children. Attention to the child's psychology,
patient-parent relationships and stress levels is
important in the surgical treatment of the paedi-
atric patient. Parental presence during the opera-
tion may be beneficial.
Infection
In general, the elective procedure is performed
when the patient is free from all systemic infec-
tion. A patient with established infection
that does not respond to oral antibiotics
and appropriate wound care demands a thor-
ough preoperative evaluation and specialty
consultation.
Laboratory investigations and
imaging modalities
Urine testing. As indicated in Chapter 13, uri-
nalysis is an aid in the diagnosis of renal
disease, hepatic disease and diabetes mellitus.
Diabetes mellitus can have widespread conse-
quences for the lower limb and is of particular
interest to the surgeon. Renal and hepatic dis-
eases may have serious systemic repercussions
and, if identified, require further investigation
before it is safe to proceed with surgery.
Urinalysis is therefore useful in the preoperative
assessment of patients to screen for illnesses
which may complicate or contraindicate elective
procedures. Screening for a urinary tract infec-
tion (UTI) or the presence of bacteria in urine
can also identify those patients at increased risk
of developing postoperative wound infections.
Testing is non-invasive and cost-effective, and
urine specimens are easily obtained.
Blood analysis. The use of blood analysis in the
preoperative assessment of the surgical patient is
a matter for debate. Routine screening prior to
surgery is likely to reveal a small percentage of
abnormality, most of which is insignificant to
anaesthetic or surgical management in any case.
Therefore, the general rule for the use of
confirmatory diagnostic testing should apply:
their use is indicated from the initial patient
assessment. In cases where systemic pathology is
known or suspected - e.g. in anaemia to ascertain
haemoglobin levels - blood sampling is most cer-
tainly indicated.
The patient on anticoagulant therapy has
already been discussed. Similarly, patients who
suffer from clotting abnormalities also require
further investigation (Table 19.5).
Radiographs. Radiographs are vital to the
surgeon for a number of reasons:
they allow the identification of many
rheumatological, metabolic, endocrine and
infective disease states
they allow the progression of deformity to be
monitored
they show the precise relationship between
osseous anatomical structures that are of
particular interest to the surgeon
they aid in the selection of the most
appropriate surgical technique
they demonstrate the position of retained
internal fixation and are used to confirm
bone healing in the postoperative phase.
The identification and use of angular relation-
ships, or charting, between the foot bones has
become a key skill of the podiatrist.
Osteoporosis begins in middle life and is pre-
dominantly a disease of postmenopausal
women. Histologically, bone formation is
normal, but bone resorption is increased. If pre-
operative radiographs suggest significant osteo-
porosis, systemic disease is likely and multiple
contributing factors, including dietary deficien-
cies, endocrine imbalances, sedentary lifestyles
and genetic predisposition, may be implicated.
The implications for the fixation of osteotomies
are clear. Radiographic assessment is covered in
Chapter 11.
Table 19.5 Common clotting abnormalities
von Willebrand's disease
Haemophilia
Type A - classical haemophilia
Type B -Christmas disease
Type C - PTA (plasma thromboplastin antecedent)
deficiency
Vitamin K deficiency
POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT
The postoperative phase is said to have begun
when the patient leaves the operating theatre.
However, wound healing commences with the
initial surgical incision. The wound will progress
through the phases of inflammation to establish
environmental homeostasis amenable to tissue
repair. Careful preoperative assessment and
meticulous surgical technique will assist the
wound through this process and minimise post-
operative complications.
A surgical complication is an unexpected set of
circumstances which occurs during the perioper-
ative setting that directly or indirectly prolongs
the patient's functional recovery period.
Complications are inherent to all types of sur-
gical procedures and forefoot surgery is no
exception. If appropriately anticipated, some
complications are preventable, whereas the effect
of other complications can be minimised with
early diagnosis. There must, therefore, be an
awareness of the signs of impending complica-
tions to trigger prompt and decisive action
appropriate to the situation.
Management is aimed at avoiding haematoma
formation, excess oedema and infection while
attempting to keep the patient comfortable and
protect the surgical site. The format of the post-
operative assessment involves the following:
evaluation of the wound dressing
evaluation of the wound
evaluation of pain.
Evaluation of the wound dressing
A wound dressing has several functions: the
main goal is to provide an optimum environ-
ment for healing to take place. It must first
protect the wound from contamination and
prevent the overgrowth or penetration of
pathogens. It must be absorptive and draw the
fluids away from the wound and prevent their
accumulation - this will reduce tissue macera-
tion. Differing materials can be employed to
provide temporary immobilisation, with or
without compression as required. This places a
wound at rest and allows healing to take place
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 481
without undue mechanical forces impeding the
physiological processes. Clots and newly
formed capillaries are thus not disturbed and
pain levels are decreased. Gentle compression
will aid haemostasis and prevent the formation
of haematoma. Immobilisation is particularly
important in reconstructive surgery to maintain
the foot or a digit in its corrected position
during the healing process.
The postoperative dressing regimen typically
sees the first dressing change at 4-7 days after
surgery. The inspection of the dressing is part of
the overall assessment process. Ensure that there
are no overt signs of slippage, which may predis-
pose exposure of the wound to contamination. If
compression has been applied, has it been effec-
tive? Examine the inside of the dressing to gauge
both the amount of blood loss and the nature of
any exudate formed. A bacterial infection will
demonstrate purulent, offensive exudate and
require prompt antimicrobial therapy andlor
drainage. It is important to record normal and
abnormal findings throughout the healing
process.
Suture removal is typically at 10-14 days post-
operatively. The dressing is inspected as before,
and all points noted.
Evaluation of the wound
A classification of wounds can be found in
Table 19.6. The majority of bone procedures on
the foot are classified as clean, with the exception
of nail surgery, where it is impossible to disinfect
the invaginated nail sulci to the same standard as
unbroken skin.
Table 19.6 Wound classification
Wounds can be classified as:
Clean: surgical incisions are made with no break in aseptic
technique; no known contamination and no Inflammation IS
encountered
Clean-contaminated: a minor break is made in aseptic
technique
Contaminated: a major break is made in aseptic technique,
or in a fresh traumatic wound (less than 4 hours)
Dirty: acute bacterial infection encountered with or without
pus. A traumatic wound with delayed treatment (greater
than 4 hours). A retained foreign body or infected surgery
482 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
When examining the wound postoperatively,
the surgeon is expecting to see:
an intact wound that shows no sign of
dehiscence
a 'normal' amount of inflammation
no sign of excessive bleeding, oedema or
haematoma formation
the position maintained if any reconstructive
technique has been performed.
Meticulous suturing technique combined
with anatomical dissection, adequate haernosta-
sis and careful skin handling are important to
reduce the incidence of these complications.
When the sutures are removed it is important to
check the healing of the wound edges by gently
applying tensile force across the area.
Dehiscence will require further support of the
wound until the area has regained its mechani-
cal strength.
Evaluation of pain
The degree and severity of pain in the postoper-
ative period depends on:
the physiological and psychological make-up
of the patient and his tolerance of pain
the site and nature of the operation
the amount of surgical trauma.
Pain reflects not only tissue injury but also
represents a psychological dimension to suffer-
ing. Much unnecessary suffering may be
avoided by the reduction of preoperative
anxiety. Simple, clear and honest communica-
tion with the patient should include an explana-
tion of what will happen and when it will
happen, and can have a positive influence on
postoperative pain levels. Certain patients may
benefit from prescription of an anxiolytic, used
FURTHER READING
British National Formulary (BNFl Updated twice yearly.
British Medical Association and Royal Pharmaceutical
Society of Great Britain, London
Forrest A P M et al 1995 Principles and practice of surgery,
3rd edn. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
alone, or with analgesic medications to raise
pain thresholds postsurgically.
Injections of a long-acting local anaesthetic
immediately after surgery are commonly per-
formed and will delay postoperative pain for
some time. Combinations of opioid analgesics
and NSAIDs, however, provide the mainstay of
postoperative pain management. Paracetamol
may be combined with opioid analgesics, such as
codeine, to gain enhanced analgesia. while
NSAIDs may be added to an opioid regimen to
provide additional anti-inflammatory and intrin-
sic analgesic effects.
During the postoperative period, the patient
should be asked about pain levels and details of
their responses recorded. There are several tools
available to assess pain, including visual ana-
logue scoring and complex questionnaires such
as the McGill Pain Questionnaire (Ch. 3). The use
of (or lack of) prescribed analgesic medication
should also be discussed. The most common
causes of excessive postoperative pain in the first
week after surgery are excessive swelling within
a restrictive dressing or cast and haematoma for-
mation. Extreme levels of pain occurring in the
second postoperative week, 'returning pain', are
suggestive of infection. A suspicion of
haematoma formation or infection requires
prompt intervention and management.
SUMMARY
The continuum of surgical care encompasses the
pre-, intra- and postoperative phases. Careful
attention to detail during each phase is essential
for the achievement of a successful surgical
outcome. The approach outlined in this chapter
will ensure that a broad range of factors are taken
into consideration when assessing the pre- and
postoperative patient.
Greenberger N, Hinthorn D 1993 History taking and
physical examination: essentials and clinical correlates.
Mosby Year-Book, St Louis
McGlamry E D 1992 A comprehensive textbook of foot
surgery. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore
O'Higgins N J et al1991 Surgical management, 2nd edn.
Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford
Pinnock C et al1999 Fundamentals of anaesthesia.
Greenwich Medical Media, London
Seymour C, Siklos P 1994 Clinical clerking: a short
introduction to clinical skills, 2nd edn. Press Syndicate of
the University of Cambridge
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVEASSESSMENT 483
Tally N, O'Connor S 1989 Clinical examination. Blackwell
Scientific, Oxford
Turner R, Blackwood R 1991 Lecture notes on history taking
and examination, 2nd edn. Blackwell Science, Oxford
Zier B 1990 Essentials of internal medicine in clinical
podiatry. W BSaunders, Philadelphia
Index
A
A-beta fibres, testing, 140-142
A-delta fibres, testing, 142-143
Abbreviations, clinical, 9, 22
Abdominal pain, 68
Abduction, 158, 160, 161
Abductor strength test, 180
Abscess, 223
Brodie's, 287
Accelerometers, 313
Accessory ossicles, 281, 282, 407-408
Accuracy, 42
ACE inhibitors, 60, 90
Acetylcholine, 122
Achilles (ankle tendon) reflex, 144,
145,347
Achilles tendon (tendo calcaneus)
rupture, 187, 193,413
Achilles tendonitis (tendinosis), 378,
412-413
Acquired conditions, 7
Acrocyanosis, 369
Acromegaly, 74,440
case history, 71
facial appearance, 59
skin changes, 225, 240
Action potential, 124-125, 126
Activated partial thromboplastin time
(APTT), 332, 334
Activities of daily living (ADU, 461,
462,464-465
Addison's disease, 73,440
Adduction, 158, 160, 161
Adductor strength test, 180
Adductovarus fifth, 206
Adrenal gland disorders, 73
Adrenocortical insufficiency, 73, 440
Aetiology, 7
Afferent nerves (nerve fibres),
120-121,122,126-127
large-diameter, testing, 140-142
small-diameter, testing, 142-143
Age
at-risk foot, 434
limping in children and, 367
neurological disorders and, 135
perioperative risk and, 479-480
sports injury risk and, 376-377
Ageing, 451
definitions, 453
lower limb consequences, 453-455
skin, 220, 454,457
sweating and, 227
see also Elderly
AIDS/HI\', 70, 135,446
Albers-Schonberg disease, 285
Alcohol
abuse (alcoholism), 61
drug metabolism, 68
neurological disorders, 135,446
preoperative assessment, 476
consumption, 61, 472
Alignment, structural
nonweightbearing assessment,
197-202
sports injuries and, 378-379
X-ray assessment, 276-282
Alimentary system, 67-68
preoperative assessment, 475-476
Allen's test, 100
Allergic contact dermatitis, 228,
235-236, Plate 19
Allergies, 235-236
drug, 61, 236
patch testing, 228
shoe components, 253
Allis test, 207
Alopecia, 225
Altitude, high, 387
Amenorrhoea, in athletes, 377-378
American Society of Anesthesiologists
(ASA) surgical risk
classification, 471
Amputation
at-risk foot, seeAt-risk foot
histology of resected parts, 337
phantom limb sensation, 139
Anabolic steroids, 388-389
Anaemia, 66, 89, 444
diagnosis, 91-92, 95
elderly, 459-460
folate-deficiency, 460
iron deficiency, 92, 225, 460
pernicious, 89, 444, 460
preoperative assessment, 475
Anaesthesia, 139, 155
Analgesics, postoperative, 482
Anaphylaxis, 61
Anchor sign, 350
Aneurysms, arterial, 101
Angina pectoris, 64
surgical risk, 473-474, 475
symptoms, 65,90-91
Angiography
in arterial insufficiency, 105
in neurological disorders, 137
venous (venography), 110, 392
Angiotensin-converting enzyme
(ACE) inhibitors, 60, 90
Anhidrosis (lack of sweating), 153,227
Ankle
children, 352
dorsiflexors, 194
equinus, 171, 188
evertors. 194
examination, 187-194
footballers, 385, 404-405
impingement, posterior, 377
injuries, 190-191
instability, 171
inverters, 193-194
ligamentous injuries, grading,
190-191
motion, 171
muscles, 193-194
plantarflexors, 193
sprain, chronic, 413-414
stress tests, 188-190
tendon (Achilles) reflex, 144, 145,
347
X-rays, 191,273-274
see alsoSubtalar joint; Talocrural
joint
Ankle-brachial pressure index (ABPI),
39,103-104,439
Ankylosing spondylitis, 445
Anterior, 158
Anterior cruciate ligament, 166, 184
485
486 INDEX
Anterior superior iliac spine (ASIS),
207,208
Anterior talofibular ligament (ATFL),
189,190
Anti-hypertensive drugs, 90
Antibiotics, 321
prophylactic, 474
sensitivity testing, 326, 327
Anticoagulant therapy, 60, 472
Anxiety, preoperative, 479
Aorta, 80, 81, 88
Apgar score, 345
Aphasia, 155
Aplasia, congenital, 281
Apley's compression test, 185
Appearance, physical, 20
Application letters/forms, 22
Apprehension test, 183
Arch
height, 201, 362
index (Staheli), 362
longitudinal, 204
Arm
extensors, weak, 155
swing, 168-170, 348
Arrhythmias, 64, 92
surgical risk, 474, 475
Arterial emboli, 96
Arterial insufficiency, 95-106
seealso Ischaemia; Peripheral
vascular disease
Arterial tree, 81
Arteries, 81, 83
ageing changes, 456
aneurysms, 101
bruits, 102
calcification, 103, 285, 442
Miinckeberg's sclerosis, 103,442
Arteriography, 105, 392
Arterioles, 81, 83, 88
Arteriovenous (A-V) anastomoses,
82-83
Arthritis
crystal, 420-421
degenerative, seeOsteoarthritis
enteropathic, 445
gonococcal, 70
juvenile idiopathic (JIA), 367, 368,
369
preoperative assessment, 477-478
psoriatic, 234, 445
rheumatoid, seeRheumatoid
arthritis
septic (infectious, pyogenic), 422,
446,478
sero-negative, 445, 478
Arthritis Impact Measurement Scales
(AIMS),401
Aspirin, 60
Assessment, 3-10
components, 4, 8
interview,4,11-26
loop, 8
process, 4-7
purpose, 3-4
records, 8-9
repeat, 7-8
risk,4-5
time management, 7
Asthma, 66-67
Astrocytes, 115
At-risk foot, 5, 427-448
assessment, seeRisk assessment
causal factors, 428-429
clinical decision-making, 447-448
elderly, 455
Ataxia, 114, 151, 175
Atenolol, 93
Atherosclerosis, 95-96
coronary, 90
in diabetes, 442
Atopic eczema (dermatitis), 221,
232-233
Atrioventricular (AV) node, 87
Atrophie blanche, 107-108, Plate 5
Atrophy
muscle, seeMuscle, atrophy
skin, 223
soft tissue, 98
subcutaneous fat layer, 239
Auspitz sign, 222, 231
Autoimmune disease, 288-289
Autonomic nervous system (ANS),
87-88,122-124
assessment of function, 153
Autonomic neuropathy, 153,441
Axon, 115, 116
Axonal degeneration, 149
Axonotmesis, 139
B
Babinski response (plantar reflex), 145,
146,347
Back pain, low, 424
Bacteria, 320
bone and joint infection, 287
culture, 228, 323-325
identification, 324, 325-327
microscopy, 323
skin infection, 237-238, Plate 21
in urine, 330-331
Balance, 133
Ball tread, 249
Ballottement test, 183
Barefoot walking, 255, 260
Barlow's test, 353
Baroreceptor reflex, 88, 153
Barthel index, 462
Basal cell carcinoma, 243
Basal ganglia, 117, 130
dysfunction, 151
Beau's lines, 224, 225
Behcet's disease, 445
Beighton scale, 352, 379
Bendrofluazide, 60
Beta-blockers, 60, 90, 93
Bias errors, 48
Bilirubin, urinary, 329
Biochemistry, blood, 334-335
Biomechanics, 308
Biopsy, 336-337
excisional. 337
muscle, 150
needle, 337
nerve, 144, 150
punch (incisional), 336-337
shave,336
skin, 228
Biothesiometer, 142
Bleeding time, 332, 334
Blistering disorders, 231-232
Blisters, 223, 231-232, 439
Blood,331
analysis, 331-335, 480
biochemistry, 334-335
components, 331
coughing up, 67
count, full, 95, 332-333
film, 333
sample collection, 332
serology, 335
in urine (haematuria), 69, 330
Blood gases, arterial, 334
Blood pressure, 64, 93-94
in autonomic dysfunction, 153
elderly, 456
measurement, 93-94
regulation, 88
seealso Hypertension
Blood urea nitrogen (BUN), 334
Blood vessels
anatomy, 81-84
major, 80
physiology, 88-89
skin, 218
Blount's disease, 355
Body mass index (BM!), 381
Body weight (mass), 59-60
loss, 72
preoperative assessment, 471
Bone
cyst
aneurysmal, 293
solitary (simple), 292-293
density, 282-285
infection, 287, 288, 422
isotope scanning, 298-300, 392
metastatic disease, 285, 296
tumours, 292-296
Bone marrow, MRI imaging, 296, 298,
299
Boots, 253-254
Bottoming, 250
Bow legs, seeGenu varum
Bowel habit, altered, 68
Bowen's disease, 242-243
Brachydactyly, 281, 282
Brachymetatarsia, 201
Bradycardia, 92
Brain
anatomy, 117, 118
ascending pathways, 127, 128
descending pathways, 127, 129
scans, 137
Brain stem, 117, 118, 128
Breastfeeding, 479
Breathlessness (dyspnoea), 65, 67, 91
Brodie's abscess, 287
Bromhidrosis, 227
Bronchitis, chronic, 66, 67
Brown-Sequard syndrome, 138-139
Bruits, 102
Budiman-Mak Foot Function Index, 34
Buerger's disease (thromboangiitis
obliterans), 96, 438
Buerger's elevation/ dependency test,
100
Bulla, 222, 223
Bullous pemphigoid, 232, Plate 15
Bundle of His, 87
Bunion, tailor's, 205
Burrow, 222
Bursae, calcification, 285-286
Bursitis, retrocalcaneal, 418-419
Buschke's disease, 290
c
C fibres, testing, 142-143
C-reactive protein (CRP), 332, 333
Cadence, 307
Calcaneal stance position
neutral (NCSP), 202-204
relaxed (RCSP), 202-204
Calcaneocuboid fault, 280
Calcaneofibular ligament (CFL), 190
Calcaneonavicular coalition, 363, 409
Calcaneus
bone density, 283
deformity, 161
fractures, 291, 298
inclination angle, 279-280, 352
position, 171
spurs, 280
Calcification, degenerative, 285-286
Calcinosis cutis, 287
Calcium antagonists, 60,90
Calibration, instrument, 45-46
Callus, 229-231, 439
elderly, 458
periungual, 226
Caltrac device, 316
Candida spp., 327
Capillaries, 81, 82-83
fluid flow, 86
function, 89
skin, 218
Capillaroscopy, 105
Capillary filling time (CFT), 100
Carbon dioxide, blood, 335
Cardiac output, 87
Cardiovascular disease
clinical tests, 92-94
current medication, 90
exercise cautions, 382
history, 64-66, 90
hospital tests, 94-96
observable signs, 92, 225
symptoms, 90-92
seealso Heart disease; Hypertension;
Peripheral vascular disease;
Venous insufficiency
Cardiovascular system (CVS), 80-89
anatomy, 80-86
at-risk foot, 438-439
elderly, 455-456
general overview, 90-95
physiology, 86-89
preoperative assessment, 473-475
Carpal tunnel syndrome, 143
Cartilage, 285
Casts, urinary, 330
Catalase test, 326
Cauda equina, 121
Cellulitis, 237-238, 422, 448, Plate 37
Central nervous system (CNS), 70-71
anatomy, 116-119
in posture/balance/ coordination,
133
seealso Neurological disorders
Cerebellum
anatomy, 117, 118
dysfunction, 150-151, 152
function, 129-130
Cerebral cortex, 117, 118
Cerebral palsy, 348
Cerebral vascular accident (CVA,
stroke), 114, 128,446
loss of consciousness, 136, 137
risk factors, 135
upper motor neurone lesions, 146
Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), 115, 118-119
Champagne legs, 109
Charcot foot, 299, 403, 441-442, Plate
34
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, see
Hereditary motor and sensory
neuropathy
Cheiroarthropathy, 443
Chemicals, in shoes, 253
Chest pain, 65, 67, 90-91
Chest X-ray, 95
Chilblains, 235, 369
Children, 341-369
assessment, 343-353
generalapproach,343-344
initiating, 343
conditions affecting lower limb,
353-369
examination, 346-352
footwear, 258, 352-353
gait analysis, 59, 348, 367
history taking, 344--346
interviewing, 344
limping, 365-368
non-weightbearing assessment,
350-352
normal development, 342-343
perioperative risk, 480
INDEX 487
sports injury risk, 376-377
weightbearing assessment, 348-350
Chloramphenicol, 60
Chloride, plasma, 335
Chondrocalcinosis, 288
Chondromalacia patellae, 183
Chondromatosis, synovial, 293
Chondrosarcoma, 294--295, 411
Chopart's joint, see Midtarsal joint
Choreo-athetotic movements, 151, 155
Chromonychia, 224, 225, 226
Cine photography, 314
Cinema seat sign, 354
Circulation
collateral, 83-84
peripheral (systemic), see Peripheral
vascular system
pulmonary, 81, 89
Circumduction test, 178
Clarke's test, 183
Claudication
distance, 97, 103
intermittent, 97
Claw toe, 172,206
Clinical environment, 45, 51-52
Clinical examination, 4
Clinical measurement, see
Measurement
Clinical tests, 4
Clogs, 254, 255
Clostridium welchii, 325
Closure,24
Clothing, 49
practitioners, 20
in sports assessment, 375-376
Clotting
abnormalities, 480
tests, 332, 333-334
Clubbing, 92,224,225
Clubfoot, 360
one-third of, 358
Coalitions, 187,281-282
tarsal, see Tarsal coalitions
Codrnan's triangle, 294
Cognitive status, assessment, 461,
463-464
Colchicine, 60
Cold-related sports injuries, 387
Collagen, 377
Collar (sports shoe), 248
Collaterals, 83-84
Colour
nail, 225, 226
skin, see Skin, colour
urine, 328-329
wound,437
Coma, 137
Common peroneal nerve, 119
Communication, 12-21
listening skills, 15-16
non-verbal, 16-21
questioning skills, 13-15
Compartment syndrome, 414-415
chronic, 391, 414-415
488 INDEX
Compensation, 163
Computed tomography (CT), 296, 297,
298
in neurological disorders, 137
quantitative (QCT), 283
in sports injuries, 392
Concerns, patients', 15,29
Conduction disturbances, 474, 475
Confidentiality, 9-10, 25
Confusion, 464
Congenital conditions, 7
Congenital talipes equinovarus, 360
Connective tissue disorders, 446
Consciousness
assessment of level of, 136-138
loss of, 135, 136
Constipation, 68
Contact dermatitis, 221
allergic, 228, 235-236, Plate 19
Contraceptive pill, 60
Conversation, 11-12
Coordination, 133
assessment, 150-152
causes of poor, 150
Corns, 229-231, 439, Plate 12
elderly, 458
fibrous, 231
hard, 231, Plate 13
periungual, 226
seed,230
soft, 231
vascular, 231
Coronal plane, seeFrontal plane
Coronary angiography, 95
Coronary arterial disease (CAD), 90
Coronary arteries, 84
Coronary artery bypass graft (CABG),
473,474,475
Corticospinal tract, 129
Corticosteroids, seeSteroid therapy
Cortisol deficiency, 73
Corunebacterium minuiissimum, 325
Cough.ri?
Court shoe, 254, 255
Coxa valgum, 170
Coxa vara, 170
Coxodynia (hip pain), 175, 176
CRAGCEL acronym, 59, 64
Cramps, nocturnal, 65-66, 97-98
Cranial arteritis, 70
Cranial nerve palsies, 155
Cranial nerves, 120
Creatinine, serum, 334
Crepitus, 165
Crohn's disease, 445
Crossed extensor reflex, 132
Cruciate ligaments, 184
Crusting, 222, 223
Crystal arthritis, 420--421
Crystals, in urine, 330
CT, seeComputed tomography
Cuboideum secundarium, 281
Culture media, 323-325
Cushing's syndrome, 73, 284, 440
Cyanosis, 6, 92
in venous insufficiency, 107
Cyclic AMP, 125
Cyma line, 280
Cyst, 222
bone, 292-293
D
Darier's disease, 229
Data
gathering, 24
intervals, 39
nominal, 39--40
ordinal,39
ratios, 39
Data Protection Act, 9-10, 25
Deep peroneal nerve, 119
entrapment, 416--417
Deep venous thrombosis (DVT),
106-107,109
Deformity, terminology, 161
Delivery, 345
Dementia, 464
Demyelination, segmental, 149
Dendrites, 115, 116
Dental disease, 67---68
Dermal papillae, 217
Dermatitis
chronic, 229
contact, seeContact dermatitis
herpetiformis, 219, 232
juvenile plantar, 236, 368-369
seealsoEczema
Dermatofibroma, 242
Dermatoglyphics, 218-219
Dermatology, 213
Dermatome, 121
Dermatomyositis, 147,240,446
Dermis, 215, 218
Dermo-epidermal junction (DEJ), 216,
217
Desmosomes, 216,217
Development
foot, 343
milestones, 345-346
normal childhood, 342-343
Diabetes insipidus, 72
Diabetes mellitus, 440, 441--444
autonomic neuropathy, 153, 441
elderly, 456, 459
exercise in, 383
foot ulcers, 428
classification systems, 432--433
ischaemic, 442, Plates 35-36
neuropathic, 441, Plates 32-33
risk assessment, 433--447
history, 71-72
insulin-dependent, 225
microangiopathy, 442
motor function testing, 149
nervous system involvement, 154
perioperative risk, 477
peripheral neuropathy, 417, 441--442
sensory testing, 141, 142, 143
shoe wear marks, 264
skin changes, 240
X-rays, 285
Diagnosis, 5-7
differential, 6
Dialect, 21
Diaphyseal dysplasia, 285
Diarrhoea, 68
Diastole, 87
Dichrotic notch, 103
Differential diagnosis, 6
Digital formulae, 206
Digiti quinti varus, 205
Direction of motion (DOM), 164, 165
Disabled Living Foundation (DLF),
261,265
Disease, coexisting
at-risk foot, 435
elderly, 454--455
skin disease, 239-240
sports injuries, 382-383
Dislocation, 165
Distal, 158
Distal articular set angle (DASA), 278,
279
Diuretics, 90
Doppler ultrasound, 300
in arterial insufficiency, 102-103,
104-105
in neurological disorders, 137
sources of error, 50, 51-52
in venous insufficiency, 102, 109
Dorsal, 158
Dorsal columns, 128
Dorsal horn, 120
Dorsalis pedis artery
patency testing, 100
pulse, 51-52, 100, 101
Dorsiflexion, 158, 159
Dorsiflexors, 194
Drawer test, 184, 189,414
Dressings, wound, 481
Drugs
adverse reactions, 60, 61, 236
allergies, 61, 236
eruptions, 236
first-pass metabolism, 68
history, 60-61
metabolism, 68
preoperative assessment, 471--472
recreational, 61, 472
self-prescribed,61
sports injuries and, 388-389
Dual energy X-ray absorptiometry
(DEXA),283
Dual-photon absorptiometry (DPA), 283
Dupuytren's contracture, 443
Dysarthria, 151, 155
Dysdiadochokinesia, 151, 155
Dysphagia, 68
Dyspnoea (breathlessness), 65, 67, 91
Dystrophia rnyotonica, 147
Dysuria, 69
INDEX 489
-------------------------------------------------------_._------
E
Eating disorders, 378
Eburnation, 283
Ecchymosis, 222
Eccrine poroma, 242
Echocardiography, 95
Ecthyma, 237
Eczema, 59,232-233
asteatotic, 233
atopic, 221, 232-233
discoid, 233
distribution, 220
gravitational (stasis, venous), 108,
233, Plate 6
seealsoDermatitis
Edmonds and Foster diabetic foot
staging system, 433
Education, patient, 434
Efferent neurones, 120-121, 122
Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, 240
Eight-finger test, 187
Elastic stockings, 107
Elbow
golfer's, 385
tennis, 385
Elderly, 451-466
assessment, 455-465
definition, 453
functional assessment, 461-462
malnutrition, 471
perioperative risk, 479
population, 452
risk assessment, 465-466
seealsoAgeing
Electrocardiogram (ECG), 95
Electroencephalogram (BEG), 137
Electrogoniometers, 313-314
Electromagnetic tracking systems, 315
Electromyography (EMG), 149, 315
Electron beam tomography, 95
Ely's test, 178
Emboli
arterial, 96
venous, 107
Emed system, 312
Empathy, 14
Emphysema, 66, 67,461
Enchondroma, 292, 411-412
Enchondromatosis, multiple, 292, 294
Endocardium, 81
Endocrine disease, 71-74
at-risk foot, 440-444
elderly, 459
perioperative risk, 477
Endothelium, vascular, 81
Energy expenditure, 315-316
Enteropathic arthritis, 445
Environmental factors
at-risk foot, 434
sports injuries, 387
Ependymal cells, 115
Ephelis, 240
Epidermis, 215, 216-217, Plate 9
basal layer, 216
granular layer, 216-217
horny layer, 217
prickle cell layer, 216
Epidermolysis bullosa, 232
Epidermophyton floccosllln, 238, 327
Epilepsy, 136, 137
progressive focal deficit, 155
surgical risk, 479
Epiphyseal dysplasia, 285
Epiphyses, 283, 343
Epithelial cells, in urine, 330
Equinus deformity, 161
Equipment
measuring, seeMeasuring
instruments/ equipment
sporting, 383-384
Erosions, 223
Errors, measurement, 44-51
random, 44
systematic, 45
Erythema, 221,222
multiforme, 235
nodosum,221,239
Erythrasma, 238
Erythrocyanosis, 235, 369
Erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR),
332,333
Erythrocytes (red blood cells, RBC),
89
counts/indices, 332-333
microscopy, 333
in urine, 330
Erythroderma, 234
Escherichia coli,325
Ethnic origin, 63
Eversion, 158, 159
Evertors, foot, 194
Ewing's tumour, 295-296, 411
Excoriation, 223
Exercise
ankle-brachial pressure index and,
104
claudication distance, 97, 103
surface, 384-385
in systemic disease, 382-383
seealsoSports
Exostosis
osteocartilagenous, 292
subungual, seeSubungual exostosis
Extension, 158
Extensor digitorum longus (EDL), 205
Extensor substitution, 205
Extensus deformity, 161
External rotation, 158,160
Extrapyramidal system, 129, 130
Exudation, 222
Eye contact, 17
Eyeballing, 48
F
F-Scan insole system, 312-313
Faber's test, 178
Facial appearance, 59
Facial expression, 17, 59
Factor V gene mutation, 106
Fainting, 65, 70, 136,474
Falls, 135
Family history, 62-63, 346
Fasciculi proprii, 128
Fat, subcutaneous, seeSubcutaneous
fat layer
Fatiguability, progressive, 148, 155
Fatigue, 60
Feedback, 26
Female athlete triad, 377-378
Femoral nerve, 119
Femur, length inequality, 207
Fibromas, periungual, 226
Fibrosarcomas,295
Fibula
children, 351-352
examination, 186-187
50:50 test, 183
Financial aspects, footwear, 256
Finger-nose test, 152
First-pass metabolism, 68
Fissures, 223, 439, Plate 30
Fitness, physical, 380, 388
Flare, shoe, 249, 259
Flat feet, seePronation,
abnormal!excessive
Flexibility, sports injuries and, 377,
378,379-380
Flexion, 158
Flexor hallucis longus tenosynovitis,
412,413
Flexor stabilisation, 204
Flexor substitution, 204
Fluid
displacement test, 183
tissue, 86
Fluoroscopy, 300
Fluorosis (fluorine excess), 285
Fog index, 14
Folate-deficiency anaemia, 460
Foot
alignment, 197-202, 276-282
anatomical variations, 281-282
arch, seeArch
care, ability to perform, 464-465
children, 352
drop, 175
elderly, 453-455
flat, seePronation,
abnormal!excessive
growth and development, 343
high-arched cavoid (pes cavus). 173,
262,263
length, 201-202
moccasin, 238
muscle activity, 173
neutral position, 199,201
pain, 397-424
assessment / measurement,
398-403
causes,399,403-424
examination, 398
490 INDEX
Foot (Cont'd)
plantar pressure measurement, see
Pressure measurement
sensors, plantar
position/shape, 173
pronated, flat, seePronation
at risk, 5, 427-448
switches, 307
trauma, 291
X-ray views, 271-274
Foot Function Index (FFI), 402
Foot Health Status Questionnaire
(FHSQ),402--403
Footballer's ankle, 385, 404-405
Footprints, 43--44, 204
Harris & Beath mat, 309
impressions during gait, 307, 308
Footwear, 245-265
acceptance of advice on, 246
acquisition, 256
assessment, 255-265
history taking, 256
purpose, 246
shoe fit, 256-261
wear marks, 261-264
athletes, 248, 383-384
children, 258, 352-353
diabetes mellitus, 442, 443
practitioners, 20
in sports injuries, 376
seealso Hosiery; Shoes
Force, 308
plates, 311
sensitive resistors, 311-312
in-shoe measurement, 312-313
Forefoot
children, 352
deformity, 171
everted, 201
inverted,199-201
to rearfoot alignment, 199-201
supinatus, 199-201
valgus, 201
varus, true, 199,200-201
Foreign bodies, 292
Forgetfulness, 464
Fractures, 291
classification, 291
healing, 291
march,385
stress, seeStress fractures
young athletes, 376
Freckles, 240
Freiberg's disease (infarction), 196,
289-290
Frequency of urination, 69
Friction, athletic surfaces, 384
Friedreich's ataxia, 114
Frontal lobe, 117, 118
Frontal plane, 157, 158
deformity, 161
joint motion, 158, 159
joint position, 161
Frusemide, 60
Functional ability, 453--454
Functional assessment, 461--462
Fungi
children, 368
culture, 323-325
identification, 327
microscopy, 228, 323
skin infections, 238, 239, Plate 23
specimen collection, 228, 322
Wood's light examination, 227-228
G
Gait
abnormal patterns, 173-175
analysis, 163, 167-175, 303-316
children, 59, 348, 367
elderly, 457-458, 462--463
GHORT method, 304
limb-length inequality, 168, 170,
206-207
methods, 304
multisystems, 316
observational (visual), 59,
167-173,304-306
quantitative methods, 306-316
sources of error, 51
in sports injuries, 376
angle and base, 202
antalgic, 173,398,463
apraxic, 155
apropulsive, 173-174,463
ataxic, 151, 155, 175
in cerebellar dysfunction, 151
children, 342
circumducted,175
disorders affecting, 167
dystrophic/ atrophic, 175
electromyography, 315
energy expenditure, 315-316
festinating, 152, 155, 175,463
helicopod, 175
kinematics, 313-315
kinetics, 308-313
mats, 307
in Parkinson's disease, 152
scissor, 145, 175, 176
spatial parameters, 306-308
stance phase, 167-168, 169
steppage, 175, 463
swing phase, 167-168, 173
temporal parameters, 306-308
in-toeing, 170,348,356-360
Trendelenburg, 175, 348
in upper motor neurone lesions,
145
seealsoWalking
Calleazi's sign, 353
Ganglion, 420
resection, 337
X-ray assessment, 285, 286
Gangrene, 99
dry, 99, Plate 3
wet, 99
Gastric ulcers, 67
Gastritis, 68
Gastrointestinal (GIl disease, 67-68,
475--476
Gender
neurological disorders and, 135
sports injuries and, 377-378
seealsoWomen
Genitourinary system, 68-70, 476--477
Genu recurvatum, 351
Genu valgum (knock knees), 161,
170-171
children, 351, 355
non-weightbearing assessment,
197-198
sporting activities and, 377
Genu varum (bow legs), 161, 170-171
children, 351, 354-355
non-weightbearing assessment,
197-198
Gestures, 17-18
Giant cell tumours, 295
Glabellar tap reflex, 152
Glial cells, 115
Glomus body, 83
Glomus tumours, 226, 420
Glucometers, 335
Glucose
blood,335
urine, 329
Goniometers, 313-314
finger, 164
gravity, 164, 177, 198-199
Gonococcal arthritis, 70
Gout, 420--421, 445--446
preoperative assessment, 478
X-ray assessment, 286
Gracilis muscle, 180
Graded potential, 125-126
Grading scales, 39
Gram stain, 323, 325
Granuloma
annulare, 235
pyogenic, 242, Plate 25
Grasp reflex, 347
Grass, artificial, 384
Grief response, sports injuries,
381-382
'Growing pains', 363
Growth, childhood, 343
Growth hormone excess, see
Acromegaly
Guillain-Barre syndrome, 114, 134,
154,446
H
Haematocrit, 332, 333
Haematological disease, 66, 444,
459--460
Haematology, 332-334
Haematoma,223
Haematuria, 69, 330
rIaemoglobin, 89,332,333
glycosylated (Crib), 335
indices, 332, 333
Haemophilia, 66, 444, 475
Haemoptysis, 67
Haemorrhages, splinter, 92, 224, 225
Haemosiderosis, 108, Plate 6
Hair
follicles, 218
in ischaemia, 98, Plate 1
Hallux
abduction angle, 277, 278
abductovalgus. 205, 206
abductus, 205, 206
abductus interphalangeus, 206
dorsiflexion test, 363
extensus (trigger toe), 196, 206
flexus, 196,206
hyperextended, 206
limitus, 196,206
plexus, 406
rigidus, 196, 206, 406-408
valgus
juvenile, 364-365
metatarsalgia, 410
sports activities and, 377
varus, 206
rIammer toe, 204, 206
Hamstring nerve, 119
Hamstrings, 185
tightness, children, 350, 355-356, 368
Handshake, initial, 23, 59
Hansen's disease, 446
Harris & Beath mat, 309
rIead position, 168,348
Headache. 70, 135
Healing
delayed, 435
fracture, 291
Health status
measuring tools, 401-402
preoperative assessment, 471
questionnaire, 22, 59, 77-78
Hearing, 50
rIeart
anatomy, 80-81, 82
murmurs, 474
physiology, 87-88
valves, 81, 82
Heart disease, 64--65, 90-95
ischaemic, seeIschaemic heart disease
valvular, 474, 475
Heart failure, congestive (CrIF), 64, 89
signs and symptoms, 65, 91
surgical risk, 474, 475
Heart rate, 87, 88, 92-93
in autonomic dysfunction, 153
physiological cost index, 316
Heat loss, 89
rIeel
to ball length, 249, 258
'bumps', 418-419
pain, 239
children, 367
shoe, 247, 248
height, 255
wear patterns, 262-263
tab,248
Heel lift, 167, 169
early, 174-175
Heel pad syndrome, 419
Heel-shin test, 152
rIeel-toe test, 152
rIeight,20
Helbing's sign, 192,361
Hemiplegic gait, 145
Heparin, 472
Hepatic disease, see Liver disease
Hepatitis B, 69
Hepatitis C, 70
Hereditary conditions, 7
Hereditary motor and sensory
neuropathy (rIMSN,
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease),
114,154,421-422,446
case histories, 148, 347
investigations, 149, 422
Herpes simplex, 237
Herpes zoster, 135,237
rIigh altitude, 387
High-density lipoprotein cholesterol
(rIDLC),95
High-heeled shoes, 254, 255
Hindfoot, see Rearfoot
Hindfoot stabiliser, 248
Hip
abduction limitation test, 353
developmental dislocation (DDrI),
345,353-354,367
examination, 175-180
in children, 349, 350-351
in in-toeing child, 357
functional tests, 180
joint, 175-176
motion, 176-178
muscle tests, 178-180
pain, 175, 176
Histology, 335-338
indications, 335-336
sample transportation and storage,
337
sampling techniques, 336-337
skin, 228
tests and interpretation, 338
History taking, 31-33, 57-78
athletes, 387-391
children, 344-346
family history, 62-63, 346
format, 75
medical history, 58-62
personal social history, 63-64
purpose, 57-58
questionnaire, 77-78
systems enquiry, 64-74
trrv/AIDS, 70, 135,446
Hobbies, 63, 473
Horne circumstances, 63, 472-473
Hosiery, 107, 264-265
INDEX 491
Hospital based tests, 4
Hospitalisation, previous, 62
Human papilloma virus (rIPV)
infection, 237
Huntington's chorea, 151
Hydrostatic pressure, 86
Hyperaemic test, 104
Hypercalcaemia, 72, 440
Hyperglycaemia, 459, 477
Hyperhidrosis, 72, 153, 227
Hyperkeratosis, 222-223, 229-231,
458
Hypcrlipidaemia. 59, 456
Hypermobility, sports injuries and,
379-380
Hyperparathyroidism, 284
Hyperpyrexia, malignant, 147
Hypertension, 64, 93, 94
elderly, 456
exercise in, 382
preoperative assessment, 474-475
seealso Blood pressure
Hyperthyroidism (thyrotoxicosis), 72,
440-441
facial appearance, 59
osteoporosis, 284
skin changes, 240
Hypervitaminosis 0, 284
HypoZbradykinesia, 152, 155
Hypocalcaemia, 72, 440
Hypoparathyroidism, 284
Hypopituitarism, 284
Hypotension, postural, 153
Hypothetico-deductive reasoning, 5
Hypothyroidism, 73, 440
elderly, 459
facial appearance, 59
skin changes, 229, 240
Hysteresis, 45, 310
I
Ichthyosis, 229
Idiopathic conditions, 7
Iliopsoas contracture, 178
Iliotibial band contraction/ tightness,
178-180
Illness, coexisting, see Disease,
coexisting
Imaging techniques, 269-300
preoperative, 480
seealso Computed tomography;
Magnetic resonance imaging;
Ultrasound; X-rays
Implants, surgical, 292
In-toeing, 170,348,356-360
Independence,256,461,462
Independent Footwear Retailers
Association, 265
Indices, 39
Indomethacin, 60
Infants
posture, 342
reflexes, 346, 347
492 INDEX
Infection, 422-423
at-risk foot, 439
bone and joint, 287, 288
children, 368
diabetes mellitus, 442-443
indications for referral, 448
lymphangitis/lymphadenitis,
110-111
microbiology, 320-328
perioperative risk, 480
as presenting problem, 5, 422
signs, 108,422
skin, see Skin, infections
tropical, 64
venous ulcers, 108
wound,437-438
Infestations, 238-239
Inflammation
blood tests, 333
joint, 164
Inflammatory skin conditions, 232-235
Information booklets/sheets, 22, 23
Infrapatellar fat pad, 182
Injuries, previous, 62
Insect bites, 239
Insole, 247
Insole pressure measurement systems,
312-313
Instruments, measuring, see
Measuring
instruments/ equipment
Intermetatarsal angle, first-second, 364
Intermetatarsal bars, 282
Intermittent claudication, 97
Internal genicular position, 357-358
Internal rotation, 158, 160
International Statistical Classification
of Diseases, Injuries and Causes
of Death, 9
Interobserver reliability, 43
Interosseous talocalcaneal ligament,
191
Interphalangeal joints (IPJ), 197
distal (DIPJ), 197, 198
examination, 197, 198
proximal (PIPJ), 197, 198
sesamoids, 281
Interpretative model, 5
Intervertebral disc, prolapsed, 424
Interview, 4,11-26
aims, 12,22
children, 344
closure, 24
communication skills, 12-21
documenting, 21-22
practical tips, 25-26
preparation, 22-23
room, 23
stereotyping, 21
structure, 22-25
techniques, 14
versus normal conversation, 11-12
Intracompartmental pressure studies,
392,415
Intraobserver reliability, 43
Inversion, 158, 159
Inverted bottle legs, 109
Invertors, foot, 193-194
Involucrum, 287
Iron-deficiency anaemia, 92, 225, 460
Ischaemia
cardinal signs, 104,438-439
clinical tests, 99-104
critical limb, 98, 104
diabetic foot, 442, Plates 35-36
hospital tests, 104-106
indications for referral, 448
observable signs, 98-99, Plates 1-2
symptoms, 97-98
Ischaemic heart disease (IHDl, 64, 90,
473-474
Ischaemic ulcers, 98-99, 442, 443,
Plates 35-36
Iselin's disease, 290, 376
Isotope clearance, 105-106
Isotope scanning, bone, 298-300, 392
J
Jack's test, 363
Jaundice, 68
Joint
ageing, 454
cartilage, 285
disease, 287-289,445-446
seealsoArthritis
examination, 164-165
inflammation, 164
ligamentous laxity, 352, 379-380
motion, 164-165
direction (DOM), 164, 165
measurement, 164
quality (QOM), 165
range (ROM), 164-165
symmetry (SOM), 165
terminology, 158-161
observation, 164
position, 161
Juvenile idiopathic arthritis (IIA), 367,
368,369
Juvenile plantar dermatitis, 236,
368-369
K
Kaposi's sarcoma, 70, 243
Keloid,223
Keratin, 216, 217
Keratinisation, 217
Keratinocytes, 216, 217
Keratoderma
climactericum, 229, 459
palmoplantar (PPK), 229, 231, Plate 14
Keratolysis, pitted, 238, Plate 22
Ketones, in urine (ketonuria), 329
Kinematics, 313-315
Kinesics, 17-18
Kistler force plate, 311
Klebsiella spp., 325
Knee
bursae, 183
in children, 351
examination, 181-186
functional tests, 186
joint, 181-182
anatomy, 180
motion, 183
painful, 175
stability, 183-185
jumper's, 385
knock, seeGenu valgum
laboratory tests, 186
muscle testing, 185
observation, 182
pain in children, 354, 367
palpation, 182-183
position, 170-171
Q angle, 186, 354
runners, 385
Koebners phenomenon, 221
Kohler's disease, 290, 367
Koilonychia (nail spooning), 92, 224, 225
Korotkoff sounds, 94
Korsakoff's psychosis, 135
Kyphosis, 349
L
Laboratory tests, 4, 319-338
preoperative, 480
Labour,345
Lace-up shoes, 247, 253-254, 260
Lachman's test, 166, 184
Lamellar granules, 216
Langerhans' cells, 216
Language, 14
Larvae migrans, 239
Lasegue's test, 180
Laser-Doppler fluximetry, 106
Lassitude, 91-92
Lasting,250
Lasts, 248-249
Lateral, 158
Lateral collateral ligament stress test,
183
Lateral plantar nerve, first branch
entrapment, 416-417
Leather, 252, 253
Leg
alignment, seeAlignment, structural
flexors, weak, 155
fresher's, 385
length inequality, see Limb-length
inequality
length measurement, 207-208
pain, exercise-induced, 391
shape, venous insufficiency, 109
tennis, 385
torsion, 198-199,202
seealso Limb
Legg-Calve-Perthes disease, 289, 367
Lentigo, 240
Leprosy, 446
Lesser tarsus abduction angle, 276-277
Letters, application, 22
Leucocytes (white blood cells, WBC)
counts (WCC), 332, 333
microscopy, 333
in urine, 330
Lichen planus, 221, 234-235, Plate 17
nail changes, 225, 234-235
Lichen simplex, 233
Lichenification, 222-223
Ligamentous injuries
ankle, 190-191
grading, 393
risk factors, 378, 379-380
Ligamentous laxity, 352, 379-380
Ligaments, 165
Lighting, 45, 48
Limb
dominance, 381
motion, 170
seealso Leg
Limb-length inequality (LU), 175,
206-208
gait changes, 168, 170,206-207
sports injuries and, 379
Limbic system, 117, 128
Limping
antalgic gait, 173, 398, 463
in children, 365-368
Linings, shoe, 247,252-253
Lipids, plasma, 95
Listening, 15-16
Liver disease, 67, 68
preoperative assessment, 476
skin changes, 240
Local anaesthetics
adverse effects, 61
contraindications, 478-479
postoperative use, 482
Locomotor system, 74
assessment, seeOrthopaedic
assessment
Loose bodies, 288,289
Lordosis, 349
Low-density lipoprotein cholesterol
(LDLC),95
Lower motor neurones (LMNs), 129
lesions, 146-150
Lumbar plexus, 119
Lumbar puncture, 138
Lunge test, 190
Lupus erythematosus, 240
systemic (disseminated), 240, 288,
446,478
Lymphadenitis, 110-111
Lymphangiography, 111
Lymphangitis, 110-111
Lymphatics, 84, 85
skin, 218
Lymphoedema, 110-111,229
praecox, 110
secondary, 110, 111
tarda,110
M
Macule, 222, 223
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),
296-298,299
in arterial insufficiency, 105
in neurological disorders, 137
in sports injuries, 392
Malignant tumours
at-risk foot, 439-440
bone, 293-296
foot, 411, 412
internal, skin changes, 240
periungual, 226
skin, 242-243
venous ulcers, 108-109
Malleolar torsion, 198-199
Malleoli
children, 351-352
medial, in leg length measurement,
207,208
X-ray assessment, 279
Mallet toe, 206
Malnutrition, 471
Marble bone disease, 285
McArdle's syndrome, 147
McGill Pain Questionnaire (MPQ), 34,
400-401,438
McMurray's test, 184-185
Measurement, 37-52
errors, 44-51
evaluation exercise, 51-52
qualitative, 38-39, 40, 47-48
quantitative, 38, 40-41
selecting technique, 41-42
semi-quantitative, 39-40
standardisation of techniques, 45
terminology, 42-44
types, 38-41
units, 38
Measuring instruments/ equipment,
38,41-42
calibration, 45-46
sources of error, 45-47, 49, 50
variation, 43
Mechanoreceptors, 126
Medial, 158
Medial collateral ligament stress test,
183-184
Medial facet tenderness test, 354
Medial plantar nerve entrapment,
416-417
Medial tibial stress syndrome, 391
Medical health questionnaire, 22, 59,
77-78
Medical history, 59-62
current health status, 59-60
medications, 60-61
past, 62, 434, 472
purpose, 57-58
Medical Research Council (MRC)
muscle strength grading, 39,
148, 165
Medications, see Drugs
Medulla oblongata, 117, 118
INDEX 493
Meggit-Wagner wound classification
system, 431-432
Melanin, 216
Melanocytes, 216
Melanoma, malignant, 241-242, 440
Meniscus tears, 184-185
Menopause, 459
Mental test score, 464
Merkel's cells, 216
Metabolic disorders, 440
Metaphyseal dysplasia, 285
Metarterioles, 82, 83
Metastasis
bone, 285, 296
skin, 243, Plate 26
Metatarsalgia, 410-411
Morton's (neuroma), 58, 411, 417-418
Metatarsals, 171-172
abnormal positions, 196
adduction angle, 277
deformity, 196
examination, 194-196
first (metatarsus primus)
adductus angle, 277
assessment of motion, 194-196
elevatus, 195, 196,201
flexible plantarflexed, 196
rigid plantarflexed, 196
formula, 201
fractures, 291
head, prominent fibular condyle, 410
joint motion, 194-196
parabola, 196
protrusion distance, 278
proximal articular set angle (PASA),
278
seealso Rays
Metatarsocuneiform split, 277
Metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJ), 196
causing metatarsalgia, 410
first
angle, 364
examination, 196, 197
in gait, 172, 173
gout, 421
in hallux valgus, 364
sesamoiditis, 411
motion assessment, 196, 197
sesamoids, seeSesamoids,
metatarsal head
Metatarsus adductus, 358-360
Metatarsus primus, seeMetatarsals,
first
Methaemoglobinaemia, 479
Metronidazole, 60
Microbiology, 227-228, 320-328
indications, 320
samples (specimens), 320-325
collection, 322
containers, 321-322
examination, 322-325
types, 320-321
Microcirculation, 83
assessment, 105-106
494 INDEX
Microglial cells, 115
Microorganisms
identification, 325-328
normally resident, 320
seealso Bacteria; Fungi; Viruses
Microscopy
blood film, 333
microorganisms, 323
urine, 330
Micturition, abnormal, 69
Midbrain, 117, 118
Midtarsal joint (MTJ), 194
motion, 194
position, 171, 172
Milroy's disease, 110
Minimum bactericidal concentration
(MBC), 326
Minimum inhibitory concentration
(MIC), 326, 327
Mobility assessment, 461, 462
Moccasin foot, 238
Moccasins,251-252,253-254
Moles, 240-241
Molluscum contagiosum, 237
Miinckeberg's sclerosis, 103,442
Monofilaments, 41, 139
accuracy, 43
using, 141
Mononeuritis multiplex, 134
Mononeuropathy, 134
Moro reflex, 347
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma), 58,
411,417-418
Motor cortex, 127, 128, 144
Motor function assessment, 144-150
Motor nerves, 122
Motor neurone disease, 114, 154
Motor neurones, seeLower motor
neurones; Upper motor
neurones
Motor neuropathy, diabetic, 441
Motor pathways, 128-129
Motor unit, 129, 130
Movement, joint, seeJoint, motion
MRI, seeMagnetic resonance imaging
Mucosal surfaces, microbiological
sampling, 322
Mudguard, 248
Mulder's click, 418
Mules, 254, 255
Multifactorial conditions, 7
Multineuronal tract, 129
Multiple sclerosis, 114, 125, 154
case history, 70
signs and symptoms, 134, 135
Multistix 8SG, 329, Plate 28
Muscle, 121-122
activity in gait, 173
assessment, 165-166
atrophy (wasting), 166
in arterial insufficiency, 98
denervation, 148
disuse, 145
knee, 182
biopsy, 150
bulk,166
fasciculation, 148
spasm, 166
spindles, 132
strength (power) testing, 39, 148,
165-166
tears, grading, 393
tone, 166
in coordination disorders, 152
in lower motor neurone lesions,
149
in upper motor neurone lesions,
145-146, 155
weakness (paresis), 71, 146-147, 155
children, 368
as presenting problem, 134-135
Muscular dystrophy, 71, 147
Becker's, 147
Duchenne, 135, 147
facio-scapulo-humeral, 147
limb girdle, 147
Musculoskeletal disease, 74, 445-446
elderly, 457-458
preoperative assessment, 477-478
seealsoOrthopaedic assessment
Musculotendinous injuries, risk
factors, 377, 378, 380
Musgrave footprint, 311-312
Myasthenia gravis, 114, 125, 135, 148
Mycology, 228
Myelin, 115, 125
Myelography, 138
Myocardial infarction (MI), 64
surgical risk, 473-474, 475
symptoms,65,90-91
Myocardial perfusion scintigraphy, 95
Myopathies, 114, 146
classification, 147
electromyography, 149
Myositis ossificans, 285-286
Myxoedema, pretibial, 72
N
Naevi
blue, 241
junctional, 241
pigmented, 240-241
Nails, 223-226
anatomy, 223-224
in arterial insufficiency, 99
clippings, 228, 322
clubbing (hippocratic), 92, 224, 225
colour changes (chromonychia), 224,
225,226
elderly, 454, 458
growth rate, 224-225
involution (pincer), 224, 225
in lichen planus, 225, 234-235
loosening/ shedding, 226
pattern of affected, 224
periungual changes, 226
pits, 225-226
plate shape, 225
in psoriasis, 225, 233-234
spooning (koilonychia), 92, 224, 225
surface texture, 225-226
thickness, 226
yellow, 111
Nalidixic acid, 60
Names, 23
Nausea, 68
Navicular
accessory, 407,408
position, 171
stress fractures, 375
Naviculocuneiform fault, 280
Necrobiosis Iipoidica, 108, 235, Plate
18
Necrosis, 99, 223
seealso Gangrene
Neonatal history, 345
Neoplasia, seeTumours
Neospinothalamic tracts, 128
Nerve
biopsy, 144, 150
conduction test, 143-144, 149, 392
damage, classification, 139
entrapments, 415-417
impulse, 124-126
injuries, 154
seealso Afferent nerves
Nervous system, 115-133
autonomic, 87-88, 122-124
central, seeCentral nervous system
function, 124-133
histology, 115-116
organisation, 116-124
peripheral, 120-121
somatic, 122
Neurofibromatosis, 114
Neurological assessment, 133-155
children, 346, 347, 368
purpose, 113-114
sources of error, 50-51
Neurological disorders, 114,446-447
causes, 133-134
elderly, 456-457
exercise in, 383
history, 70-71, 134-135
observation, 135-136
perioperative risk, 477
signs and symptoms, 155
Neurones, 115-116
Neuropathic ulcers, 154,441,443,
Plates 32-33
Neuropathies, 134
Neuropraxia,139
Neurothesiometers, 51, 139, 142
Neurotips, disposable, 142, 143
Neurotmesis,139
Neurotransmitter, 125
Neutral calcaneal stance position
(NCSP), 202-204
Neutral position, foot, 199,201
Night cramps, 65-66, 97-98
Nikolsky's sign, 232
90:90 test, 185, 186,354
Nitrite, in urine, 330
Nitroglycerine, 91
Nociceptors, 126
Nocturia, 69
Nocturnal cramps, 65-66,97-98
Nodes of Ranvier, 116, 125
Nodules, 222, 223
rheumatoid, 445
Noise, electrical equipment, 47
Nominal categorisation, 39-40
Non-verbal communication, 16-21
Non-weightbearing examination, 162,
163,175-202
children, 350-352, 367-368
leg and foot alignment, 197-202
Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
(NSAIDs), 67, 68, 458, 482
Noradrenaline (norepinephrine), 122
Nuclear medicine, 298-300
Numbness, 71, 135
Nutrition, sports injuries and, 388
Nystagmus, 152, 155
o
Ober's test, 178-180
Obesity, 59, 381
surgical risk, 471
Observation, 4, 59,164
children, 346
pain assessment, 401
Obturator nerve injury, 178
Occipital lobe, 117, 118
Occuloplethysmography, 137
Occupation, 63
at-risk foot, 434
footwear, 256
nail changes, 225
preoperative assessment, 473
skin disease, 220
Odour
skin, 222
urine, 329
Oedema (swelling), 92, 222
acute, 5
in arterial insufficiency, 99
in deep vein thrombosis (DVT), 107
differential diagnosis, 99
knee, 182
in lymphoedema, 110
non-pitting, 109
peripheral, 65, 69, 92
pitting, 109
tibiofibular segment, 186
in venous insufficiency, 109, Plate 8
Oestrogen deficiency, 459
Older athletes, 377
Oligodendrocytes, 115
Oliguria, 69
Olliers disease (multiple
enchondrornatosis), 292, 294
Oncotic pressure, 86
Onychauxis, 224, 226
Onychocryptosis, 224
Onychogryphosis, 224, 226
Onycholysis, 224, 226
Onychomadesis, 224, 226
Onychomycosis, 224, 238
Oral reflex, 347
Orthopaedic assessment, 157-209
children, 347-352
elderly, 457-458
gait analysis, 163, 167-175
guidelines, 163-164
limb-length inequality, 206-208
non-weightbearing, 162, 163, 175-202
palpation, 164-167
preoperative, 477-478
process, 162-163
purpose, 161-162
static (weightbearing), 162, 163,
202-206
terms of reference, 157-161
Orthopnoea, 91
Ortolani's manoeuvre, 353
Os peroneum, 281
Os tibiale externum. 281
Os trigonum, 190, 281, 407-408
Os vesalianum, 281
Osgood-Schlatter's disease, 289, 354
case history, 182
young athletes, 376-377
Ossicles, accessory, 281, 282, 407-408
Osteoarthritis (OA), 403-404, 446
hip, 176
preoperative assessment, 477-478
X-ray assessment, 287-288, 289, 404
Osteochondritis dissecans, 354, 405-406
Osteochondroma, 292, 293, 411
Osteochondrosis, 289-290, 354, 367
Osteoid osteoma, 293, 411, 412
Osteomyelitis, 422
diagnosis, 437-438
X-ray assessment, 287, 288, 422
Osteopenia, 283
Osteopetrosis, 285
Osteophytes, 288, 289
Osteoporosis, 283-284, 459
in female athletes, 377-378
preoperative assessment, 480
Osteosarcoma, 293-294, 411
Osteosclerosis, 283, 284-285
Outsole, seeSole
Overuse injuries
extrinsic risk factors, 383-385, 386-387
history taking, 390
intrinsic risk factors, 377, 379, 381
Oxygen
consumption, 316
tension, transcutaneous (TcPO
z
)'
105,439
transport, 89
p
Pachyonychia congenita, 226, 229
Packed cell volume (PCV), 332, 333
INDEX 495
Paediatric patients, 341-369
seealso Children
Paget's disease, 187,284-285
Pain, 5
in amputees, 139
assessment/measurement, 34-35,
398-403
at-risk foot, 438
postoperative, 482
at-risk foot, 438
charts, 34-35
diaries, 35, 36
dimensions, 33
foot, 397-424
gating mechanism, 131
hip, 175, 176
knee, in children, 354, 367
limping in children, 365-368
in neurological disorders, 134, 155
in peripheral vascular disease, 97-98
postoperative, 482
referred, seeReferred pain
sensation testing, 140, 142-143
sports injuries, 390-391
subjectivity, 397-398
withdrawal reflex, 131
Pain perception profile, 401
Palaeospinothalamic tract, 128
Pallor, 92
Palmen' s sign, 353
Palmoplantar keratoderma (PPK), 229,
231, Plate 14
Palpation, 164-167
Panniculitis, 239
Papule, 222, 223
Paraesthesia, 71, 139, 155
Paralanguage, 20-21
Parallax error, 49
Paralysis, 146, 147, 155
Paraphrasing, 16
Paraplegia, 145
Parasympathetic nervous system, 88,
122, 123
dysfunction, 153
Parents, 343, 344
Paresis, seeMuscle, weakness
Parietal lobe, 117, 118
Parkinsonism, 114, 125, 135
Parkinson's disease, 135, 151, 152
Paronychia, 224, 226
Parsponea metatarsalia, 281
Patch testing, 228
Patches, 223
Patella, 181-182
children, 351
compression test, 354
fish eye, 170
position, 170, 182
Q angle, 186,354
size, 182
squinting, 170, 356
Patella tendonitis, 385, 390
Patellar tap test, 183
Patellar tendon reflex, 144, 145, 347
496 INDEX
------------------------------------------
Patellofemoral joint tests, 183
Patellofemoral syndrome, 377, 379, 390
Patient-centred approach, 12
Patients
assessment, 3-10
'at risk', seeAt-risk foot
choice of practitioner, 31
confidentiality, 9-10, 25
expectations, 6, 22-23
measurement errors, 50-51
measurement techniques, 41
perceptions of problems, 30
records, seeRecords
stereotyping, 21
Patrick's test, 178
Pattern recognition, 5
Pedigree chart, 62
Pedobarograph,309-311
Pelvis
in children, 350-351
tilt, 170
Pemphigus, 232
Perinatal history, 345
Peripheral arterial occlusive disease
(PAOD), seePeripheral vascular
disease
Peripheral nervous system (PNS),
120-121
Peripheral neuropathy, 71, 114, 417, 446
diabetic, 417, 441--442
elderly, 456--457
sensory testing, 140-143
Peripheral resistance, 88
Peripheral vascular disease (PVD,
PAOD),95-106
causes, 95-96
clinical tests, 99-104
in diabetes, 442
elderly, 456
exercise in, 382
Fontaine classification, 97
history, 65-66, 95-96
hospital tests, 104-106
observation, 98-99
symptoms, 97-98
seealso Ischaemia
Peripheral vascular system
anatomy, 81-86
assessment, 65-66, 95-111
physiology, 88-89
Peritendinitis, 412--413
Periungual disorders, 226-227
Pernicious anaemia, 89,444,460
Perniosus (chilblains), 235, 369
Peroneal muscle atrophy, see
Hereditary motor and sensory
neuropathy
Peroneal muscles, 194
Peroneal spastic flat foot, 363-364, 409
Peroneal tendons
subluxing,413
tenosynovitis, 412, 413
Personal space, 18-20
Perthes' disease, 289, 367
Perthes test, 109
Pes cavus, 173, 262, 263
Petechia, 222
Phalangeal fractures, 291
Phantom limb, 139
Phlebitis, 106, 107, 108
Phlebo-thrombosis, 106
Phonocardiography, 95
Photoelectric plethysmography, 105
Photography
cine, 314
digital, 41--42, 436
skin problems, 228-229
wounds/ulcers, 436
Physical appearance, 20
Physical build, 380-381
Physical fitness, 380, 388
Physiological cost index (PCD, 316
Physiological measures, pain, 401
Piezogenic papules, painful, 239
Pigmented skin lesions, 240-242
Pinprick testing, 140, 142-143
Piriformis test, 180
Piston (telescope) sign, 353-354
Pitted keratolysis, 238, Plate 22
Pivot shift test, 184
Placing reflex, 347
Planes, cardinal body, 157, 158
Planimetry, wound, 436
Plantar, 158
Plantar dermatitis, juvenile, 236,
368-369
Plantar fasciitis, 63, 419--420
Plantar fat pad, atrophy, 410
Plantar fibromatosis, 420
Plantar pressure sensors, seePressure
measurement sensors, plantar
Plantar reflex (Babinski sign), 145, 146,
347
Plantarflexion, 158, 159
Plantarflexors, 193
Plantaris muscle, 193
Plaque, 222, 223
Plasma, 331
viscosity, 333
Platelet count (thrornbocytes), 332, 333
Play, 344
Plethysmography, 110
photoelectric, 105
Podotrack plantar pressure measuring
device, 41
Pole test, 104
Poliomyelitis, 114, 147, 148,446
Polycythaemia, 444
Polydactyly, 281
Polymyositis, 147,446
Polyneuropathy, 134
Polyuria, 69, 72
Pompholyx, 233
Pons, 117, 118
Popliteal angle, in children, 355-356
Porocarcinoma, 243
Poroma, eccrine, 242
Porphyrias, 479
Positron emission tomography (PET)
scanning, 105
Post-neonatal history, 345
Post-thrombotic syndrome, 106-107,
108,109
Posterior, 158
Posterior cruciate ligament, 184
Posterior talofibular ligament (PTFL),
190
Posterior tibial artery (tibialis
posterior)
patency testing, 100
pulse, 51-52, 100, 101
Postmenopausal syndrome, 440, 459
Postoperative assessment, 481--482
Posture, 17-18, 133
approaching, 17-18
contraction, 18
early childhood, 342
expansion, 18
withdrawal, 18
Potassium, plasma, 334
Potassium hydroxide, 228, 323
Pott's fracture, 291
Practitioners
appearance, 20
measurement errors, 47-50
measurement techniques, 41
patient's choice of, 31
Precision, 42
Prednisolone, 60
Pregnancy
history, 345
surgery in, 471, 479
X-rays in, 271
Premature babies, 345
Premotor cortex, 128
Preoperative assessment, 469, 470--480
current health status, 471
factors affecting surgical risk, 478--480
home circumstances, 472--473
investigations, 480
past and current medication, 471--472
past medical history, 472
physical examination, 478
purpose, 470--471
systems enquiry, 473--478
PREPSOCS indicators of foot
infection, 437
Presenting problem, 29-36
articulating, 30-31
assessment,31-35
high priority, 5
history, 31-33
patient perceptions, 30
Pressure, 308
sensation testing, 141
Pressure measurement sensors,
plantar, 41, 46--47, 309-313
dynamic range, 47
platform systems, 46, 309-312
sampling frequency, 47
in-shoe systems, 46--47, 312-313
spatial resolution, 47
Pretibial myxoedema, 72
Problems, patients', 15,29
seealsoPresenting problem
Processus uncinatus, 281
Pronation, 161
abnormal/excessive (flat foot), 173,
360-364
gait, 174
non-weightbearing assessment,
192-193
objective indices, 362
rigid, 204, 363-364
weightbearing assessment, 202-204
X-ray assessment, 276-277, 280
Propionibacterium minutissimum, 228,
238
Propranolol, 60
Proprioception
assessment, 150-152
testing, 140, 151
Proprioceptors, 126
Propulsion, 167-168,169,173
Protein, in urine (proteinuria), 330
Proteus spp., 325
Prothrombin time (PT), 332, 333
Protractor, 164
Proxemics, 18-20
Proximal, 158
Proximal articular set angle (PASA), 278
Pruritus
elderly, 459
lesions causing, 439
Pseudogout, 286-287,420-421
Pseudomonas aeruginosa, 325
Psoriasis, 217, 233-234
arthritis, 234, 445
case history, 214
children, 369
clinical examination, 220, 221, 222,
231
guttate, 234, 369
nail changes, 225, 233-234
palmar plantar pustular, 234, Plate 16
plaque, 234, 369
pustular, 229, 234
Psychiatric status, preoperative
assessment, 479
Psychological factors
at-risk foot, 433-434
skin disease, 214
sports injuries, 381-382
Pulmonary circulation, 81, 89
Pulmonary embolism, 66, 67, 106, 107
Pulmonary oedema, 65
Pulse(s), 88, 100
Doppler assessment, 102-103
palpation errors, 51-52
pedal, 100-101,438
points (pressure points), 100, 101
pressure, 93
quality, 93
rate, seeHeart rate
'Pump (heel) bumps', 418-419
Purkinje fibres, 87
Purpura, 223
senile, 458
Pus, 322
Pustule, 222, 223
Pyogenic granuloma, 242, Plate 25
Pyuria, 330
Q
Q angle, 186,354
Quadriceps muscle
bulk evaluation, 185, 354
function testing, 185, 354
Quality of life (Qol.)
elderly, 461, 463
measures, 401, 463
Quality of motion (QOM), 165
Quantitative computed tomography
(QCT),283
Quarter (shoe), 247
Questionnaires
foot specific (pain), 402-403
medical health, 22, 59, 77-78
pain, 34,400-401,438
Questions, 13-15
closed,13-14
leading, 14
open, 13
personal/intimate, 15
practical tips, 14-15
probing, 14
4-Quinolones, 60
R
Radiation, effects on tissue, 270
Radiculopathy, 134
Radiographic assessment, 269-300
alignment, 276-282
basic (ABCS), 275-287
bone density, 282-285
cartilage, 285
soft tissue, 285-287
specific pathologies, 287-296
seealso X-rays
Radiographic views
anteroposterior (AP) ankle, 273-274
Anthonsen's, 404
dorsiplantar (DP), 271, 272, 276-279
dorsiplantar oblique, 274, 275
lateral (weightbearing), 271-273,
279-280
Radiolucency, increased, 283
Radiopacity, increased, 282-283
Random errors, 44
Range of motion (ROM), 164-165
Rating scales, 39
numerical pain, 34
Raynaud's disease, 97, 225
Rays
fifth
abducted, 205
dorsiflexed, 201
plantarflexed, 201
INDEX 497
first
dorsiflexed (metatarsus primus
elevatus), 195, 196,201
plantarflexed, 201
seealsoMetatarsals
Re-assessment, 7-8
Rearfoot
alignment, to forefoot, 199-201
children, 352
deformity, 171
varus, 192,203,204
partially compensated, 361
Recede (shoe last), 249
Records, 8-9,21-22
computerised, 8, 21
confidentiality, 9-10, 25
handwritten, 8, 22
location of presenting problem, 32
pro-forma, 8, 22
Rectus femoris muscle, 185
Red blood cells, seeErythrocytes
Referral
indications for medical/ surgical,
447-448
letters, 22
Referred pain, 139, 424
features, 33, 143
in orthopaedic assessment, 163
Reflection technique, 16
Reflex arcs, 131-133
Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD),
284,423
Reflexes, 130-133
crossed extensor, 132
diminished, pendular, 155
early development, 346, 347
grading of responses, 144
pain withdrawal, 131
stretch, 132-133
tendon, seeTendon reflexes
Reiter's disease, 70, 229, 240, 445
Relaxed calcaneal stance position
(RCSP),202-204
Reliability, 42-43
interobserver, 43
intraobserver, 43
Renal failure/ disease
foot complications, 447
preoperative assessment, 476-477
skin changes, 240
symptoms,69,72
Renal pain, 69
Renal transplant, 225
Repeatability, 42
Resected organs, 337
Resistance vessels, 88
Resources, measurement techniques
and,41-42
Respiratory disease, 66-67
at-risk foot, 447
clubbing, 225
elderly, 460-461
preoperative assessment, 475
Rest pain, 98
498 INDEX
------------------------------------
Rete pegs, 217
Reticular activating system (RAS), 128
Reticular formation, 117
Reticulocyte count, 332, 333
Retrocalcaneal bursitis, 418-419
Rheumatic fever, 65
Rheumatoid arthritis, 445
case histories, 74, 382, 444
preoperative assessment, 478
skin changes, 240
steroid therapy, 60, 441
X-ray assessment, 288-289, 290
Rheumatoid factor, 335, 445
Rickets, 355
vitamin D-resistant, 447
Rigidity, lead-pipe/ cog-wheel, 152,
155
Risk assessment, 4-5, 433-447
elderly, 465-466
holistic overview, 433-435
local indicators, 435-438
preoperative, seePreoperative
assessment
systems approach, 438-447
Romberg's sign, 151-152
Rose's valgus index, 362
Rubber, 253
Running
uphill and downhill, 385
windmilling style, 356
Ryder-Seiffel tuning fork, 141-142
S
Sacral plexus, 119
Sacroiliac joint provocation test, 178
S(AD) SAD ulcer classification system,
432-433
Saddle (sports shoe), 248
Sagittal plane, 157, 158
deformity, 161
joint motion, 158, 159
joint position, 161
Sagittal Raynger, 195
Salbutamol, 60
Salt intake, excess, 72
Saltatory conduction, 125
San Antonio/Texas ulcer classification
system, 432
Sandals, 253-254
Saphenous nerve, 119
Scabies, 238
Scale, 222, 223
Scannergram, 207-208
Scars, 223
Scheuermann's disease, 289
Schistosomiasis, 154
Schwarm cells, 115
Sciatic nerve, 119
Sciatica, 424
Scleroderma/ systemic sclerosis, 225,
240,288
Scoliosis, 202, 349
Scopulariopsis breoicaulis, 327
Scouring test, 178
Sebaceous glands, 218
Seborrhoeic warts, 240
Self-referrals, 22
Senses, 126
Sensitivity, 44, 319-320
Sensorimotor cortex, 127, 128
Sensory cortex, 127
Sensory deficits
causes, 138
elderly, 456-457
Sensory nerves, 122
seealsoAfferent nerves
Sensory neuropathy, diabetic, 441
Sensory pathways, 126-128
Sensory receptors, 126
Sensory testing, 50-51,138-144
Septic arthritis, 422, 446, 478
Sequestrum, 287
Sero-negative arthritides, 445, 478
Serology, 335
Sesamoiditis, 411
Sesamoids
interphalangeal joint, 281
metatarsal head, 281
axial view, 274
position, 277-278, 280
seealso Patella
Sever's disease, 290, 376
Sex, seeGender
Sexually transmitted infections, 70
Shank (shoe), 247, 248, 253
Shin splints, 389, 391
Shingles, 135,237
Shock meter system, 313
Shoe and Allied Trades Research
Association (SATRA), 264, 265
Shoes, 245
allergy to, 253
children, 258, 352-353
comfort, 257
components, 246-248
construction, 248-253
depth,259
everyday, 264
fit, assessment, 256-261
fitting problems, 260-261
fixation, 260
flare, 249, 259
function, 260
Goodyear welt, 251
heel to ball length, 249, 258
inside, examination, 264
inside border shape, 259-260
lace-up, 247, 253-254, 260
lasts, 248-249
length, 249-250, 257-258
materials, 252-253
measurement, 249-250
moulded, 251, 252
sports, 248, 383-384
stitchdown, 251
Strobel-stitched, 251, 252
stuck-on (cement), 250-251
styles, 253-255
suitable, 253-255
unsuitable, 255
suitability, 264
wear marks, 261-264, 384
width, 250, 258-259
Short form-36 (SF-36), 401--402, 463
Shoulder
position, 168, 348
swimmer's, 385
Shuttle run test, 20 min, 380
Sickle cell disease, 63, 66, 444
surgical risk, 66, 475, 476
Sickness impact profile (SIP), 401
Single-limb heel-raise test, 190
Single-photon absorptiometry (SPA),
283
Sinoatrial (SA) node, 87
Sinus, 223
Sinus tarsi, 191, 279
syndrome, 414
Skew foot, 358, 359
Skin
ageing, 220, 454, 457
allergies/ drug eruptions, 235-236
appendages,215,216,218-219
seealsoNails
assessment, 5, 213-243
approach,213-214
elderly, 458-459
purpose, 214
recording, 228-229
at-risk foot, 439-440, Plates 20-21
barrier function, 217
biopsy, 228
blistering disorders, 231-232
blood supply, 218
colour
interpretation, 98
lesions, 221
in venous insufficiency, 107-108
disease, 213
clinical examination, 220-227
distribution, 220, 221
elderly, 454
frequency, 214-215
history taking, 219-220
investigations, 227-228
lesion morphology, 221-223
primary lesions, 222
psychological aspects, 214
secondary lesions, 222, 223
subcutaneous layer, 239
dry, 439, Plate 30
functions, 215, 217, 428
hyperkeratotic disorders, 229-231
infections, 236-238
elderly, 458
investigations, 227-228
infestations/insect bites, 238-239
inflammatory conditions, 232-235
lymphatics, 218
metastasis, 243, Plate 26
microbiological sampling, 322
-----------------------------_.
INDEX 499
odour, 222
over-moist (macerated), 439, Plate 31
perfusion pressure (SPP), 105-106
pigmented lesions, 240-242
scrapings,228,322,323
structure, 215-219, Plate 9
in systemic disorders, 239-240
transparent, syndrome of, 458---459
tumours,242-243
vascular resistance (SVR), 105-106
viability, seeTissue, viability
Skyline/ Allis test, 207
Slipped capital femoral epiphysis
(SCFE),367
Smoking, 61, 135
cardiovascular problems, 91
preoperative assessment, 472, 475
Social habits, 135
Social history, 57-58, 63-64
Society of Chiropodists and
Podiatrists, 9
Socioeconomic status, 434
Socks, 264-265
Sodium, plasma, 334
Soft tissue
atrophy, 98
masses/tumours, 420
MRI imaging, 296
X-ray assessment, 285-287
Sole, 247
materials, 253
wear marks, 261-262, 263
Somatotopic organisation, 127
Spasticity, 145
clasp knife, 145
Special needs, patients with, 31
Specificity, 44
Speech
defects, 155
scanning, 155
Spina bifida, 114, 154
occulta, 63, 349
Spinal cord
anatomy, 118-119, 120
ascending pathways, 127, 128
descending pathways, 127, 129
function, 126-127, 129
lesions/ compression, 146, 154
Spinal nerves, 120-121
Spine, 202,348-349
Spinocerebellar tract, 128, 129
Spinothalamic tract, 128
Splinter haemorrhages, 92, 224, 225
Sports, 373-393
equipment, 383-384
history, 63, 389-390
injuries, 373
assessment environment, 375-376
assessment principles, 373-374
clinical examination, 391-392
grading systems, 393
history taking, 387-391
investigations, 392-393
previous, 378, 390
risk factors, 376-387
specific to sport, 385-386
medicine team, 374-375
podiatrist, 374-375
preoperative assessment, 473
shoes, 248,383-384
Squamous cell carcinoma (SCC),
108-109,243
Squatting tests, 180, 354, 392
Staheli's arch index, 362
Staphylococcus aureus, 237, 325, 326
Starling's law of the heart, 89
Startle reflex, 347
Stasis syndrome, seePost-thrombotic
syndrome
Step length, 307
Stepping reflex, 347
Stereotyping, 21
Steroid therapy
long-term, 59, 60, 441
myopathy, 147
surgical risk, 472
Stevens-Johnson syndrome, 235
Stiffener (shoe), 247
Still's disease, 289
Stockings, 264-265
Stork test, 180
Straight-leg-raise test, 180
Strain gauge transducers, 312
Stratum compactum, 217
Stratum corneum, 217
Stratum germinativum, 216
Stratum granulosum. 216-217
Stratum spinosum, 216
Strength, sports injuries and, 380-381
Streptococcus pyogenes, 237-238,
325-326
Stress, sports injuries and, 381
Stress fractures, 291, 408
navicular, 375
risk factors, 377-378, 379, 385, 387
tibia, 391
Stress radiographs, ankle, 274
Stress tests
ankle ligaments, 188-190
knee ligaments, 183-184
sports injuries, 391-392
Stretch reflex, 132-133
Stretching, pre-exercise, 380
Striae, 223
Stride length, 307
Stroke, seeCerebral vascular accident
Stroke volume, 87
Subacute combined degeneration of
spinal cord, 114,460
Subcutaneous fat layer, 218
atrophy, 239
disorders, 239
Subluxation, 165
Subtalar joint (STJ), 187, 191-194
abnormal pronation, 192-193
motion, 192, 193
position, 171, 172
varus, 192
Subungual exostosis, 225, 226,
408---409, Plate 11
X-rays, 292, 293, 409, 412
Sudecks atrophy, 284
Summarising technique, 16
Summation, 125
Sunburn, 235
Sunlight exposure, 454
Superficial peroneal nerve, 119
entrapment, 416---417
Supination, 161
Surface area, wound, 435---436
Surgery, 469---482
complications, 481
postoperative assessment, 481---482
preoperative assessment, 468,
469---480
previous, 62, 387-388
Swabs, 228,322,437
Swallowing, difficulty in, 68
Sweat glands, 218-219, 227
Sweating, 218
absent (anhidrosis), 153,227
disorders, 227
excessive, seeHyperhidrosis
Swelling, seeOedema
Swivel test, 364
Sydenham's chorea, 151
Symmetry of motion (SaM), 165
Sympathetic nervous system, 87-88,
122, 123
dysfunction, 153
Sympathetic tone, 88
Synapses, 116, 125-126
Synchondrosis, 409
Syncope (fainting), 65, 70, 136, 474
Syndesmosis, 409
Synostosis, 409
Synovial chondromatosis, 293
Synovial fluid examination, 337
Synthetic shoe materials, 252, 253
Syphilis, 70, 229
Syringomyelia, 114, 154
Systematic errors, 45
Systeme International (SDunits, 38
Systemic (disseminated) lupus
erythematosus (SLE), 240, 288,
446,478
Systemic sclerosis/scleroderma, 225,
240,288
Systems enquiry, 59, 64-74
preoperative assessment, 473---478
Systole, 87
T
Tabes dorsalis, 114, 150
Tachycardia, 92
Talar tilt test, 189-190
Talipes equinovarus, congenital, 360
Talocalcaneal bar (coalition), 363, 409
case history, 410
investigations, 281, 283, 297, 409
Talocalcaneal notch, 276
500 INDEX
--------------------------------------------
Talocrural joint (TCJ), 171, 187, 188-191
dorsiflexion, 188, 189
functional tests, 190
grading of ligamentous injury,
190-191
investigations, 191
motion, 188
osteochondritis dissecans, 405--406
proprioception, 191
stability (stress) testing, 188-190
strength, 190
Talus
declination angle, 280, 352
neck fractures, 291
Tarsal coalitions, 187,409
case history, 410
investigations, 281, 283, 297, 409
rigid flatfeet, 363
Tarsal tunnel syndrome, 72, 143,
415--416
Team, sports medicine, 374-375
Telangiectases (telangiectasiae), 107,
222, Plate 4
Telescope sign, 353-354
TELOS system, 190
Temperature
ambient clinic, 45, 51-52
lower limb
in arterial insufficiency, 99
gradient, 99
measurement, 49-50
in venous insufficiency, 108
perception testing, 140, 142
Temporal lobe, 117, 118
Tendinitis (tendonitis), 390, 393,
412--413
Tendo calcaneus, seeAchilles tendon
Tendon reflexes, 132-133
in cerebellar dysfunction, 152
in children, 347
diminished,155
in motor dysfunction, 144, 145, 149
Tendonosis, 390
Tensor fasciae latae, tightness, 178, 179
Terrain, exercise on uneven, 385
Thalamus, 117, 128
Thalassaemia, 63, 444
Thermoreceptors, 126
Thiamine deficiency, 135
Thigh movement, 170
Thirst, 72
Thomas's test, 178
Thomson's test, 187
Throat (shoe), 247
Thrombin time (TTl, 334
Thromboangiitis obliterans, 96, 438
Thrombocytes (platelet count), 332, 333
Thrombophlebitis, 106, 107
Thumb technique
malleolar torsion, 198
metatarsal motion, 195
Thyroid disease, 72-73, 225, 459
seealsoHypothyroidism
Thyrotoxicosis, seeHyperthyroidism
Tibia
anterior spur, 404--405
children, 351-352
examination, 186-187
length inequality, 207
position, 171
sabre, 171, 187
stress fracture, 391
torsion, 187, 198-199,357-358
valgum, 204
varus (varum), 171, 187,204
Tibial nerve, 119
Tibialis anterior muscle, 193-194
Tibialis posterior artery, seePosterior
tibial artery
Tibialis posterior dysfunction
syndrome (TPDS), 190
TIbialis posterior muscle, 193-194
Tibialis posterior tenosynovitis,
412--413
Tibiofemoraljoint
motion, 183
stability, 183-185
Tibiofibular joint, inferior, 187
Time management, 7
Timed up and go test', 462
Tinea
incognito, 238, 239
pedis, 229, 238, 368
Tinel sign, 143,415
Tiptoe-standing tests, 363, 392
Tissue
ageing effects, 454
fluid,86
radiation effects, 270
sampling methods, 336-337
viability, 429--433
in arterial insufficiency, 98
classifying loss, 430--433
factors causing loss, 429--430
factors essential to, 429
foot at risk of losing, seeAt-risk foot
in lymphoedema, 110
in venous insufficiency, 108
Tobacco use, seeSmoking
Toe(s),204-206
adductovarus fifth, 206
alignment, 278-279
claw, 172,206
deformities, 364-365, 457
dorsally displaced, 206
flexor stabilisation, 204
flexor substitution, 204
formulae, 206
hammer, 204, 206
mallet, 206
position, 172, 201
puff, 246, 247
retracted, 206
spring, 249
trigger (hallux extensus), 196,206
turf, 384
walking, 174-175, 348
seealsoHallux
Toe-in, 307
seealso In-toeing
Toe-out, 307
Toecap, 247
Tongue (shoe), 247
Tonic neck reflex, 347
'Too many toes sign', 361, 413
Torque conversion, 170
Touch,18,49-50
functional, 18
perception testing, 140-141
in skin assessment, 221-222
Tourniquets, in sickle cell disease, 66,
475,476
Toys, 344
Tractograph, 164
ankle dorsiflexion, 188, 189
malleolar torsion, 198
Trainers (sports shoes), 248, 383-384
Training errors, 386-387, 389
Transcutaneous oxygen tension
(TcPO
z)'
105, 439
Transient ischaemic attack (TIA), 136,
137
Transmalleolar axis, 357
Transtarsal joint, seeMidtarsal joint
Transverse plane, 157, 158
deformity, 161
joint motion, 158-161
joint position, 161
Trauma
at-risk foot, 439
in children, 367
tissue viability, 430
X-ray assessment, 291
Travel, foreign, 64, 444, 473
Treadmills
elderly, 457--458
gait analysis, 306
Tremor
in cerebellar dysfunction, 151
classification, 136
intention, 136, 151, 155
in Parkinson's disease, 152
rest, 155
Trendelenburg gait, 175, 348
Trendelenburg test, 180
children, 349-350, 368
Trephine, 337
Trichophyton mentagrophuies, 238, 327
Trichophyton rubrum, 238, 327
Trigger toe (hallux extensus), 196,
206
Triplanar motion, 161
Tropical diseases, 64
Trunk position/rotation, 170
Tumours, 222
bone, 292-296
malignant, seeMalignant tumours
painful foot, 411--412
skin, 242-243
soft tissue, 420
Tuning fork, 141-142
Turf toe, 384
Turner's syndrome, 284
Two-point discrimination, 140-141
U
Ulcers, 223
classification, 431-433
diabetic foot, seeDiabetes mellitus,
foot ulcers
elderly, 457
ischaemic, 98-99, 442, 443, Plates
35-36
neuropathic, 154,441,443, Plates
32-33
as presenting problem, 5
trophic, 430
venous, 108-109,443, Plates 7-8
seealsoWounds
Ultrasound, 300
Doppler, seeDoppler ultrasound
duplex
in neurological disorders, 137
in venous insufficiency, 110
quantitative, calcaneum, 283
in sports injuries, 392
Ultraviolet light exposure, 454
Underweight, 59-60, 471
Uniforms, 20
Units of measurement, 38
Upper (shoe), 246-247
crease marks, 263
deformation, 263
materials, 252
Upper motor neurones (UMNs),
128-129
lesions, 144-146, 150,457
Urea, serum, 334
Uric acid, serum, 334, 421
Urinalysis, 328-331
indications, 328
preoperative, 480
Urinary tract infection (UTI), 330-331,
480
Urine
culture, 330-331
microscopy, 330
pH,330
physical examination, 328-329, Plate
27
reagent testing, 329-330, Plate 28
specific gravity, 329-330
specimen collection, 328
Urobilinogen, 330
Urticaria, 223
V
Vagus nerve, 122, 123
Valgus deformity, 161
Valgus index, Rose's, 362
Valgus stress test, 183-184
Validity, 43-44
Valleix phenomenon, 415
Valsalva manoeuvre, 153
Valvular heart disease, 474, 475
Vamp, 246, 247
Varicose veins, 106-107, 108
Varus deformity, 161
Varus stress test, 183
Vascular assessment, 79-111
elderly, 455-456
purpose, 79-80
Vasculitis, 96, 446
clinical features, 234
in rheumatoid arthritis, 445
Vasoconstriction, 88
Vasodilation, 88
Vasospastic disorders, 369, 382, 438
Veins, 81-82, 83
function, 89
valves, 81-82
varicose, 106-107, 108
Velocity, walking, 307
Vena cava, 80, 81
Venography (venous angiography),
110,392
Venous insufficiency, 106-110
causes, 106
chronic, seePost-thrombotic
syndrome
clinical tests, 109
elderly, 456
history, 106-107
hospital tests, 110
observation, 107-109, Plates 4-8
stasis dermatitis, 108,233, Plate 6
symptoms, 107
Venous return, 89
Venous thrombosis, 106
deep (DVT), 106-107, 109
Venous tree, 81-82
Venous ulcers, 108-109,443,
Plates 7-8
Venules, 81, 83
Verbal (descriptor) scales (VDS, VS),
34,400
Verrucae, 237, 368, Plate 20
Vertebrae, alignment, 202
Vesicle, 222, 223
Viability, tissue, seeTissue, viability
Vibration perception
elderly, 457
testing, 51, 140, 141-142
Videotaping
kinematic gait analysis, 314-315
skin assessment, 228-229
visual gait analysis, 306
Virchow's triad, 106
Viruses
culture, 228
identification, 327-328
infections, 237, 320
Vision, role in measurement, 48-49
Visual analogue scales (VAS), 34,
399-400,438
Visual defects, 155
Vitamin B
12
deficiency, 114, 154,444,
460
INDEX 501
Vitamin D
deficiency, 284
excess, 284
Vitamin deficiencies, 155
Vomiting, 68
W
Waiting room, 23
Walking
barefoot, 255, 260
base, 307
distance, 103
early childhood, 342, 347-348
footwear assessment, 255, 260
reflex, 347
toe, 174-175,348
velocity, 307
seealsoGait
Wardrobe,256
Warfarin, 60, 472
Warts
mosaic, 237
periungual, 226, 237
plantar (verrucae), 237, 368,
Plate 20
seborrhoeic, 240
Weal, 222, 223
Wear marks, shoe, 261-264,384
Weighing scales, calibration, 45-46
Weight, seeBody weight
Weightbearing examination, 162, 163,
202-206
children, 348-350
Welt, 247, 248
West Haven-Yale multidimensional
pain inventory (WHYMPI), 401
White blood cells, seeLeucocytes
White patches (atrophia blanche),
107-108, Plate 5
Wipe test, 183
Wisconsin brief pain inventory, 401
Women
postmenopausal, 440, 459
radiation safety, 271
shoes, 246, 256
sports injuries, 377-378
Wood's light, 227-228
Wounds
assessment, 435-438
classification, 430-433, 481
colour, 437
depth,436
dressings, 481
healing, delayed, 435
infection, 437-438
loss of tissue viability, 429-430
margins, 437
microbiological sampling, 322
postoperative assessment, 481-482
surface area, 435-436
traumatic oersus trophic, 430
volume, 436-437
seealsoUlcers
502 INDEX
---------------------------------------
X
X-rays, 269-296
ankle, 191,273-274
assessment, seeRadiographic
assessment
chest, 95
child's foot, 343
generation, 269-270
in hallux valgus, 364-365
knee, 186
in lymphoedema, 111
ordering, 270-271
in osteoarthritis, 287-288, 289, 404
preoperative, 480
in sports injuries, 392
subungual exostosis, 292, 293, 409,
412
views, seeRadiographic views
Xanthoma tuberosum multiplex,
287
Xiphisternum, 208
y
Yellow nail syndrome, 111
Young's test, 178
z
Z foot, 358, 359
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY rr
Appendix: Medical Health Questionnaire
Please complete the health questionnaire in your own time.
Take as long as you feel you need. If there are any areas of
the form that you are not clear about, please ask the
practitioner for help. It is important that we know about all
aspects of your health as this may affect your legs and feet
and may be important when deciding the best form of
treatment.
Your foot/leg problem
Have you had any previous treatment for your feet? Yes/No
Who provided the treatment?
Were any X-rays taken? Yes/No
Were any blood samples taken? Yes/No
Your general health
Are you generally well? Yes/No
Are you under a doctor or consultant currently? Yes/No
Are you sleeping well? Yes/No
What is your weight?
For women, could you be pregnant? Yes/No
Past medical history
Has your weight recently changed? Yes/No
If yes, how has your weight changed?
Are you taking any medication or tablets? Yes/No
If Yes, please list below:
Are you allergic to anything? Yes/No
If Yes, please list below:
Do you smoke? Yes/No
If Yes, how many do you smoke per day?
Have you ever:
Been off sick from work for more than a week? Yes/No
Been admitted to hospital? Yes/No
Undergone an operation? Yes/No
Have you ever been under the care of a hospital
consultant? Yes/No
If Yes, please give details:
Do you take any recreational drugs? Yes/No
Have you ever been injured at work? Yes/No
Did you have any major childhood illnesses? Yes/No
If Yes, please state which ones:
Family history
Does anyone in your family suffer from foot or leg problems?
Yes/No
Please place a tick if a member of your family suffered from
any of these illnesses:
Haemophilia 0
Sickle cell disease 0
Diabetes 0
Rheumatoid arthritis 0
Epilepsy 0
Social history
What is your occupation?
Do you participate in sporting activities? Yes/No
If Yes, please state which sports and how regularly do you
partici pate:
Heart and circulatory problems
Have you ever had:
A heart attack? Yes/No
Angina? Yes/No
High blood pressure? Yes/No
Heart failure? Yes/No
Irregular heart rhythms? Yes/No
Rheumatic fever? Yes/No
A thrombosis or blood clot? Yes/No
Night cramps? Yes/No
Muscle cramps when walking short distances? Yes/No
An ulcer on your leg or foot? Yes/No
Chilblains? Yes/No
Varicose veins and/or surgery? Yes/No
Anaemia? Yes/No
Hepatitis or jaundice? Yes/No
Haemophilia? Yes/No
Any other blood disorder? Yes/No
Do you suffer from:
Chest pains? Yes/No
78 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Shortness of breath? Yes/No
Palpitations? Yes/No
Swollen ankles? Yes/No
Regular fainting? Yes/No
Respiratory problems
Have you ever had:
Asthma? Yes/No
Chronic bronchitis? Yes/No
Emphysema? Yes/No
A blood clot on the lung? Yes/No
Have you ever had a cough for several months? Yes/No
Do you ever bring up blood when you cough? Yes/No
Diet and digestive problems
Do you have any diet or bowel problems? Yes/No
Are you troubled by toothache or gum swelling? Yes/No
Do you suffer from indigestion or stomach ache? Yes/No
Do painkillers like aspirin upset your stomach? Yes/No
Genitourinary problems
Have you ever had any 'waterworks' problems? Yes/No
Is your sleep disturbed by the need to go to the toilet?
Yes/No
Have you ever had any sexually transmitted infections? Yes/No
Are you in a high-risk group for blood-borne infections, such
as hepatitis B or HIV? Yes/No
Head and nerve problems
Have you ever injured your head? Yes/No
Have you ever injured your spine? Yes/No
Do you suffer from migraines or regular headaches? Yes/No
If Yes, how frequently:
Do you ever get numbness, weakness, tingling, heaviness
or shooting pains in your legs and feet? Yes/No
Do you ever get blackouts or feel faint? Yes/No
Glandular problems
Do you have sugar diabetes? Yes/No
Do you have thyroid problems? Yes/No
Are you always thirsty? Yes/No
Do your hands and feet get particularly sweaty? Yes/No
Are you particularly sensitive to cold? Yes/No
Do you bruise easily? Yes/No
Bone and joint problems
Do you have any arthritis? Yes/No
Do you ever get any aches and pains in your joints? Yes/No
Have you any arthritis or long-standing muscle injuries? Yes/No
Thank you for completing this questionnaire. Please add any
further information that you think may be of use.